Text

Rev 74 to Emergency Response Manual (Sser)
	ML20083K735
Person / Time
Site:	Seabrook
Issue date:	04/19/1995
From:	Baer J, Diprofio W, Tailleart D; NORTH ATLANTIC ENERGY SERVICE CORP. (NAESCO)
To:	;
Shared Package
ML20083K732	List: ML20083K729; ML20083K735;
References
	PROC-950419, NUDOCS 9505150148
	Download: ML20083K735 (392)
	v • d • e

_ __

4 ,.

'N

~ ,

RMD CONTROL COPY oooooooooooooooooeo'ooo '

.* EMERGENCY RESPONSE

7 ,i .

x,,_)

MANUAL '*

(SSER) *'

1. .Does this manual / manual revision:

a. Make changes in the facility as described in the UFSAR? O Yes . E No

b. Make changes in procedures as described in the UFSAR? O Yes E No

c. Involve tests or experiments not described in the UFSAR7 O Yes E No

d. Involve changes to the existing Operating License or require additional license requirements? O Yes E No

2. .If any of the above questions are answered 221. a safety evaluation per the Regulatory Compliance Manual (NARC) is required. (The individual performing this review shall have completed 10 CFR 50.59 training.) l PREPARED BY: J. W. BAER, NUCLEAR EMERGENCY PLANNING COORDINATOR SUBMITTED BY: 3 D. R. TAILLEART, EMERCENCY PREPAREDNESS MANAGER. I IIATE SORC REVIEW COMPLETED DURINC MEETING NUMBER: kNNM DATE: / 9(

APPROVED BY: b -

FIO, STATION DIRECTOR

//8C 7 WATE

" ' W. I. 6I REVISION 74 -- EFFECTIVE: 05/03/95 (D

^LJ l

North Atlantic Energy Service Corporation )

l 9505150148 950502 i PDR ADOCK 05000443 p PDR

4 4 - M 4 +, h 5 --a - h - 4m - as aA-s ,.w. - 6.-4 eap. E 4...w, 4, %.

Q .

g 4 e

l -

l l

f I

I-a a

1 1

1 i

a f

J O

i J

.i J

4 4

4 d

e f

N

gm ,

ar ,.

EM' ERGENCY RESPONSE MANUAL' (SSER) ,

TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTENT FAGE CHAPTER 1: CIASSIFICATION AND RESPONSE

.l.0 INTRODUCTION ~1-1.1 1.1 CENERAL 1-1.1 l

1.2 IMPLEMENTATION .1-1.1 1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES 1-1.1 1.4 DEFINITION OF DOSE .1-1.1 ER 1.1: Classification of Emergencies ER 1.2: Emergency Plan Activation ER 1.3: CANCELLED ER 1.4: CANCELLED ER 1.5: CANCELLED CHAPTER 2: NOTIFICATION >

ER 2.0: Emergency Notification Documentation Forms Procedure ER 2.1: CANCELLED ER 2.2: CANCELLED ER 2.3: CANCELLED CHAPTER 3: EMERGENCY FACILITY ACTIVATION ER 3.1: Technical Support Center Operations ER 3.2: Operational Support Center Operations ER 3.3: Emergency Operations Facility Operations ER 3.4; Seabrook Station News Services Operations ER 3.5: Media Center / Joint Telephone Information Center ER 3.6: Assembly Area Operations Page 1 SSER Rev. 74

I TABLE OF CONTENTS

l CONTENT CHAPTER 4: PERSONNEL PROTECTION ER 4.1: CANCELLED ER 4.2: CANCELLED ER 4.3: Radiation Protection During Emergency Conditions ER 4.4: CANCELLED ER 4.5: CANCELLED ER 4.6: Offsite Monitoring and Decontamination ER 4.7: CANCELLED ER 4.8: CANCELLED CHAPTER 5: RADIOIDGICAL ASSESSMENT ER 5.1: CANCELLED ER 5.2: Site Perimeter and Offsite Monitoring and Environmental Sampling ER 5.3: Operation of the METPAC System ER 5.4: Protective Action Recommendations ER 5.5: CANCELLED ER 5,6: CANCELLED ER 5.7: Offsite Dose Projection System ER 5.8: CANCELLED CHAPTER 6: CANCELLED ER 6.1: CANCELLED ER 6.2: CANCELLED ER 6.3: CANCELLED ER 6.4: CANCELLED ER 6.5: CANCELLED ER 6.6: CANCELLED ER 6.7: CANCELLED Page 2 SSER Rev. 74

9, - ., ,- ,- _- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~ - - - - - - - - - - -

k;:; - ^' %' '

l f,:0 ,

l 1

TABLE'OF CONTENTS j .

CONTENT

'} -

A -,

CHAPTER 6: CANCELLED

.,I .ER 6,8: CANCELLED 4

ER 6.9: CANCELLED ER 6.10: CANCELLED-CHAPTER 7: CANCRTJRn ER 7.1: CANCELLED i

ER 7.2: CANCELLED ER 7.3: CANCELLED ER 7.4: CANCELLED 1 CHAPTER 8: CANCRTJRn ER 8.1: CANCELLED l

ER 8.2: CANCELLED 1

ER 8.3: CANCELLED ER 8.4: CANCELLED ER 8.5: CANCELLED i ER 8.6: CANCELLED ER 8.7: CANCELLED CHAPTER 9: CANCRTJRn ER 9.1: CANCELLED l

l l

Page 3 SSER Rev. 74 i

gg , 1 7 v . - , _

.. - .. ,j ,

s '{ ,?

~ '

s , ,

.l

, y.x; m. . . .,

s ,.

o.. .

a,.: 9

'y o ., LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES >

. --i : , ;

J 9 J- I' M ., E .$f E )

( 74 3-% ,' Cover -

~

, TOC _1' .74

, s

'IDEP

-74 1- 1.1 - '69 O" / ER 1.1. .25 ,

'ER 1.2 26

. l ' ER ' 2. 0 - 16 ER 3.1 23

-- ER 3.2 19.

ER 3.3 .18 ER 3.4 9 ER 3.5- 15 ,

1 ER 3.6 11

-ER 4.3 13

. ER 4.6 9 ER 5.2 22 ER 5.3- 12 ER 5.4 19 >

t ER 5.7 16 4

I I

r. , .,

e1 r I

. 1 i

1 b'

3 Page 1 SSER Rev. 74

. 1

. l

. ~-

ER 1.1. Paga 1 Rev. 25 AMMISTRATIVE PROCEDURE COVER FORM y

A. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER' ER 1.1 REVISION 25 TITLE CIASSIFICATION OF EMERGENCIES ORIGINATOR D. L. Younn

1. Does this procedure / procedure revision:

a. Make changes in the facility as described in the UFSAR? O Yes E No

b. Make changes in procedures as described in the

i. .

UFSAR? O Yes E No

+

c. Involve tests or experiments not described in the UFSAR? O Yes E No

d. Involve changes to the existing Operating License L or require additional license requirements? O Yes E No

2. If any of the above questions are answered yRE a safety evaluation per NAMM Procedure 11210 is required. (The individual performing the above review shall have completed 10 CFR 50.59 training.)

B. DEPARTMENT SUPVR./MGR. APPROVAL TITLE SIGNATURE DATE e c> m _ osau 3aI (

C. -NUCLEAR OUALITY GROUP REVIEW TITLE SIGNATURE DAIE N)/A

/

1 D. SORC REVIEW SORC MEETING NO. QS-04c/__

T E. APPROVAL FOR IMPLEMENTATION

[ M- ///f> ~~~

JJfL DATE 05/03/95 EFFECTIVE DATE STNTIONM[AGER SM 6.1A Rev. 12 1

1

( u ER 1.1 P:gs 2 Rev. 25 CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS CONTENTS PAGE NO. PAGE REV.

COVER 1 25 CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS 2 25 1.0 OBJECTIVES 3 25 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 3 2.1 ' UNIT SHIFT SUPERVISOR 3 2.2 SHIFT SUPERINTENDENT 3 2.3 SITE EMERGENCY DIRECTOR 3 3.0 PRECAUTIONS 3 4.0 PREREQUISITES 4 25 5.0 ACTIONS 4 5.1 EMERGENCY CIASSIFICATION 4

6.0 REFERENCES

5 22 7.0 ATTACHMENTS Figure 1, Miscellaneous Emergency Conditions 6 22 And Emergency Action Levels 7-16 21 17-18 22 19-56 25 Figure 2, Dose Assessment Data Points 57 25 ER 1.1A, Emergency Classification Flow Chart 25 t

O l

l i

l ER 1.1 Pag) 3 Rev. 25

/N -1.0 OBJECTIVES l 1

' This' procedure specifies the classification of emergencies in accordance with the Seabrook Station Radiological Emergency Plan (SSREP). j 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 UNIT SHIFT SUPERVISOR Responsible for assuming the role of Short Term Emergency Director (STED) until the Shift Superintendent has reported to the Control Room.

2.2 SHIFT SUPERINTENDENT Responsible for classifying observed station conditions in accordance with the emergency classification system specified in this procedure and reclassifying the emergency as necessary until relieved by the Site Emergency Director.

2.3 SITE EMERGENCY DIRECTOR Responsible for analyzing changing station conditions and reclassifying the emergency classification in accordance with this procedure.

3.0 PRECAUTIONS

1. When two or more critical safety functions (CSFs) or emergency 7-~ conditions exist and different emergency classifications result, the (j higher emergency classification will be used.

2. Final emergency classifications are contingent upon the evaluation and discretion of the Shift Superintendent or the Site Emergency Director.

3. Critical safety function evaluation for emergency classification purposes should be performed in accordance with the guidance contained in the Emergency Response Procedures User's Guide of the Operations Management Manual (OPMM).

4. Once critical safety functions have been verified with hardwired indications, further hardwire verifications are not required (i.e., the SPDS CSFST displays may be used).

5. Only CSF combinations that require emergency classification are listed on Form ER 1.lA.

6. Emergency Action Levels (EALs) pertaining to specific initiating conditions are described in Figure 1, Miscellaneous Emergency Conditions and Emergency Action Levels. t

7. When making classifications based upon lights, alarms and other indications, caution must be exercised in the review of these indications to ensure the validity of the information.

h

g_.

ER 1.1 Pcg2 4 Rev. 25 4

3.0 , PRECAUTIONS

8. At the discretion of the Shift Superintendent, the evaluation of EALs 12a, 12b, 12d and 12e may take place after an initial classification is made based on other plant or radiological conditions. If the results of this evaluation indicate that an EAL for a higher emergency classification has been exceeded, then reclassify the emergency and again implement Procedure ER 1.2.

4.0 PREREOUISITES A C':P has been challenged and/or one of the miscellaneous emergency conditions has occurred.

5.0 ACTIONS Shift Superintendent / Site Emergency Director 5.1 EMERGENCY CLASSIFICATION

1. If there has not been a valid reactor trip or safety injection signal (s), proceed to Step 5.

2. If there has been a valid reactor trip or safety injection signal (s),

determine using hardwired information whether any of the following critical safety functions (CSFs) are challenged:

S. Subcriticality, C. Core cooling, H. Heat sink, P. RCS integrity, and Z. Containment integrity.

3. Identify the color-coded event for the challenged CSFs.

4. Circle the letter and color of each CSF event or combination of events

-identified in Step 3 on Form ER 1.1A, Emergency Classification Flow Chart.

5. Review and then circle the miscellaneous emergency conditions and combinations of miscellaneous emergency conditions that correspond to actual station conditions on Form ER 1.1A.

6. Circle any combinations of miscellaneous emergency conditions and critical safety functions that correspond to actual station conditions on Form ER 1.1A.

7. If emergency classification is being considered under any of the High Radiation EALs, which involve a release, (12a, 12b, 12d or 12e),

implement offsite dose assessment using procedure ER 5.7, Offsite Dose Projection System (ODPS) . A radiological release which requires dose assessment utilizing the Offsite Dose Projection System (ODPS) is defined as follows:

O

ER 1.1 Pega 19 Rev. 25 t

FIGURE 1 r'3

) MISCELLANEOUS EMERCENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERCENCY ACTION LEVELS

~# (Continued)

Initiatine Condition for UNUSUAL EVENT 9a. Unplanned loss of most UA panel hardwired annunciator alarms for greater than 15 minutes.

EQIE l This Initiating Condition does not apply in Mode 5 or 6, or when the reactor vessel is defueled.

EMERCENCY ACTION LEVELS

1. MOST OR ALL UA PANEL HARDWIRED ANNUNCIATOR ALARMS HAVE BEEN LOST FOR GkEATER THAN 15 MINUTES E

2. COMPENSATORY INDICATIONS ARE AVAIIABLE (E.G. , MAIN CONTROL BOARD INDICATIONS, MPCS, VAS, SPDS, ETC.)

M w/

3. THE IDSS OF THE UA PANEL HARDWIRED ANNUNCIATOR ALARMS REQUIRES INCREASED SURVEILIANCE TO SAFELY OPERATE THE STATION M

4. THE LOSS OF THE UA PANEL HARDWIRED ANNUNCIATOR ALARMS DID NOT RESULT FROM A PLANNED ACTION.

f\

v

ER 1.1 Pega 20 l Rev. 25 1

FIGURE 1 l MISCELIANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERCENCY ACTION LEVELS

, (Continued) l Initiatine Condition for UNUSUAL EVENI 9b. Failure of Control Room RDMS panels EMERCENCY ACTION LEVELS

1. CP-180A INDICATES BIANK OR ERRONEOUS LED DISPLAYS 6HQ

2. CP-180B INDICATES BIANK OR ERRONEOUS LED DISPLAYS AHQ

3. CP-295 RDMS TERMINAL INDICATES BLANK OR ERRONEOUS CRT DISPLAY.

I 9c. Loss of automatic and manual SPDS.

HQIE This Initiating Condition does not apply in Modes 5 or 6, or when the reactor vessel is defueled.

EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS

1. LOSS OF COMPUTER SPDS AHQ

2. LOSS OF BOTH TRAINS OF HARDWIRED SPDS INDICATIONS.

O

ER 1.1 P ga 21 Rev. 25 r%3 FIGURE 1

('j MISCELIANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS (Continued)

Initiatinr_ Condition for ALERT 9d. Unplanned loss of most UA panel hardwired annunciator alarms for greater than 15 minutes with a transient in progress OR without compensatory measures.

E915 l This Initiating Condition does not apply in Modes 5 or 6, or when the reactor vessel is defueled.

EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS

1. MOST OR ALL UA PANEL HARDWIRED ANNUNCIATOR ALARMS HAVE BEEN LOST FOR GREATER THAN 15 MINUTES M

2. THE LOSS OF THE UA PANEL HARDWIRED ANNUNCIATOR ALARMS REQUIRES INCREASED SURVEILLANCES TO SAFELY OPERATE THE STATION 0.

'\j i; 3. THE LOSS OF THE UA PANEL HARDWIRED ANNUNCIATOR AIARMS DID NOT RESUIT j FROM A PLANNED ACTION l E l l

4. COMPENSATORY INDICATIONS ARE E91 AVAILABLE (E.G., MAIN CONTROL BOARD INDICATIONS, MPCS, SPDS, VAS, ETC.)

I 9.E

5. A SIGNIFICANT PLANT TRANSIENT IS IN PROGRESS.

l l

l o

O

ER 1.1 Peg 2 22 Rev. 25 FIGURE 1 MISCELLANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS (Continued)

Initiatine Condition for SITE AREA EMERGENCY l 9e. Inability to monitor a significant transient in progress.

g E0.IE l This Initiating Condition does not apply in Modes 5 or 6, or when the reactor vessel is defueled.

EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS l 1. MOST OR ALL UA PANEL HARDWIRED ANNUNCIATOR AIARMS HAVE BEEN LOST m

2. COMPENSATORY INDICATIONS ARE t!QI AVAIIABLE (E.G. , MAIN CONTROL BOARD INDICATIONS, MPCS, SPDS, VAS, ETC.)

M l 3. A SIGNIFICANT PLANT TRANSIENT IS IN PROGRESS.

O

g ., " %f , ;. 9'

, 3 y;;u ,

3'

~ER 1.1' Psg2 23 Rev. 25

. [.

.4-:

." ^

FIGURE'l-

[ ' MISCRT.TANEOUS EMRRGENCY CONDITIONS AND- RMNENCY ACTION LEVRTA M? (Continued) n(, ,

Initiatine Condition for UNUSUAL EVENT

-10a. ' Loss of a11' control room communication.

i'-, EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS ,

COMPLETE LOSS OF ALL THE FOLIDWING CONTROL ROOM COMMUNICATIONS.

a. TELEPHONES,' INCLUDING THOSE ON'CP-2'95

.g t

b. RADIOS, INCLUDING THE MANCHESTER DISPATCHER M -

c. GAITRONICS i

M-

d. SOUND POWERED PHONES.

4

f .,

t 9

i.

"V.

ER 1.1 Pags 24 Rev. 25 FIGURE 1 MISCELIANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS (Continued)

Initiatine Condition for UNUSUAL EVENT lla. Initiation of shutdown to the cold shutdown condition as required by technical specifications.

EQTE This Initiating Condition does not apply in Modes 5 or 6, or when the reactor vessel is defueled.

EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS

1. THE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION IN QUESTION REQUIRES THE STATION TO ULTIMATELY ACHIEVE COLD SHUTDOWN (MODE 5)

E

2. THE PRIMARY SYSTEM TEMPERATURE IS BEING REDUCED O

3. THE TIME REMAINING TO REACH ANY REQUIRED MODE IS LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO ZERO. REFER TO ODI.30 FOR TIME CALCULATION INSTRUCTIONS.

l l

l 1

Ol l

ER 1.1 Pags 25 Rev. 25 FIGURE 1 j ,eml

'i MISCELLANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS (Continued)

Initiating Condition for UNUSUAL EVENT 12a. Site boundary dose rate greater than or equal to 0.06 mrem /hr.

EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS

1. DOSE PROJECTIONS OR EFFLUENT ANALYSIS INDICATES A PROJECTED TOTAL EFFECTIVE DOSE EQUIVALENT (TEDE) RATE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO 0.06 mrem /hr AT THE SITE BOUNDARY OE

2. FIELD MONITORING INDICATES A DOSE RATE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO 0.06 mrem /hr AT THE SITE BOUNDARY (SEE NOTE 1) .

NOTE 1 This value is alternately called the "whole body" dose rate or " deep dose

[ equivalent" rate. It is typically a " closed window" reading.

NOTE 2 Figure 2 provides computer generated assessment points and RDMS channol numbers to be used for dose assessment.

1 l

i 1

1 I

i D

U. i l

i

ER 1.1 Pega 26 Rev. 25 l l

FIGURE 1 a ,

tilSCELIANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS (Continued) ;

l Initiatine Condition for ALERT l l

12b. Site boundary dose rate greater than or equal to 0.6 mrem /hr, ;

l EMERGENCY ACTION IIVELS

1. DOSE PROJECTIONS OR EFFLUENT ANALYSIS INDICATES A PROJECTED TOTAL EFFECTIVE DOSE EQUIVALENT (TEDE) RATE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO 0.6 mrem /hr AT THE SITE BOUNDARY

.QB

2. FIELD MONITORING INDICATES A DOSE RATE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO 0.6 mrem /hr AT THE SITE BOUNDARY (SEE NOTE 1).

NOTE 1 This value is alternately called the "whole body" dose rate or " deep dose equivalent" rate. It is typically a " closed window" reading.

NOTE 2 Figure 2 provides computer generated assessment points and RDMS channel numbers to be used for dose assessment.

O

ER 1.1 Paga 27 Rev. 25 ,

,- 'N FIGURE 1

! )' MISCELIANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS (Continued)

Initiatine Condition for ALERT 12c. Significant loss in control of radioactive materials and an increase in radiation monitor (s) by a factor of 1000 or greater.

EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS

1. INCREASE IN AREA OR AIRBORNE RADIATION MONITOR (S) BY A FACTOR OF 1000 OR GREATER M

2. A SIGNIFICANT LOSS IN THE CONTROL OF RADIOACTIVE MATERIALS HAS OCCURRED.

E0IE To determine a factor of 1000 increase in area or airborne radiation, select the appropriate trend display on the alarming channel (s) to ascertain the rate of increase and approximate background value. Verify (w the increase by survey or other means to confirm that the increase is a result of a significant loss in control of radioactive material.

e%

ER 1.1 P ga 28 l s Rev. 25 l FIGURE 1 ' '

MISCELLANEOUS EMERCENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS '

(Continued)

Initiating Condition for SITE AREA EMERCENCY 12d. Site boundary dose rate greater than or equal to 50 mrem / hour, or adult thyroid committed dose equivalent rate greater than or equal to 250 mrem / hour.

EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS

1. DOSE PROJECTIONS OR EFFLUENT ANALYSIS INDICATES A PROJECTED TOTAL EFFECTIVE DOSE EQUIVALENT (TEDE) RATE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO 50 mrem /hr AT THE SITE BOUNDARY DE

2. DOSE PROJECTIONS OR EFFLUENT ANALYSIS INDICATE A PROJECTED ADULT THYROID COMMITTED DOSE EQUIVALENT (CDE) RATE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO 250 mrem /hr AT THE SITE BOUNDARY OB

3. FIELD MONITORING INDICATES A DOSE RATE CREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO 50 mrem /hr AT THE SITE BOUNDARY (SEE NOTE 1)

DE

4. FIELD MONITORING RESULTS INDICATE AN ADULT THYROID COMMITTED DOSE EQUIVALENT (CDE) RATE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO 250 mrem /hr AT THE SITE BOUNDARY.

NOTE 1 This value is alternately called the "whole body" dose rate or " deep dose equivalent" rate. It is typically a " closed window" reading.

NOTE 2 Figure 2 provides computer generated assessment points and RDMS channel numbers to be used for dose assessment.

O

ER 1.1 Paga 29 Rev. 25 r3 FIGURE 1

( ) MISCELLANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS (Continued)

Initiatine Condition for GENERAL EMERGENCY 12e. Site boundary Total Effective Dose Equivalant greater than or equal to 1,000 l mrem or Adult Thyroid Committed Dose Equivalent greater than or equal to 5,000 j f

l mrem.

I EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS l

l 1. DOSE PROJECTIONS OR EFFLUENT ANALYSIS INDICATES A TOTAL EFFECTIVE DOSE l' l EQUIVALENT (TEDE) OF GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO 1,000 mrem AT THE SITE 1

( BOUNDARY FOR THE ACTUAL OR PROJECTED DURATION OF THE RELEASE l E

2. DOSE PROJECTIONS OR EFFLUENT ANALYSIS INDICATES AN ADULT THYROID COMMITTED DOSE EQUIVALENT (CDE) 0F CREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO 5,000 mrem AT THE SITE BOUNDARY FOR THE ACTUAL OR PROJECTED DURATION OF THE RELEASE V

3. FIELD MONITORING RESULTS INDICATE A DEEP DOSE EQUIVALENT (DDE) 0F GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO 1,000 mrem AT THE SITE BOUNDARY FOR THE ACTUAL OR PROJECTED DURATION OF THE RELEASE (SEE NOTE 1)

E

4. FIELD MONITORING RESULTS INDICATE AN ADULT THYROID COMMITTED DOSE EQUIVALENT (CDE) 0F GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO 5,000 mrem AT THE SITE BOUNDARY FOR THE ACTUAL OR PROJECTED DURATION OF THE RELEASE.

NOTE 1 This value is also called the "whole body" dose. It is typically based on a " closed window" reading.

NOTE 2 Figure 2 provides computer generated assessment points and RDMS channel numbers to be used for dose assessment.

v

)

l ER 1.1 Pcg3 30 Rev. 25 FIGURE 1 MISCELIANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS (Continued) I 1

l Initiatinir Condition for ALERT 13a. Fuel handling accident with release of radioactivity.

EMERGENCY ACTION LEVEi3 l

1. NOTIFICATION OF THE DROPPING, EUMPING, OR OTHERWISE ROUGH HANDLING OF AN IRRADIATED FUEL ASSEMBLY

2. ANY INDICATION THAT RADIOACTIVITY HAS BEEN RELEASED FROM THE IRRADIATED FUEL ASSEMBLY. THESE INDICATIONS MAY INCLUDE:

. A1 ARMS OR ELEVATED READINGS ON AREA RDMS MONITORS

- CONTAINMENT CP-295: 1AM102 or LAM 103 CONTAINMENT CP-180: RM-6535A or RM-6535B FUEL STORAGE BLDG CP-295: 1AM401

= AIARMS OR ELEVATED READINGS ON PORTABLE RADIATION MONITORS e ALARMS OR ELEVATED READINGS ON AIR MONITORS

- 0

3. A VISUAL ASSESSMENT OF THE IRRADIATED FUEL ASSEMBLY INDICATES NO MAJOR DAMAGE OR DEFORMATION (E.G., N0 CRUSHED OR BENT FUEL RODS, ALL RODS REMAIN WITHIN THE ASSEMBLY FRAME, ETC.)

E

4. A VISUAL ASSESSMENT OF THE EXTENT OF DAMAGE TO THE IRRADIATED FUEL ASSEMBLY CANNOT OR HAS NOT BEEN MADE.

i l

l l

l O

i ER 1.1 Pags 31 . !

Rev. 25

(

FIGURE 1 f] . MISCELIANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS

-(f (Continued)

Initiatine Condition for SITE AREA EMERGENCY l

13b. Major damage to irradiated fuel with radiation. release or loss 'of water in spent fuel pool or reactor cavity and irradiated fuel present.

EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS i

1. NOTIFICATION OF THE DROPPING, BUMPING, OR OTHERWISE ROUGH HANDLING OF .

AN IRRADIATED FUEL ASSEMBLY M

2. ANY INDICATION THAT RADIOACTIVITY HAS BEEN RELEASED FROM THE IRRADIATED FUEL ASSEMBLY. THESE INDICATIONS MAY INCLUDE:

. ALARMS OR ELEVATED READINGS ON AREA RDMS MONITORS

- CONTAINMENT CP-295; 1AM102 or 1AM103

- CONTAINMENT CP-180: RM-6535A or RM-6535B

- FUEL STORAGE BLDG CP-295: 1AM401 e ALARMS OR ELEVATED READINGS ON PORTABLE RADIATION MONITORS e ALARMS OR ELEVATED READINGS ON AIR MONITORS

=

O 3. A VISUAL ASSESSMENT OF THE IRRADIATED FUEL ASSEMBLY INDICATES MAJOR DEFORMATION OR DAMAGE (E.G., CRUSHED OR BENT FUEL RODS, ALL RODS NOT WITHIN THE ASSEMBLY FRAME, ETC.) ;

l 9.E (Continued on next page)

I l

O !

l

ER 1.1 Pega.32 Rev. 25 FIGURE 1 MISCELIANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS ,

(Continued)

Initiatine Condition for SITE AREA EMERCENCY

4. a) THE FOLLOWING VAS AIARM:

D5198 SPENT FUEL POOL LEVEL LOW M

b) THE INABILITY TO MAINTAIN LEVEL AS INDICATED BY AN UNC0hTROLLED DECREASING LEVEL READ ON SF-LI-2607 (MCB-BR)

M c) IRRADIATED FUEL IS PRESENT IN THE POOL AND UNC0VERY IS IMMINENT OR HAS OCCURRED E

5. a) THE FOLLOWINC VAS ALARM:

B7062 RX REFUEL CAVITY LEVEL LOW M

b) THE INABILITY TO MAINTAIN LEVEL AS INDICATED BY AN UNCONTROLLED DECREASING LEVEL READ ON SF-LI-2629 (MCB-BF)

M c) IRRADIATED FUEL IS PRESENT IN THE CAVITY AND UNCOVERY IS IMMINEh7 OR HAS OCCURRED.

1 0

ER 1.1 Paga 33 Rev. 25 FIGURE 1

^3

) MISCELLANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS

'~'

(Continued)

Initiatine Condition for UNUSUAL EVENT 14a. Abnormal reactor trip or safety injection.

NOTE This Initiating Condition does not apply in Modes 4, 5 or 6, or when the reactor vessel is defueled.

EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS

1. ENTRY INTO PROCEDURE ES-0.1, REACTOR TRIP RESPONSE, WITHOUT TRANSITIONING TO PROCEDURE OS1000.11, POST-TRIP TO HOT STANDBY E

2. ENTRY INTO PROCEDURE ES-1,1, SI TERMINATION, WITHOUT TRANSITIONING TO PROCEDURE 0S1000.11, POST-TRIP TO HOT STANDBY (O

3. TRANSITIONING BACK INTO PROCEDURE E-0, REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION, FROM PROCEDURE FR-S.1, RESPONSE TO NUCLEAR POWER GENERATION /ATUS.

/^N

ER 1.1 Pzga 34 Rev. 25 FIGURE 1 MISCELIANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS (Continued) l Initiatine Condition for UNUSUAL EVENT l 15a. Reactor coolant system leakage.

NOTE This Initiating Condition does not apply in Modes 5 or 6, or when the reactor vessel is defueled.

l EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS

1. UNIDENTIFIED OR PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE GREATER THAN 10 GPM.

9.S l 2. IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE GRU EP. THAN 25 GPM.

O O

ER 1.1 Pegs 35 Rev. 25

.- : FIGURE '1 4

? MISCELIANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVFfS ,

'(Continued)

Initiatine Condition for UNUSUAL EVENT 15b. Faulted Steam Generator Isolation (E-2).

l HQ.TE This Initiating Condition does not apply in Modes 5 or 6, or when the reactor vessel is defueled.

l EMERGENCY ACTION TEVELS i

j INITIATION OF EMERGENCY PROCEDURE E-2, FAULTED STEAM GENERATOR ISOLATION. ,

O l

l

ER 1.1 Pega 36 Rev. 25 FIGURE 1 MISCELLANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS (Continued)

Initiatinr_ Condition for ALERT 15c. Reactor coolant leak rate greater than 50 gpm.

EO.TI This Initiating Condition does not apply when the reactor vessel is defueled.

EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS REACTOR COOLANT LEAK RATE GREATER THAN 50 GPM.

O O

3 ;p ER 1.1 Pegs 37 Rev. 25 FIGURE 1

'f' MISCRT T ANEOUS EMrncENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVgg

( (Continued)

Initiating Condition for SITE ARRA EMERGENCY 15d. Loss of Reactor Coolant with ECCS required.~

EQ1E This Initiating Condition does not apply in Modes 4, 5 or 6, or when the reactor vessel is defueled.

EMERGENCY ACTION LEVrfR

1. INITIATION OF EMERGENCY PROCEDURE E-1,-IDSS .0F REACTOR OR SECONDARY C001 ANT l AND :

3

2. RCS SUBC00 LING BASED ON CORE EXIT THERMOCOUPLES IS LESS THAN 40*F-DE

/ 3. PRESSURIZER LEVEL IS LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 5% (35% IF CONTAINMENT PRESSURE IS GREATER THAN 4 PSIG).

l I

'A+- , - - , - - ,. -- - - ,,. - ., ,n., r . s - - - - . - -we

ER 1.1 Paga 38 Rev. 25 FIGURE 1 MISCELLANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS (Continued)

Initiatine Condition for SITE AREA EMERGENCY 15e. LOCA outside of containment NOTE This Initiating Condition does not apply when the reactor vessel is defueled.

EMERGENCY ACTION LEVE Q

l. INITIATION OF EMERGENCY PROCEDURE ECA-1.2, LOCA OUTSIDE OF CONTAINMENT E

2. RCS PRESSURE IS DECREASING UNCONTROLLABLY AE

3. A1:Y COMBINATION OF PLANT PARAMETERS THAT INDICATE THAT THE RCS MASS IS BEING LOST OUTSIDE THE CONTAINMENT BOUNDARY.

HQTX If this condition exists concurrently with a C orange, declare a GENERAL EMERGENCY. Refer to the CSFST EALs at the top of Form ER 1.lA.

9

1 ER 1.1 Paga 39 Rev. 25

-y^.g FIGURE 1 f(f , MISCELIANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS ' AND ' EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS (Continued)

Initiating Condit' or GENEP & RMFDO'NCY I

15 f. Loss of emergency coolant recirculation (ECA-1.1).

' EII

~

This Initiating Condition does not apply ~in Modes 4, 5 or 6, or when the reactor vessel is defueled.

EMERGENCY ACTION LEVRTR INITIATION OF EMERGENCY PROCEDURE ECA-1,1, LOSS OF EMERCENCY C001 ANT RECIRCUIATION, O

I O

I y

- n--. . _#D

ER 1.1 Pzga 40 Rev. 25 FIGURE 1 MISCELIANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS (Continued)

Initiating Condition for UNUSUAL EVENT 16a. Fire inside the Protected Area lasting more than 10 minutes EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS

1. VERIFICATION OF AN ACTUAL FIRE AS REPORTED BY THE FIRE BRIGADE LEADER E

2. THE FIRE IS LOCATED INSIDE THE PROTECTED AREA E

3. THE FIRE IS NOT REPORTED EXTINGUISHED 10 MINUTES AFTER INITIAL OBSERVATION BY THE FIRE BRICADE LEADER.

O O

ER 1.1 Pags 41 Rev. 25 w FIGURE 1 i MISCELLANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS (Continued)

Initiating Condition for ALERT 3Gb. Fire potentially or actually defeating one train of a safety system EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS

1. VERIFICATION OF AN ACTUAL FIRE AS REPORTED BY THE FIRE BRICADE LEADER AND

2. A VALID "S" OR "P" SIGNAL EXISTS 6ED

3. THE FIRE HAS DISABLED, OR HAS THE POTENTIAL TO DISABLE, ONE OPERABLE TRAIN OF ANY OF THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS:

a) Charging b) Safety Injection f] c) Residual Heat Removal

( ) d) Containment Building Spray e) Emergency Feedwater f) Containment Phase A Isolation Valves g) Containment Phase B Isolation Valves (SEE NOTE BELOW)

NOTI If '.he remaining (unaffected by the fire) train is also inoperable, refer to Initiating Condition 16c.

l

ER 1.1 Pego 42 Rev. 25 FIGURE 1 MISCELIANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS (Continued)

Initiatine Condition for SITE AREA EMERGENCY 16c. Fire potentially or actually defeating both trains of a safety system EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS

1. VERIFICATION OF AN ACTUAL FIRE AS REPORTED BY THE FIRE BRIGADE LEADER M

2. A VALID "S" OR "P" SIGNAL EXISTS E

3. THE FIRE HAS RESULTED, OR MAY RESULT, IN THE LOSS OF BOTH TRAINS OF ANY OF THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS:

a) Charging b) Safety Injection c) Residual Heat Removal d) Containment Building Spray e) Emergency Feedwater (See Note) f) Containment Phase A Isolation Valves g) Containment Phase B Isolation Valves NOTE If the Startup Feedwater System is operable, declare an ALERT.

O

e ER.1.1 -Pags 43 Rev. 25

&N FIGURE 1 ,

MISCELIANEOUS ENRRnENCY CONDITIONS AND ENRRnENCY " ACTION LEVRf A

-(Continued) <

yu ,

Initiatina Condition for AT RET

,17a'. . Control'-Room evacuation anticipated gr required with safe shutdown capability established.

EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS ,

A determination by the Shift Superintendent that:

CONTROL ROOM EVACUATION IS ANTICIPATED-

.c QE CONTROL ROOM EVACUATION HAS OCCURRED AND SAFE SHUTDOWN CAPABILITY HAS BEEN~

ESTABLISHED WITHIN 15' MINUTES OF THE ANNOUNCEMENT FOR MANNING THE REMOTE l SAFE SHUTDOWN PANELS PER PROCEDURE OS1200.02.

~

NOTE 1 In the event of a Control Room evacuation, Short Term Emergency Director

(

(STED) actions may be performed from the Alternate TSC in Administration Building Room 219. If time permits, .take the STED packet'from the Control.

Room with you; if not, SSER Manual' checklists and forms are available~in a

' file cabinet in Room 219. Announce that TSC personnel should assemble in..

Room 245 of'the Administration Building and await further instructions.

NOTE 2 Verify that Remote Safe Shutdown (RSS) capability was established within.

15 minutes of the announcement to man the RSS panels; if not, declare a Site Area Emergency in accordance with initiating condition 17b. RSS-capability is established when at least one RSS panel is manned.

ER 1.1 Pag 2 44 Rev. 25 FIGURE 1 MISCELIANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS (Continued)

Initiatine Condition for SITE AREA EMERGENCY 17b. Control Room evacuation without safe shutdown capability established within fifteen minutes.

EliERGENCY ACTION LEVELS A determination by the Shift Superintendent that the following conditions exist:

1. THE CONTROL ROOM HAS BEEN EVACUATED AND

2. SAFE SHUTDOWN CAPABILITY HAS NOT BEEN ESTABLISHED WITHIN 15 MINUTES OF THE ANNOUNCEMENT FOR MANNING THE REMOTE SAFE SHUTDOWN PANELS PER PROCEDURE OS1200.02.

O O

ER 1.1 Paga 45 Rev. 25 g FIGURE 1 4 ) MISCELLANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS (Continued)

Initiatine Condition for UNUSUAL EVENT 18a. Hazards experienced or projected which involve potential degradation of station safety.

EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS NATURAL PHENOMENA

1. ANY SEISMIC ACTIVITY LESS THAN OBE LEVELS AS INDICATED BY:

a) VAS ALARM D POINT MESSAGE 5452 SEISMIC EVENT IN PROGRESS M

b) AT THE KINEMETRICS " STRONG MOTION ACCELEROGRAPH," THE " EVENT INDICATOR" VINDOW IS WlITE BED

{j

\

c) NO RED LIGHTS LIT ON RESPONSE SPECTRUM ANNUNCIATOR 1.SM-X1 6705, ON SEISMIC MONITORING CONTROL PANEL 1.SM-CP.58 M

(1) THE EARTHQUAKE IS FELT BY STATION PERSONNEL E ,

1 l

(2) THE EARTHQUAKE OCCURRENCE IS VERIFIED DURING IMPLEMENTATION OF PROCEDURE ES1802.001, SEISMIC RESPONSE PROCEDURE E

i i

2. TORNADO STRIKING UnWlERE ON SITE l 1

i

$ l 1

f r-m

ER 1.1 Pega 46 Rev. 25 FIGURE 1 MISCELIANEOUS EMERCENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS (Continued)

Initiatine Condition for UNUSUAL EVENT 18a. (Continued)

3. WIND SPEEDS EXCEEDING 75 MPH FOR GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO 5 MINUTES.

VAS INDICATORS A POINT MESSAGE A1626 UPPER WIND SPEED (INSTANT), OR A1628 LOWER VIND SPEED (INSTANT)

E

4. A VERIFIED TIDAL UAVE WARNING FOR THE HAMPTON AND SEABROOK BEACHES SECURITY EVENTS A determination by the Shift Superintendent or notification by the So:urity Supervisor that.

1. AN ARMED, MALICIOUS INTRUDER (S) IS ATTEMPTING TO ENTER THE PROTECIED AREA E

2. A SABOTAGE ACT HAS OCCURRED (OR BEEN ATTEMPTED) INSIDE THE PROTECTED AREA 8UT OUTSIDE ANY VITAL AREAS E

3. THERE IS A CREDIBLE BOMB THREAT INSIDE THE PROTECTED AREA BUT OUTSIDE ANY VITAL AREAS E

4. A 1ARCE DISTURBANCE OUTSIDE THE PROTECTED AREA THAT COULD RESULT IN A BREACH OF THE PROTECTED AREA FENCE.

O

ER 1.1 Pegs 47 Rev. 25

- /~'g FIGURE 1 MISCELIANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS

) (Continued) c Initiatine Condition for UNUSUAL EVENT 18a. (Continued)

MANMADE EVENTS

1. AN AIRCRAFT CRASH ANWHERE ON SITE THAT MAY ADVERSELY IMPACT NORMAL STATION OPERATIONS E

2. AN EXPLOSION ANWHERE NEAR-SITE OR ON SITE THAT MAY ADVERSELY IMPACT NORMAL STATION OPERATIONS E

3. A RELEASE OF T0XIC OR FLAMMABLE GAS FROM ANWHERE NEAR-SITE OR ON SITE THAT MAY ADVERSELY IMPACT NORMAL STATION OPERATIONS _

r OE

4. PLANT SHUTDOWN DUE TO TURBINE DAMAGE WITHOUT CASING PENETRATION.

a) A VALID TURBINE TRIP SIGNAL EXISTS 6LQ b) TURBINE BEARING VIBRATION EXCEEDS 15 MILS M

c) EXCESSIVE OR UNUSUAL TURBINE NOISE EXISTS.

DISCRETIONARY EVENTS AN EVENT IS IN PROCRESS OR HAS OCCURRED THAT INDICATES A POTENTIAL DEGRADATION OF THE LEVEL OF SAFETY OF THE STATION.

v

r 1 ER 1.1 Pega 48 Rev. 25 )

FIGURE 1 MISCELLANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEV,ELS, (Continued)

Initiating Condition for ALERT 18b. Hazards experienced or projected which involve substantial degradation of station safety.

EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS NATURAL PHENOMENA

1. OBE EARTHQUAKE AS INDICATED BY:

a) VAS AIARM D POINT MESSAGE 5450 or 5451 CONTAINMENT FOUNDATION OBE M

b) TWO OR MORE RED LIGHTS PER INSTRUMENT AXIS ARE LIT ON RESPONSE SPECTRUM ANNUNCIATOR 1.SM.X1 6705 ON SEISMIC MONITORING CONTROL FANEL 1-SM-CP.58 G

(1) THE EARTHQUAKE IS FELT BY STATION PERSONNEL E

(2) AN OBE EARTHQUAKE OCCURRENCE IS VERIFIED DURING IMPLEMENTATION OF PROCEDURE ES1802.001, SEISMIC RESPONSE PROCEDURE M

2. TORNADO STRIKING ANY PERMANENT STRUCTURE INSIDE THE PROTECTED AREA THAT CONTAINS SYSTEMS REQUIRED FOR SAFE SHUTDOWN E

ER 1.1 Prgs 49 Rev. 25 FIGURE 1

, ~w)

! MISCELLANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS (Continued)

Initiating Condition for ALERT 18b. (Continued) l l 3. WIND SPEEDS EXCEEDING 90 MPH FOR GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO 5 MINUIES.

VAS INDICATORS l

A POINT MESSAGE A1626 UPPER WIND SPEED (INSTANT), OR A1628 LOWER WIND SPEED (INSTANT)

E 4 POIENTIAL SITE FIDODING AS INDICATED BY WATER LEVEL APPROACHING THE TOP OF THE SEA WALL.

MANMADE EVENTS

1. AN AIRCRAFI CRASH IMPACTING ON ANY PERMANENT STRUCTURE INSIDE THE PROTECTED AREA THAT CONTAINS SYSTEMS REQUIRED FOR SAFE SHUTDOWN D/ E

2. AN EXPLOSION OR MISSILE IMPACT DAMAGING ANY PEMANENT STRUCTURE INSIDE l THE PROTECTED AREA THAT CONTAINS SYSTEMS REQUIRED FOR SAFE SHUTDOWN !

E i

(

3. UNCONTROLLED RELEASE OF SIGNIFICANT QUANTITIES OF A T0XIC OR Flin%BLE j j

GAS ANYWHERE INSIDE OR INTO THE PROTECTED AREA AED

4. THE CONCENTRATION OF THE GAS MAY (OR HAS) ADVERSELY IMPACT (ED) NOMAL STATION OPERATIONS E

l5. TURBINE FAILURE WITH CASING PENETRATION. l DISCRETIONARY EVENTS AN EVENT IS IN PROGRESS OR HAS OCCURRED THAT INVOLVES AN AGIUAL OR POTENTIAL SUBSTANTIAL DEGRADATION OF THE LEVEL OF SAFETY OF THE STATION.

rs

ER 1.1 P ga 50 Rev. 25 FIGURE 1 MISCELIANEOUS EMERCENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS (Continued)

Initiatine Condition for ALERT 18b. (Continued)

SECURITY EVENTS A determination by the Shift Superintendent or notification by the Security Supervisor that:

1. AN ARMED, HALICIOUS INTRUDER (S) HAS CAINED ENTRY INTO THE PROTECTED AREA E

2. A SAB0 TACE ACT HAS OCCURRED (OR BEEN ATTEMPTED) INSIDE ANY VITAL AREA E

3. THERE IS A CREDIBLE BOMB THREAT INSIDE ANY VITAL AREA E

4. A IARCE DISTURBANCE HAS RESULTED IN OCCUPATION OF ANY PORTION OF THE PROTECTED AREA.

I 01

g.-,, . . - . --. . . . .. ...

^:l '

f, u e

's .4 ER l'.1- Pegs 51-g ,

' Rev.-25

>[ .t FIGURE 1 MISCRT.tANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERCENCY ACTION LEVRTR<

4 (Continued)

Initiatine Condition For SITE AREA EMERGENCY

', 118c. Hazards ex' p erienced or projected which involve major failures of station ifunctions'needed for public protection.-

, . EMERGENCY ACTION LEVEIS

NATURAL PHENOMENA

l. SSE. EARTHQUAKE AS INDICATED BY:

a) VAS A1 ARM D POINT MESSAGE 5450 or 5451 CONTAINMENT FOUNDATION OBE M

b) TWO OR MORE RED LIGHTS PER INSTRUMENT AXIS ARE LIT ON RESPONSE SPECTRUM ANNUNCIATOR 1-SM-X1-6705 ON SEISMIC MONITORING CONTROL-PANEL 1-SM-CP-58 M .

c) THE EARTHQUAKE-IS FELT BY STATION PERSONNEL M .

i d)- AN SSE EARTHQUAKE OCCURRENCE IS VERIFIED DURING IMPLEMENTATION OF PROCEDURE ES1802.001, SEISMIC RESPONSE PROCEDURE DE

2. WIND SPEEDS EXCEEDING 110 MPH FOR GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO 5 MINUTES..

VAS INDICATORS A POINT MESSAGE A1626 UPPER WIND SPEED (INSTANT), OR A1628 LOWER WIND SPEED (INSTANT)'

DE

3. SITE FLOODING AS INDICATED BY WATER LEVEL OVER THE SEA WALL.

w '7e- - - -

+- ,- y , -- w-r-. - - . - - - - aw-- _-- - - - - - --- a_ _ __- - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

ER 1.1 P:ga 52 Rev. 25 FIGURE 1 MISCELIANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS (Continued)

Initiating Condition For SITE AREA EMERGENCY 18c. (Continued)

MANMADE EVENTS

1. AN AIRCRAFT CRASH RESULTING IN DAMAGE OR FIRE INSIDE ANY VITAL AREA E

2. AN EXPLOSION OR MISSILE IMPACT DAMAGING EQUIPMENT INSIDE AnY VITAL AREA E

3. UNCONTROLLED RELEASE OF SIGNIFICANT QUANTITIES OF T0XIC OR FIAMMABLE GASSES INSIDE OR INTO ANY VITAL AREA.

SECURITY EVENT

1. OCCUPATION OF A VITAL AREA BY AN ARMED, HOSTILE INTRUDER (S) IS IMMINENT.

I plSCRETIONARY EVENTS AN EVENT IS IN PROGRESS OR HAS OCCURRED THAT INVOLVES ACTUAL OR LIKELY l MAJOR FAILURES OF STATION FUNCTIONS NEEDED FOR PROTECTION OF THE PUBLIC.

t i

I' I

i i

1 O

l

ER 1.1 Paga 53 Rev. 25 m FIGURE 1 ij MISCELIANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS (Continued)

Initiatine Condition for GENERAL EMERGENCY 18d. Hazards experienced or projected which involve substantial core degradation and/or gross loss of containment integrity.

LMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS NATURAL PHENOMENA / MANMADE EVENTS THERE HAS BEEN OR WILL BE MAJOR INTERNAL OR EXTERNAL EVENTS THAT COULD CAUSE OR HAVE CAUSED MASSIVE COMMON DAMAGE TO PLANT SYSTEMS RESULTING IN ANY OF THE GENERAL EMERGENCY INITIATING CONDITIONS.

SECURITY THREATS A VITAL AREA HAS BEEN OCCUPIED BY AN ARMED, HOSTILE INTRUDER (S).

DISCRETIONARY EVENTS AN EVENT IS IN PROGRESS OR HAS OCCURRED THAT INVOLVES ACTUAL OR IMMINENT

,m . SUBSTANTIAL CORE DEGRADATION OR MELTING WITH POTENTIAL FOR IDSS OF

( ) CONTAINMENT INTEGRITY.

(3 v

l l

ER 1.1 Pega 54 Rev. 25 FIGURE 1 MISCELLANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS (Continued)

Initiatine Condition for UNUSUAL EVENT I

19a. Loss of shutdown cooling with RCS loops filled EDIE This Initiating Condition does not apply in Hodes 1, 2, 3 or 4, or when the reactor vessel is defueled.

EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS

1. SHUTDOWN COOLING HAS BEEN LOST M

2. RCS LOOPS ARE FILLED HQIE - RCS LOOPS ARE CONSIDERED FULL WHEN THE INDICATED LEVEL IS CREATER THAN THE TOP OF THE HOT LEG JUNCTION WITH THE REACTOR VESSEL.

GREATER T&ui (-71") USING RC-LI-9405.

E

3. ONE HOUR HAS EIAPSED SINCE SHUTDOWN COOLING WAS LOST DE

4. RCS SUBC00 LING IS LESS THAN 10' F.

O l

i

i ER 1.1 Pags 55 i Rev. 25 l

/~~s FIGURL 1 (j ' MISCELIANEOUS EMERGENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS ,

(Continued)

Initiatine Condition for ALERT 19b. Loss of shutdown cooling with RCS loops not filled F_01E This Initiating Conditinn does not apply in Modes 1,'2, 3 or 4, or when the reactor vessel is detueled.

EMERGENCY ACTION LEVELS

1. SHUTDOWN COOLING HAS BEEN IDST M

2. RCS IDOPS ARE NOT FILLED t!QIE - RCS LOOPS ARE CONSIDERED FULL WHEN THE INDICATED LEVEL IS GREATER THAN THE TOP OF THE HOT LEG JUNCTION WITH THE REACTOR VESSEL.

,. GREATER THAN (-71") USING RC-LI-9405.

V M

3. ONE HOUR HAS EIAPSED SINCE SHUTDOWN COOLING WAS LOST 93

4. RCS TEMPERATURE GPIATER THAN 200* F.

O, U

ER 1.1 P2gs 56 Rev. 25 FIGURE-1 MISCELIANEOUS EMERCENCY CONDITIONS AND EMERCENCY ACTION LEVELS (Continued)

,Initiatine Condition for SITE AREA EMERCENCY 19c. Loss of shutdown cooling without containment integrity U.QIf This Initiating Condition does not apply in Modes 1, 2, 3 or 4, or when the reactor vessel is defueled.

EMERGENCY ACTION LEVEIE

1. SHUTDOWN COOLING HAS BEEN LOST M

2. RCS TEMPERATURE GREATER THAN 200' F M

3. RCS IS OPEN TO ATMOSPHERE

4. CONTAINMENT INTECRITY IS NOT SET.

I 1

i I

I

ER 1.1 Peg'a 57 7

Rev. 25

, s FIGURE 2

)- DOSE ASSESSMENT DATA POINTS v

MPC POINTS /

RDMS CHANNEL # DESCRIPTION UNITS / MEASURE C3000 Time after Shutdown hr/ min C0784 Upper Wind Speed mph C0786 Upper Wind Direction (from) deg C0783 Lower Wind Speed sph C0785 Lower Wind Direction (from) deg C0787 Lower Delta Temp El 150/43 F C0788 Upper Delta Temp El 209/43 F C0797 Precipitation in/qtr hr C0798 Solar Radiation Langley / min.

A3778 Conem Encl /Outside Atmos DP (-)In. Uc.

C0726 Contm Avg Press (Band) psig C1000 Conta Dose Rate (Have) R/hr AM104 Lo Range Personnel Hatch mr/hr AM105 Hi Range Personnel Hatch mr/hr 1NG222, 223 & 224 WRGM Concentration pCi/cc 1CC225 Plant Discharge Rate pCi/sec fm 1GM801 Main Steam Line Loop 1 mr/hr

(\ 1GM803 Main Steam Line Loop 2 mr/hr 1GM804 Main Steam Line Loop 3 mr/hr 1GM802 Main Steam Line Loop 4 mr/hr D5214 ASDV A Open/ Closed D5215 ASDV B Open/ Closed D5216 ASDV C Open/ Closed D5217 ASDV D Open/ Closed C3145 SG A Avg Pressure Band psig C3146 SG B Avg Pressure Band psig C3147 SG C Avg Pressure Band psig C3148 SG D Avg Pressure Band psig l

l l

1 i \

U

ER 1.2 P ga 1 Rev. 26 ADMINISTRATIVE FROCEDURE COVER FORM A. JDENTIFICATION NUMBER ER 1.2 REVISION 26 TITLE EMERCENCY PIAN ACTIVATION ORIGINATOR J. W. Baer

1. Does this procedure / procedure revision:

a. Make changes in the facility as described in the UFSAR7 O Yes E No

b. Make changes in procedures as described in the UFSAR7 O Yes S No

c. Involve tests or experiments not described in the UFSAR7 O Yes E No

d. Involve changes to the existing Operating License or require additional license requirements? O Yes E No

2. If any of the above questions are answered y.gg, a safety evaluation per the Regulatory Compliance Manual (NARC) is required. (The individual perforzning the above review shall have completed 10 CFR 50.59 training.)

B. MANAGER / DEPARTMENT SUPERVISOR APPROVAL

TITLE SIGNATURE D6TE E9 %e h4f1k 9/3/W t t I

l C. NUCLEAR OUALITY SERVICES REVIEW TITLE SIGNATURE DATI I

N/A l D. SORC REVIEV SORC MEETING NO. h5'O l E. APPROVAL FOR IMPLEMENTATION l

//))hd-V ~ STATIO5 CTOR t,///9/ff--

APPKO'Vil. DATE 05/03/95 EFFECTIVE DATE l

SM 6.1A Rev. 13

ER 1.2 Pega 2 Rev. 26 CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS COVER 1 26 CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS 2-3 26 1.0 OBJECTIVES 4 26 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 4 2.1 SHIFT SUPERINTENDENT 4 2.2 UNIT SHIFT SUPERVISOR 4 2.3 WORK CONTROL COORDINATOR 4 2.4 INSTRUMENT AND CONTROLS TECHNICIAN 4 2.5 SITE EMERGENCY DIRECTOR 4 2.6 EMERGENCY OPERATIONS FACILITY (E0F) COORDINATOR 5 26 2.7 EMERGENCY OPERATIONS MANAGER 5 2.8 TECHNICAL SERVICES COORDINATOR 5 2.9 HEALTH PHYSICS COORDINATOR 5 2.10 ON-SHIFT HEALTH PHYSICS TECHNICIAN 5 2.11 EMERGENCY NEWS MANAGER 5 2.I2 RESPONSE MANAGER 5 2.13 ERO TECHNICAL LIAISON 6 26 3.0 PRECAUTIONS 6-7 26 4.0 PREREQUISITES 8 26 5.0 ACTIONS 8 5.1 SHIFT SUPERINTENDENT OR UNIT SHIFT SUPERVISOR 8 5.2 WORK CONTROL COORDINATOR 8 5.3 INSTRUMENT AND CONTROLS TECHNICIAN 8 5.4 SITE EMERCENCY DIRECTOR 8 5.5 EMERGENCY OPERATIONS FACILITY (EOF) COORDINATOR 9 26 O

l l

l

'c ER 1.2 Paga 3 Rev. 26

.-s ,Q)NTENTS AND REVISION STATUS j (Continued) v gQ163HTj. PAGE NO. PAGE REV.

5.0 ACTIONS 5.6 EMERGENCY OPERATIONS MANAGER 9 26 5.7 TECHNICAL SERVICES COORDINATOR- 9 5.8 . HEALTH PHYSICS COORDINATOR AND/OR ON-SHIFT HEALTH PHYSICS TECHNICIAN 10 26 5.9 EMERGENCY NEWS MANAGER 10 5.10 RESPONSE MANAGER 10 5.11 ERO TECHNICAL LIAISON 11 26

6.0 REFERENCES

11 26 7.0 ATTACHMENTS Figure 1, Site Area Emergency Protective Action Recommendation (PAR) Flowchart 12-13 26 7m ER 1.2A, Unusual Event Checklist -

Short Term Emergency Director 26

() ER 1.2B, Alert Checklist -

26 Short Term Emergency Director ER 1.2C, Site Area Emergency Checklist -

Short Term Emergency Director 26 ER 1.2D, General Emergency Checklist -

Short Term Emergency Director 26 ER 1.2E, Emergency Action Checklist -

Control Room Communicator 26 ER 1.2F, General Emergency PAR Worksheet 26 e i Q) l 1

i l

ER 1.2 Peg 2 4 ;

Rev. 26 l 1.0 OBJECTIVES This procedure specifies the initial emergency response actions to be taken upon the i classification of an UNUSUAL EVENT, ALERT, SITE AREA EMERGENCY or GENERAL EMERGENCY in accordance with the Seabrook Station Radiological Emergency Plan.

2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 SHIFT SUPERINTENDENT Assumes the role of Short Term Emergency Director (STED). The following responsibilities inay not be delegated:

1. Initiation of station emergency response,

2. Decision and direction to notify offsite authorities,

3. Approval of protective action recommendations to offsite authorities,

4. Overall direction to station staff for mitigation of emergency conditions,

5. Reclassification of the emergency,

6. Approval of news releases, and

7. Authorization of emergency radiation exposures.

2.2 UNIT SHIFT SUPERVISOR Assumes the role of the STED until the Shift Superintendent has reported to the Control Room.

2.3 WORK CONTROL COORDINATOR Assists the STED with the implementation of emergency plan activation actions.

Obtains STED review and approval of information provided to offsite authorities prior to its transmittal.

2.4 INSTRUMENT AND CONTROLS TECHNICIAN Assumes the position of Control Room Communicator and notifies offsite authorities and Primary Responders.

2.5 SITE EMERGENCY DIRECTOR Performs Unusual Event responsibilities in accordance with this procedure. In the event that in Alert, Site Area Emergency or General Emergency is declared, performs I

duties in accordance with procedure ER 3.1, Technical Support Center Operations.

Relieves the STED of overall command and control of emergency response activities.

O l

i i

1 ER 1.2 Pag) 5 Rev. 26 i' l m 2.6 EMERGENCY OPERATIONS FACILITY (EOF) COORDINATOR 1 \ \

Performs Unusual Event responsibilities in accordance with this procedure. In the i event that an Alert, Site Area Emergency or General Emergency is declared, performs (

duties in accordance with Procedure ER 3.3, Emergency Operations Facility l Operations.

Through contacts with the Control Room, maintains awareness of Station conditions.

Remains available to report to the EOF if Station conditions deteriorate.

2.7 EMERGENCY OPERATIONS MANAGER Performs Unusual Event responsibilities in accordance with this procedure. In the event that an Alert, Site Area Emergency or General Emergency. is declared, performs duties in accordance with Procedure ER 3.1, Technical Support Center Operations.

Directs and coordinates Operations emergency response actions. Assumes NRC notification responsibility.

2.8 TECHNICAL SERVICES COORDINATOR Performs Unusual Event responsibilities in accordance with this procedure. In the event that an Alert, Site Area Emergency or General Emergency is declared, performs duties in accordance with Procedure ER 3.1, Technical Support Center Operations.

Assists the Site Emergency Director (SED) in the assessment of station conditions.

) 2.9 HEALTH PHYSICS COORDINATOR

's /

Performs Unusual Event responsibilities in accordance with this procedure. In the event that an Alert, Site Area Emergency or General Emergency is declared, performs duties in accordance with Procedure ER 3.1, Technical Support Center Operations.

Responsible for evaluation of station radiological conditions.

2.10 ON-SHIFT HEALTH PHYSICS TECHNICIAN Advises the STED on radiological aspects of an emergency, as requested. (Ref. 6.8) 2.11 EMERGENCY NEWS MANAGER Performs Unusual Event responsibilities in accordance with this procedure and Procedure ER 3.4, Seabrook Station News Services Operations. In the event that an Alert, Site Area Emergency or General Emergency is declared, performs duties in accordance with Procedure ER 3.5, Media Center / Joint Telephone Information Center.

Provides media updates on the emergency situation.

2.12 RESPONSE MANAGER Performs Unusual Event responsibilities in accordance with this procedure. In the event that an Alert, Site Area Emergency or General Emergency is declared, performs duties in accordance with Procedure ER 3.3, Emergency Operations Facility !

b.

V Operations.

Notifies Seabrook Station executive management, l

l i

)

ER 1.2 Peg's 6 Rev. 26 l

2.13 ERO TECHNICAL LIAISON Performs Unusual Event responsibilities in accordance with this procedure. In the Oll event that an Alert, Site Area Emergency or General Emergency is declared, performs i duties in accordance with Procedure ER 3.3, Emergency Operations Facility j Operations.

Notifies the New Hampshire Public Utilities Commission (NHPUC) and the Massachusetts Emergency Management Agency (MEMA) Nuclear Engineer.

3.0 PRECAUTIONS

1. Notification of State authorities shall be initiated within fifteen (15) minutes after declaring an emergency.

l 2. Notification of the NRC shall be initiated immediately after offsite authority notification and within one hour of the emergency declaration.

For an Alert or higher emergency classification level, the Emergency Response Data System (ERDS) shall be initiated in conjunction with NRC norifications. Once contact is established with the NRC, the NRC may require that an open line be maintained. (Ref. 6.8)

3. Perform checklist actions in the order listed.

4. During a backshift, weekend or holiday, if an Unusual Event is terminated before the Primary Responders call back, the STED may determine which, if any, of the Primary Responders need to report to the Station. This determination may be made in conju:tction with the appropriate Primary Responders when they call in to acknowledge pager activation. Individuals not reporting to the Station should complete all assigned tasks no later than the following day.

5. For an emergency condition that meets the criteria for an emergency classification level, but completely clears before notifications have been initiated, perform all required State and NRC notifications adhering to the 15-minute and 1-hour time requirements, respectively.

During the notifications, these authorities should be informed that the emergency has been terminated. (Ref 6.2)

6. For an emergency condition that reduces in severity, but does not completely clear before notifications have been initiated, perform all required initial notifications using the current (lower) emergency classification level. During follow-up State notifications and the initial NRC notification, provide the following information:

a. State that a higher classification level had existed prior to the initial notification;

b. Explain the conditions that required the higher emergency classification level; and

c. Explain the conditions that warranted the de-escalation to the lower emergency classification level. (Ref. 6.2)

O

,= - ,

IN- q ER 1.2~ Pags.7: d Rev. 26 l

/ _

= 3.0 ' PRECAUTIONS p

\ ,) > -

During an emergency Form ER-2.0D, Event Notification Worksheet,

^. "

7.

requires.only the authorization signatureaof the~STED or the Emergency Operations Manager.

8. If available',-the Work Control Coordinator may assist the STED with' implementation of this procedure. ' Such assistance will be at-the~

+ . discretion of and as directed by the STED. All information provided to-offsite authorities by the Work Contro1' Coordinator shall first receive ,

. review and approval by the STED.

9. A radiological release which' requires dose assessment utilizing'the

~

Offsite Dose Projection System (ODPS) is defined as follows:

l a. A' Wide Range Gas Monitor (WRGM) high alarm (1CC225).

b. A Main Steam Line' Monitor high alarm with an Qf]2[ atmospheric steam dump. valve (ASDV) or safety relief valve'(SRV) on the affected-line.

c. The results of effluent analysis or site boundary.monitorin'g indicate a dose rate greater than or equal to 0.06 mres/hr. ,

In the event of a radiological release via the turbine driven EFW pump exhaust, dispatch a monitoring team to the downwind site boundary -

location to obtain a site boundary dose rate and use the Unmonitored

, Release Path of ODPS.

\-

10. If the emergency condition involves a security event, the STED shall l establish contact with the Security Shift Supervisor to determine the following: ,

7

a. Precautions for deployment of Operations or other personnel (e.g.,

security escort),

b. Need for security posts in the Control Room,

c. Modifications to Gaitronics announcements to Station personnel.

d. Need for relocation of emergency response fa'cilities to alternate locations,

11. No Primary Responder shall attempt to call on-duty Operations personnel l in the Control Room until their pager has been activated. A Primary Responder hearing the Plant Emergency Alarm, Gaitronics emergency announcement or site siren may report to the Control Room prior to pager '

activation and then remain on standby for an event briefing.

12. Activities normally performed in the TSC may be performed in other locations (e.g. , Administration Building, Room 245) as deemed appropriate by the Site Emergency Director based on the emergency.

conditions (e.g., severe weather).

7 t

ER 1.2' PJga 8 Rev. 26 4.0 PREREOUISITES An emergency classification level has been declared in accordance with Procedure-ER 1.1, Classification of Emergencies.

5.0 ACTIONS 5.1 SHIFT SUPERINTENDENT OR UNIT SHIFT SUPERVISOR

1. Assume the role of STED.

2. Implement one of the following forms based on the emergency classification:

a. Form ER 1.2A, Unusual Event Checklist - Short Term Emergency Director.

b. Form ER 1.2B, Alert Checklist - Short Term Emergency Director.

c. Form ER 1.2C, Site Area Emergency Checklist - Short Term Emergency Director,

d. Form ER 1.2D, General Emergency Checklist - Short Term Emergency '

Director.

3. As required, direct the Work Control Coordinator to provide assistance in the implementation of Forms ER 1.2A, ER 1.2B, ER 1.2C or ER 1.2D.

5.2 WORK CONTROL COORDINATOR

1. Provide assistance in the implementation of Forms ER 1.2A, ER 1.2B, ER 1.2C or ER 1.2D as directed by the STED.

2. Obtain STED review and approval of information intended for offsite authorities prior to its transmittal.

3. If the I&C Technician is unavailable to perform the Control Room Communicator function, assume this role and implement Form ER 1.2E.

5.3 INSTRUMENT AND CONTROLS TECHNICIAN

1. Assume the role of Control Room Communicator.

2. Implement Form ER 1.2E, Emergency Action Checklist - Control Room Communicator.

5.4 SITE EMERGENCY DIRECTOR

1. Report to the Control Room, check in with the Control Room Communicator, and receive a briefing from the STED.

2. Assist the STED as requested.

3. Relieve the STED of overall command and control of emergency response activities. l l

ER 1.2 Pega 9 Rev. 26 7' 5.4 SITE EMERGENCY DIRECTOR

> /

4. Notify all appropriate emergency response personnel of the change of command.

5. As appropriate, ensure that in-station radiological conditions are being evaluated.

6. If staffing deficiencies exist, or if additional support personnel are j needed, direct the Guard Island Supervisor to notify the needed i personnel. {

1 i

7. When contacted, brief the Emergency News Manager on emergency l conditions. l

8. If emergency conditions change, reclassify in accordance with Procedure f~

i ER 1.1, Classification of Emergencies.

9. When Unusual Event emergency conditions have ended, terminate the {

emergency in accordance with Form ER 1.2A, Unusual Event Checklist - l Short Term Emergency Director. 1 5.5 ENERGENCY OPERATIONS FACILITY (EOF) COORDINATOR l

1. Contact the Control Room to obtain a summary of the event and current conditions.

(m Based on an assessment of accident trajectory and discussions with the

(") 2.

Site Emergency Director or Response Manager, determine an appropriate reporting location (e.g., remain on standby at present location, TSC or EOF).

3. If not reporting to a facility, obtain event briefings on a periodic basis until the emergency is terminated.

5.6 EMERGENCY OPERATIONS MANAGER

1. Report to the Control Room, check in with the Control Room Communicator and receive a briefing on emergency conditions.

2. Review Control Room staff actions.

3. Establish and maintain a log in accordance with Procedure ER 2.0, Emergency Notification Documentation Forms Procedure.

4. Provide technical guidance to the Shift Superintendent.

5. Ensure that the NRC FTS-2000 phone (or commercial line) is staffed.

5.7 TECHNICAL SERVICES COORDINATOR

1. Report to the Control Room, check in with the Control Room Communicator and receive a briefing on emergency conditions.

(p t-

2. Report to the Technical Support Center.

3. Provide support in emergency condition evaluation.

I l

_ _ _ _ _j

r ER 1.2 Pcgr. 10 Rev. 26 5.7 TECHNICAL SERVICES COORDINATOR

4. Provide corrective action recommendations to the SED and Emergency Operations Manager.

5, Direct the emergency response actions of on shift Maintenance, I6C and Chemistry personnel.

5.8 HEALTH PHYSICS COORDINATOR AND/OR ON-SHIFT HEALTH PHYSICS TECHNICIAN

1. Contact the Control Room to obtain a briefing on the event and current conditions. Determine if the emergency has actual or potential radiological consequences.

2. If the accident has radiological consequences, report to the Control Room, check in with the Control Room Communicator and obtain a briefing from the STED/ SED.

3. Receive a briefing on emergency cor.ditions from the on shift Health Physics Technician and report information to the STED/ SED as necessary.

4. Determine the radiation protection steps necessary to support emergency rosponse activities.

5. Ensure that Procedure ER 4.3, Radiation Protection During Emergency Conditions, is implemented as necessary.

6. If the accident has n2 radiological consequences, establish a means for future notifications.

7. Direct the on-shift Health Physics Technician to provide radiological survey and job coverage for the Radiologically Controlled Area (RCA) .

8. Provide advice on the radiological aspects of the emergency as requested. (Ref. 6.8) 5.9 EMERGENCY NEWS MANAGER

1. Contact the Control Room to obtain a briefing on the event and current conditions. Inform either the STED or the SED as to Seabrook Station News Services activation.

2. Prepare a draft news release and obtain approval of the news release content by the SED or STED in accordance with Procedure ER 3.4, Seabrook Station News Services Operations.

5.10 RESPONSE MANAGER

1. Contact the Control Room to obtain a summary of the event and current conditions.

2. Notify and - ovide a briefing to Seabrook Station executive management.

3. Call YAEC security. Leave your name and a telephone number where you can be reached if the YNSD Engineering Support Center Director requires information.

m .w '

~

n. p.

l;;

E l ,

$N , y-uf :a_. bi -' s , ,

ER 1.21-Peg 3'11~-

Rev. 26

-- ^ . .

5.11 'kRO. 1 TECHNICAL LIAISON.- r

.3 . . , ,

g, .

Contact the Control Room to obtain a'summaryfof the event [and current?

, y ..;f ,

1. -

conditions, i ,

s

< -2. Based 'on an assessment of accident ' trajectory and discussions with the

-Site Emergency Director or Response Manager, determine an appropriate-s reporting:locationi(e.g.', present location, TSC or EOF).

. 3. If' reporting to the Control Room, check'in with the Control Room

. Communicator-and receive a briefing on emergency conditions.

4. Notify and provide a briefing to ' the NHPUC Chief Engineer upon classification of an Unusual Event and upontevent-termination.'

-l S. If the NHPUC Resident Engineer is on site, notify and provide a briefing upon classification of an Unusual Event and.upon event termination.

6. Notify ' and- provide a briefing to _ the MEMA Nuclear Engineer upon.

-classification.of an Unusual Event and-upon event termination. ,

7. Provide .other briefings to each of the above as requested or as -

conditions warrant.

6.0 REFERENCES

1. Procedure ER 1.1, Classification of Emergencies 7 - 2. NRC Inspect. ion: Report No. ' 50-443/87-08-04

3. Procedure ER 4.3, Radiation Protection During Emergency Conditions

4. Procedure GD1332.00, Security Response to a Declared Radiological Emergency

5. Procedure ER 2.0, Emergency Notification Documentation Forms Procedure.

6. Procedure ER 5.7, Offsite Dose Projection System

7. Seabrook Station Radiological Emergency Plan

8. NRC Inspection Report No. 50-443/86-18-23

9. NRC Inspection Report No. 50-443/85-32-14a

10. NRC Inspection Report No. 50-443/86-18-06'

9 ER 1.2. P ga 12 Rev. 26 FIGURE 1 SITE AREA EMERCENCY PROTECTIVE ACTION RECOMMENDATION (PAR) FLOUCHART SAE DECIARED NO PROTECTIVE IS TODA ACTIONS BETWEEN MAY 1 No d R

RECOMMENDED AND SEPTEMB -

15 A 7

1 YES NO 1

UNMITIGATED AS THE STATIO YES S-RED, y

IN MODE 1, 2, 3, C-ORANGE, OR 4, PRIOR TO H-RED, P-RED, IE EVENT Z-ORANCE,Oy 7 -RED EXIST NO YES V

(C0TO"A"ON)

NEXT PAGE j V

Unmitigated means the Csr RECOMMEND:

condition has been identified and verified, and that the EVACUATION OF SEABROOK AFD appropriate Functional Restoration Guide was HAMPTON BEACHES.

unsuccessful in correcting l the condition. CLOSURE OF SALISBURY AND PLUM ISIAND BEACHES, AND PARKER RIVER NATIONAL VILDLIFE REFUCE.

9

. ~ - ..,. . ,_. ,

g7; , ; , , ,- ,

%d;f ; -

I o i p

ER 1.2 P.:ra?13.

~

-I

, y ;Rav. 26-

,s. , , :FICURE 1 .-

"rd]:

,?I

. l%.),

~ SITE ARRA EMERCENCY PROTECTIVE ' ACTION RECOMMENDATION (PAR)' FfMJCHART :

-(Continued) ,

A-

.c

!+.

YES CAN.THE STATION YES WAS THE STATIONc IN MODE 5 PRIOR : NOW. BE .

TO,THE EVENT' MAINTAINED IN

?- MODE 5

?

6

- NO -NO E

't U

RECOMMEND:

IS IRRADIATED- -YES FUEL COOLANT AT % EVACUATION OF SEABROOK O OR ABOVE 200*F7 SEE NOTE 1 AND HAMPTON BEACHES.

CIDSURE OF SALISBURY Ah?

PLUM ISLAND BEACHES, AND' NO PARKER RIVER NATIONAL WILDLIFE REFUGE ~

Jk .

j IS IRRADIATED YES

'l IVEL UNCOVERED fNOPROTECTIVE\

ACTIONS OR IS UNCOVERY '

IMMINDIT RECOMMENDED

?

l O!

NO l NOTE 1: TEMPERATURE AS INDICATED BY EITHER INSTRUMENTATION READINGS ;

OR VISUAL INDICATIONS OF COOLANT 1 l

BOILING.

J-

UNUSUAL EVENT CHECKLIST -

SHORT TERM ENERGENCY DIRECTOR

,im) '

i 1'. [ '] NOTIFY STATION PERSOtGIEL w/

EQTI If a security event is in progress, refer to Precaution 3.10.

a. Ensure Gaitronics night muting is off.

b. Sound the plant emergency alarm.

c. Using the Gaitronics override, make the following announcement:

" ATTENTION ALL PERSONNEL. AN UNUSUAL EVENT HAS BEEN DECIARED. DUTY PRIMARY RESPONDERS REPORT TO YOUR ASSIGNED LOCATIONS."

d. Repeat the plant emergency alarm. ,

e. Using the Gaitronics override, repeat the announcement.

2. [} NOTIFY CUARD ISIAND SECURITY

a. Contact the Guard Island Supervisor at x4006,

b. Provide the following informatien:

/

- An Unusual Event has been declared

\. - The ' emergency initiating condition designation (e.g. , C Red, 6a, ' 12b, etc.)

- Schiller Station is not being activated

c. Direct that procedure GD1332.00, Station Emergency / Evacuation, be implemented.

3. [] COMPI.ETE FORM ER 2.08, STATE NOTIFICATION FACT SHEET

a. Block 1 - Leave blank

b. Block 2 - Check " Unusual Event"

c. Block 3 - Check "None" Enter "None" as the PANS Message Number.

d. Block 4 - Self-explanatory gs

\ ER 1.2A Rev. 26 Page 1 of 4

UNUSUAL EVENT CHECKLIST -

SHORT TERM EMERGENCY DIRECTOR (Continued)

e. Block 5 - Use the following guidance when completing this block.

As used here, a " release" is defined as follows:

Radioactive material is being released to the environnes.t as indicated by radiation monitoring effluent alarms (Alert or High) or based upon STED judgement, and release of the material is directly attributable to the event.

f. Block 6 - Self-explanatory

4. [] NOTIFY THE STATES

a. Assign one I6C Technician reporting to the Control Room as Control Room Communicator.

b. Cive the completed copy of form ER 2.0B, along with forms ER 1.2E and ER 2.0A, to the Control Room Communicator.

c. Direct the Communicator to implement form ER 1.2E, Steps 1 through 12.

d. If the Communicator is not available, implement form ER 1.2E, Steps 1 through 12.

5. [] COMPLETE FORM ER 2.0D, NRC EVENT NOTIFICATION WORKSHEET If needed, detailed instructions are contained in procedure ER 2.0, Emergency Notification Documentation Forms Procedure.

6. [] NOTIFY THE NRC

a. Using form ER 2.0D, notify the NRC Headquarters Operations Officer on the FTS-2000 handset phone. If this phone is not operable, use a commercial line. The numbers below can be used for either phone. (On the FIS phone, do not dial "la before the area code.)

(301) 816-5100 (primary)

(301) 951-0550 (backup)

b. Turn over NRC communications to the Control Room Communicator.

i l 7. [] NHDPHS AND MDPH VERIFICATION CALLBACKS I When representatives of the NH Department of Public Health Services and/or the Massachusetts Department of Public Health call in, provide the following information, as requested:

- Verification of the information contained on form ER 2.08, State

. Notification Fact Sheet

- A brief description of events and prognosis.

t ER 1.2A Rev. 26 l Page 2 of 4 l

l

P UNUSUAL EVENT CHECKLIST --

SHORT TERM EMERGENCY DIRECTOR

.(Continued)

_. i,-

sj '

8. [] ENERCENCY RECIASSIFICATION'

a. If an ODPS run is required.and one. has not yet been performed, initiate an.. '

ODPS run in accordance with procedure ER 5.7, Offsite Dose Projection System. An ODPS run is required for each of the -following conditions:

- A Wide Range Gas Monitor (WRGM) high alarm (ICC225)

- A Main Steam Line Monitor high alarm with an open ASDV or SRV on the affected line

- ' The results of effluent analysis or site boundary monitoring indicate a dose rate greater than or equal to 0.06 mrem /hr.

b. Assess current emergency conditions and reclassify in accordance with procedure ER 1.1, Classification of Emergencies,

c. If warranted, implement form ER 1.2B, ER 1.2C, or ER 1.2D as appropriate to the new classification.

9. [] PRIMARY RESPONDER BRIEFINGS (Do not delegate)

As requested, brief Primary Responders on:

- Station status,

- Accident mitigation and corrective actions taken,

- Status of the emergency response organization, and pi . Communications with offsite authorities.

% )-

10. [] COMMAND AND CONTROL TURNOVER (Do not delegate)

a. Turn over emergency command and control responsibilities to the Site Emergency Director.

b. Provide all notification documentation,

c. Enter the time of turnover:

d. Announce turnover of command and control ,- esponsibilities in the Control Room.

11. [] EMERCENCY TERMINATION If no emergency condition (s) exists;

a. Complete a new form ER 2.0B.

- Insert termination time in Block 2 ,

Indicate termination in Block 4

b. Provide the completed form ER 2.0B to the Control Room Communicator.

c. Direct the Control Room Communicator to notify the States.

\J ER 1.2A Rev. 26 Page 3 of 4 l

i

UNUSUAL EVENT CHECKLIST -

SHORT TERM EMERGENCY DIRECTOR (Continued)

d. Complete a new form ER 2.0D.

e. Notify the NRC Headquarters Operations Officer using form ER 2.0D.

f. Ensure Gaitronics night muting is off.

g. Using the Gaitronics override, make the following announcement:

" ATTENTION ALL PERSONNEL. THE UNUSUAL EVENT HAS BEEN TERMINATED. THE UNUSUAL EVENT HAS BEEN TERMINATED."

h. Resume normal Control Room duties. Time:

O ER 1.2a Rev. 26 Page 4 of 4

b

+

t Af2RT (WEf21.TST -

N> '

SHORT TEEK BrMatsurY DIRECTOR c < ,

y A.h If a security event is in progress, refer to Precaution 3.10.

1. ; [ ] . DETERMINE SCHILLER STATION ACTIVATION:

~ NO IS THERE A WRCM HIGH NO IS THERE A MAIN STEAM LINE. "

AIARM (ICC225)? i MONITOR HIGH AIARM VITH AN 7 OPEN ASDV OR SRV ON THE qy.YES .AFFECTED.LINE7' ,

IS THE UPPER WIND NO YES DIRECTION BETWEEN 80 AND-

180 DEGREES? 1F YES YES IS THE LOWER WIND DIRECTION 1F BETWEEN 80 AND 180 DECREES?

SCHILLER STATION- NO ACTIVATED -

CO TO STEP 2 6 1F SCHILLER STATION NOT ACTIVATED -

CO TO STEP 3 CAUTION BEFORE DIRECTING A SITE EVACUATION, ENSURE THERE ARE NO RADIOIDCICAL OR OTHER O NATURAL OR TECHNOIDGICAL HAZARDS ON SITE.THAT WOULD ENDANGER EVACUATING PERSONNEL. SUCH CONDITIONS (e.g., SEVERE WEATHER, FIRE, BAZARDOUS' CHEMICAL PUNES) U0012 REQUIRE DIRECTING PERSONNEL TO STAY IN PIACE, TO SEEK PROTECTIVE SHELTER ON SITE, OR TO USE A SITE ECRESS ROUTE THAT WOULD AVOID THE HAZARD.

2. ( ) NOTIFY STATION PERSONNEL (SCHILLER STATION ACTIVATED)

a. Ensure Gaitronics night muting is off.~

b. Sound the plant emergency alarm.

c. Using the Caitronics override, make the following announcement:

' ATTENTION ALL PERSONNEL, AN ALERT HAS BEEN DECLARED. ALL PERSONNEL WITH ALERT DUTIES REPORT TO YOUR ASSIGNED IDCATIONS. ALL OTHER PERSONNEL EVACUATE THE SITE TO SCHILLER STATION."

d. Repeat the plant emergency alarm.

e '. Using the Caitronics override, repeat the announcement.-

'f. Proceed to Step 4.

3. [] NOTIFY STATION PERSONNEL (SCHILLER STATION NOT ACTIVATED)

- a. Ensure Caitronics night muting is off.

b. Sound the plant emergency alarm.

ER 1.2B Rev. 26 Page 1 of 4

ALERT CHECKLIST -

SHORT TERM ENERGENCY DIRECTOR (Continued)

c. Using the Gaitronics override, make the following announcement:

" ATTENTION ALL PERSONNEL. AN ALERT HAS BEEN DECLARED. ALL PERSONNEL WITH ALERT DUTIES REPORT TO YOUR ASSIGNED LOCATIONS. ALL NON-ASSIGNED PERSONNEL EVACUATE THE SITE TO YOUR HOME."

d. Repeat the plant emergency alarm.

e. Using the Gaitronics override, repeat the announcement.

4. -( ) NOTIFY GUARD ISIAND SECURITY

a. Contact the Guard Island Supervisor at x4006,

b. Provide the following information:

An Alert has been declared

- The emergency initiating condition designation (e.g., C Red, 6a, 12b, etc.)

- Schiller Station is/is not being activated (as determined above)

c. Direct that procedure GD1332.00, Station Emergency / Evacuation, be implemented.

d. If between 1530 and 0700 hours0.0081 days 0.194 hours 0.00116 weeks 2.6635e-4 months , or on weekends or holidays, direct activation of Emergency Response Organization Notification System (ERONS).

5, [] COMPLETE FORM ER 2.0B, STATE NOTIFICATION FACT SHEET

a. Block 1 - Leave blank

b. Block 2 - Check " Alert"

c. Block 3 - Check "None" Enter "None" as the PANS dessage Number.

d. Block 4 - Self-explanatory

e. Block 5 - Use the following guidance when completing this block.

As used here, a " release" is defined as follows:

Radioactive material is being released to the environment as indicated by radiation monitoring effluent alarms (Alert or High) or based upon STED j udgement, and release of the material is directly attributable to the event,

f. Block 6 - Self-explanatory ER 1.2B Rev. 26 Page 2 of 4

em I.,.' ~

ALERT m RmTTST,-

I .' < SHORT TERN EMERGENCY, DIRECTOR (Continued)

( ) 6; [ ]) NOTIFY THE STATES

a. Assign one I&C Technician reporting to the Control. Room as Control Room Communicator.

l

b. Give the completed copy of form ER 2.0B, along with forms ER 1.2E and

.ER'2.0A, to the' Control Room Communicator.

}

c. Direct the Communicator to. implement form ER 1.2E, Steps 11through 12.

d. If the Communicator is not available, implement form ER 1.2E, Steps 1

through 12; l e. If the ERO pager system fails to activate, direct the Communicator to call-l the ERO Backup Dispatcher at 964-6035 and to instruct the dispatcher _to

call out ERO Backup Notification Phone List A.

7. [] COMPLETE FDRM ER 2.0D, EVENT NOTIFICATION WORKSHEET If needed, detailed instructions are contained in procedure ER 2.0, Emergency Notification Documentation Forms Procedure. j

8. [] ACTIVATE THE EMERGENCY RESPONSE DATA SYSTEM (ERDS)

a. Select " Cancel" (this will return screen to main menu).

hd b. From the main menu screen, select " BOP."-

c. From the BOP-menu screen, select " EMERGENCY RESPONSE."

d. From the Emergency Response menu screen, select "ERDS ACTIVATION."

e. From the ERDS menu screen, select " ACTIVATE."

i

9. [] NOTIFY THE NRC

a. Using form ER 2.0D, notify the NRC Headquarters Operations Officer on the FTS-2000 handset phone. If this phone is not operable, use a commercial line. The numbers below can be used for either phone. (On the FTS phone, do not dial "1" before the area code.)

(301) 816-5100 (primary)

(301) 951-0550 (backup)

b. Ask the NRC Headquarters Operations Officer to verify that ERDS data is being satisfactorily received by the NRC. If not, use " Reconnect" to reactivate ERDS.

c. Turn over NRC communications to the Control Room Communicator.

ER 1.2B Rev. 26

- Page 3 of 4 i

_ _ _ _ _j

ALERT CHECKLIST -

SHORT TERM EMERGENCY DIRECTOR (Continued)

10. [] NHDPHS AND MDPH VERIFICATION CALLBACKS When representatives of the NH Department of Public Health Services and/or the Massachusetts Department of Public Health call in, provide the following information, as requested:

- Verification of the information contained on form ER 2.0B, State Notification Fact Sheet

- A brief description of events and prognosis, ll. [] EMERGENCY RECIASSIFICATION

a. If an ODPS run is required and one has not yet been performed, initiate an ODPS run in accordance with procedure ER 5.7, Offsite Dose Proj ection System. An ODPS run is required for each of the following conditions:

- A Wide Range Gas Monitor (URCM) high alarm (ICC225)

- A Main Steam Line Monitor high alarm with an open ASDV or SRV on the affected line

- The results of effluent analysis or site boundary monitoring indicate a dose rate greater than or equal to 0.06 mrem /hr.

b. Assess current emergency conditions and reclassify in accordance with procedure ER 1.1, Classification of Emergencies.

c. If warranted, implement form ER 1.2A, ER 1.20, or ER 1.2D as appropriate to the new classification.

12. [] PRIMARY RESPONDER BRIEFINGS (Do not delegate)

As requested, brief Primary Responders on:

- Station status,

- Accident mitigation and corrective actions taken,

- Status of the emergency response organization,

- Communications with offsite authorities, and Status of ERDS activation.

13. [] COMMAND AND CONTROL TURNOVER (Do not delegate)

a. Turn over emergency command and control responsibilities to the Site Emergency Director.

b. Provide all notification documentation,

c. Enter the time of turnover:

d. Announce turnover of command and control responsibilities in the Control Room.

14. [] EMERGENCY TERMINATION An Alert cannot be terminated by the STED except as discussed in Precaution 3.5. The emergency shall be terminated by either the Site Emergency Director or the Response Manager,

j. ER 1.2B Rev. 26 l

Page 4 of 4 t

SITE AREA ENERGENCY NFNT.YST '-

SHORT TERM EMERCENCY DIRECTOR

'l . EQIE

-V If a security event is in' progress, refer to Precaution 3.10.

1. . [] DETERMINE SCHIL12R STATION ACTIVATION NO IS THERE A WRGM HIGH NO IS THERE A MAIN STEAM LINE

. AIARM (ICC225)? MONITOR HIGH AIARM WITH AN YES

> OPEN ASDV OR SRV ON THE qp AFFECTED LINE?

IS THE UPPER WIND NO YES DIRECTION BETWEEN 80 AND 180 DEGREES? 1F YES YES IS THE LOWER WIND DIRECTION w BETWEEN 80 AND 180 DECREES?

SCHILLER STATION NO ACTIVATED - J GO TO STEP 2 gr SCHILLER STATION NOT ACTIVATEu -

GO TO STEP 3 p

CAUTION BEFORE DIRECTING A SITE EVACUATION, ENSURE THERE ARE NO RADIOIDGICAL OR OTHER NATURAL OR TECHNOIDGICAL HAZARDS ON SITE THAT WOULD ENDANGER EVACUATING PERSONNEL. SUCH CONDITIONS (e.g., SEVERE WEATHER, FIRE, HAZARDOUS CHEMICAL MDfES) WOULD REQUIRE DIRECTING PERSONNEL TO STAY IN PIACE, TO SEEK FROTECTIVE SHELTER ON SITE, OR TO USE A SITE EGRESS ROUTE THAT WOULD AVOID THE HAZARD.

2. [] NOTIFY STATION PERSONNEL (SCHILLER STATION ACTIVATED)

a. Ensure Gaitronics night muting is off.

b. Sound the plant emergency alarm.

c. Using the Gaitronics override, make the following announcement:

" ATTENTION ALL PERSONNEL, A SITE AREA EMERGENCY HAS BEEN DECLARED. ALL PERSONNEL WITH SITE AREA EMERCENCY DUTIES REPORT TO YOUR ASSIGNED LOCATIONS. ALL OTHER PERSONNEL EVACUATE THE SITE TO SCHILLER STATION."

d. Repeat the plant emergency alarm.

e. Using the Caitronics override, repeat the announcement. P

f. Proceed to Step 4 ER 1.2C Rev. 26 Page 1 of 5

E-l SITE AREA EMERGENCY CHECKLIST -

SHORT TERM EMERGENC1f DIRECTOR (Continued)

3. () NOTIFY STATION PERSONNEL (SCHILIEJt STATION NOT ACTIVATED)

a. Ensure Gaitronics night muting is off,

b. Sound the plant emergency alarm.

c. Using the Caitronics override, make the following announcement:

" ATTENTION ALL PERSONNEL. A SITE AREA EMERGENCY HAS BEEN DECIARED. ALL PERSONNEL WITH SITE AREA EMERGENCY DUTIES REPORT TO YOUR ASSIGNED LOCATIONS. ALL NON-ASSIGNED PERSONNEL EVACUATE THE SITE TO YOUR HOME."

d. Repeat the plant emergency alarm.

e. Using the Gaitronics override, repeat the announcement.

4. [] NOTIFY CUARD ISIAND SECURITY l

a. Contact the Guard Island Supervisor at x4006. l l

b. Provide the following information: i

- A Site Area Emergency has been declared

- The emergency initiating condition designation (e.g. , C Red, 6a,12b, etc.)

- Schiller Station is/is not being activated (as determined above)

c. Direct that procedure CD1332.00, Station Emergency / Evacuation, be implemented.

d. If between 1530 and 0700 hours0.0081 days 0.194 hours 0.00116 weeks 2.6635e-4 months , or on weekends or holidays, direct activation of Emergency Response Organization Notification System (ERONS).

5. [] COMPLETE FORM ER 2.03, STATE NOTIFICATION FACT SHEET

a. Block 1 - Leave blank

b. Block 2 - Check " Site Area Emergency"

c. Block 3 - Use Figure 1, Site Area Emergency PAR Flowchart, to determine appropriate protective action recommendations. (Ref 6.10)

Enter "None" as the PANS Message Number.

d. Block 4 - Self-explanatory ER 1.2C Rev. 26 Page 2 of 5

1

. SITE AREA ENERGENCY CHECKLIST f SHORT TERM EMERGENCY DIRECTOR (Continued)

e. Block 5 - Use the following guidance when completing this block.

As used here, a " release" is defined as follows:

Radioactive material is being released to the environment as indicated by radiation monitoring effluent alarms (Alert or High) or based upon STED judgement, and release of the material is directly attributable to the

,' event,

f. Block 6 - Self-explanatory

6. [] NOTIFY THE STATES

a. Assign one I&C Technician reporting to the Control Room as Control Room _

Communicator.

b. Give the completed copy of form ER 2.08, along with forms ER 1.2E and ER 2.0A, to the Control Room Communicator,

c. Direct the Communicator to implement form ER 1.2E, Steps 1 through 12.

d. If the Communicator is not available, implement form ER 1.2E, Steps 1 through 12.

e. If the ERO pager system fails to activate, direct the Communicator to call the ERO Backup Dispatcher at 964-6035 and to instruct the dispatcher to call out ERO Backup Notification Phone List A.

(' -

7. [] COMPLETE FORM ER 2.0D, EVENT NOTIFICATION WORKSHEET If needed, detailed instructions are contained in procedure ER 2.0, Emergency Notification Documentation Forms Procedure.

8. [ ] _ ACTIVATE THE EMERGENCY RESPONSE DATA SYSTEM (ERDS)

a. Select " Cancel" (this will return screen to main menu).

b. From the main menu screen, select " BOP."

c. From the BOP menu screen, select " EMERGENCY RESPONSE."

d. From the Emergency Response menu screen, select "ERDS ACTIVATION."

e. From the ERDS menu screen, select " ACTIVATE." !

9. [] NOTIFY THE NRC

a. Using form ER 2.0D, notify the NRC Headquarters Operations Officer on the FTS-2000 handset phone. If this phone is not operable, use a commercial line. The numbers below can be used for either phone. (On the FIS phone, do not dial "1" before the area code.)

(301) 816-5100 (primary)

(301) 951-0550 (backup)

V ER 1.2C Rev. 26 Page 3 of 5 1

T SITE AREA EMERGENCY CHECIG.IST -

SHORT TERM EMERGENCY DIRECTOR (Continued)

b. Ask the NRC Headquarters Operations Officer to verify that ERDS data is being satisfactorily received by the NBC. If not, use " Reconnect" to reactivate ERDS.

c. Turn over NRC communications to the Control Room Communicator.

10. [] NHDPHS AND MDPH VERIFICATION CALLBACKS When representatives of the NH Department of Public Health Services and/or the Massachusetts Department of Public Health call in, provide the following information, as requested:

- Verification of the information contained on form ER 2.0B, State Notification Fact Sheet

- A brief description of events and prognosis,

11. [] EMERGENCY RECLASSIFICATION

a. If an ODPS run is required and one has not yet been performed, initiate an ODPS run in accordance with procedure ER 5.7, Offsite Dose Projection System. An ODPS run is required for each of the following conditions: .

- A Wide Range Gas Monitor (WRGM) high alarm (lCC225)

- A Main Steam Line Monitor high alarm with an open ASDV or SRV on the affected line

- The results of effluent analysis or site boundary monitoring indicate a dose rate greater than or equal to 0.06 mrem /hr.

b. Assess current emergency conditions and reclassify in accordance with procedure ER 1.1, Classification of Emergencies.

c. If warranted, implement form ER 1.2A, ER 1.2B, or ER 1.2D as appropriate to the new classification.

12. [] PRIMARY RESPONDER BRIEFINGS (Do not delegate)

As requested, brief Primary Responders on:

- Station status,

- Accident mitigation and corrective actions taken,

- Status of the emergency response organization,

- Communications with offsite authorities, and

- Status of ERDS activation.

13. [] COMMAND AND CONTROL TURNOVER (Do not delegate)

a. Turn over emergency command and control responsibilities to the Site Emergency Director.

b. Provide all notification documentation.

c. Enter the time of turnover:

ER 1.2C Rev. 26 Page 4 of 5

e:

l. ~

' SITE AREA ENERGENCY CHECKLIST -

.SHORT TERM ENERGENCY DIRECTOR (Continued)

d. Announce turnover of command =and control responsibilities in the Control-Room.

.14 [-) ENERGENCY TERMINATION A Site' Area Emergency cannot be terminated by the STED except as. discussed in Precaution 3.5. The emergency shall be terminated by either the Site Emergency Director or the Response Manager.

>e i

1 O

2

' ER 1.20 Rev. 26 Page 5 of 5

g" sg-

-- -~ -

j~,- - - - - - - -- - 7

- n M i

' ~

GENERAL INERCENCY cNFt3ff.TST -

R SHORT TERN ENERGENCY DIRECTOR 9%)i .

E23 If a' security event is in progress, refer- to Precaution 3.10. .,

1

1. [ ] DETERMINE SCHILLER STATION ACTIVATION ,

]

. N0 '

IS THERE-A WRGN HIGH NO IS THERE A MAIN STEAM LINE AIARM (ICC225)? MONITOR HIGH AIARM WITH AN YES N :OPEN ASDV OR SRV ON THE AFFECTED LINE7.

1F IS THE UPPER WIND NO YES DIRECTION BETWEEN 80 AND 180 DEGREES? yy YES YES IS THE IDWER WIND DIRECTION ,

qr BETWEEN 80 AND 180 DEGREES?

SCHILLER STATION , NO ACTIVATED - M CO TO STEP 2 , y, I SCHILLER STATION NOT ACTIVATED -

b.

GO TO STEP'3-

, . >O CAMION BEFORE DIRECTING A SITE EVACUATION, ENSURE THERE ARE NO RADI0IDGICAL OR MHER NATURAL OR TECHNOIDGICAL HAZARDSLON SITE THAT WOUID ENDANGER EVACUATING PERSONNEL. SUCH CONDITIONS (e.g., SEVERE WEATHER, FIRE, HAZARDOUS- CHEMICAL PUNES) EDUID REQUIRE DIRECTING PERSONNEL TO STAY IN PIACE, TO SEEK PROTECTIVF SHELTER ON SITE, OR TO USE A SITE EGRESS ROUTE THAT WOUID AVOID THE HAZARD.

2. ( ) ~ NOTIFY STATION PERSONNEL (SCHILLER STATION ACTIVATED)

, a. Ensure Gaitronics night muting is off.

b. Sound the plant emergency alarm.

c. Using the Gaitronics override, make the following announcement:

.Il

" ATTENTION ALL PERSONNEL, A CENERAL ENERGENCY HAS BEEN DECIARED, ALL PERSONNEL WITH GENERAL EMERCENCY DUTIES REPORT TO YOUR ASSIGNED IDCATIONS.

ALL OTHER PERSONNEL EVACUATE THE SITE TO SCHILLER STATION."

d. Repeat the plant emergency alarm.

e. Using the Caitronics override, repeat the announcement.

ER l'.2D.

Rev. 26 Page 1 of 6

CENERAL EMERGENCY CHECKLIST -

SHORT TERM EMERGENCY DIRECTOR (Continued)

f. Proceed to Step 4.

3. [] NOTIFY STATION PERSONNEL (SCHILLER STATION NOT ACTIVATED)

a. Ensure Gaitronics night muting is off.

b. Sound the plant emergency alarm.

c. Using the Gaitronics override, make the following announcement:

" ATTENTION ALL PERSONNEL. A CENERAL EMERGENCY HAS BEEN DECLARED. ALL PERSONNEL WITH GENERAL EKERGENCY DUTIES REPORT TO YOUR ASSIGNED LOCATIONS.

ALL NON-ASSIGNED PERSONNEL EVACUATE THE SITE TO YOUR HOME."

d. R3 peat the plant emergency alarm.

e Using the Gaitronics override, repeat the announcement.

4. [] NOTIFY GUARD ISIAND SECURITY

a. Contact the Guard Island Supervisor at x4006.

b. Provide the following information:

- A General Emergency has been declared

- The emergency initiating condition designation (e.g., C Red, 6a, 12b, etc.)

- Schiller Station is/is not being activated (as determined above)

c. Direct that procedure GD1332.00, Station Emergency / Evacuation, be implemented.

d. If between 1530 and 0700 hours0.0081 days 0.194 hours 0.00116 weeks 2.6635e-4 months , or on weekends or holidays, direct activation of Emergency Response Organization Notification System (ERONS).

5. [] COMPLETE FORM ER 2.0B, STATE NOTIFICATION FACT SHEET

a. Block 1 - Leave blank

b. Block 2 - Check " General Emergency"

c. Block 3 - Complete using the following information ,

(1) If a release is in progress from the plant vent, enter the current upper wind direction; otherwise, enter the current lower wind direction - FROM degrees.

(2) Identify the appropriate PAR GROUP A column based on the above wind ;

direction to determine the towns to be evacuated and sheltered. l (3) Check off the evacuated and sheltered towns on form ER 2.0B, Block 3.

I ER 1.2D O.ll Rev. 26 Page 2 of 6

l GENEltAL DURGENCY CHECKLIST -

SHORT TERM EMERGENCY DIRECTOR f (Continued)

[

(4) ' All New Hampshire and Massachusetts beaches should be checked off as evacuated and closed, respectively, i 1

(5) Enter applicable PANS message number.

1 PAR m oDF A *

(Evacuate 2 Mile Radius and 5 Miles Downwind-Shelter All others) l 1

WIID DIRECEIN Fipt (Degrese)

ERFA TOWN 303-33.9 34-100.9 101-122.9 123-167.9l 168-281.4 281.5-302.9 .

A Seabrook Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Hampton Falls Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate B Amesbury Evacuate Evacuate Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter l Salisbury Evacuate Evacuate Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter l c Kensington Shalter Evacuate Evacuate Evocuate Shelter Shelter South Bampton Shelter Evacuate Evacuate tracuate- Shelter - Shelter l

D Hampton Shelter Shelter Shelter Evacuate Evacuate Shelter North Hampton Shelter Shelter Shelter Evocuate Evacuate Shelter E Merrimac Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Newburyport Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Newbury Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter West Newbury Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter l F Brentwood Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter j Shelter East Eingston Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Exeter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Newfields Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Newton Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter. Shelter Kingston Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter

'g G Greenland Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter (j Stratham Rye Shelter Shelter Shelter Ehelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter i New castle Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter f Portsmouth Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter l l

l nas msSmEsenEnSnEenos nelz l Release in progress (as ,

defined in Block 5 628 GZ8 GE6 GE6 GE6 GES l below)

Release not in progress GES ~ GIS GZ5 (as defined in Block 5 GZ7 GE7 GES below)

d. Block 4 - Self-explanatory

e. Block 5 - Use the following guidance when completing this Block.

As used here, a " release" is defined.as follows:

Radioactive inaterial is being released to the environment as indicated by radiation monitoring effluent alarms (Alert or High) or based upon STED l judgement, and release of the material is directly attributable to the event.

f. Block 6 - Self-explanatory p

(

ER 1.2D Rev. 26 Page 3 of 6

=

GENERAL EMERCENCY C11ECKLIST -

SilORT TERM EMERGENCY DIRECTOR (Continued)

6. [] NOTIFY Tile STATES

a. Assign one I&C Technician reporting to the Control Room as Control Room Communicator.

b. Give the completed copy of form ER 2.0B, along with forms ER 1.2E and ER 2.0A, to the Control Room Comaranicator.

c. Direct the Communicator to implement form ER 1.2E, Steps 1 through 12.

d. If the Communicator is not available, implement form ER 1.2E, Steps 1 through 12.

e. If the ERO pager system fails to activate, direct che Communicator to call ~

the ERO Backup Dispatcher at 964-6035 and to instruct the dispatcher to call out ERO Backup Notification Phone List A.

7. [] FOLIDW-UP PAR ASSESSMENT

a. Using form ER 1.2F, General Emergency PAR Worksheet, determine if upgraded protective action recommendations are warranted,

b. If results from the above assessment indicate a PAR Group B selection, complete a new form ER 2.0B and provide it to the Control Room Communicator for transmittal.

8. [] COMPLETE FORM ER 2.0D, EVENT NOTIFICATION WORKSIIEET If needed, detailed instructions are contained in procedure ER 2.0, Emergency Notification Documentation Forms Procedure.

9. [] ACTIVATE T11E EMERCENCY RESPONSE DATA SYSTEM (ERDS)

a. Select " Cancel" (this will return screen to main menu).

b. From the main menu screen, select " BOP."

c. From the BOP menu screen, select " EMERGENCY RESPONSE."

d. From the Emergency Response menu screen, select "ERDS ACTIVATION."'

e. From the ERDS menu screen, select " ACTIVATE."

10. [] NOTIFY THE NRC

a. Using form ER 2.0D, notify the NRC Headquarters Operations Officer on the ETS-2000 handset phone. If this phone is not operable, use a commercial line. The numbers below can be used for e ither phone. (On the FTS phone, l

! do not dial "1" before the area code.)

l (301) 816-5100 (primary)

(301) 951-0550 (backup)

ER 1.2D Rev. 26 Page 4 of 6 i

l

GENERAL ENERGENCY CHECKLIST -

SHORT TERM EMERGENCY DIRECTOR (Continued)

,m .

j

' C'.

) b. Ask the NRC Headquarters Operations Officer to verify that ERDS data is being satisfactorily received by the NRC. If not, use " Reconnect" to

reactivate ERDS.

c. Turn over NRC communications to the Control Room Communicator.

11. (} NHDPHS AND MDPH VERIFICATION CALLBACKS When representatives of the NH Department of Public Health Services and/or the Massachusetts Department of Public Health call in, provide the following information, as requested:

- Verification of the information contained on form ER 2.0B, State

( Notification Fact Sheet

- A brief description of events and prognosis.

12. () EMERGENCY RECIASSIFICATION

a. If an ODPS run is required and one has not yet been performed, initiate an ODPS run in accordance with procedure ER 5.7, Offsite Dose Projection System. An ODPS run is required for each of the following conditions:

l

- A Wide Range Gas Monitor (WRCM) high alarm (ICC225)

- A Main Steam Line Monitor high alarm with an open ASDV or SRV on the

! affected line

- The results of effluent analysis or site boundary monitoring indicate a g dose rate greater than or equal to 0.06 mrem /hr.

U b. Assess current emergency conditions and reclassify in accordance with procedure ER 1.1, Classification of Emergencies.

c. If warranted, implement form ER 1.2A, ER 1.2B, or ER 1.2C as appropriate to the new classification.

13. () PRIMARY RESPONDER BRIEFINGS (Do not delegate)

As requested, brief Primary Responders on:

- Station status,

- Accident mitigation and corrective actions taken,

- Status of the emergency response organization.

- Communications with offsite authorities, and

- Status of ERDS activation.

)

\ ER 1.2D Rev. 26 Page 5 of 6 I

E CENERAL EMERGENCY CHECKLIST -

SHORT TERM EMERGENCY DIRECTOR (Continued)

I

14. [] COMMAND AND CONTROL TURNOVER (Do not delegate)

a. Turn over emergsney command and control responsibilities to the Site Emergency Director. j

b. Provide all notification documentation.

c. Enter the time of turnover:

d. Announce turnover of command and control responsibilities in the Control Room.

15. [] EMERGENCY TERMINATION A General Emergency cannot be terminated by the STED except as discussed in Precaution 3.5. The emergency shall be terminated by either the Site Emergency Director or the Response Manager.

O ER 1.2D Rev. 26 Page 6 of 6

7 7

ENERGENCY ACTION CHECKLIST.-

CONTROL ROOM COMMUNICATOR

rs s . .

1. [] Report to the Control Room.

2. [] When given the completed Form ER 2.0B, State Notification Fact Sheet, from the STED, contact the NH State Police and MA Emergency Management Agency using the Nuclear Alert System (NAS or orange phone), in the following manner:

a. Pick up the handset and press Group Call Number 555.

b. Verify that the NH and MA dispatcher (s) are on the line.

c. Ensure that the dispatcher (s) answering has (have) a copy of the State Notification Fact Sheet,

d. Enter the time in the block in the upper right-hand corner of Form ER 2.08.

e. Read all information slowly and clearly.

f. Verify that the dispatcher (s) has (have) received the correct information by asking one to read back the information.

g. At an ALERT or higher emergency classification level, read the following:

"Please be advised that the site siren, located at Seabrook Station, has been activated to notify Station personnel to respond to the emergency."

i

h. Obtain the name(s) of the dispatcher (s) and enter in Block 7. Also enter the current date and time.

3. [] If contact with one or both states cannot be made via the NAS Croup Call number, make contact individually by using the NAS or a commercial telephone numbers below and follow Steps 2.c through 2.h above. ,

i Nuclear Alert System Commercial Telephone i l

New Hampshire 212 (800) 852-3411 Massachusetts 313 (508) 820-2000 i

4. [ ] If contact is made via commercial telephone, callback verification is 1 required. When callback occurs, record verification time. l i

NH MA .]

5. [ ] Retain Form ER 2.0B, State Notification Fact Sheet.

l

6. [ ] Determine duty Primary Responders from the Duty Primary Responder Board in the Control Room.

ER 1.2E Rev. 26 Page 1 of 3

EMERGENCY ACTION CHECKLIST -

CONTROL ROOM COMMUNICATOR (Continued)

7. [ ] Activate the primary responder paging system by performing the following:

H.QIE If the Metromedia paging system is known to be out of service or cannot be j reached, proceed to step 10 and contact duty responders by telephone.

a. Dial 771-2400. If the call does not go through, dial 508-522-8958. (If neither call goes through, dial 800-666-7890. At the tone, dial 771-2400.)

b. After (3) beeps, dial the number that corresponds to the emergency classification:

UNUSUAL EVENT (In effect or terminated) 474-8330-012 ALERT 474-8330-013 SITE AREA EMERCENCY 474-8330-014 CENERAL EMERCENCY 474-8330-015

c. If the emergency classification was an UNUSUAL EVENT and the UNUSUAL EVENT has been terminated, perform the following additional steps:

1. Dial 771-2400. If the call does not go through, dial 508-522-8958.

(If neither call goes through, dial 800-666-7890. At the tone, dial 771-2400.)

2. After 3 beeps, dial 474-8330-111.

8. [ ] Enter the time of pager activation on Form ER 2.0A, Primary Emergency Response Organization Call List.

9. [ ] As paged individuals call in,

a. Record the time of the return call on Form ER 2.0A.

b. Inform them of the emergency classification and time the emergency was declared.

10. [ ] If the Control Room spare pager does not activate, indicating that the pager system failed, immediately inform the STED.

l 11. [ ] If directed by the STED to call the ERO Backup Dispatcher, instruct the dispatcher to verify the call by callback to the Control Room telephone number.

12. [ ] If acknowledgement of a duty responder is not received within fifteen minutes of paging, contact the duty responder via telephone using the numbers provided on the Duty Primary Responders Board.

ER 1.2E Rev. 26 Page 2 of 3

.7 3- EMERGENCY ACTION CHECKLIST -

00ertROL BOOK ColetDNICATOR -

(Continued) m When activating individual pagers, the "771 " prefix must be used. .

13. [ ]-If a duty responder cannot be reached by telephone,-contact an alternate'by telephone using the Emergency Responsa Organization Pager Wearer Schedule.

V/ (This schedule is normally available in the Shift Information Book.)-

14. '[ ] When complete, inform the STED or Site Emergency Director,,as' appropriate.- .

and indicate whether any parties could not be reached.-

?15. ( ) Take over communications with the NRC as directe'd by the STED. .

g ,16. [ ] Obtain information from Centrol Room personnel as requested by the NRC' Headquarters Operations' Officer.

17. [ ] When the NH Department of Public Health Services and/or the Massachusetts Department of Public Health Representatives call in for a follow-up briefing, ask the STED or Work Control Coordinator to take the call,

18. .[ ] When offsite authorities call in, note the name of the individual, organizational affiliation, and time of call on Form ER 2.0E.

19. [ ] Upon activation of the TSC at an ALERT or higher emergency classification level, report to the Emergency Operations Manager in the TSC.

b 5

a

]

O ER 1.2E Rev. 26 Page 3 of 3 l

)

GENERAL EIERGENCY PAR WORKSHEET t

j%.; ..

5

-y ENERAL EMERGEN 1F YES IS THE CORE COOLING CSFST PROCEEDING AIDNG A RED PATH?

1F YES IS THE CONTAINMENT CSFST-PROCEEDING ALONG A RED PATH?

1F RELEASE IN PROGRESS 7

- WRGM HIGH AIARM (1CC225)

NO - MSL HIGH AIARM WITH OPEN ASDV OR SRV

- SITE BOUNDARY DOSE RATE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO 0.06 mrem /hr YES 1F- k PERFORM ODPS RUN PAR PAR GROUP B PER PROCEDURE CROUP B CO TO PAGE 2 ER 5.7 & DETERMINE OF THIS FORM PAR RESULTS.

PAR GROUP A 1F NO ADDITIONAL PARS ARE REQUIRED -

) RETURN TO FORM ER 1.2D STEP 8.

4 ER 1.2F

() Rev. 26 Page 1 of 2

=

l-CENERAL EMERGENCY PAR WORKSHEET g

~

(Continued)

For a PAR Croup B selection, use the following instructions and table to determine Protective Action Recommendations.

1. If a release is in progress from the plant vent, encer the current upper wind direction; otherwise, enter the current lows.r wind direction -

FROM degrees.

2. Identify the appropriate PAR GROUP B column based on the r.tove wind direction to determine the towns to be evacuated and shelteted.

3. Check off the evacuated and sheltered towns on Form ER 2.0B, Block 3.

4. New Hampshire and Massachusetts beaches should be checked off as evacuated and closed, respectively.

5. Leave PANS Message Number blank - not required with follow-up PAR.

f PAR GROll? B l (Evacuate 5 Mile Radiue and 10 Miles Downwind-Shelter All Othere) l WIND DIRECTION FROM (Degrees)

ERPA TOWN 303- 34- 101 123 191.5- 259-33.9 100.9 122.9 191.4 258.9 302.9 A Seabrook, Evacuate Evacuate Evecuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Hampton Falle Evacuate Evacuate Evoeuste Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate B Amesbury Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Salisbury Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evocuate Evacuate C Kensington Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuete South Hampton Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate D Hampton Evacuate Evocuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate North Hampton Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuata E Merrimac Evacuate Evacuate Shelter Ehelter Shelter Shelter Newburyport Evocuate Evacuate Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Newbury Evacuate Evocuate Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter West Newbury Evacuate Evacuate Shelter Shelter Shelter Shetter F Brentwood Shelter Evacuate Evecuate Evacuate Shelter Shelter East Kingston Shelter Evecuate Evecuate Evacuate Shelter Shelter Exeter Shelter Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Shelter Shelter Newfields Shelter Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Shelter Shelter Newton Sheltar Evacuate Evacusto Evacuate Shelter Shelter Kingston Shelter Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Shelter Shelter G Greenland Shelter Shelter Shelter Evacuate Evacuate Shelter Stratham Shelter Shelter Shelter Evacuate Evacuate Shelter Rye Shelter Shelter Shelter Evecuste Evacuate Shelter New Castle Shelter Shelter Shelter Evacuate Evecuate Shelter i Portsmouth Shelter Shelter Shelter Evacuate Evacuate Shelter

6. heturn to Form ER 1.2D, Step 7.

ER 1.2F Rev. 26 Page 2 of 2 I

l ER 2.0 Peg 2 1 Rev. 16 ;

ADMINISTRATIVE FROCEDURE COVER PURN A. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ER-2.O REVISION 16 _,

l TITLE EMERGENCY NOTIFICATION DOCUMENTATION FORMS PROCEDURE i

ORIGINATOR J . W. Baer i

1. Does this procedure / procedure revision: ;

a. Make changes in the facility as described in the UFSAR? O Yes E No j

b. Make changes in procedures as described in the UFSAR? O Yes S No

c. Involve tests or experiments not described in the UFSAR? O Yes E No

d. Involve changes to the existing Operating License or require additional license requirements? O Yes E No-

2. If any of the above questions are answered y.ng, a safety evaluation per the Regulatory Compliance Manual (NARC) is required. (The individual performing the above review shall have completed 10 CFR 50.59 training.)

B. MANAGER / DEPARTMENT SUPERVISOR APPROVAL f%

TITLE SIGNATURE DAT.E EP h m 9KC C 4/shs

<1 1

C. NUCLEAR OUALITY SERVICES REVIEW TITLE SIGNATURE DAIE j NM .

D. SORC REVIEW SORC MEETING NO. hMON I E. AfflOVAL FOR IMPLEMENTATION

/,fhi1 b4 ,.->6

~

2/hy/f.s' 0s/03l95 APPRENAlf 6 ATE EFFECTIVE DATE "STATIONDIRE[OR i

i

./

SM 6.1A Rev. 13

ER 2.0 P ga 2 Rev. 16 CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS CONTENTS PAGE NO. PAGE REV.

COVER 1 16 CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS. 2 16 1.0 OBJECTIVES 3 15 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 3 2.1 EMERGENCY RESPONSE ORGANIZATION MEMBERS 3 2.2 ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES COORDINATOR 3 2.3 EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS MANAGER 3 3.0 PRECAUTIONS 3 4.0 PREREQUISITES 3 5.0 ACTIONS 3 5.1 EMERGENCY FACILITY LOGS 3 5.2 COMMUNICATIONS RECORD KEEPING (SPEED LETTERS) 4 15 5.3 EMERGENCY EVENT REPORTS 4

6.0 REFERENCES

5 15 7.0 AfTACHMENTS Figure 1, Guidelines For Completing Form ER 2.0D, Event Notification Worksheet 68 15 ER 2.0A, Primary Emergency Response Organization Call List 15 ER 2.0B, State Notification Fact Sheet 14 ER 2.00, Follow-Up Information Form 15 ER 2.0D, Event Notification Worksheet 11 ER 2.0E, Emergency Facility Log 15 ER 2.0F Cancelled ER 2.0G, HPN Event Notification Worksheet 15 ER 2.0H, Plant Parameter Data Sheet - Single Data Set 15 ER 2.01, Plant Parameter Data Sheet - Multiple Data Set 15 ER 2.0J, System Status Data Sheet 15 ER 2.0K, Critical Safety Function Status Sheet 15 O

., .. - . ._ ,- . . . - . . . ~ . - .

+ AmetTNISTRATIVE PROCEDERE CANCRYJATIMt FtXM

" A. IDElffIFICATION NUMBER: ER 2.1 REVISION: 15 TITLE: NOTIFICATION OF ENNENCY BMPONSE MdANT2ATION l=

ORIGINATOR: J. W. Raer

'1. Does this procedure cancellation:

s. Make changes'in the facility as described in the UFSAR7 O Yes B No;

b. Make changes in procedures as described in the UFSAR7 O Yes E No

c. Involve tests or experiments not described in the'UFSAR?- O Yes E No

d. Involve changes to the existing Operating License or require additional license requirements? O Yes E No

2. If any of the above questions are answered y.as., a safety evaluation per the Regulatory Compliance Manual (NARC) is required. (The individual-performing the above review shall have completed 10 CFR 50.59 training.)

B. REASON FOR CANCELIATION 1 '

ER 2.1 nrovisions for notification of ERO norsonnel have been incornorated into Security Procedure CD1332.00.

C. MANAGER / DEPARTMENT SUPERVISOR APPROVAL TITLE SIGNATURE DATE EP Nm bfC 9/shs i I D. NUCLEAR OUALITY SERVICES REVIEW TITLE SIGNATURE DAIE

~

tJM l E. SORC REVIEW SORC MEETING NO.: Mb F. CANCELLATION APPROVAL V

~

[V 05/03/95 AfPR6 VAL DATE EFFECTIVE DATE STATION [ RECTOR VO SM 6.1B Rev. 13

l ER 3.1 Pega 1 l Rev. 23 l j- ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURE COVER FORM i

A. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ER 3.1 REVISION 23 TITLE TECHNICAL SUPPORT CENTER OPERATIONS ORIGINATOR J. V. Baer

1. Does this procedure / procedure revision:

a. Make changes in the facility as described in the UFSAR? O Yes E No

b. Make changes in procedures as described in the UFSAR7 O Yes E No

c. Involve tests or experiments not described in the UFSAR? -O Yes E No

d. Involve changes to the existing Operating License or require additional license requirements? O Yes @ No

2. If any of the above questions are answered yng, a safety evaluation per the Regulatory Compliance Manual (NARC) is required. (The individual performing the above review shall have completed 10 CFR 50.59 training.)

B. MANAGER / DEPARTMENT SUPERVISOR APPROVAL TITLE SIGNATURE E o m_ rwm qw Il C. NUCLEAR OUALITY SERVICES REVIEW IIILE SIGNATURE DAIX NJA D. SORC REVIEW SORC MEETING NO. hI"ON E. APPROVAL FOR IMPLEMENTATION f,f h /), '

hp/ff 05/03/95 APflid/AL DATE EFFECTIVE DATE

"~STATIONDI[CTOR

/ SM 6.1A fC] Rev. 13

.m ER 3.1 Pego 2 Rev. 23 CONTENTS AND REVISION STATQS, COVER 1 23 CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS 2-3 23 1.0 OBJECTIVES 4 23 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 4 2.1 TECHNICAL SERVICES COORDINATOR 4 2.2 SITE EMERGENCY DIRECTOR 4 2.3 EMERGENCY OPERATIONS MANAGER- 4 2.4 HEALTH PHYSICS COORDINATOR 4 2.5 CHEMISTRY COORDINATOR 5 23 2.6 I6C COORDINATOR 5 2.7 ENGINEERING COORDINATOR 5 2.8 MAINTENANCE COORDINATOR 5 2.9 REACTOR ENGINEER 5 2.10 COMPUTER ENGINEER 5 3.0 PRECAUTIONS 5 4.0 PREREQUISITES 6 23 5.0 ACTIONS 7 23

6.0 REFERENCES

8 23 7.0 ATTACHMENTS Figure 1. Technical Support Center Operations Area Floor Plan 9 22 Figure 2, Relative Location of the Technical Support Center within the 75' Elevation Level of the Control Building 10 23

. Figure 3, Technical Support Center (TSC) Staff 11 23 Figure 4, Release Definitions 12 23 ER 3.1A, Technical Services Coordinator Checklist 23 ER 3.1B, Site Emergency Director Checklist 23 ER 3.1C, Emergency Operations Manager Checklist 23 ER 3.1D, Health Physics Coordinator Checklist 23 ER 3.1E, Chemistry Coordinator Checklist 23 4

rr ER 3.1 Pags 3 Rev. 23 CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS

}

-y CONTENTS PAGE NO. PAGE REV.

J 7.0- ATTACHMENTS

[ ER 3.lF, I&C Coordinator Checklist 23 ER 3.lG, Engineering Coordinator Checklist 23

"' ER 3.lH,~ Maintenance Coordinator Checklist 23 ER 3.1I, Reactor Engineer Checklist -23 ER 3.lJ,= Computer Engineer Checklist 23

ER 3.lK, OSC Staff Tracking 23 ER 3.lL, Core Damage Assessment Information Worksheet 19 23 2

ER 3 lM, Planned Radiological Release Data ER 3.LN, PASS Contingency Matrix 23 l

i e

O l

O

ER 3.1 Pcga 4 Rev. 23 1.0 OBJECTIVES This procedure specifies the actions required to activate and operate the Technical Support Center (TSC). It also provides instructions for recovery from Site Area or General Emergency conditions.

2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 TECHNICAI. SERVICES COORDINATOR Monitors TSC activation process, assesses Station conditions, and determines appropriate corrective measures.

2.2 SITE EMERGENCY DIRECTOR Directs onsite emergency response activities and coordinates recommendations of the TSC or6anization.

Relieves the Short Term Emergency Director (STED) of overall responsibility for directing the onsite emergency response.

l The following responsibilities may not be delegated (Ref. 6.10):

1. Relieve Short Term Emergency Director.

2. Direct notification of offsite authorities (until relieved by the Response Manager).

3. Direct in-station emergency response.

4. Reclassify the emergency.

5. Request industry emergency response assistance, if necessary.

6. Authorize workers to exceed 10 CFR 20 Radiation Exposure Limits.

7. Recommend protective actions to offsite authorities.

8. Approve news releases.

Also provides technical information and advice to the Response Manager in support of reentry and recovery operations.

2.3 EMERGENCY OPERATIONS MANAGER Responsible for overall direction and coordination of Operations emergency response actions, including Control Room activities until the emergency conditions are terminated.

2.4 HEALTH PHYSICS COORDINATOR Provides input on radiological considerations during emergency corrective and response action planning.

O

y ,

l ER 3.1 Pega 5 Rev. 23 p., 2.5 C11EMISTRY COORDINATOR Provides chemistry data for accident assessment.

2.6 I6C COORDINATOR Evaluates I&C problems and coordinates I6C repairs.

2.7 ENGINEERING COORDINATOR Coordinates damage evaluation, repair and corrective action effor ts of engineering support personnel.

2.8 MAINTENANCE COORDINATOR Directs repair and corrective actions requests to the Operational Support Center .

I (OSC) and provides input for repair team makeup.

2.9 REACTOR ENGINEER Analyzes the reactor core and plant transient response and provides core protection recommendations.

2.10 COMPUTER ENGINEER Evaluates computer system problems and provides computer assistance to TSC personnel.

3.0 PRECAUTIONS

1. TSC personnel should not leave the facility without first notifying the Technical Services Coordinator, so appropriate personnel protective l measures may be employed. (Ref. 6.8)

2. In the event of a Control Room evacuation for other than radiological j concerns, TSC personnel should establish their work space as directed by 1 the Technical Services Coordinator and continue to implement this i procedure.

3. For a condition (s) that meets the criteria for emergency classification, I but completely clears before notifications have been _ initiated, perform all required offsite authority notifications adhering to the 15-minute requirement. Dur!ng this notification, these authorities should be 1 l ' informed that the emergency has been terminated. (Ref. 6.13) l

4. For an emergency condition that reduces in severity, but does not' i I

completely clear before notifications have been initiated, perform all required initial notifications using the current (lower) emergency classification level. During follow-up State notifications and the initial NRC notification, provide the following information:

t

a. State that a higher classification level had existed prior to the initial notification; g I

, .d

p ER 3.1 P:ga 6 Rev. 23 3.0 PRECAUTIONS

b. Explain the conditions that required the higher emergency classification level; and

c. Explain the conditions that warranted the deescalation to the lower l emergency classification level. (Ref. 6.13)

5. An evacuation of the Station protected area or site shall be considered upon occurrence of one or more of the following abnormal conditions:

a. Safety hazards such as high radiation, toxic gases, flammable gases, and/or fire affecting widespread areas within the protected area.

b. Environ:nental conditions such as a flood, hurricane or other phenomena threaten the safety of Station personnel and there is adequate time for a safe and orderly evacuation.

c. A security event significantly threatens the safety of Station personnel and/or the integrity of Station safety systems, (e.g., a bomb threat, discovery of a bomb, or an attack on the Station).

d. In some instances, circumstances may dictate evacuation of only a portion of the Station.

6. During an emergency, form ER 2.0D, NRC Event Notification Worksheet, requires only the approval signature of the STED or Emergency Operations Manager. -

4.0 PREREOUISITES

1. An Alert, Site Area Emergency or General Emergency has been declared in accordance with procedure ER 1.1, Classification of Emergencies, DE The Site Emergency Director has ordered the activation of the TSC to support response activities associated with the declaration of an Unusual Event.

2. All reporting TSC personnel should obtain appropriate dosimetry frcm the Thermoluminescent Dosimeter (TLD) rack located on the first floor of the Administration Building (Radiologically Controlled Area [RCA) access l hall). (Ref. 6.9)

3. Prior to declaring Recovery, the following plant conditions must exist:

a. Radiation levels of in-station areas are stable or are decreasing with time.

9

C

' i , :1Q ; >

C

, ER 3.1'-Paga 7 ,

Rev. 23 l

' f.4%

".; - 4.0 ' PREREOUISITES N'! . L- -b. 'As appropriate to the. emergency condition, the reactor and ,

associated systems are in a safe and stable condition as indicated'

.by:

(1). The: reactor is shut down and criticality-controls are in..effect a- ' (only if reactor shutdown ,was required by the emergency L.e condition).

(2) The core is being-adequately cooled.

(3) Control has been established over containment' pressure and temperature.

(4) An adequate heat transfer path to an ultimate heat sink has.

been established.

a (5) l Primary system pressure is under control' .

c. Any fire, flooding, earthquake or similar initiating events are either under control or have ceased.

s

d. Releases of radioactive material to the environment are either-under control or have ceased.

g e. .Specified corrective emergency actions have been completed'and the Station is in the appropriate operating mode, and notifications are complete.

5.0 ACTIONS g,

Telephone numbers for contacts referenced in the checklists are available in the Emery,ency Response Telephone Directory.

1. Refer to form ER 3.lA,= Technical Services Coordinator Checklist, for.

required actions for this position.

2. Refer to form ER 3.1B, Site Emergency Director Checklist, for required actions for this position. <

3. Refer to form ER 3.1C. Emergency Operations Manager Checklist, for required actions for this position.

4. Refer to form ER 3.1D, Health Physics Coor.linator Checklist', for~

required actions for this position.

5. Refer to form ER 3.1E, Chemistry Coordinator Checklist, for required actions for this position.

6. Refer to form ER 3.1F, I&C Coordinator Checklist, for required actions

%: for this position.

ER 3.1 Prgo 8 Rev. 23 5.0 ACTIONS

7. Refer to form ER 3.1G, Engineering Coordinator Checklist, for required j 4

actions for this position.

8. Refer to form ER 3.1H, Maintenance Coordinator Checklist, for required actions for this position.

9. Refer to form ER 3.11, Reactor Engineer Checklist, for required actions for this position.

10. Refer to form ER 3.1J, Computer Engineer Checklist, for required actions for this position.

6.0 REFERENCES

1. ER 1.1, Classification of Emergencies

2. ER 2.0, Emergency Notification Documentation Forms Procedure

3. ER 3.2, Operational Support Center Operations

4. ER 4.3, Radiation Protection During Emergency Conditions

5. ER 5.4, Protective Action Recommendations

6. ER 5.7, Offsite Dose Projection System

7. CSO925.10, Preparation for Post-Accident Sampling

8. tac Inspection Report No. 50-433/88-09-02

9. NRC Inspection Report No. 50-433/88-09 03

10. NRC Inspection Report No. 50 433/86 18-01

11. NRC Inspection Report No. 50-433/88-09 01

12. ER 3.3, Emergency Operations Facility Operations

13. NRC Inspection Report No. 50-433/87-08 04

14. SS Safety Evaluation Report, Sup 3, July 1985 l 15. NRC Inspection Report No. 50-443/93-07 l

l 16. ODI.32, Medical Emergency

)

17. Security Procedure CD1332.00, Security Response to a Declared Radiological Emergency 9

(m . .-

g g --

EPLANNE970096EN FIGURE 3 ER 3.1 Page 11- ,

Rev.~ 23 Vj TECHNICAL SUPPORT CENTER (TSC) STAFF i

SITE EMERGENCY DIRECTOR TSC I l

j l

!- - -NRC- - ~} ,

TECtedlCAL SERvlCES EMERGENCY OPERATIONS CHEMISTRY KALTH PHYSICS l REPS : COORDINATOR MANAGUI COORDINATOR C00RO!NATOR g g_-l_ _r j -

TSC i TSC i TSC i i TSC- i t 4 I

I Cp COMMUNICATOR OPERATIONS ! gg g TECHNICIAN l_ ADWISOR !

- q TSC 1 : TSC l [ {SC_l"~ T l ~i MAINTENANCE - COMPUTER REACTOR I& C ENGl9EERING COORDINATOR ENGINEER . ENGINEER COORDINATOR COORDINATOR TSC l t TSC i 1 ~TSC 1 TSC l t TSC t

's e

i l l

_l~ ~ l

- ~ ~ -

l yNSO NoTC EAR l YNSD TSC . TSC-OESIGH SAFETY SYSTEM DECHANICAL

-l ADVISOR l ENGINEER l ADVISOR -

'.l ENGINEER

. ELECTRICAL ENGINEER E ESC _E _T _1 TSC i i E ESC _ C _T -] TSC l- i TSC i i 0

NEy TSC TSC EPLAN\E978006.DCN

< PERSONDEL TITLE ' ' '

I I I LOCATION NUMBER

] ,

NOTE: DASHED LINES leelCATE OUTSIDE ORGANIZATION. . 3/10/95

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ - _ = _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . . . .- -

ER 3.1 Prgo 12 Rev. 23 FIGURE 4 RELEASE DEFINITIONS

1. A " release" for purposes of comoletine Form ER 2.0B, State Notification Fact Sheet, Block 5, is defined as follows:

Radioactive material is being released to the environment as indicated by radiation monitoring instrumentation or based upon SED judgement, and release of the material is directly attributable to the event.

2. A " release" for purposes of reouirinc'offsite dose assessment (i.e., an ODPS run) is defined as follows:

A. Wide Range Gas Monitor (WRCM) High Alarm (lCC225) ;

E !

B. Main Steam Line Monitor High Alarm with an Open ASDV or SRV on the affacted main steam line E

C. The results of effluent analysis or site boundary monitoring indicate dose rate 2: .06 mren/hr.

3. During an Alert, Site Area Emergency or General Emergency, a " release" for purposes of recuirine activation of the remote monitoring and decontamination Arga at Schiller Station is the same as number 2 above.

O j

I 1

TECHNICAL SERVICES COORDINATOR CHECKLIST INITIAL

[7 1. ACTIVATION N -)

CAUTION IF THE CONTROL ROOK HAS BEEN EVACUATED FOR OTHER THAN RADIOIDCICAL CONCERNS, ASSICN THE TSC PERSONNEL ASSDIBLED IN ROOM 245 TO ADMINISTRATION BUIIDING OFFICES AND DIRECT THEN TO ESTABLISH 1

WORKSTATIONS. ALL PERSONNEL SHOUID CONTINUE TO IMPLEMENT PROCEDURE ER 3.1. f 1

a. Obtain a briefing from the Short Term Emergency Director / {

Site Emergency Director in the Control Room. 4

b. Check in with the Control Room Communicator to confirm arrival. )

i

c. Report to the TSC. Sign in on TSC roster board,

d. Obtain the Technical Services Coordinator Emergency Response Position Manual from the emergency equipment cabinet. Remove green TSC position badge from the badge storage box and place I Protected Area badge over TSC position badge.

e. Direct the Health Physics Coordinator to verify that all personnel have obtained appropriate dosimetry prior'to reporting ]

to the TSC. I 1

f. In the event that more than the required number of individuals are available to fill a given position, determine which individual (s) shall= remain in the TSC to serve as the position holder (s). All excess personnel should be directed to the IPC Assembly Area (if activated), or to evacuate the site to their homes or Schiller Station.

g. Determine the status of the following activation actions:

(1) The Reactor Engineer has obtained a Critical Safety Function update from the MPCS.

(2) The Health Physics Coordinator has prepared for a dose assessment evaluation per Procedure ER 5.7, Offsite Dose Projection System.

(3) The I6C Coordinator has established 4-vay communications with the OSC, the Control Room, and the CAS.

(4) The Maintenance Coordinator has established accountability using Form ER 3.3M.

(5) The Engineering Coordinator has determined the operational j

status of the FINIS Computer System, the aperture card reader /

printer, the copy machine and the telecopier.

ER 3.1A Rev. 23 Page 1 of 7

TECHNICAL SERVICES COORDINATOR CHECKLIST !

(Continued)

(6) The TSC Support Engineers have updated the TSC status boards with the latest accident data available through the MPCS.

(7) The Site Emergency Director and/or Emergency. Operations Manager has provided a status update to TSC staff.

(8) All TSC communication channels have been checked for operability by staff members.

(9) The TSC has assumed responsibility for NRC notifications.

CAUTION IF THE SITE EMERCENCY DIRECTOR HAS NOT ARRIVED, THEN THE TECHNICAL SERVICES COORDINATOR SHOUIE CONFER WITH THE SHORT TERM EMERCENCY DIRECTOR CONCERNING IMPLEMENTATION OF THE

, FOLIDWING ACTION.

I f h. Review the status of Step 1.g actions with the Site Emergency Director and determine if the TSC should be declared operational,

i. Direct the notification of all emergency centers concerning the TSC activation status,

j. Ensure that a logkeeper is designated to maintain an Emergency Facility Log (Form ER 2.0E) for the Site Emergency Director,

k. Direct other logkeeping, status board keeping and clerical functions, as required. Direct the administrative staff to i verify date and time on TSC fax machines and to correct them I

if necessary.

i

1. If additional manpower is required, instruct the Maintenance Coordinator to fill out page 1 of Form ER 3.3M, Manpower Planning, and transmit to the Administrative Services Coordinator at the EOF only if the EOF is activated. (Ref. 6.11)

m. Ensure accountability of all TSC personnel on Form ER 3.3M, Manpower Planning,

n. Obtain accountability listing of Control Room personnel from the Emergency Operations Manager.

o. Determine, in conjunction with the Emergency Operations Manager, if any special access controls are required for the back stairwell Control Room entrance.

p. Ensure the Security Shift Supervisor receives a completed copy of Form ER 3.3M, Manpower Planning.

ER 3.1A Rev. 23 Page 2 of 7 i

TECHNICAL SERVICES COORDINATOR CHECKLIST .

(Continued)

INITIAL

( ,) q. If the emergency is declared during an outage, confer with the Outage Coordinator concerning the status of outage-ralated work and what j obs , if any, should be resumed to support event mitigation. Ensure that accountability is maintained for the Outage Coordinator.

EDIE

1. The OSC Coordinator shall dispatch a runner to route the completed Form ER 3.3M to all onsite emergency response facilities and deliver them to the Security Shift Supervisor and Assembly Area Coordinator as applicable.

2. For daytime responses, it will also be necessary to notify the Guard Island of TSC response personnel who will be dispatched from the .TSC to evacuate the Station for future assignment,

r. Initiate a log using Form ER 2.0E, and remind all TSC personnel to document their actions using Form ER 2.0E, speed memos, computer printouts, etc.

s. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled

()

copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. ACCIDENT ASSESSMENT

a. Monitor plant conditions and trends.

b. If a release is in progress or suspected, request the Maintenance Coordinator to direct the OSC to dispatch an onsite survey team.

1

c. In the event of a total or partial Main Plant Computer System (MPCS) failure, consider the following guidance as appropriate to the extent and nature of the failure:

(1) Designate an individual to report to the Control Room to manually obtain plant data and to pass the data to the TSC.

(2) Designate an individual to receive data in the TSC from the Control Room and to provide it to the EOF.

(3) Personnel assigned to either of the above roles should have a basic working knowledge of station operations, operating parameters, and the MPCS. Coordinate selection of these individuals with the Emergency Operations Manager (a licensed operator would be ideal) .

(4) Remind the assigned individuals to use Forms ER 2.0H through K to facilitate data transfer activities.

(,_

ER 3.1A Rev. 23 Page 3 of 7

Y TECHNICAL SERVICES COORDINATOR CHECKLIST l

(Continued)

(5) Contact the Technical Assistant and determine to whom at the EOF data should be transferred, and at what desired frequency (e.g. , as needed, an established callback schedule, continuous open line,.etc.). Set realistic expectations for data flow timeliness given current conditions and constraints.

(6) If Forms ER 2.0H through K are used, the originals of the completed sheets should first be provided to the individual (s) maintaining the operational and system status boards so that the data can be posted.

The sheets should then be used to provide information to the EOF.

(7) Brief the Site Emergency Director, Emergency Operations Manager, and the assigned individuals on the compensatory arrangements for data transfer, including realistic expectations for timeliness and other limitations. Request the Emergency Operations Manager to brief the control Room.

(8) Consider the need for headsets for individuals performing data transfer.

(9) If available, consider use of a telecepy machine to facilitate inter-facility communication of data.

(10) If the site PBX fails, designate a TSC " power fail" phone for transfer of data to the EOF. (TSC " power fail" phones are listed in the Emergency Response Telephone Directory).

3. CLASSIFICATION Provide input to the Site Emergency Director for reclassification per Procedure ER 1.1, Classification of Emergencies.

4 ACCIDENT MITICATION

a. Discuss potet.tial corrective actions / repairs with TSC personnel.

NOTE The need for or use of the Specialty Technical Assistants assigned to the OSC should be considered. l

b. If the emergency is declared during an outage, discuss potential corrective actions / repairs with the Outage Coordinator,

c. Obtain Site Emergency Director authorization for planned corrective actions / repairs, and notify the Maintenance Coordinator.

d. Ensure the Emergency operations Manager notifies the Control Room of planned OSC actions.

ER 3.1A Rev. 23 Page 4 of 7

TECHNICAL SERVICES COORDINATOR CHECKLIST (Continued) i v) 5. EMERCENCY REPAIR

a. Determine the location (s) of defective equipment and systems using Station drawings, general arrangement drawings, flow and system drawings,-direct observations, Maintenance Coordinator or OSC Coordinator input.

b. Evaluate for any other existing conditions, such as the proximity of fire, smoke or steam from direct or reported observations or panel indications.

c. Evaluate any radio communication difficulties that may be experienced in the field by repair teams and recommend communication alternatives to the Maintenance Coordinator.

d. If the emergency is declared during an outage, ensure that use of outa58 personnel for emergency repair efforts is coordinated between the Outage Coordinator and OSC Coordinator. Ensure that accountability is maintained for any outage worker personnel brought back into the Protected Area.

e. Following Site Emergency Director approval, direct the Maintenance Coordinator to provide instruction for repair actions to the OSC Coordinator.

6. SEARCH AND RESCUE

a. Upon notificatit of missing personnel, ensure the following is included in 7- s the log:

I

]

(1) Name of missing pecson(s),

(2) Name of person making call, and (3) Attempt to determine missing person's last location by contacting Security, or other center locations.

b. Ensure the OSC Coordinator is briefed on the above information.

c. Direct the OSC to dispatch a search and rescue team,

d. If the OSC Coordinator is not available, assign an individual to dispatch a search and rescue team, per Procedure ER 3.2, Operational Support Center Operations.

7. MEDICAL EMERGENCY Upon notification of an injured person (s), implement ODI.32.

8. MANPOWER / EQUIPMENT NEEDS

a. Assess the need for immediate additional manpower and equipment. Complete Form ER 3.3M, Manpower Planning, and transmit to the EOF.

ER 3.lA Rev. 23 Page 5 of 7

[, (+

TECHNICAL SERVICES COORDINATOR CILECKLIST (Continued)

b. Notify the Site Emergency Director of additional support required and requested. -

c. Technical support can be obtained through the following resources, if activated:

(1) Technical Support - Contact Yankee Nuclear Services Division (YNSD)

Engineering Support Center.

(2) Training Center Staff Support - Contact the Technical Assistant in the EOF.

(3) Vendor / Equipment Support and Station Staff Support - Contact the Administrative Services Coordinator in the EOF.

d. Develop, in accordance with other TSC members, and the Administrative Services Coordinator in the EOF, a shift schedule for 24-hour staffing using Form ER 3.3M, Manpower Plannin6

9. ENGINEERING SUPPORT CENTER INTERFACE NOTE Initial manpower levels may prohibit this interface. Notify the YNSD Engineering Support Center and establish a periodic update schedule.

a. Coordinate accident status information and proposed actions with the YNSD Engineering Support Center,

b. Ensure Security is notified of the YNSD site response, provide names, and request notification of their arrival at the Station.

c. Upon arrival of YNSD engineering persennel at the TSC:

(1) Brief them on status of emergency.

(2) Direct them to their assigned locations (see F1 6ure 1, Technical Support Center Operations Area Floor Plan (Typical)) and turn over

- communications interface with the Engineering Support Center to these staff members.

10. NRC INTERFACE

a. Brief incoming NRC personnel,

b. Direct them to assigned locations (see Figure 1) in the TSC Operations Area.

Show them the location of the NRC Emergency Area (see Figure 2, Relative Location of the Technical Support Center within the 75' Elevation Level of the Control Building).

c. Brief and discuss accident assessment and mitigation, reclassificatirn and overexposure authorization; obtain input, as appropriate.

ER 3.lA Rev. 23 Page 6 of 7

.n, l

l TECHNICAI, SERVICES COORDINATOR CHECKLIST i (Continued)

INITIAL

_y ;

' I

't i

n. E 11. OSC EVACUATION a, Consider using an area on the ~ 75-foot elevation of the Control Building as an alternate OSC. Depending on radiological conditions, other areas may be utilized, I

b. Have Health Physics survey che area to establish habitability.

c._ Determine in concert with the Site Emergency Director, OSC Coordinator and Emergency Operations Manager which OSC personnel will report to the relocated OSC and which, if any, will be evacuated to the EOF.

d. Notify the Administrative Services Coordinator of any personnel that will be evacuated to the EOF,

12. TSC EVACUATION

a. Obtain radiological input from the Health Physics Coordinator.

b. Consider using an area on the second floor of the Administration Building as an alternate TSC. If radiological conditions preclude this, direct TSC personnel to report to the EOF.

c. Brief personnel as to the safest egress route.

() d. Ensure all TSC personnel report to the relocated TSC.

13. REENTRY AND RECOVERY Provide the Site Emergency Director with information concerning plant conditions and trends necessary for declaration of recovery.

14. DEACTIVATION

a. Collect all TSC documentation.

b. Direct TSC personnel to clear call forwarding on phones.

c. Submit _all emergency documentation to the Administrative i Services Coordinator located in the EOF.

d. Restore the facility to its original state of readiness.

l l

, i l

1 O\

I ER 3.lA Rev. 23 Page 7 of 7 1

l j

L _

b i' SITE EMERGENCY DIRECTOR CHECKLIST INITIAL

1. ACTIVATION

-~s 3

I l- Obtain a briefing from the Short Term Emergency Director a.

in the Control Room.

(1) Determine the status of Primary Responder notifications (Form ER 2.0A).

(2) Determine the status of initial State notifications (Form ER 2.0B).

(3) Obtain a copy of the transmitted Form ER 2.08.

(4) Determine status of State Health Department callbacks.

~

(5) Determino completion status of Form ER 2.00, Follow-up Information Form. Obtain completed copy, if available.

(6) Determine status of NRC communications and completion of Form ER 2.0D, Event Notification Worksheet.

(7) Review classification and initial PAR status with the Short Term Emergency Director,

b. Check in with the Control Room Communicator to confirm arrival,

c. Report to the TSC. Sign in on the roster board.

p-~

's- d. Obtain the Site Emergency Director Emergency Response Position Manual from the emergency equipment cabinet. Remove green TSC position badge from the badge storage box and place Protected Area badge over TSC position badge,

e. Brief the TSC staff on plant status.

ERTI In the event that the emergency is declared during an outage, remind key TSC managers that non-NAESCo project managers, field work supervisors and vendor technical representatives will assemble in the OSB second floor cafeteria,

f. Obtain TSC activation status report from the Technical Services Coordinator.

g. When sufficient personnel are available, assume the following responsibilities from the Short Term Emergency Director:

(1) Reclassification.

(2) Protective Action Recommendation (PARS).

,a ER 3.lB Rev. 23 Page 1 cf 7 l

+

SITE EMERCENCY DIRECTOR CHECKLIST (Continued)

(3) Notifications (i.e., offsite authorities and the NRC).

(4) Site evacuation authorization.

f (5) Emergency exposure authorization.

t (6) Command / control of onsite response.

l h. When all functions have been assumed, announce that the TSC

is activated. During this announcement, remind personnel to use l and maintain proper log sheets, forms, etc.

i. Ensure the Control Room, OSC, and the EOF, when activated, are notified of TSC activation,

j. Respond to any State Health Department callbacks on the Communicator *s phone. Use a completed Form ER 2.00, Follow-up Information Form, if available.

EQTE Until relieved by the EOF, you are responsible for completing a new l Form ER 2.0C approximately every 60 minutes. Ensure that the i Health Physics Coordinator provides the necessary radiological input.

k. For those instances when the EOF in not activated and the Emergency News Manager requires approval for a news release, -j review the text and grant the approval if the release is I technically accurate.

1. Contact the EOF, when activated, and perform the following actions:

(1) Transfer responsibility for State notifications.

(2) Transfer responsibility for PARS.

(3) Transfer responsibility for approval of news releases.

(4) Telefax completed forms ER 2.0B and ER 2.0C to the EOF Coordinator.

m. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

ER 3.1B Rev. 23 Page 2 of 7

4 i

h ( ,

i

~

q; SITE EMERGENCY DIRECTOR CHECKLIST -

< (Continued)

INITIAL

['N -1

%^J '

2. ACCIDENT ASSESSMENT

a. Obtain regular updates from the Emergency Operations Manager and. Technical

-Services Coordinator, b .- Conduct regular briefings for the TSC staff. Periodically review task and job priorities, including those assigned to the OSC.

c. Provide regular updates to-the Response Manager in the EOF.

d. Provide periodic updates on emergency response actions to the Security Shift Supervisor.

- 3. CLASSIFICATION

a. Direct the individual (s) maintaining' the wall-mounted Emergency Classification Flow Chart status board to circle any and all applicable Initiating Conditions, not just those corresponding to the highest classification. A circle may be erased when that Initiating Condition is no longer applicable.

b. Review recommendations for reclassification.

c. Reclassify as appropriate in accordance with Procedure ER 1.1, Classification of Emergencies.

p

d. Upon reclassification, direct the Control Room to make appropriate site page announcements.

e. Inform the Response Manager of the reclassification.

f. If the EOF is not activated, prepare and authorize a new Form ER 2.0B, and transmit the information to' State authorities.

CAUTION NOTIFICATIONS SHALL BE INITIATED WITHIN 15 MINUIES UPON RECIASSIFICATION OF THE EVENT O.R FORMUIATION OF A NEW PAR. THE 15 MINUTE NOTIFICATION OF RECIASSIFICATION MUST BE MADE WHETHER OR MZI THERE ARE ANY FROTECTIVE ACTION RECOMMENDATIONS.

g. Notify Guard Island of any change in the emergency classification level.

h. When the risk posed by the emergency is clearly decreasing or has ceased, and de-escalation'or closeout of the emergency is appropriate, review section 11, Emergency Termination and Recovery, of this checklist.

I

' ER 3.lB Rev. 23 Page 3 of 7

I SITE EMERGENCY DIRECTOR CHECKLIST (Continued)

4. PROTECTIVE ACTION RECOMMENDATIONS

a. As appropriate to changes in station conditions or radiological release rates, request the Health Physics Coordinator to immediately reassess Protective Action Recommendations. Prepare a new Form ER 2.0B any time a new PAR is warranted.

b. Authorize the PAR by signing Form ER 2.0B.

c. Notify the States via the Nuclear Alert System (NAS),

if available.

NOTE Notifications to the States of changes to Protective Action Recommendations must be made within 15 minutes of the PAR decision.

5. ACCIDENT MITIGATION Review and authorize planned corrective actions / repairs.

6. EMERGENCY EXPOSURE

- G

Figure 4 of ER 4.3 will be issued by the RCC for signature. Verbal concurrence is acceptable.

l 1

Authorize exposures in excess of 10 CFR 20 limits, using ER 4.3, Figure 4, Emergency Dose Limit Extension.

7. EVACUATION

a. Determine if a partial or complete site evacuation is required based on the precautions listed in $3.0 of this procedure,

b. When radiation is the major threat, evacuation should be ordered only after l

it has been determined that it is the protective action that will result in the lowest probable personnel exposure.

l l

c. Confer with the Health Physics Coordinator or on-shift Health Physics Technician to determine whether personnel evacuating from in-station locations must modify their evacuation route to avoid in-station hazards.

d. Confer with the EOF Coordinator or HP Coordinator to determine whether evacuating personnel are to be sent to the Remote Monitoring Area or home and the most appropriate egress route (North Access Road or South Access Road).

ER 3.1B Rev. 23 Page 4 of 7 l

y, -

g--

SITE IDERGENCY DIRECTOR CHECKLIST

.(Continued) s

)%

i'~ > )- e, .If possible, one access ~ road sho'uld be left open for emergency responders'

, access.

-f. Contact the Security Shift Supervisor and do the following:

(1) Provide information on appropriate evacuation e'gress routes. ,

(2) . Direct implementation of accountability / evacuation actions in accordance with~ Procedure GD1332.00, Security Response to a Declared-Radiological Emergency.

(3)' Direct notification of . local police support, as necessary, to assist in directing traffic leaving the site,

g. Brief the Response Manager'regarding evacuation proceedings.

h. If the TSC must be evacuated, ensure emergency documentation 1 is removed to the alternate TSC. TSC evacuation plans should be discussed with the Technical Services Coordinator.

8. MANPOWER / EQUIPMENT NEEDS

a. The TSC should be staffed in accordance with Figure 3, Technical Support Center (TSC) staff, I

b. Review procedure NM 11800, Hazardous Condition Response Plan,

> to identify additional logistical and recovery considerations j that may be useful in responding to the emergency. Brief the j Response Manager on any recommendations.

c. Authorize the TSC to obtain additional equipment or manpower as needed.

9. PLANNED RELEASES

a. Determine where planned releases will exceed Technical Specification Allowable Limits. l 1

i

b. If the planned release will exceed Technical Specification Allowable Limits, j then determine the need for a planned release of radioactive material based '

on:

(1) Mitigation of Station emergency conditions (2) Protection of Station personnel (reduce onsite exposures)

(3) Favorable meteorological conditions which will minimize offsite i exposure

c. Complete Section 1 of Form ER 3 lM, Planned Radiological Release Data, and transmit to the EOF Coordinator.

O U ER 3.1B Rev. 23 Page 5 of 7 l

._ ___-__ _ _ __ _ ___ ____ _ - ______ _ _ _ ___ _ _ __ _ n

SITE EMERCENCY DIRECTOR CIECKLIST (Continued)

d. Upon being notified that the proposed release conditions and period have h been approved by the Response Manager, initiate actions to commence release arrangements.

e. Inform the Response Manager when the release has been terminated.

10. OFFSITE PUBLIC NOTIFICATION PROCESS NOTE The Response Manager may be requested by State response personnel to initiate the proposed action. Verify all requests prior to implementing the following action.

Direct the Control Room to implement the appropriate Figure in Procedure ER 1.2, if the State of New Hampshire requests the Station to activate the Public Alert and Notification System. Notify the EOF of the request and status of actions.

11. EMERGENCY TERMINATION AND RECOVERY Uhen the risk posed by the emergency is clearly decreasing or has ceased, de-escalation or closecut of the emergency is appropriate. A combination approach is used and summarized in the table below.

Classification Event Event Downgrading Closeout via Closeout via Allowed? Termination? Recovery?

Unusual Event N/A Yes No Alert Yes Yes No Site Area Emergency Yes Yes No with no long-term station damage Site Area Emergency Yes No Yes; may with long-term station occur after damage downgrading General Emergency Yes No Yes; may occur after downgrading

a. As Station conditions improve, determine the appropriate emergency classification in accordance with procedure ER 1.1, Classification of Emergencies,

b. Prior to de-escalating or terminating the emergency, assemble status information on Station operational and radiological conditions and brief the Response Manager.

c. Confer with the Response Manager to determine whether actual /

potential conditions warrant entry into a recovery mode.

ER 3.1B Rev. 23

[

Page 6 of 7

l SITE EMERCENCY DIRECTOR CHECKLIST ;

(Continued) l rN INITIAL l l \

'~') d. If recovery is appropriate, confer with the TSC staff and ,

determine whether any radiological and/or operational conditions I exist which would preclude entry into a recovery mode.

1LO1E Conditions required for declaring recovery are listed in $4.0, Prerequisites,

e. Direct development of an onsite recovery organization and shift schedule taking into account incident specifics.

Consider outside support organizations such as (1) UE&C (2) Westinghouse (3) Yankee Atomic Electric Company (4) Resources coordinated through INPO (5) Northeast Utilities

f. Direct key onsite recovery organization members to prepare written prioritized work plans required to (1) maintain long-term Station stability (2) confirm the status of systems and equipment (3) confirm radiation and contamination conditions (4) repair damaged systems and equipment

()/

(m, (5) remove contamination (6) maintain doses to recovery personnel ALARA (7) minimize industrial hazards to recovery personnel (8) facilitate reentry into all Station areas

g. Review procedure NM 11800, Hazardous Condition Response Plan, in the North Atlantic Management Manual (NAMM), to identify additional recovery considerations,

h. Review proposed recovery organization and recovery plans with the Response Manager.

i. Brief key ERO managers on the recovery organization, action plans, and date and time for entry into recovery mode,

j. When the Response Manager declares recovery, brief the TSC staff, the Shift Superintendent and the OSC Coordinator.

12. DEACTIVATION Ensure all emergency documentation is submitted to the Technical Services Coordinator who, in turn, should organize it and send it to the Administrative Services Coordinator.

("%

N--) ER 3.lB Rev. 23 Page 7 of 7 I

1 1

l ENERCENCY OPERATIONS MANAGER CHECKLIST INITIAL

1. ACTIVATION

- f]n V a. Obtain a briefing from the Short Term Emergency Director /

' Site Emergency Director in the Control Room.

'b. Check in with the Control Room Communicator to confirm arrival.

I i c. Review Control Room log entries, f

I d. Determine Control-Room or5anization status,

e. Direct the Control Room Communicator to report to the TSC.

f. Report to the TSC. Sign in on TSC roster board.

I

i. g. Obtain the Emergency Operations Manager Emergency Response Position Manual from the emergency equipment cabinet. Remove l green TSC position badge from the badge storage box and place l Protected Area badge over TSC position badge.

h. Direct activities of the Communicator in conjunction with the offsite notification process.

1. Assume responsibility for NRC notifications.

CAUTION l 0 1 V IF THE I&C COORDINATOR HAS NOT ESTABLISHED COMMUNICATION WITH THE CONTROL ROOM VIA THE 4-WAY LINK, ENSURE THAT TSC DECISIONS ARE DOCUMENTED AND DISTRIBUTED TO THE SHIFT SUPERINTENDENT, NO ACTION SHALL BE IMPLEMENTED WITHOUT SITE EMERGENCY DIRECTOR APPROVAL.

j. Maintain a log using Form ER 2.0E, Emergency Facility Log.

k. Ensure that all Control Room personnel are accounted for using j Form ER 3.3M, Manpower Planning, and provide results to the l Technical Services Coordinator j J

1. If the Control Room has not already activated the Emergency Response Data System (ERDS), request the Reactor Engineer to activate the ERDS link,

m. Communicate as required with the Shift Superintendent and provide technical accident assessment and operational guidance, i

n. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current ]

revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those i of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled '!

7 copies of procedures in your position packet.

i l

O ER 3.lc Rev. 23 )

Page 1 of 3 1

l

_ _ _ - _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .__ _ _ ______..___a

EMERGENCY OPERATIONS MANAGER CHECKLIST (Continued)

2. ACCIDENT ASSESSMENT

a. Obtain required input from cognizant individuals in the TSC. O

b. Obtain Operations input from the Shift Superintendent.

c. Analyze and coordinate operational data.

d. Provide accident assessment data to the Site Emergency Director,

e. Ensure that operational status boards are maintained.

3. CIASSIFICATION Provide the Site Emergency Director input for reclassification per Procedure ER 1.1, Classification of Emergencies.

4. NOTIFICATIONS

a. During initial contact with the NRC, verify with the NRC official that ERDS data is being satisfactorily received by the NRC. If not, request the Reactor Engineer to reconnect the ERDS link.

b. As station conditions change or as events warrant, complete a new Form ER 2.0D, Event Notification Worksheet. If needed, see ER 2.0, Figure 1 for instructions.

- 0 If ERDS is activated, it may not be necessary to provide all operational or radiological data requested by Form ER 2.0D. Check with the NRC Communicator to determine what information is needed from ER 2.0D and what information is being satisfactorily provided by ERDS.

c. Transmit the information to the NRC. Use the FIS-2000 handset phone if available.

d. Ensure that the NRC line is manned as requested by the NRC. The Communicator or the Operations Technician may be used for this purpose,

e. In the event that the Communicator is unabic to provide information to the NRC in a satisfactory manner, direct the operations Technician to man the NRC line,

f. Transmit copies of any documentation used for NRC updates (usually Form ER 2.0D) to the Licensing Coordinator located at the EOF.

g. Request the Health Physics Coordinator to provide you any Health Physics Network information transferred to the EOF.

ER 3.lC Rev. 23 Page 2 of 3

EMERGENGY OPERATIONS. MANAGER CHECKLIST (Continued)

.;,5 INITIAL I

.x_j- 5. .. ACCIDENT. MITIGATION

[" a. Provide operational guidance to the TSC and Control Room for accident mitigation.

b. Define emergency operatin5 Procedures for. temporary modifications.

1: . Ensure that appropriate emergency procedures related to system operation are determined.

d. Ensure that vital plant parameters needed.to analyze the accident are documented.

e. Coordinate the development of simulated operational sequences with the Technical Assistant in the EOF, if applicable,

f. Ensure that major plant evolutions or nonproceduralized corrective actions to be taken by operations staff are not implemented prior to radiological review and Site. Emergency Director approval.

6. MANPOWER / EQUIPMENT NEEDS

a. Assess the need for additional Control Room manpower'and equipment.

b. Request additional support through the Technical Services

-Coordinator.

~~s

\ c. In the event of a loss of offsite power, direct the Control Room to dispatch a Nuclear Systems Operator to start and load the telephone system diesel generator next to the operations , ,

Support Building.

7. REENTRY AND RECOVERY Provide the Site Emergency Director plant parameters necessary for declaration of Recovery.

8. DEACTIVATION

a. In conjunction with the NRC, determine when ERDS can be deactivated,

b. When appropriate, direct the Reactor Engineer to deactivate ERDS.

c. Submit all emergency documentation to the Technical Services Coordinator who, in turn, should organize it and send it to the Administrative Services Coordinator.

O ER 3.lc Rev. 23 Page 3 of 3

HEALTH PHYSICS COORDINATOR CHECKLIST INITIAL

'~1 1. ACTIVATION i )

a. Sign in on TSC roster board.

b. Check in with the Control Room Communicator to confirm arrival.

c. Obtain the Health Physics Coordinator Emergency Response Position Manual from the emergency equipment cabinet. Remove green TSC position badge from the badge storage box and place Protected Area badge over TSC position badge,

d. Issue appropriate dosimetry to personnel at the outset. When time allows, after completion of other priority tasks, ensure appropriate information is recorded on ER 4.3, Figure 5, Emergency Exposure Tracking.

e. Confirm that Control Room personnel have proper dosimetry.

Issue appropriate dosimetry to Control Room personnel if necessary.

f. Obtain a briefing from the Technical Services Coordinator,

g. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

/ 2. ACCIDENT ASSESSMENT U Until EOF activation, assume responsibility for dose assessment using the a.

Offsite Dose Projection System. Refer to Procedure ER 5.7 of the SSER as needed. Once the EOF is activated, transfer this responsibility.

b. If a release condition is in progress, immediately request the Reactor Engineer to provide an update from the Dose Assessment Status Screen on the MPCS or call up the Dose Assessment Status Screen. The instructions provided in Procedure ER 5.7 may be used if needed.

c. If a release is not in progress, obtain an update of the Station meteorological conditions from the MPCS when available.

d. Evaluate onsite and in-plant radiological conditions from Station survey information and Radiation Data Monitoring System (RDMS). Utilize this data to review planned OSC missions from an exposure standpoint.

e. Trend appropriate plant radiological conditions on the radiologir.al status boards. If required, request additional TSC Administrative Support Engineers to support this activity,

(-)'

ER 3.1D Rev. 23 Page 1 of 5

I IIEALTH PHYSICS COORDINATOR CHECKLIST (Continued)

f. Establish periodic contact with the Radiological Controls Coordinator to discuss onsite and in-plant radiological conditions.

3. RADIATION RELEASE PRECAUTIONS

a. Confer with the Emergency Operations Manager to determine the ventilation paths that should be isolated if a release occurs. (Ref. 6.15)

b. Discusi k3:h the Technical Services Coordinator the need for implementing contaminc _on controls if a release occurs. (Ref. 6.15)

c. If a re' lease occurs, determine the venttlation systems that have been isolated. (Ref. 6.15)

d. Consider establishment of access control points for entry into the Administration Building and Control Building and coordinate implementation of contamination control measures with the Radiological Controls Coordinator. (Ref 6.15)

e. Before personnel are released from the Assembly Area, consider and recommend to the EOF Coordinator appropriate contamination control measures to prevent spread of contamination offsite. Appropriate measures may include alternative transportation arrangements to the Remote Monitoring Area.

(Ref 6.15)

M If the emergency is declared during an outage, the above considerations should also be made for outage personnel assembled in the OSB second floor cafeteria.

4. PROTECTIVE ACTION RECOMMENDATIONS

a. Assume responsibility for the Plume Exposure Protective Action Recommendation (PAR) process.

b. Complete Form ER 5.4A, Plume Exposure Protective Action Recommendation (PAR)

Worksheet.

c. Complete Form ER 2.0B, State Notification Fact Sheet, with the FAR results,

d. Review the results with the Site Emergency Director (SED) and obtain his authorization.

E Notifications to the States of changes to Protective Action Recommendations must be made within 15 minutes of the PAR decision.

e. Continue to review conditions and update PARS until the EOF has been activated. Once the EOF is activated, transfer this responsibility to the EOF Coordinator.

f. Transmit all forms and worksheets to the EOF Coordinator.

ER 3.lD Rev. 23 Page 2 of 5 i

l

1 l

t HEALTH PHYSICS COORDINATOR CHECKLIST (Continued)

~s 5. HABITABILITY

' _- )

x a. Direct or perform periodic checks of TSC/CR habitability,

b. Establish, as necessary, a frisking Station /stepoff point at the entrances to the Control Room, i.e., the main entrance and the stairwell entrance.

(Ref. 6.9)

c. Determine the need for evacuation of the TSC in accordance with Procedure ER 4.3, Radiation Protection During Emergency Conditions.

6. NOTIFICATIONS NOTE If the NRC initiates contact via the Health Physics Network (HPN), direct them to contact the Health and Safety Coordinator at the EOF.

a. Provide radiological information as requested for completion of Form ER 2.0C, Follow-up Information Form,

b. Following EOF activation, contact the Health and Safety Coordinator to determine if the NRC-has requested establishment of the HPN line.

c. Provide the necessary onsite radiological data required to support the HPN communications link to the Health and Safety Coordinator.

NOTE

[\_ /T HPN Event Notification Worksheet for recording radiological data is located on Form ER 2.0G. Depending upon the volume of information, you may either provide this information over the telephone to the Health and Safety Coordinator or telecopy the forms to him,

d. Provide copies of HFN information to the Emergency Operations Manager.

H2IE J Notify the Technical Services Coordinator if the HPN data transmission function requires a higher level of support than current conditions allow.

1

7. ACCIDENT MITIGATION Provide the Technical Services Coordinator and Maintenance Coordinator with radiological data for repair and corrective action decision making. l l

8. MEDICAL EMERGENCY l

If a medical emergency occurs that involves actual or potential contamination of the i victim, refer to ODI.32,

9. STATION EVACUATION

a. Provide the Site Emergency Director with recommended evacuation routes.

b. At the Alert, Site Area Emergency or General Emergency, consider the l following guidance when a release is in progress (as defined in Figure 4).

(V ER 3.lD Rev. 23 Page 3 of 5

HEALTH PHYSICS C00EDINATOR CHECKLIST (Centinued)

NO IS THERE A WRCM HIGH NO IS THERE A MAIN STEAM LINE AIARM (1CC225)7 MONITOR HIGH AIARM VITH AN

' OPEN ASDV OR SRV ON THE YES F AFFECTED LINE7 1F IS THE UPPER WIND NO - YES DIRECTION BETWEEN 80 AND 180 DEGREES 7 y YES YES IS THE IDWER WIND DIRECTION qr '

BETUEEN 80 AND 180 DEGREES 7 SEND PERSONNEL TO NO SCHILLER STATION p FOR MON /DECON y SEND PERSONNEL HOME M

c. If the Remote Monitoring Area is to be used for monitoring, direct the Radiological Control Coordinator to dispatch assigned OSC personnel as needed for monitoring.

10. MANPOWER / EQUIPMENT NEEDS

a. Assess the need for additional manpower and equipment.

b. Direct the activities of the YNSD Radiological Engineer upon his arrival at the TSC.

c. Request additional support from the Technical Services Coordinator.

11. EMERCENCY EXPOSURE AUTHORIZATION Coordinate Site Emergency Director approval for exposures that may exceed 10 CFR 20 limits. Complete ER 4.3, Figure 4, Emergency Dose Limit Extension, and obtain the Site Emergency Director's signature. Verbal authorization from the Site Emergency Director is acceptable provided ER 4.3, Figure 4, is completed and signed at a later time.

12. RELEASE OF ASSEMBLY AREA PERSONNEL

a. Provide the Site Emergency Director with recommended evacuation routes.

. b. At the Alert, Site Area Emergency or Ceneral Emergency, consider the l following guidance when a release is in progress (as defined in Figure 4).

I l

ER 3.1D Rev. 23 Page 4 of 5

HEALTH PHYSICS COORDINATOR Clerf.TST.

F (Continued)

,-Q cI NO

. \_, j :-

IS THERE A WRCM HIGH No g IS THERE A MAIN STEAM LINE A1 ARM (ICC225)? r MONITOR HIGH ALARM WITH AN.

OPEN ASDV OR SRV ON.THE YES AFTECTED LINE?

1F L

IS THE UPPER WIND NO YES DIRECTION BETWEEN 80 AND 180 DEGREES? 1r YES YES IS THE IDWER WIND DIRECTION qr y BETWEEN 80 AND 180 DEGREES?

SEND PERSONNEL TO NO SCHILLER STATION &

FOR MON /DECON qr SEND PERSONNEL HOME M INITIAL

c. If the Remote Monitoring Area is to be used for monitoring, direct the Radiological Control Coordinator to dispatch assigned OSC personnel as needed for monitoring.

p 13. REENTRY AND RECOVERY Provide the Site Emergency Director any radiological data necessary for declaration of Recovery.

14. DEACTIVATION Submit all emergency documentation to the Technical Services Coordinator.

1 I

l 1

0 ER 3.1D Rev. 23 Page 5 of 5 I

i.

- 4 ~.

~

CHEMISTRY COORDINATOR. CHECKLIST

' INITIAL

N^ 'l .' ACTIVATION.

i \-

'~' i a'. Report to the TSC. Sign in the TSC roster board. ;

1

b. Obtain the Chemistry Coordinator Emergency Response Position Manual from the emergency equipment cabinet. Remove-green TSC positicn badge from the badge storage box and place Protected Area badge over TSC position badge.

c. 'Obtain a briefing from the Technical Services Coordinator.

d. Contact Chemistry Hot Lab personnel or the PASS Coordinator in the OSC to determine the lab's operational status and whether power to the Count Room has been lost or interrupted.

(The WRGM and Hi Range pump may be out of service.)

e. Verify that forms obtained from the foran file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. ACCIDENT ASSESSMENT

a. Determine what post accident samples are required to support future accident analysis.

b. Review operability of PASS equipment per form ER 3.1N.

(/

(,,

T e Identify if any contingency actions for accident assessment-are being taken by circling on the form. Notify the Technical l

Services Coordinator and the Site Emergency Director (SED). _

c. As needed direct the PASS Coordinator to prepare'the chemistry lab for PASS samples per appropriate Chemistry Department procedures.

d. Determine if any previous analysis had been completed prior to the accident condition as a means of establishing a baseline for future findings,

e. Determine appropriate times and conditions to obtain PASS and plant vent samples. Brief the PASS Coordinator.

f. Provide status of sampling and analysis activities to the Technical Services Coordinator,

g. When available, obtain chemistry / PASS data and sample results from the PASS Coordinator, j

h. Review release data and approve release permits as necessary.

a

. ("

\ ER 3.1E l Rev. 23 Page 1 of 3 i

CHFX2STRY COORDINATOR CHECKLIST (Continued)

1. Assist the Health Physics Coordinator with dose assessment activities J. Perform the following steps when accident conditions have stabilized enough to make the assessment of core damage meaningful.

(1) Obtain as much of the information listed on Form ER 3.lL, Core Damage Assessment Information Worksheet as possible for an individual sample and request the YNSD Engineering Support Center staff to evaluate the level of fuel damage associated with the accident. Some information on Form ER 3.1L may be provided by the Reactor Engineer.

(2) Provide results of fuel damage assessment to the Site Emergency Director, Technical Services Coordinator, Reactor Engineer and EOF Coordinator.

(3) If WRCM is out of service and compensatory actions are being taken for continuous high level noble gas monitoring, determine the frequency of obtaining readings in TSC to support dose assessment activities.

(4) Post-accident chloride analysis on RCS has been performed within 96 hours0.00111 days 0.0267 hours 1.587302e-4 weeks 3.6528e-5 months of the first RCS post-accident sample (Ref 6.14).

3. NOTIFICATIONS Provide chemistry data to the Emergency Operations Manager for completion of the NRC Notification forms.

4, ACCIDENT MITICATION Provide the Technical Services Coordinator and the Maintenance Coordinator chemistry input for corrective action decision making.

5. MANPOWER / EQUIPMENT NEEDS

a. Assess the need for additional manpower and equipment.

b. Request additional support from the Technical Services Coordinator.

6. PLANNED RELEASF,S

a. Assess the need for planned releases and determine whether or not normal release permits are adequate,

b. Review release data and approve release permit as required.

ER 3 lE Rev. 23 Page 2 of 3

4 . -

S s CHEMISTRY COORDINATOR'CIMCKLIST-4

!(Continued)

, Q"N.. :-INITIAL U *

[7, REENTRY AND RECOVERY J

Provide the Site Emergency -Director chemistry data necessary for declaration of Recovery.

's

8. '. DEACTIVATION a..' Submit all emergency' documentation to the: Technical Services Coordinator.

b. Direct the PASS Coordinator and Chemistry Technicians to submit their documentation to the OSC Coordinator.

O .

l

"\ ER 3.1E Rev. 23 Page'3 of 3

I&C COORDINATOR CHECKLIST h

INITIAL

1. ' ACTIVATION

a. Report to the TSC. Sign in on TSC roster board.

l l b. Obtain the I&C Coordinator Emergency Response l Position Manual from the emergency equipment cabinet.

Remove green TSC position badge from the badge storage box and place Protected Area badge over TSC position badge,

c. Obtain a briefing from the Technical Services Coordinator.

I d. Obtain headset for phone; and, establish a 4-way conference call with the OSC Communicator, the Supervisory Control Room-Operator in the Control Room, and the Security Shift Supervisor (or designee) in the Central Alarm Station.

! (1) Provide an overview of accident status to the OSC and determine the manpower available for team deployment.

HOIS Unless there is a desire to know the availability of a key individual (s), refrain from asking for names of personnel at the OSC. This information will become available when a copy of the OSC accountability sheet is delivered to the l TSC.

(2) Document the manpower status report on Form ER 3.lK, OSC Staff Tracking.

l l

O e. Transfer this status report to the OSC Team Tracking Board using the color coded magnets.

f. Interface with the Maintenance Coordinator to determine the priority of OSC job tasks. Transfer this report status to the OSC, when available.

g. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. ACCIDENT ASSESSMENT Assess I&C problems associated with the emergency condition.

3. NOTIFICATIONS

a. Notify the appropriate TSC personnel of particular OSC requests (e.g.,

exposure authorization, etc.).

b. Update the Maintenance Coordinator of the status of all OSC team activities.

4. ACCIDENT MITICATION

a. Provide the Technical Services Coordinator and Maintenance Coordinator with I&C input for repair and corrective actions.

O ER 3.lF ps 23

=

I&C COORDINATOR CHECKLIST (Continued)

b. When directed by the Haintenance Coordinator, relay requests for in plant actions to the OSC using the 4 way data link. This ensures that the Control Room and Security are aware of any in-plant actions.

c. Provide periodic plant status updates to the OSC Communicator; this should be' done every 30 minutes or as conditions warrant.

d. Ensure that changes in task / job priorities are immediately relayed to the OSC.

5. MANPOWER / EQUIPMENT NEEDS

a. Identify the need for additional OSC manpower and equipment.

b. Request additional support from the Technical Services Coordinator.

6. DEACTIVATION Submit all emergency documentation to the Technical Services Coordinator.

O ER 3,1p Rev. 23 E*8* 2 of 2 i

f

+

I ENGINEERING COORDINATOR CHECKLIST..

INITIAL cg _

1. : ACTIVATION

[y

, ( ,) : a. Report to the TSC. Sign in on TSC roster board.

L b. Obtain the Engineering Coordinator Emergency. Response

. Position Manual from the' emergency equipment cabinet. Remove green TSC position badge from the badge storage box and place Protected Area badge over TSC position badge.

! c. Obtain a briefing from the Technical Services Coordinator. .i (1) Determine the nature of the accident and define the systems involved.

EQIE l The TSC support staff assigned to the DCC are under your !

I direction. If references are missing and can be obtained from the master DCC then discuss dispatch of the staff !

member with the Technical Services Coordinator.

(2) Interface with appropriate TSC support staff to determine if the TSC Document Control Center maintains the appropriate references.

(3) Interface with appropriate TSC support staff to obtain prints of aperture card files and/or copies of manual references, k-m (4) Report any maintenance problems with DCC equipment.

(5) Request the Computer Engineer to monitor particular I operational parameters required to support accident .f analyses. Provide input to the TSC support staff. j i

d. Determine a workstation location for the Design Engineer,

e. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled l

copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. ACCIDENT ASSESSMENT

a. Coordinate TSC support staff efforts to evaluate and trend vital plant parameters.

b. Manage the activities of the YNSD Systems Engineer who responds to the TSC.

3. ACCIDENT MITIGATION s- Coordinate engineering staff efforts to determine in-plant repair and corrective actions. Specific questions or concerns dealing with component or system design should be directed to the Design Engineer.

( ER 3.1G Rev. 23 Page 1 of 2 t... .. .. .. .. ..

- _ . . . _ . . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____ _____ _ _ _ _ _ _ ]

n . - _ . -

ENGINEERING COORDINATOR CHECKLIST (Continued)

INITIAL

4. HANF0WER/ EQUIPMENT NEEDS G, ,

I

a. Assess the need for additional manpower and equipment,

b. Request additional support from the Technical Services coordinator.

5. REENTRY AND RECOVERY Provide engineering requirements necessary for the Recovery Organization.

6. DEACTIVATION Submit all emergency documentation to the Technical Services Coordinator.

O 1

ER 3.1G Rev. 23 Page 2 of 2

MAINTENANCE COORDINATOR CHECKLIST I

INITIAL

1. ACTIVATION i l

"- a. Report to the TSC. Sign in on TSC roster board,

b. Obtain the Maintenance Coordinator Emergency Response Position Manual from the emergency equipment cabinet. . Remove j green TSC position' badge from the badge storage box and place l Protected Area badge over TSC position badge, 4

NOTE Daytime response may require initial assignment based on the l actual response time to the TSC. As additional personnel respond j for a particular position, each position should decide who should

l l be the initial responder and who are backup responders. !t

c. Maintain a log using Form ER 2.0E, Emergency Facility Log.

d. Assist the Technical Services Coordinator to coordinate immediate manpower planning efforts to support TSC activation. ,

i (1) If applicable, direct excess response staff to report to the Inprocessing Center assembly area until further notice.

(2) Provide the Technical Services Coordinator with the completed Form ER 3.3M, Manpower Planning.

-s l

( ) The OSC Coordinator shall dispatch a runner to route the I

\- completed Form ER 3.3M to all onsite emergency response f facilities and deliver them to the Security Shift Supervisor l and Assembly Area Coordinator as applicable, j l

(3) Assist the Technical Services Coordinator in evaluating !

any immediate staffing requirements for the Control Room, j TSC and OSC.

e. Obtain a briefing from the Technical Services Coordinator.

Determine the initial priority assignments required of the OSC staff.

f. Monitor assembly area activities as follows:

(1) Contact the Assembly Area Coordinator to ensure that the position is filled.

NOTE This position is normally filled by a backup Administrative Services i Coordinator or Maintenance Coordinator. l (2) If the position is not filled, assign an Assembly Area Coordinator. l n

'v) t ER 3.1H Rev. 23 !

Page 1 of 3

I MAINTENANCE COORDINATOR CHECKLIST (Continued)

INITIAL Additional personnel are available at the assembly area 9

(Inprocessing Center); however, the assembly area is only activated during normal working hours and will be terminated after all ERO facilities are staffed and the relief shif t has been established.

(3) Determine which, if any, current or anticipated unsite manpower needs might be provided for by personnel in the assembly area.

(4) Contact the Assembly Area Coordinator and request dispatch of desired personnel to appropriate onsite facilities.

(5) Periodically brief the Assembly Area Coordinator regarding classification and event status.

(6) Direct the Assembly Area Coordinator to contact the Administrative Services Coordinator prior to releasing the remaining personnel.

g. Ensure that the I6C Coordinator has established a 4-way data link with the OSC Communicator, the Supervisory Control Room Operator in the Control Room, and the Security Shift Supervisor (or designee) in the Central Alarm Station.

- G If an ACRO is available, assign the ACR0 to the 4-vay data link.

If an ACRO is not available, assign the Control Rocm Communicator when he/she reports to the TSC.

H. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. ACCIDENT ASSESSMENT Evaluate damage to plant systems and components.

3. ACCIDENT MITICATION Recommend repair and corrective actions to the Technical Services Coordinator and the Site Emergency Director.

4. EMERCENCY REPAIR

a. Direct the OSC Coordinator to initiate corrective actions / repairs. These requests should be made through the I&C Coordinator using the 3-way data link. This ensures that the control Room is aware of any in-plant actions.

ER 3.lH Rev. 23 Page 2 of 3

k" .g-F d NAINTENANCE COORDINATOR CHECKLIST (Continued)

INITIAL )

fW A l \

Ns -b. Provide instructions with specific' information for briefing repair teams

~

ci C

'through the Technical-Specialist. Coordinator. ]

4 J

(1) Details of suspect equipment operation,-maintenance and failure modes (2) Exact location and designation of equipment (3) Proper tools-(4) Procedures, manuals or drawings required (5) Use of Specialty Technical Assistants

c. Maintain records of completed repair / maintenance.

d. Ensure that all accident status reports from team activities are reported to the Technical Services Coordinator, the Site.

Emergency Director and the Emergency Operations Manager.

5. MANPOWER / EQUIPMENT NEEDS

a. Assess the need for additional TSC manpower / equipment ~to support OSC efforts.

b. Request additional support from the Technical Services Coordinator.

.Q .6. REENTRY AND RECOVERY Provide maintenance requirements for the Recovery effort.

7. DEACTIVATION Submit all emergency documentation to the Technical. Services Coordinator.

V ER 3.lH Rev. 23 Page 3 of 3 1

- - - a

\(J REACTOR ENGINEER CHECKLIST INITIAL-

, .- l . ACTIVATION' a, Report to.the TSC. Sign in on TSC roster board.

b, Obtain the Reactor-Engineer Emergency Response Position Manual from the emergency equipment, cabinet. Remove green TSC position badge from the badge storage box and place -

Protected Area badge over TSC position badge.

c. Obtain a briefing from the Technical Services Coordinator. l

d. Determine what parameters should be trended on the MPCS. !

e. Direct the Computer-Engineer to program the MPCS Logger trend to: monitor the selected computer points of interest.

f. Provide an initial Critical Safety Function status report to the Technical Services Coordinator.

-i

g. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies-of procedures in your position packet.

.2. ACCIDENT ASSESSMENT

a. Ensure that the Safety Parameter Display System (SPDS) is monitored.

) b. If.a release is in progress, provide dose assessment data from the MPCS'to the Health Physics Coordinator.

c. Review plant responses to mitigation actions to identify possible inconsistencies or unexpected responses.

d. Provide necessary data for analyzing core damage to the Chemistry ,

Coordinator. Record data on Form ER 3.lL.

3. NOTIFICATIONS Provide the Emergency Operations Manager with any core damage data necessary for completion of the NRC Notification Forms.

4. ACCIDENT MITIGATION Provide the Site Emergency Director and the Emergency Operations Manager with recommendations for protection of the reactor core.

5. MANPOWER / EQUIPMENT NEEDS

a. Assess the need for additional manpower and equipment. 1

b. Request additional support from the Technical Services Coordinator.

^

1 I

(d' )

ER 3.11 Rev. 23 i

Page 1 of 2

_.e --_ .

REACTOR ENGINEER CHECKLIST (Continued)

INITIAL

c. If requested by the Emergency Operations Manager, activate the Emergency Response' Data System (ERDS) link on the MPCS by performing the following steps:

(1) From the main menu screen, select " BOP."

(2) From the BOP menu screen, select " EMERGENCY RESPONSE."

(3) From the Emergency Response menu screen, select "ERDS ACTIVATION."

(4) From the ERDS menu screen, select " ACTIVATE."

d. Direct the activities of the YNSD Nuclear Safety Advisor upon his arrival at the TSC.,

e. In the event of a total or partial Main Plant Computer System (MPCS) failure, assist the Technical Services Coordinator in devising appropriate compensatory arrangements. Forms ER 2.0H through K are available to facilitate manual data acquisition and transfer activities.

6. REENTRY AND RECOVERY Provide the Technical Services Coordinator with requirements for the Recovery effort.

7. DEACTIVATION

a. When directed by the Emergency Operations Manager, deactivate the ERDS link on the MPCS by performing the following steps:

(1) Select " Cancel" (this will return screen to main menu).

(2) From the main menu screen, select " BOP."

(3) From the BOP menu screen, select " EMERGENCY RESPONSE."

(4) From the Emergency Response menu screen, select "ERDS ACTIVATION."

1 (5) From the ERDS menu screen, select " TERMINATE. " i l

Submit all documentation to the Technical Services Coordinator.

b.

l l

ER 3.1I Rev. 23 Page 2 of 2

/

COMPUTER ENGINEER CHECKLIST' INITIAL

['

3

1. . ACTIVATION 6 4 a.

~

Report to the TSC. Sign in on the TSC roster board,

b. Obtain the Computer Engineer Emergency Response Position Manual from the emergency equipment cabinet. Remove green TSC position badge from the badge storage box and place Protected Area badge over TSC position badge.

c. Obtain a briefing from the Technical Services Coordinator.

L l- d. Synchronize Technical Support Center Facility clocks with the Main Plant Computer digital time display.

l

e. Enable to Met Menu to obtain a printout of Main Plant '] '

Computer System (MPCS) historical archive data (past 24-hour history of hourly 15-minute averages) for the following meteorological values for use by the Health Physics Coordinator.

(1) -Upper and lower wind speed -

(2) Upper and lower wind direction (3) Upper and lower Delta T i'

f. Enable the Logger Trend to produce a copy of the existing program computer points to the Reactor Engineer.

N. g. Provide the Logger Trend printout to the Reactor Engineer and discuss any modifications to the existing data file.

Establish the required Logger Trend and ensure periodic copies are distributed to each table in the TSC.

h. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled j copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. ACCIDENT ASSESSMENT I

a. Ensure continuous operation of the MPCS and the Safety Parameter Display {

System. 1

b. Assist the Maintenance Coordinator in directing the activities of the OSC computer technicians in the event that a MPCS failure occurs.

c. Obtain a tape of the 5-second MPCS archive file once every hour.

3. ACCIDENT MITIGATION Provide continuous operation of the MPCS to support accident mitigation.

l ER 3.1J Rev. 23 Page 1 of 2

COMPUTER ENGINEER CHECKLIST (Continued)

4. MANP0tlLR/ EQUIPMENT NEEDS~

a. Assess the need for additional manpower and equipment.

b. Request additional support from the Technical Services Coordinator.

5. REENTRY AND RECOVERY Provide continuous operation of the MPCS to support reentry and recovery.

6. DEACTIVATION Submit all documentation to the Technical Services Coordinator.

O s

i l

U 3.1J Rey, 23 E*8e 2 og g

,~, -~ ,

f ws'

) 1 N.,/

4 e

\ v' OSC STAFF TRACKING REY. DATE: 4/4/95 EPLAN:E060018.DGN OSC STAFF TRACKING E 93 = = & ~="

OSC STMF STMF PRIORITY TEAM

TASK POSl! ION AVAllABLE TIME y g' g ost C0mcarm 1 TECH WE01 ELECT I& C 00 NS05 ECH WM STORES OUT BACK 1E01 SPEC COGUIMIS I

GCC COMDINAT@ t PASS C030lNATS 1 DEM.iEOMGANS 3 1& C IEDMCIANS 2 EDeNICS 2 ELECTRICIANS 2 NSO'S 5 iP TEDMCIANS S RAufASTE SUP 1 IM0 WASTE TECH 2 CR (FERAT@ t STOREKEEPER I FIRE FIGiTER/EMI 2 CGfUTER g TEOMQANS SPECIE 01 ASSIS

MANPOWER REQUEST Tag Yng i Tag Yag TM

- to BE DETERWINED BY TECH. SPEC COORD.

Rev. 23

, -. .. - - . . . . ~ - .. - ..

FIAMED RADIGIDGICAL REIJASE RTA j fW. SECTION 1: (To be completed by the Site' Emergency Director)

!d7 '

=A. Reason for release:

4 A

B. Proposed time of release:

.. (Time) ,

F 'Date: /. /

C. Define the proposed release pathway:

D. Record the containment dose rate: R/hr E. Record the time of the containment monitor reading:

F. Record the containment pressure at the time of the proposal:

Psig C. Record the containment pressure expected due to the release:

-- Psig H. Estimate the rd v: se point diameter: ft 4

I. Record any isotopic data available from containment air or WRGM sampling:

J. Transmit this form to the EOF Coordinator.

ER 3.1M Rev. 23 Page 1 of 5

,_ ~ - . _ _ _ .,. .-- _ ., . _

FIANNED RADIGIDGICAL mRTs.4SE DATA (Continued)

SECTTION 2 A. Meteorological Conditions (To be completed by the Dose Assessment Specialist)

Available from Weather Forecast l E.GI. P.Bla l

1. Current Wind Forecasted Wind Direction ("from) Direction (*from).

2. Current Wind Forecasted Wind Velocity (mph) Velocity (mph)

3. Current Estimated Stability Class Stability Class for the Proposed Release Period

4. Precipitation (in/hr) Probability of Precipitation for the Proposed Release Period B. Radiological Conditions Based on Release in Progress (To be completed by the Dose Assessment Specialist)

1. Projected Site Boundary Centerline Dose Rate arem/hr Analysis Time

2. Projected 2 Mile Centerline Dose Rate arem/hr Analysis Time

3. Projected 5 Mile Centerline Dose Rate mrem /hr Analysis Time

4. Projected 10 Mile Centerline Dose Rate mrem /hr Analysis Time

5. Measured Centerline Report Time Dose Rate urem/hr Report Distance mi.

6. Measured Centerline Report Time Dose Rate mrem /hr Report Distance mi.

7. Measured Centerline Report Time Dose Rate mrem /hr Report D1 stance mi.

ER 3.lM Rev. 23 Page 2 of 5

i-l PIMMED RADILIACICAL BRTJABE DATA (Continued) 1 SECTION 2

%)

C. Projected Radiological Impact of Planned Release (To be completed by the Dose Assessment Specialist)

Evaluate using Section I information in conjunction with the forecasted ,

meteorological conditions recorded in Section 2A and the Containment Vent option j of the Dose Asoessment Programs. l Dose Rate (arem/hr) Thyroid Dose Rate (aren/hr)

1. Site Boundary Centerline Dose Rate

'2. 2 Mile Centerline Dose Rate

3. 5 Mile Centerline Dose Rate

4. 10 Mile Centerline Dose Rate F._QIE (O The actual duration will depend on the time it takes to reduce the pressure to the proposed level (i.e., vent time). This will be provided by the program.

5. Record the " vent time," if applicable hours

6. Calculate the maximum Record Location integrated Dose From Station mrem degree / mile

7. Calculate the maximum Record Location integrated Thyroid From Station Dose mrem degree / mile Dose Assessment Specialist Date/ Time D. Transmit this form to the EOF Coordinator.

l l

\, ER 3.1M Rev. 23 ,

Page 3 of 5 I I

l l

l

PLUOfED RADIOIDGICAL REfJtARE MTA (Continued)

SECTION 3: (To be completed by the EOF Coordinator)

After discussions with offsite authorities, determine:

Additional Protective Actions that would be required:

Status of Offsite Emergency Response Actions:

O EOF Coordinator:

Date: / / Time:

Transmit this form to the Response Manager.

l ER 3.lM Rev. 23 Page 4 of 5

\:

yrmsun RADIOIAGIC&L REfmE MTA (Continued)

/ .

SECTION 4: (To be completed by the Response Manager) l Document the planned release authorization.

ACTIONS TO BE TAKEN .

(inform the Site Emergency Director) 1 M

O Approval:

(Response Manager)

Date: / / Time:

1. Notify the Site Emergency Director of the final decision.

Record the notification time:

2. Notify the Emergency Communication Coordinator of the action.

Record the notification time:

1 I

(' :

\ ER 3.1M J Rev. 23 l Page 5 of 5 )

1

PASS CONTINCENCY MATRIX ANALYSIS PLANT ASSESSMENT CONTINGENCY ACTION

( SAMPLE /1DCATION PARAMETER I RCS Hydrogen Core Damage RDMS Correlation _

(PASS Panel) C=====etries/ Source Range Boron Sub-critical Margin Activity Core Damage RDMS Correlation Chloride Long Term Recovery TSC Recovery Actions RHR Hydrogen Core Damage RDMS Correlation l (PASS Panel) Ca====etries/ Source Range Boron Sub-critical Margin Activity Core Damage RDMS Correlation Chloride Long Term Recovery TSC Recovery Actions PAB SUMP Activity Long Term Recovery TSC Recovery Actions (PASS Panel)

RER A SUMP Activity. Long Term Recovery TSC Recovery Actions (PASS Panel)

RHR B SUMP Activity Long Term Recovery TSC Recovery Actions (PASS Panel)

CONT AIR Hydrogen Core Damage RDMS Correlation (EW Pipechase) RDMS Correlation Activity Core Damage PLANT VENT Activity Effluent Release RM 6495 (WRGM-PAB 51')

Identify if any contingency actions for accident assessment are being taken by circling above.

I Chemistry Coordinator i'

Date Time l

O ER 3.lN Rev. 23 i

j

ER 3.2 P:gi 1 Rev. 19 ADMINISTRATIVE FROCEDURE COVER FORK

,7 -

A. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ER 3.2 REVISION 19 TITLE OPERATIONAL SUPPORT CENTER OPERATIONS ORIGINATOR J. W. Baer

1. Does this procedure / procedure revision:

a. Make changes in the facility as described in the UFSAR? O Yes E No

b. Make changes in procedures as described in the UFSAR? O Yes B No

c. Involve tests or experiments not described in the UFSAR? O Yes E No

d. Involve changes to the existing Operating License or require additional license requirements? O Yes S No

2. If any of the above questions are answered y.g.g, a safety evaluation per the Regulatory Compliance Manual (NARC) is required. (The individual-performing the above review shall have completed 10 CFR 50.59 training.)

B. MANAGER / DEPARTMENT SUPERVISOR APPROVAL IJ.TLE SIGNATURE DAIE EP mm MJhd 4hhs 6 #

C. NUCLEAR OUALITY SERVICES REVIEW TITLE SIGNATURE DAIE N\A D. SORC REVIEW SORC MEETING NO. kYO j

E. APPROVAL FOR IMPLEMENTATION

/jgM' ////p[/ 05/03/95 ;

V APpROiAL DATE EFFECTIVE DATE STATI)5NDIRECTOR O SM 6.1A i

Rev. 13

r ER 3.2 Pcg3 2 Rev. 19 CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS COVER 1 19 CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS 2 19 1.0 OBJECTIVES 3 19 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 3 2.1 OSC COORDINATOR 3 2.2 RADIOLOGICAL CONTROLS COORDINATOR 3 {

2.3 TECHNICAL SPECIALIST COORDINATOR 3 I 2.4 OSC COMMUNICATOR 3 2.5 PASS COORDINATOR 3 3.0 PRECAUTIONS 3 i

I 4.0 PREREQUISITES 3 f

5.0 ACTIONS 4 19 i

6.0 REFERENCES

4 7.0 ATTACHMENTS l

l Figure 1, Operational Support Center (OSC) Staff 5 19 Figure 2, Operational Support Center (OSC) Area 6 19 Figure 3, HP Control Point /OSC Command Point (Typical) 7 19 Figure 4, OSC Tagboard Assignments 8 19 9 15 Figure 5, Team Status Board 10 15 Figure 6 Emergency Onsite Radiological Surveys 11-14 18 Figure 7, Protected Area Survey Map 15-16 15 Figure 8, Site Area 17-18 15 Figure 9, Site Boundary 19-20 15 Figure 10, Unit 1 Location Reference Drawing 21 15 Figure 11, Emergency Sample Log 22 15 ER 3.2A, OSC Coordinator Checklist 19 ER 3.2B, Radiological Controls Coordinator Checklist 19 ER 3.2C, PASS Coordinator 19 ER 3.2D, OSC Communicator checklist 19 ER 3.2E, Technical Specialist Coordinator Checklist 19 ER 3.2F, Emergency Team Briefing / Debriefing Form 15 O

ER 3.2 Pags 3 Rev. 19 1.0 OBJECTIVES 1

/

This procedure specifies the actions required to activate, operate and/or evacuate the Operational Support Center (OSC), and the techniques and precautions to take when performing radiological surveys on site during a radiological emergency.

2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES l 2.1 OSC COORDINATOR Activates and manages the OSC.

2.2 RADIOLDCICAL CONTROLS COORDINATOR

1. Ensures implementation of emergency exposure control measures associated with Station emergency response efforts.

2. Provides direction to onsite Health Physics (HP) Technicians on which surveys to perform and techniques to follow depending on the situation.

2.3 TECHNICAL SPECIALIST COORDINATOR Responsible for technical evaluation of Station repair / corrective actions.

2.4 OSC COMMUNICATOR 7m Maintains three-way telephone link with the Technical Support Center and Control

Room.

l 2.5 PASS COORDINATOR Coordinates post-accident sampling and analysis functions during an emergency.

3.0 PRECAUTIONS

1. All OSC personnel are responsible for ensuring accountability is maintained at the OSC.

2. Take actions to prevent the spread of contamination.

3. Monitor exposure and dose rates frequently.

4. Radiation levels may be considerably higher during emergencies. Beta energies may be considerably higher and transuranic isotopes (alpha emitters) may exist in large quantities.

4.0 PREREOUIGITES

1. An Alert, Site Area Emergency or General Emergency has been declared in accordance with Procedure ER 1.1, Classification of Emergencies, 9B

[) 2. The Site Emergency Director (SED) has ordered activation of the OSC.

v

ER 3.2 Pags 4 Rev. 19 5.0 ACTIONS O

Telephone numbers for contacts referenced in the checklists are available in the Emergency Response Telephone Directory.

1. Refer to Form ER 3.2A, OSC Coordinator Checklist, for required actions for this position.

2. Refer to Form ER 3.2B, Radiological Controls Coordinator Checklist, for required actions for this position.

3. Refer to Form ER 3.2C, PASS Coordinator Checklist, for required actions for this position.

4. Refer to Form ER 3.2D, OSC Communicator Checklist, for required actions for this position.

5. Refer to Form ER 3.2E, Technical Specialist Coordinator Checklist, for required actions for this position.

6.0 REFERENCES

1. ER 1.1, Classification of Emergencies

2. ER 2.0, Emergency Notification Documentation Forms Procedure

3. ER 3.3, Emergency Operations Facility Operations

4. ER 4.3, Radiation Protection During Emergency Conditions

5. ER 4.6, Offsite Monitoring and Decontamination

6. ER 5.2, Site Perimeter and Offsite Monitoring and Environmental Sampling

7. HX0956.04, Radiological Environmental Sampling of Food Crops and Vegetation

8. CS0925.10, Preparation for Post-Accident Sampling

9. HD0955.01, General Count Room Guidelines i 10. NRC Inspection Report No. 50-443/86-10-12 l 11. NRC Inspection Report No. 50-443/88-09-01

12. NRC Inspection Report No. 86-18, Item 86-18-15 l

l 13. SS #25564, Establishing Efficiencies for Field Calculations of l

Radioactive Activity on Air Sample Cartridges, June 16, 1986 i

14. NRC Inspection Report No. 89-19, NUREG 0737 Audit l 15. NRC Inspection Report No. 50-443/93-07 l

1

- ~ . ,=. .;,

^ '

jq S _,,._.

u

'Q . y 1(

.Nr..

)J

- l i

E m e7 m S.oCN - ER 3.2 Page S ' ~

t FIGURE '1 n.( 19

-)

OPERATIONAL SUPPORT CENTER (OSC) STAFF MAINTENANCE COOR0fMATOR ,

TSC 1 r----l

! REPRESENTATIVE l .

osc i EF_C11_J t

4 MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL RA010 LOGICAL TEC estCAL gg DADWASTE

""I" **I" ~

PE C OR COORDINATOR C00kiNAOR OSC l 2 OSC l 2 OSC a OSC t OSC t OSC t I # SPECIALTY RAOWASTE 1& C HEALTH PHYSICS TR : TEC8etICIAN E" PERSONNEL TECHNICIAN 7 g 7

OSC I 1 OSC l 2 OSC I S OSC I 3 OSC I

OSC l 2 I I I l l NUCLEAR CONTROL ROOM . SYSTEM COMPUTER - WORK CONTROL STOREKEEPER FIRE FIGHTER / TITLE' OPERATOR TECHNICIAN COORDINATOR EMT OPERATOR OSC l t OSC I 5 OSC i 3 OSC I i OSC l 8 OSC l 2 I I I LOCATION NUNGER

NUH8ER DEPENOS UPOM TYPE AND SEVERITY OF ACCIDENT NOTE: DASHED LINES INDICATE OUTSIDE ORGANIZATION, 3/13M5

. ~ ~ .

ER 3.2 P gs 6 Rev. 19 FIGURE 2 Of.EFATIONAL SUPPORT CENTER (OSC) AREA f//fffffff/f STAGING AREA /OSC EMERGENCY LOCKER ROOM 1

, i 2

/'

l RCA DECON 0Ch4IOLE FACILITIES

%{

3 H.P. CONTROL POINT / -

GSC COMM%0 POINT _

~

PORTAL

- MONITORS v u.=====! _

-ORG T10N HEN'S CLEAN \ STAFFING ^ / TAG LOCKER ROOH \

':==

/j/ '"?#i" A J

COMPUTER ROOM WORX AREA =

x 8 cuo m a m

j n ll I l

{ _

2 1 3

0 I I OI I _

I THE FOLLOWING IS LOCATED AS SHOWN ABOVE: CHEMISTRY

1. EQUIPMENT LOCKERS (51 H0T LAB -

2, SPARE SCBA BOTTLES (8) }

NOTE: LAYOUT IS TYPICAL -

N"********"

$WILL BE INSTALLED UPON OSC ACTIVATION.

il1

~

7

5. e E R G g

<w a P

R O

T R A O ST N A A C O A P

C X E

N I

L E L

NO I I S B O I C N N O A L P A S

D I U N RT C. RNM O I 2.U 3 O NO OOC O

HM C CR Oo'

I T

A L

A N

N R O E C O C

- E C . R I M o C C. S T. s E T t o

R I

O N t T A MO A N A A P U a N T E E RP M e M w I S C

- - _R-MDS s& is G - - - -

E O T 3 4 C 8 L

s $ V V I l l l Ig k' iil I . .

g .

T _

/

N I

O P

h e g D 7 N _

_ 8

_ A 6 M _ V90 M l O _ sf -

_ C .

3 C JI _

E5H)

N9T L L - _

E S A I2A _

L3EWA

.O R O U

/ I P

C _

X XR P

O8O 0N t

CN O -

- G F N I

T T I

{

R E 4 T

8U O S9I- SB X

I O

P C

E6 H6KC C3 CA N3AJ A8U K

m -- b 0

'4 2

M6( >

L -

s -

O R

T

- @ Ve s u

m h

N - _

O -

C g-P - _

H -

7 -

- {

S U

- MT

- tAA" SET oTS" .

, 3 6

- n69 9 nO 4V a ,

(V ! "I l g l l 6EE h -

N

- G p ,

0 " i 6 .

0 G O

I 0 N C -

0 CI 5 O

1 SG 9 0 /

E: OAT YA 3 __

1

- N S W( /

A 3 _

L P

E

()lllll l {I If l flf !

l ER 3.2 Pcga 8 Rev. 19 FIGURE 4 OSC TACBOARD ASSIGNMENTS

1. Health Physics Technician #1

a. Sign in on board and take tag.

b. Install OSC organization (Roster) Board, Team Status Board (Figure 5) and Staffing / Tag Board.

c. Remove the Emergency Response position manuals and place them at their assigned locations per Figure 3.

d. Obtain phones from locker / cabinet and connect the phones as indicated on Figures 2 and 3. Perform phone checks.

e. Bring tag back to tagboard and put tag in the complete column on board.

Sign off the " completed" signature,

f. Remain on standby in HP Operations area.

2. Health Physics Technician #2

a. Sign in on board and take tag.

b. Obtain an air sampler and survey meters as necessary from the emergency locker,

c. Check operability of instrumentation. Perform battery / response check on instrumentation if not done in past 24 hours2.777778e-4 days 0.00667 hours 3.968254e-5 weeks 9.132e-6 months .

d. Verify habitability of the OSC following normal survey procedures,

e. Bring tag back to tagboard and put tag in the complete column on board.

Sign off the " completed" signature.

f. Remain on standby in HP Operations area.

3. Health Physics Technician #3

a. Sign in on board and take tag.

b. Obtain proper dosimetry equipment (SRDs, whole body and extremity TLDs, dosimeter chargers) from the emergency locker.

c. Set up a Dosimetry Issue station.

d. Bring tag back to tagboard and put tag in the complete column on board.

Sign off the " completed" signature,

e. Maintain the Dosimetry Issue station.

O

~

O ]

OSC COORDINATOR CHECKLIST

-1. ACTIVATION INITIAL

(.

a. Obtain the OSC Coordinator Emergency Response Position

( '

) Manual and initiate this checklist.

b. Check workstation telephones for operability,

c. Attach your security badge to the green identification tag located in the OSC Coordinator Emergency Response Position Manual.

d. Direct (using the OSC page system) incoming personnel to sign in on the OSC organization board and Form ER 3.3M, Manpower Planning, and card in at the card reader.

e. Ensure OSC tagboard assignments (Figure 4) are in progress.

Initial when the first three assignments have been completed.

f. Designate an OSC communicator; if available, this individual should be the Control Room Operator. Direct the individual to:

(1) Complete Form ER 3.2D, OSC Communicator Checklist.

(2) Maintain a log using Form ER 2.0E, Emergency Facility Log.

s (3) Log OSC work requests received from the TSC or Control Room, as required.

f

g. Contact the I6C Coordinator in the TSC to determine the emergency classification, general Station status and priority of OSC job tasks. (Ref. 6.15)

h. Synchronize the OSC clocks with the Main Plant Computer digital time display,

i. In the event that more than the required number of individuals are available to fill a given position, determine which individual (s) shall remain in the OSC to serve as the position holder (s). All excess personnel should be directed to the IPC Assembly Area (if activated), or to evacuate the site to their homes or Schiller Station.

J. Collect the completed Form ER 3.3M, Manpower Planning, and ensure a completed copy of Form ER 3.3M is sent to the Maintenance Coordinator.

Dispatch a runner to deliver a copy of Form ER 3.3M to the TSC, receive copies of Form ER 3.3M from the TSC and Control Room and deliver them to the Security Shift Commander at Guard Island. If the Inprocessing Center (IPC) is activated, deliver another set of copies of Form ER 3.3M to the Assembly Area

, Coordinator at the Inprocessing Center.

ER 3.2A Rev. 19 Page 1 of 6 l

l

OSC COORDINATOR CHECKLIST (Continued)

INITIAL

k. Ensure staffing is adequate for OSC activation. Staffing does not necessarily have to meet levels indicated on Figure 1 to be considered adequate for activation.

1. Upon arrival of the Supervisory Control Room Operator, inform

~ the operator to report to the control Room and act as a 4-vay data link contact.

m. Ensure personnel are available to access and issue tools from appropriate tool cribs.

n. Declare the OSC operational by OSC page announcement and notify the Maintenance Coordinator. Record the time:

o. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. ACCOUNTABILITY Maintain proper documentation of personnel on teams using Form ER 3.2F, Emergency Team Briefing / Debriefing Form, and/or OSC team status board.

3. PLANT STATUS

a. Provide regular field status updates (operational and radiological) to the Maintenance Coordinator.

b. Receive / request plant status from the Maintenance Coordinator and Control Room, as necessary.

c. Provide' periodic updates / briefings on plant status to OSC personnel. This should be done approximately every 30 minutes or when there is a major change in accident or response status.

4 TEAM FORMATION / DISPATCH

a. Direct team formation requests from the Maintenance Coordinator / Control Room for:

(1) Search and rescue operations (2) Repair and corrective actions (3) Onsite medical emergencies (4) Onsite/inplant survey teams (5) Post accident sampling activities (6) Reentry and recovery operations (7) Site boundary survey teams ER 3.2A Rev. 19 Page 2 of 6

M OSC COORDINATOR CHECKLIST (Continued)

b. Designate team members and leader by selecting personnel based upon task 1 definition and recommendations from the Radiological Controls Coordinator l

(6S) (RCC) and/or Maintenance Coordinator.

c. Obtain briefing information.

(1) Fill out Form ER 3.2F, Emergency Team Briefing / Debriefing Form (may be ,

delegated). !

l

< (2) Obtain operational data information from the Maintenance Coordinator / ~

Control Room.

(3) Obtain radiological input from RCC.

d. Brief the team (may be delegated) regarding:

(1) Information from Form ER 3.2F (2) Communication instructions, as necessary

, (a) Use of radios (b) Use of Caitronics (c) Use of phones

- (d) Frequency of communications (e) Communication techniques, as necessary (f) Back-up communication methods '

(3) Special instructions, as necessary (a) Search and Rescue

1. Name of missing, stranded or disabled individual

2. Location where individual was last seen or reported

3. Expected location of individual A

4. Conditions restraining the individual's mobility (e.g. , plant structures, equipment, water, fires, radiation levels)

5. Medical condition of individual

6. Conditions restricting the search and rescue of the individual

7. Instructions to keep team in voice or visual contact

8. Provide information to the OSC as it becomes available (at least every 15 minutes).

l' '

ER 3.2A Rev. 19 l

l Page 3 of 6

OSC COORDINATOR CHECKLIST (Continued) l (b) Repair and Corrective Actions I

1. As repair and corrective actions are requested by the 9, Maintenance Coordinator or Control Room, receive a briefing on Station status and required team skills.

2. Instruct the Technical Specialist Coordinator to receive a briefing from the TSC engineering staff on equipment and systems which are or will be affected by damaged equipment or the corrective action (s).

3. Ensure that repair and corrective action teams follow the guidance in Procedure ER 4.3, Radiation Protection During Emergency Conditions, to mininize exposure.

(c) Medical Emergency

1. Direct assistance in accordance with Procedure ER 4.4, RCA Medical Emergency.

2. Form ER 3.2F is not required for medical emergency responders; use OSC team status board to track accountability.

(d) Fire Brigade Support

1. Support Station Fire Brigade as requested by the Control Room.

2. Form ER 3.2F is not required for fire brigade responders; use OSC team status board to track accountability.

3. Consult with RCC for dispatch of Health Physics Technician (s) to fire location if:

a. The fire is located outside the RCA with a release in progress.

b. The fire is located inside the RCA. Verbally brief HP technician (s) and document using Form ER 2.0E, Emergency Facility Log.

e. When teams are ready for dispatch, contact the TSC via 4-way data link and request final authorization for team deployment.

f. Debriefing of teams (may be delegated)

(1) Use Form ER 3.2F, Emergency Team Briefing / Debriefing Form, to obtain information from team members.

(2) Provide debriefing information to the RCC, Maintenance Coordinator and control Room,

g. Personnel dispatched to non Radiologically Controlled Areas (RCA) with no release in progress.

ER 3.2A Rev. 19 Page 4 of 6

OSC COORDINATOR. CHECKLIST (Continued)

,m (1) Personnel dispatched to non RCAs (e.g., stores / warehouse)

)

[V .. (a) Using Form ER '2.0E,' log name, destination, purpose and time dispatched from the OSC.

(b) Ensure the OSC team status board is updated.

(2) Personnel dispatched to other facilities (e.g., TSC)

(a) Inform destination facility of personnel being dispatched.

(b) Using Form ER 2.0E, log name, destination, purpose and time dispatched from the OSC.

(c) Instruct personnel to sign in on destination facility Manpower Planning Form ER 3.3M, and inform the OSC of arrival.

(d) Remove personnel form OSC Form ER 3.3M and OSC Organization Board.

5. MANPOWER ASSESSMENT

a. Instruct the-Technical Specialist Coordinator to provide periodic manpower requirements to the Maintenance Coordinator based on: ,

(1) Number of teams and assigned tasks ,

(2) Long-term scheduling 1

-f (3) Permissible Accumulated Dose (PAD) of personnel in OSC (4) Available Specialty Technical Assistants and current or anticipated special needs !

~

'l

b. Authorize additional manpower as needed based on specific tasks requested of the OSC (e.g. , welders, crane operators, carpenters, pipefitters, etc.) .

6. EVACUATION

a. Notify the Maintenance Coordinator when evacuation of the OSC is required and discuss where the OSC should be relocated.

M l Consider using an area on the 75 foot level of the Control Building.

Depending on radiological conditions, other areas may be utilized. ___

ER 3.2A Rev. 19 Page 5 of 6

OSC COORDINATOR CHECKLIST (Continued) i I

INITIAL

b. Review the OSC organization size with the Maintenance l Coordinator and determine what staff should relocate to the new OSC and what staff should evacuate to the Emergency Operations Facility (EOF). l

c. Review protective measures with the RCC prior to directing the evacuation process.

d. Announce evacuation of the OSC and relocation instructions.

Ensure all inplant and onsite teams are informed of the evacuation.

e. Coordinate and direct the evacuation of selected OSC staff to the new OSC location.

f. Ensure all documentation is moved to the new OSC location.

g. Upon arrival at the new OSC location await further instructions from the Maintenance Coordinator.

7. DEACTIVATION Submit the OSC emergency documentation to the Administrative Services Coordinator.

O l

l l

ER 3.2A Rev. 19 Page 6 of 6 1

l l

l

?? -

n RADICIDGICAL CONIROLS COORDINATOR CHECKLIST '

/-Q 1. ACTIVATION INITIAL.

,j l a. Sign inlon Form ER 3.3M, Manpower Planning, and card-in at card reader.

b. Obtain the-RCC Emergency Response Position Manual and initiate this checklist.

c. . Check workstation telephones for operability.

d. Obtain a briefing from the.0SC Coordinator.

e. Attach'your security badge to.the green identification tag located in the RCC Emergency Response Position Manual.

1

f. Assist / direct the implementation of the OSC tagboard assign-ments listed in Figure 4.

g. Obtain plant radiological status.

h. Provide RDMS data to Health Physics coordinator (HPC), as requested.

i. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled-

- copies of procedures in your position packet.

(

2. RADIOLOGICAL RELEASE INFORMATION

~

a. Contact the HPC to obtain Station radiological release information.

b. Contact onsite monitoring and perimeter monitoring teams for release information.

c. Obtain information from the RDMS.

d. As release information becomes available, notify onsite and perimeter monitoring teams, as necessary.

.3. TEAMS

a. Provide Health Physics support / coordination of team tasks. -!

J l

b. If warranted, contact the Maintenance Coordinator in the TSC and request the dispatch of HP support from the Assembly Area for conducting team briefings.

t-i

's. ER 3.2B I Rev. 19 Page 1 of'4

RADI!LDCICAL CONTROLS COORDINATOR CHECKLIST (Continued) l l

c. Provide radiological data for briefings. This includes appropriate entries on Form ER 3.2F, Emergency Team Briefing / Debriefing Form. '

(1) Available RDMS data.

(2) Available inplant survey data including information from previous team debriefings.

(3) Transfer latest Year to Date (YTD) exposure on each team member from Procedure ER 4.3, Figure 5, Emergency Exposure Tracking, to Form ER 3.2F, Emergency Team Briefing / Debriefing Form. (Ref. 6.10)

(4) Access and egress routes, and stay times, as necessary.

(5) Protective clothing, dosimetry, respiratory protection and other special requirements.

(6) ALARA input.

(7) Emergency exposure authorization as necessary, per Procedure ER 4.3, Radiation Protection During Emergency Conditions. This requires Site Emergency Director approval.

(8) Provide Potassium Iodide (KI) issuance guidance and appropriate exposure control practices per Procedure ER 4.3, Radiation Protection During Emergency Conditions.

(9) For debriefing, obtain information from team and record on Form ER 3.2F, Emergency Team Briefing / Debriefing Form. Ensure individual exposure records are updated.

d. If a release is in progress or suspected, request the OSC Coordinator to obtain TSC approval for dispatch of an onsite survey team. Refer to Figure 6, Emergency Onsite Radiological Surveys.

FSTI Radios for use outside the protected area are stored in the Dosimetry Lab located in the Inprocessing Center. The key is available in the OSC.

e. Coordinate establishment of contamination controls (e.g. , step-off pads at Administration Building and the Control Room entrances) with the HPC. (Ref.

6.17)

f. Brief OSC personnel on prohibition against eating and drinking while a release is in progress. (Ref. 6.15)

ER 3.2B l Rev. 19 l Page 2 of 4

e RADIGIDGICAL CONTROLS COORDINATOR CHECKLIST (Continued)

- s 4 EVACUATION OF SITE i

a. Upon request of the Health Physics Coordinator, assign a minimum of two Health Physics technicians to activate the Remote Monitoring Area and supervise monitoring and decontamination team (s). Assign available Radwaste personnel to support Remote Monitoring Area operations as follows:

(1) If the emergency response does not involve immediate radwaste activity,

. assign the Radwaste Supervisor and Ralwaste Technicians from the OSC.

(2) If the emergency response requires immediate radwaste activity, assign the second shift Radwaste Supervisor and Radwaste Technicians from the Assembly Area.

b. Brief personnel assigned to the Remote Monitoring Area on radiological release conditions.

c. Dispatch team members to the locations to be activated.

5. RABITABILITY

a. Provide Health Physics (HP) support to periodically survey and verify habitability of the OSC, Secondary Alarm Station-(SAS), Inprocessing Center Assembly Area and Security Building, as necessary.

b. Set up access control measures, as necessary, f'N

( 6. RELEASE OF ASSEMBLY AREA PERSONNEL Dispatch HP support to monitor personnel and vehicles as directed by the Health Physics Coordinator.

7. HP STAFFING

a. Assess need for additional HP personnel.

b. Inform OSC Coordinator of staffing needs.

8. OSC EVACUATION

a. In the event that the OSC radiological conditions exceed the evacuation limits of Procedure ER 4.3, Radiation Protection During Emergency Conditions, inform the OSC Coordinator that the center must be evacuated.

b. Recommend the relocation area for evacuating the OSC staff to the OSC Coordinator, F.9IE Consider using an area on the 75-foot level of the Control Building.

Depending upon radiological conditions, other areas may be utilized.

,O b ER 3.2B Rev. 19 Page 3 of 4 I

RADIO 1DGICAL CONTROLS COORDINATOR C11ECKLIST (Continued)

INITIAL

c. Establish the best egress route for the OSC staff. O

d. Direct Health Physics personnel regarding the supplies / equipment that should be moved,

e. Notify Dosimetry Records Personnel at the EOF that the exposure record keeping function is being transferred to the EOF.

f. ' Coordinate contamination control measures for Control Room entry with the HPC in the TSC for those personnel requested to report to the 75-foot level of the Control Building (TSC expansion area).

g. Accompany the OSC staff during the evacuation. Provide Health Physics coverage, per Figure 6, Emergency Onsite Radiological Surveys, while en route.

9. DEACTIVATION Submit all emergency documentation to the OSC Coordinator.

O ER 3.2B Rev. 19 Page 4 of 4

~

. i l

1 I

PASS COORDINATOR CHECKLIST

1. ACTIVATION INITIAL

/~ '(

"i

a. Sign in on Form ER 3.3M, Manpower Planning, and card in at card reader,

b. Obtain the PASS Coordinator Emergency Response Position Manual and initiate this checklist.

c. Check workstation telephones for operability.

d. Obtain a briefing from the OSC Coordinator,

e. Attach your security badge to the green identification tag located in the PASS Coordinator Emergency Response Position Manual.

f. Direct Chemistry Hot Lab setup activities including contamination controls and HP support for checking dose rates.

g. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. TEAMS f-~3 a. Report to the Chemistry Hot Lab and direct the implementation of Procedure CS0925.10, Preparation for Post-Accident Sampling, using dedicated equipment

(\ ') assigned for post-accident sampling and analysis.

b. Form a PASS team. Direct PASS team to dress out while waiting for briefing.

c. Coordinate with the Radiological Controls Coordinator in assigning team members an RAE of up to 4500 mrem.

d. Coordinate with the Radiological Controls Coordinator in providing hand and head TLDs to team members,

e. Help conduct the PASS team briefing with the OSC Coordinator and RCC.

f. Report the chemistry staffing level to the OSC Coordinator and indicate PASS readiness,

g. Direct PASS samples to be taken in accordance with proper PASS procedures,

h. Establish priorities for analysis of samples with the Chemistry Coordinator and direct analysis personnel accordingly.

1. Report all sample results to the OSC Coordinator as they become available.

3. DEACTIVATION Submit all documentation to the OSC Coordinator.

(N ER 3.2C )

Rev. 19 l 1

l

!e-OSC COMMUNICATOR CHECKLIST

1. ACTIVATION INITIAL g) a. Sign in on Form ER 3.3M, Manpower Plannin5, and card-in at card reader.

1

b. Attach your security badge to the green identification tag located in the OSC Locker.

l

c. Assist the Health Physics Technician in setting up phones, as l appropriate. 1

d. Install OSC Team Status . Board (Figure 5).

e. Await TSC initiation of the 4-way data link unless otherwise i directed by the OSC Coordinator. A headset may be utilized 1 for manning this link. 1 f .- Obtain the current MPCS digital time display and synchronize ;

Operational Support Center facility clocks. '

i f' g. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current I revision. To' do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet. .,

2. LOCS 7-~s a. Maintain OSC log using Form ER 2.0E, Emergency Facility Log.

( )

\/'

b. Record team in/out times and team number on the OSC Team Status Board.

Li9.IE

\

Do not erase team number if the team has been cancelled.

c. Record plant status conditions periodically.

f d. Record outside ambient temperature, wind speed and j l direction periodically.

f I

3. TEAM TRACKING

a. Record team destination in the team destination column and list of team members in the miscellaneous information column of the OSC team status board (e.g., 1-Electrician, 2 Mechanics). l I

b. Assign team numbers to the teams requested by the OSC Coordinator. ;

1

c. Inform the TSC of the team in/out times. )

5 l

- /3 ER 3.2D Rev. 19 f {A] Page 1 of 2

OSC COMMUNICATOR CHECKLIST (Continued)

4. C01 M ICATIONS a.

Self-initiate requests for plant status and weather conditions on a periodic basis. Provide this information to the OSC Coordinator,

b. Record weather data on the OSC team status board.

c. Take notes during peak communication loads to ensure that no data is lost.

Transfer this data to Form ER 2.0E when poss.ible,

d. Place the MUTE switch to the OFF position when not communicating on the 4-way data link.

e. Ensure that the OSC Coordinator knows when communications are not occurring.

f. Keep lengthy communications to a minimum. Request that technical questions or problem-solving discussions be directed to the Technical Specialist Coordinator.

5. PHONE DESCRIPTION

a. DO NOT hang up handset as this will disconnect the phone,

b. Place the black switch to HEADSET position to communicate on the 4-way phone tie via the headset. Placing black switch to HANDSET will allow communication on the handset.

O HEADSET BLACK SWITCH --- TELEPHONE to select handset or HANDSET -

headset MUTE SUITCH (Silver)

TOP VIEV ER 3.2D Rev. 19 Page 2 of 2

(

TECHNICAL SPECIALIST COORDINATOR CHECKLIST

1. ACTIVATION INITIAL l

--s l

,/ a. Sign in on Form ER 3.3M, Manpower Planning, and card in at card reader. ;

b. Obtain the Technical Specialist Coordinator Emergency Response Position Manual and initiate this checklist.

c. Check workstation telephones for operability.

d. Obtain a briefing from the OSC Coordinator.

e. Attach your security badge to the green identification tag located in the Technical Specialist Coordinator Emergency Response Position Manual.

f. Maintain a log using Form ER 2.0E, Emergency Facility Log.

g. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures 'in your position packet.

2. MANPOWER ASSESSMENT

a. Assist the OSC Coordinator in initiating immediate manpower planning efforts to support OSC activation.

,q

\ )

%' NOTE Daytime response may require initial assignment based on the actual response time to the OSC. As additional personnel respond for a particular position, decide who should be the initial responder and who are backup responders,

b. If applicable, direct excess responders to report to the Inprocessing Center assembly area until further notice,

c. When directed by the OSC Coordinator, contact the Maintenance Coordinator located in the TSC and determine areas requiring technical assistance. (Ref. 6.12)

d. Request the Maintenance Coordinator obtain the required Specialty Technical Assistant (s).

HOIE The assembly area (Inprocessing Center) is activated only during normal working hours and will be terminated after all ERO facilities are staffed.

/~'%

k-) ER 3.2E Rev. 19 Page 1 of 2

i' TECHNICAL SPECIALIST COORDINATOR CHECKLIST (Continued)

. INITIAL

e. Evaluate and provide periodic manpower requirements to the O

Maintenance Coordinator based on the following:

(1) Number of teams and assigned tasks, (2) long-term schsduling, and (3) Available Specialty Technical Assistants and current or anticipated special needs,

f. Develop, in conjunction with the OSC Coordinator and the Maintenance Coordinator a shift schedule for 24-hour staffing using Form ER 3.3M, Manpower Planning.

3. SPECIALTY TECHNICAL ASSISTANT (STA)

a. Ensure STA(s) sign in on Form ER 3.3M, Manpower Planning, and card in at card reader.

b. Brief STA(s) on current plant conditions and ongoing work.

c. Instruct STA(s) to attach security badge to the green identification tag located in the OSC storage locker.

d. Assign tasks as required by repair / corrective actions.

4. TEAM FORMATION Assist in repair and corrective action team formation requests as follows:

a. Task identification / definition (obtain additional information from the TSC Engineering Staff as needed) .

b. Required skills, procedures and drawings,

c. Identify equipment or systems that are or may be made inoperable or damage by team actions,

d. Assist in the formulation of special repair procedures and ensure repair / corrective action team members are briefed.

5. DEACTIVATION Submit all emergency documentation to the OSC Coordinator.

1 ER 3.2E Rev. 19 Page 2 of 2 l

1

% ' j i

ER 3.3 P:g3 1 Rev. 18 f

y.. AMMISTRATIVE FROCEDURE COVER FORM A, IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ER 3.3 REVISION 18 TITLE EMERGENCY OPERATIONS FACILITY OPERATIONS i

ORIGINATOR J. W. Baer

-1. Does this procedure / procedure revision:

a. Make changes in the facility as described in the UFSAR7 O Yes E No

b. Make changes in procedures as described in the UFSAR7 O Yes E No

c. Involve tests or experiments not described in the UFSAR7 ~ O Yes E No

d. Involve changes to the existing Operating License or require additional license requirements? O Yes E No

2. If any of. the above questions are answered yma, a safety evaluation per the Regulatory Compliance Manual (NARC) is required. (The individual performing the above review shall have completed 10 CFR 50.59 training.)

B. MANAGER / DEPARTMENT SUPERVISOR APPROVAL TITLE SIGNATURE DJJE 9d M 4As ce mm I I C. NUCLEAR OUALITY SERVICES REVIEW TITLE SIGNATURE D6IE N lA D. SORC REVIEW SORC MEETING NO. h8 N E. APPROVAL FOR IMPLEMENTATION l])/]pf -

t///f/f.r' 05/03/95

APpRChAL DATE EFFECTIVE DATE STAT' ION [ RECTOR l 1

i SM 6.1A tQ Rev. 13 V ,

ER 3.3 Pcgs 2 Rev. 18 CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS COVER 1 18 CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS 2-5 18 1.0 OBJECTIVES 6 18 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 6 2.1 EOF SECURITY PERSONNEL 6 2.2 RESPONSE MANAGER 6 2.3 EOF COORDINATOR 6 2.4 DOSE ASSESSMENT SPECIALIST 6 2.5 TECHNICAL ASSISTANT 6 2.6 0FFSITE MONITORING COORDINATOR 6 2.7 SECURITY COORDINATOR 6 2.8 RADIOLOGICAL ASSISTANT 7 18 2.9 ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES COORDINATOR 7 2.10 CORPORATE SUPPORT MANAGER 7 2.11 HEALTH AND SAFETY COORDINATOR 7 2,12 LICENSING COORDINATOR 7 2.13 INDUSTRY LIAISON 7 2.14 EMERCENCY COMMUNICATIONS COORDINATOR 7 2.15 TECHNICAL ADVISOR (EOF) 7 2.16 ECCC WRITER / COMMUNICATOR 7 2.17 EOF ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF 7 2.18 JOINT OWNERS LIAISON 7 2.19 METPAC OPERATOR 8 18 2.20 DOCUMENT CONTROL CENTER COORDINATOR 8 2.21 MATERIAL AND LOGISTICS COORDINATOR 8 O.

i

gm . .. ,....r . - . . . , . . . .

. ? .: qf s

y

^ '

' ER 3.3 -Pegs'3 Reve 18' p

CONTENTS'AND REVISION STATUS-

}f -

[\,

r i CONTENTS PAGE NO. PAGE REV. J

.)

i 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.22. DOSIMETRY RECORDS PERSONNEL -

8 18 -

6 2.23 DOSE ASSESSMENT PERSONNEL 8 2.24 ECCC CLERK 8

.2.25 ERO TECHNICAL LIAISON- 8 2.26 TRAINING CENTER STAFF 8

-3.0 PRECAUTIONS 8 4.0 8 PREREQUISITES

- 5.0 ACTIONS 9- 18 5.1 EOF SECURITY PERSONNEL 9 f

5.2 DOSE ASSESSMENT PERSONNEL CHECKLIST 10 18 5.3 ' RESPONSE MANAGER 10 s

5.4 EOF COORDINATOR 10 5.5 DOSE ASSESSMENT SPECIALIST 10 5.6 TECHNICAL ASSISTANT 10 5.7 0FFSITE MONITORING COORDINATOR 10 5.8 SECURITY COORDINATOR 10 5.9 RADIOLOGICAL ASSISTANT. 10 5.10 ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES COORDINATOR- 10 5.11 CORPORATE SUPPORT MANAGER 10 5.12 HEALTH AND SAFETY COORDINATOR 10 5.13 LICENSING COORDINATOR 11' .18 5.14 INDUSTRY LIAISON 11 5.15 EMERCENCY COMMUNICATIONS COORDINATOR (ECC) 11 fj 4

'5.16 TECHNICAL ADVISOR (EOF) 11 l

.I ;

ER 3.3 Pega 4 Rev. 18 CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS 5.0 ACTIONS 5.17 ECCC WRITER / COMMUNICATOR 11 18 5.18 EOF ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF 11 5.19 JOINT OWNERS LIAISON 11 5.20 METPAC OPERATOR 11 5.21 DOCUMENT CONTROL CENTER COORDINATOR 11 5.22 MATERIAL AND IDGISTICS COORDINATOR 11 5.23 DOSIMETRY RECORDS PERSONNEL 11 5.24 ECCC CLERK 12 18 5.25 ERO TECHNICAL LIAISON 12 5.26 TRAINING CENTER STAFF 12

6.0 REFERENCES

12 7.0 ATTACHMENTS Figure 1, Emergency Operations Facility Layout 13 18 Figure 2, Emergency Operations Facility Staff 14 18 Figure 3, Emergency Access Control Measures for the EOF 15 18 Figure 4, Instructions for Operating the Standby Diesel Generator 16 18 Figure 5, EOF Sample Return Area Layout 17 18 Figure 6, Release Definition 18 18 Figure 7, Sample News Release - UNUSUAL EVENT 19 18 Figure 8, Sample News Release - ALERT 20-21 18 Figure 9, Sample News Release - SITE AREA EMERGENCY 22-23 18 Figure 10, Sample News Release - GENERAL EMERGENCY 24-25 18 Figure 11, Offsite Monitoring and Sampling Team Deployment Flowchart 26 18 Figure 12, EOF Dosimetry Issue Flowchart 27 18 Figure 13, YTD Transit Card 28 18 Figure 14, EOF Dosimetry Return Card 29 18 Figure 15, EOF Dosimetry Return Flowchart 30 18 Figure 16, Post-Emergency Organizations 31 18 O

i l

l ER 3.3 Pags 5 Rev. 18

. /N CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS i

m-CONTENTS PAGE NO. PAGE REV. j i

i 7.0 ATTACHMENTS d ER 3.3A, EOF Security Personnel Checklist 18 ER 3.3B, Emergency Response Personnel Requiring Site Access 15 ,

ER 3.3C, Dose Assessment Personnel Checklist 18 ;

ER 3.3D, Response Manager Checklist 18 l ER 3.3E, EOF Coordinator Checklist 18 )

J ER 3.3F, Dose Assessment Specialist Checklist 18 ER 3.3G, Radiological Status Board Update Form 15 l ER 3.3H, Technical Assistant Checklist lf l ER 3.3I, Offsite Monitoring Coordinator Checklist 16 l ER 3.3J, Security Coordinator Checklist 1E ER 3.3K, Radiological Assistant Checklist 18 ER 3.3L, Administrative Services Coordinator Checklist 18 ER 3.3M, Manpower Planning 18 ER 3.3N, Corporate Support Manager Checklist 18 ,

ER 3.3P, Plant Specific' Message Form for Seabrook Station Unit 1 15 l ER 3.3Q, Health and Safety Coordinator Checklist 18 ER 3.3R, Licensing Coordinator Checklist 18 ER 3.3S, Industry Liaison Checklist 18 ER 3,3T, Emergency Communications Coordinator (ECC) Checklist 18 1 r~~ ER 3.3U, Technical Advisor (EOF) Checklist 18 ER 3.3V, ECCC Writer / Communicator Checklist 18'

(

ER 3.3W, EOF Administrative Staff Checklist 18 ER 3.3X, Joint Owners Liaison Checklist 18 ER 3.3Y, METPAC Operator Checklist 18 ER 3.3Z, Document Control Center Coordinator Checklist 18 ER 3.3AA, Material and Logistics Coordinator Checklist 18 ER 3.3BB Cancelled ER 3.3CC Cancelled ER 3.3DD, Dosimetry Records Personnel Checklist 18 ER 3.3EE, Emergency Worker Call-In Report 15 l ER 3.3FF Cancelled ER 3.3GG, Offsite Monitoring and Sampling Team Exposure Tracking 15 ER 3.3HH, Current Year to Date Exposure 15 ER 3.3II, Emergency Dosimetry Issue Log 15 ER 3.3JJ, ECCC Clerk Checklist 18 ER 3.3KK, ERO Technical Liaison Checklist 18 ER 3.3LL, Training Center Staff Checklist 18

'O

ER 3.3 Pcga 6 Rev. 18 1.0 OBJECTIVES

\

This procedure specifies the actions required to activate and operate the Emergency Operations Facility (EOF). It also provides instruction for recovery from Site Area Emergency or General Emergency conditions.

2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 EOF SECURITY PERSONNEL Ensures that all response personnel entering the main entrance of the EOF are properly authorized prior to being badged for entry.

2.2 RESPONSE MANAGER

1. Provides overall direction to the emergency response organization.

2. Obtains NRC and State concurrence of a plan for termination of emergency conditions.

3. Provides management direction and guidance to the Site Emergency Director in his effort to return the Station to a safe condition once the emergency mitigation phase of a Station response has been completed.

2.3 EOF COORDINATOR

1. Evaluates radiological and meteorological data and formulates protective action recommendations. Also responsible for State notifications.

2. Offers to coordinate the efforts of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, State of New Hampshire, State of Maine and Seabrook Station regarding the formulation of re-entry and recovery protective actions.

2.4 DOSE ASSESSMENT SPECIALIST

1. Determines projected / actual offsite dose conditions from radiological release data.

2. Develops initial projected information regarding the location and extent of contamination of the environment following the termination of a release and its eventual complete dispersal. Coordinates the evaluation of sample analysis data obtained from all groups performing ingestion pathway sampling and develops information useful for the establishment of long-term protective actions.

2.5 TECHNICAL ASSISTANT Assists the Response Manager on the interpretation of the Station conditions.

2.6 0FFSITE MONITORING COORDINATOR Coordinates radiological emergency monitoring and sampling.

2.7 SECURITY COORDINATOR Coordinates all Station emergency security actions, including EOF access control measures.

i ER 3.3 Pega 7 Rev. 18

(] 2.8 RADIOLOGICAL ASSISTANT

~ . Coordinates radiological control measures at the EOF.

2.9 ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES COORDINATOR Provides administrative support and obtains additional resources to support the

-emergency effort.

2.10 CORPORATE SUPPORT MANAGER Directs licensing and offsite engineering support, assiste the EOF Coordinator in State notifications and the Response Manager in event logging and status board upkeep.

l 2.11 HEALTH AND SAFETY COORDINATOR l

! Coordinates accident / incident information with American Nuclear Insurers.

Communicates with the Yankee Engineering Support Center for coordination of their emergency support of offsite radiological and environmental monitoring and sampling.

Maintains Health Physics Network communication with the NRC.

2.12 LICENSING COORDINATOR l Coordinates resolution of licensing issues that may result from the emergency conditions or the mitigating actions that follow.

2.13 INDUSTRY LIAISON Coordinates all requests for support from industry organizations and Westinghouse.

2.14 EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS COORDINATOR Coordinates communication strategy between the Response Manager and the Emergency

News Manager including content of news releases.

2.15 TECHNICAL ADVISOR (EOF)

Provides technical expertise to assist Emergency Communications Coordinator and Media Center Technical Advisor. Reviews draft news releases for technical accuracy.

2.16 ECCC WRITER / COMMUNICATOR Maintains communication between the Emergency Communications Command Center at the EOF and the Media Center.

2.17 EOF ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF Provides administrative support to key Emergency Response Organization (ERO) functions, ensuring that accident information is disseminated and recorded in accordance with SSER procedures.

1 (O 2.18 JOINT OWNERS LIAISON Keeps the Joint Owners apprised of the emergency situation.

i

ER 3.3 Paga 8 l Rev. 18 l l

2.19 METPAC OPERATOR Operates the METPAC Computer System to evaluate the offsite dose impact from a O'!

radiological release.

2.20 DOCUMENT CONTROL CENTER COORDINATOR Provides the EOF staff with updated copies of Station prints, procedures and vendor references supporting the accident analyses and coordinates Nuclear Network activities.

2.21 MATERIAL AND LOGISTICS COORDINATOR Provides the EOF staff with the resources necessary to complete their assignments and assists in the acquisition of those resources not readily available.

2.22 DOSIMETRY RECORDS PERSONNEL Issues dosimetry, tracks doses of offsite monitoring teams and dose reporting for emergency response personnel. Coordinates with YNSD TLD Van Coordinator as requested.

2.23 DOSE ASSESSMENT PERSONNEL Assists in the dissemination of dose assessment information to emergency response organization personnel and other officials.

2.24 ECCC CLERK Provides administrative support to ECCC p rsonnel.

2.25 ERO TECHNICAL LIAISON Notifies and interfaces with the New Hampshire Public Utilities Commission (NHPUC) and the Massachusetts Emergency Management Agency (MEMA) Nuclear Engineer.

2.26 TRAINING CENTER STAFF Assists the Technical Assistant with monitoring plant operational data.

3.0 PRECAUTIONS Activation of the New Hampshire Incident Field Office (IFO) is not the responsibility of the Seabrook Station emergency response organization.

4.0 PREREOUISITES

1. An Alert, Site Area Emergency or General Emergency has been declared in accordance with Procedure ER 1.1, Classification of Emergencies.

2. Prior to declaring Recovery, the following plant conditions exist:

a. Radiation levels of in-station areas are stable or are decreasing with time.

'R' a n

ER 3.3 Paga 9 Rev. 18

- ^'s. - 4.0 PREREOUISITES I j-

>~ b. As appropriate'to the emergency condition, the reactor and associated systems are in a safe and stable condition as indicated by:

(1) The reactor is shut down and criticality controls are in effect (only if reactor shutdown was required by the emergency condition).

(2) The core is being adequately cooled.

(3) Control has been established over containment pressure and temperature.

(4) An adequate heat transfer path to an ultimate heat sink has been established.

(5) Primary system pressure is under control.

c. Any fire, flooding, earthquake or similar initiating events are either under control or have ceased.

d. Contaminated, injured personnel have been transferred to a hospital-or received appropriate medical treatment.

-s e. Releases of radioactive material to the environment are either I i under control or have ceased.

O

f. Specified corrective emergency actions have been completed and the Station is in the appropriate operating mode, and notifications are complete.

3. YNSD support will be implemented in accordance with appropriate YAEC procedures.

5.0 ACTIONS E91 Telephone numbers for contacts referenced in the checklists are available in the Emergency Response Telephone Directory.

5.1 EOF SECURITY PERSONNEL Refer to Form ER 3.3A, EOF Security Personnel Checklist, for required actions for this position.

' t'3 V

ER 3.3 Pegs 10 Rev. 18 5.2 DOSE ASSESSMENT PERSONNEL CHECKLIST Refer to Form ER 3.3C, Dose Assessment Personnel Checklist, for required actions for this position.

5.3 RESPONSE MANAGER Refer to Form ER 3.3D, Response Manager Checklist, for required actions for this position.

5.4 EOF COORDINATOR Refer to Form ER 3.3E, EOF Coordinator Checklist, for required actions for this position.

5.5 DOSE ASSESSMENT SPECIALIST Refer to Form ER 3.3F, Dose Assessment Specialist Checklist, for required actions for this position.

5.6 TECHNICAL ASSISTANT Refer to Form ER 3.3H, Technical Assistant Checklist, for required actions for this position.

5.7 0FFSITE MONITORING COORDINATOR Refer to Form ER 3.31, Offsite Monitoring Coordinator Checklist, for required actions for this position.

5.8 SECURITY COORDINATOR Refer to Form ER 3.3J, Security Coordinator Checklist, for required actions for this position.

5.9 RADIOLOGICAL ASSISTANT Refer to Form ER 3.3K, Radiological Assistant Checklist, for required actions for this position.

5.10 ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES COORDINATOR Refer to Form ER 3.3L, Administrative Services Coordinator Checklist, for required actions for this position.

5 11 CORPORATE SUPPORT MANAGER Refer to Form ER 3.3N, Corporate Support Manager Checklist, for required actions for this position.

5.12 HEALTH AND SAFETY COORDINATOR Refer to Form ER 3.3Q, Health and Safety Coordinator Checklist, for required actions for this position.

ER 3.3 Page 11 Rev. 18 5.13 LICENSING COORDINATOR O Refer to Form ER 3.3R, Licensing Coordinator Checklist, for required actions for this position.

5.14 INDUSTRY LIAISON Refer to Form ER 3.3S, Industry Liaison Checklist, for required actions for this position.

5.15 EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS COORDINATOR (ECC)

Refer to Form ER 3.3T, Emergency Communications Coordinator (ECC) Checklist, for required actions for this position.

5.16 TECHNICAL ADVISOR (EOF)

Refer to Form ER 3.3U, Technical Advisor (EOF) Checklist, for required actions for this position.

5.17 ECCC WRITER / COMMUNICATOR Refer to Form ER 3.3V, ECCC Writer / Communicator Checklist, for required actions for this position.

5.18 EOF ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF O Refer to Form ER 3.3W, EOF Administrative Staff Checklist, for required actions for this position.

5.19 JOINT OWNERS LIAISON Refer to Form ER 3.3X, Joint Owners Liaison Checklist, for required actions for this position.

5.20 METPAC OPERATOR Refer to Form ER 3.3Y, METPAC Operator Checklist, for required actions for this position.

5.21 DOCUMENT CONTROL CENTER COORDINATOR Refer to Form ER 3.3Z, Document Control Center Coordinator Checklist, for required actions for this position.

5.22 MATERIAL AND LOGISTICS COORDINATOR Refer to Form ER 3.3AA, Material and Logistics Coordinator Checklist, for required actions for this position.

5.23 DOSIMETRY RECORDS PERSONNEL Refer to Form ER 3.3DD, Dosimetry Records Personnel Checklist, for required actions for this position.

i ER 3.3 Pc.go 12 Rev. 18 5.24 ECCC CLERK Refer to Form ER 3.3JJ, ECCC Clerk Checklist, for required actions. i 5.25 ERO TECHNICAL LIAISON Refer to Form ER 3.3KK, ERO Technical Liaison, for required actions for this position.

5.26 TRAINING CENTER STAFF Refer to Form ER 3.3LL, Training Center Staff Checklist, for required actions for this position.

6.0 REFERENCES

1. ER 1.1, Classification of Emergencies

2. ER 2.0, Emergency Notification Documentation Forms Procedure

3. ER 3.5, Media Center Activation

4. ER 4.3, Radiation Protection During Emergency Conditions 1

5. ER 5.2, Site Perimeter and Offsite Monitoring and Environmental Sampling

6. ER 5.3, Operation of the METPAC System l

7. ER 5.4, Protective Action Recommendations l 8. CD1332.00, Security Response to a Declared Radiological Emergency

9. NRC Inspection Report No. 50-443/86-18-01

10. Memo SEP901118, NHPUC Contacts During Emergencies

11. Ingestion Pathway Tracking (IPT) Software Technical Reference Manual

12. Ingestion Pathway Tracking Software User Manual

13. YAEC Technical Description of the SB METPAC System

14. SS# 25564, Establishing Efficiencies for Field Calculations of Radioactive Activity on Air Sample Cartridges, June 16, 1986

15. NRC Inspection Report No. 50-433/89-19

16. Health Physics Department Procedures

17. Canberra Series 85 Multichannel Analyzer Operations Manual

18. ER 4.6, Offsite Monitoring and Decontamination I

19. Memorandum SEP921168 l

,-~.

I , ,

f i*

\ t r.

% %j e

EPLAN\E070004 "

FIGURE 2 ER 3.3 Page 14

- - - '18 EMERGENCY OPERATIONS FACILITY (EOF) STAFF .

~~a tW E l l l l 1 m m. F cl. l x,,, _Fii.dih 1 asma l

c'"~T bcod - i bred - i

=

ama = 'tp:: '

l E- i z sw 1 I l i i i

I accc ctasm w-teca moviso.

I r----------. ry i , my , ,

_ _ __ _l .43c ...

wacuusi

--g -1,g.*s

,ct, c0Memmcaise

-i.

, ; g ;

bM E

"'liatll'."a "' 4,'A w.c t== -l

- i i - -

> .. i i _ t_d7, - ii l l

%'i"dm i .

t r..mJ m.- :

c .- ca

- -si -

===ac caro,.

-i i -i < t:M:r:r:j <- iz W

mm.E.T >

TITLE ERO tu TE.Oe.s.tC4.

sa "d"s" a

gg',,, '

gM,, M eY.v."

ca S' i

- ,. - > - > - i i a- i i e- i i SECun a.ettsOns.E0

-s LI.E peICATES OptSIK citcase21198 l e- . . c.L

[ ,w=e , ,

tif . . . To.m.

,-= .u-I i ne s s

'7'"' cEY

- 1 A*

- f z i

4 /18 /515

04/03/95 ER 3.3 Pcg2 15 FIGURE 3 "** * ' 18 EMERGENCY ACCESS CONTROL MEASURES FOR THE EOF O

MAY USE NATURAL FENCE %

BARRIER RATHER THAN PERSONNEL FRISKER STATION STANCHIONS EMERGENCY VEHICLE b

FRISK AREA -* B TRANSFORMER STATION MONITORING TEAM DISPATCH AREA

\

WASTE STORAGE DRUMS -

3 p MAIN ENTRANCE N FRISKER 4 4 -

CLEAN k WALKWAY GUARDo (/

HOUSE _R_t n

10F/ EOF /JTIC STAFF ~

WALK-WAY GATE q84 PARK]NG AREA *""'~~~~' 0 l l'q

.......J $

E lO 1. ALL MONITORING TEAMS RETURNING TO

, j THE EOF WILL BE REQUIRED TO REPORT TO THE EMERGENCY VEHICLE FRISK

\ ,e j

\

TRAFFIC AREA TO CHECK THEIR VEHICLE FOR CONTAMINATION. HAVING COMPLETED THIS ACTION THEY SHOULO REPORT TO THE hhhNG E EOF.

< ROUTING SIGN 2. A RA010i.0GICAL ACCIDENT WHICH CREATES SURFACE CONTAMINATION WILL Co(%\','e' REQUIRE THE RADIOLOGICAL AS$1STANT TO ESTABLISH TWO FRISKING STATIONS.

ONE AT THE ENTRANCE TO ROUTE 2 FOR

i* INCOMING RESPONSE PERSONNEL AND ONE AT THE ENTRANCE TO THE MONITORING TEAM DISPATCH AREA.

.O ALL CONTAMINATED PERSONNEL WILL BE ql' REQUIRED TO ENTER VIA ROUTE 1 he THE POTENTIAL CONTAMINATION ZONE)

AN6 REPORT TO THE PERSONNEL FRISKER STATION WHEREUPON PERSONNEL DECON-TAMINATION EFFORTS. INCLUDING SHOWER.

WILL BE INITIATE 0. ALL RESPONDING PERSONNEL WHO HAVE NOT BEEN EXPOSE 0 TO THE PLUME WILL BE ALLOWED TO ENTER / EXIT VIA ROUTE 2.

T:

- e.

ll' ER.3.3_! Pegs'16 <

ik [O Rev. 18

.j "

C '

f' -

FIGURE 4

( INSTRUCTIONS FOR OPERATING THE STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR 4

4 1.0 STARTING

1. EIf conditions allow, verify oil level prior to starting the diesel.

2. Depress the engine START button and hold until engine starts. If start does not occur within 30 seconds, refer to emergency checks listed

'below.

3. Allow engine to'run for 5 minutes to warm up.

2.0 LOADING / UNLOADING GENERATOR

1. Turn circuit breakers "CU2" and "AH2" (located on Panel 1C) to the "0FF" position.

2. Push " TRANSFER TO EMERGENCY" switch, located at right of door, to the incoming from generator position. Generator is now supplying building t

load.

3. Log start and run hours, water temperature, oil pressure and charge amps in diesel log book located in utility. room next to outside door.

4. To unload the generator and return to utility power, push the " TRANSFER TO NORHAL" switch to the incoming from normal source position.

('

5. Turn circuit breakers "CU2" and "AH2" (located on Panel 1C) to the "0N" position.

3.0 STOPPING ENGINE

1. Allow 5 to 10 minutes of unloaded run time to cool generator and engine.

2. Depress the engine STOP button to stop engine.

3. Verify engine stops and reset the fuel rack trip on the engine. Fuel rack trip is inside the left door of the diesel generator.

4.0 EMERGENCY CHECKS Check fuel rack trip to ensure it has been properly reset. If not, turn large throttle knob clockwise (or to "RUN") until solenoid latches on smaller knob.

Check overspeed shutdown solenoid trip and ensure it is in its reset position.

Overspeed solenoid is inside the right door of the generator. Lift the solenoid up and ensure that the air box lever is latched in the open position. The air box lever is painted red and should be latched with the handle down.

If the above protection and shutdown trips are found to be in their operational position, call a technician at once to check engine. q l

ER 3.3 Page 17' .

Rev. 18 FICURE 5 EOF SAMPLE RETURN AREA TAYOUT PERSONFEL

, DECON LOCKER MONITORING TEAM DISPATCH AREA 2 BUILDING NORTH I WASTE CONTAINER N O m ::: C

..D.

FRISKER -> E ,/

's 's sat 1PLE TRANSFER

,WW *,. ,s

,' 'l, 'Y'Y .*/

TABLE STANCHION jj;,,,;,

'i t t s's

FRISKER ,;,;,p'# .*'4 - R0PE

' 'is' l SAMPLE ^

C DECON 3 N

PORT TAER\ .

. SHOWERi'

[

i ROLL-UP ,

DOOR ENTRANCE e O O

r.'

l ER 3.3 Page 18 l

- Rev. 18

- fm FIGURE 6 i RELEASE DEFINITION

1. A " release" for purposes of comoletine Form ER 2.0B, State Notification Fact i I

Sheet, Block 5, is defined as follows:

Radioactive material is being released to the environeent as indicated by radiation monitoring instrumentation or based upon Response Manager judgement, and release of the material is directly attributable to the event.

2. A " release" for purposes of reauirine offsite dose assessment (i.e., a METPAC run) is defined as follows:

l A. Wide Range Gas Monitor (WRGM) High Alarm (ICC225).

B B. Main Steam Line Monitor High Alarm with an Open ASDV or SRV on the affected main steam line.

E C. The results of effluent analysis or site boundary monitoring indicate dose rate 2 06 arem/hr.

O

3. During an Alert, Site Area Emergency or General Emergency, a " release" for purposes of recuirine activation of the remote monitoring and decontamination ane.a e at Schiller Station is the same as number 2 above.

1 l

l l

(

ER 3.3 Piga 19 Rev. 10 FIGURE 7 SAMPLE NEWS RELEASE - UNUSUAL EVENT SEABROOK STATION NEWS PACE 1 of (No. OF PAGES] CONTACT:

(603) 474-9521 ext. 2722, 2725, 2709 THIS [IS/IS NOT] A DRILL

[ DAY OF WEEK]

[ MONTH, DATE, YEAR]

[ TIME a.m./p.m.]

Release # 1 SEABROOK, N.H. - Seabrook Station control-room operators declared an " unusual event" at the plant at [ TIME a.m./p.m.], [ DAY OF UEEK).

An unusual event is the lowest of four emergency categories that apply to nuclear power plants, as defined by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission.

The plant (HAS/HAS NOT] released radioactive material due to this incident.

Control-room operators declared the unusual event because (CAUSE OF DECIARATION], said (NAME), spokesman for Seabrook Station. [ ADDITIONAL BACKGROUND INFORMATION.]

Operators . . .

[ARE CONTINUING TO OPERATE THE PLANT AT _ PERCENT POWER.)

[ARE SHUTTING DOWN THE PLANT, CURRENTLY AT _ PERCENT POWER.]

[ SHUT DOWN THE PLANT AT (TIME a.m /p.m.)]

Technicians are working to assess and correct the situation. Seabrook Station has informed federal and state authorities about the incident.

There [HAVE BEEN/HAVE BEEN NO] personnel injuries associated with this incident. (IF INJURIES, INCLUDE ADDITIONAL AVAILABLE INFORMATION.]

A recorded telephone message providing information about the incident is available by dialing (800) 774-4771.

[ APPROVED: }

[DATE/ TIME: )

9

ER 3.3 Pzgs 20 Rev. 18 FIGURE 8 SAMPLE NEWS RELEASE - ALERT s,'

SEABROOK STATION NEWS PAGE 1 of [No. OF PAGES] CONTACT:

1-800-458-2408 THIS (IS/IS NOT] A DRILL (DAY OF WEEK]

[ MONTH, DATE, YEAR]

[ TIME a.m./p.m.]

Release # 1 SEABROOK, N.H. - Seabrook Station control-room operators declared an " alert" at the plant at [ TIME a.m./p.m.], [ DAY OF WEEK].

An alert is the second lowest of four emergency categories that apply to nuclear power plants, as defined by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission.

The plant [HAS/HAS NOT] released radioactive material due to this incident.

Control-room operators declared the alert because (CAUSE OF DECLARATION], said

[NAME), spokesman for Seabrook Station. [ ADDITIONAL BACKGROUND INFORMATION.]

)

x_) Operators . . .

[ARE CONTINUING TO OPERATE THE PLANT AT - PERCENT POWER.]

(ARE SHUTTING DOWN THE PLANT, CURRENTLY AT - PERCENT POWER.]

[ SHUT DOWN THE PLANT AT (TIME a.m./p.m.)]

Technicians are working to assess and correct the situation. Seabrook Station has informed federal and state authorities about the incident.

There [HAVE BEEN/HAVE BEEN NO] personnel injuries associated with this incident. [IF INJURIES, INCLUDE ADDITIONAL AVAIIABLE INFORMATION.] l New Hampshire residents should listen to their local radio stations for Emergency Broadcast Messages from the Office of Emergency Management. Primary radio !

stations are WOKQ FM (97.5) and WMYF AM (1540). l q

i f }

N.)

fT ER 3.3 Paga 21 Rev. 18 FIGURE 8 SAMPLE NEWS RELEASE - ALERT (Continued)

Massachusetts residents should listen to their local radio stations for Emergency troadcast Messages from the Massachusetts Emergency Management Agency.

l Primary radio stations are WEGQ FM (93.7), VLYT FM (92.5), WCCM AM (800) and WHAV AM (1490).

In addition, special phone numbers have been established for the public to obtain information about this situation:

A recorded message about plant conditions: (800) 774-4771.

An " answer line" for public inquiries: (800) 458 2407 NOTE TO NEWS MEDIA -- A dedicated phone number has been established for media inquiries: 1-800-458-2408. This phone number is for use by reporters only.

Separate phone numbers are available for the general public, as noted above.

(APPROVED: ]

[DATE/ TIME: )

O O ,

1 i

l

7 ER 3.3 Peg'a 22 Rev. 18 FIGURE 9 SAMPLE NEWS RELEASE - SITE AREA EMERGENCY

)

SEABROOK STATION NEWS PAGE 1 of [No. OF PAGES] CONTACT:

1-800-458-2408 THIS (IS/IS NOT] A DRILL

[ DAY OF WEEK]

(MONTH, DATE, YEAR]

(TIME a.m./p.m.]

Release # 1 SEABROOK, N.H. - Seabrook Station control-room operators declared a " site area emergency" at the plant at (TIME a.m./p.m.), [ DAY OF WEEK].

A site area emergency is the second highest of four emergency categories that apply to nuclear power plants, as defined by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory commission.

The plant (HAS/HAS NOT] released radioactive material due to this incident.

Control-room operators declared the site area emergency because (CAUSE OF DECIARATION] , said (NAME] , spokesman for Seabrook Station. [ ADDITIONAL BACKGROUND INFORMATION.]

V Operators . . .

[ ARE CONTINUING TO OPERATE THE PIANT AT _ PERCENT POWER. ]

( ARE SHUTTING DOWN THE PLANT, CURRENTLY AT _ PERCENT POWER. ]

[SERIT DOWN THE PLANT AT (TIME a.m./p.m.)]

Technicians are working to assess and correct the situation. Seabrook Station has informed federal and state authorities about the incident. j There [HAVE BEEN/HAVE BEEN NO] personnel injuries associated with this i I

incident. (IF INJURIES, INCLUDE ADDITIONAL AVAILABLE INFORMATION.]

New Hampshire residents should listen to their local radio stations for Emergency Broadcast Messages from the Office of Emergency Management. Primary radio stctions are WOKQ FM (97.5) and WMYF AM (1540). ;

m

ER 3.3 P2ga 23 Rev. 18 FIGURE 9 SAMPLE NEWS RELEASE - SITE AREA EMERGENCY (Continued)

Massachusetts residents should listen to their local radio stations for Emergency Broadcast Messages from the Massachusetts Emergency Management Agency.

l Primary radio stations are WEGQ D1 (93.7), WLYT FM (92.5), WCCM AM (800) and WHAV AM (1490).

In addition, special phone numbers have been established for the public to obtain information about this situation:

A recorded message about plant conditions: (800) 774-4771.

An " answer line" for public inquiries: (800) 458-2407 NOTE TO NEWS MEDIA -- A dedicated phone number has been established for media inquiries: 1-800-458-2408. This phone number is for use by reporters only.

Separate phone numbers are available for the general public, as noted above.

(APPROVED: }

[DATE/ TIME: }

O O

~ ~

..' ER 3.3 Pags 24 Rev.'18

. ' FIGURE 10-(. ^

-SAMPLE NEWS RELEASE - CENERAL EMERCENCY

n SEABROOK STATION NEWS CONTACT:

PACE 1 of [No. 0F PAGES]'

1-800-458-2408 THIS [IS/IS NOT] A DRILL

'[ DAY OF WEEK]

[ MONTH, DATE, YEARJ

[ TIME a.m./p.m.]

Release # 1 SEABROOK, N.H. - Seabrook Station control-room operators declared a:" general-emergency" at the plant at (TIME a.m./p.m.], [ DAY OF WEEK].

A general emergency is the highest of four emergency categories that' apply to nuclear power plants, as defined by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission.

The plant [HAS/HAS NOT] released radioactive material due to this-incident. l Control-room operators declared the general emergency because [CAUSE OF DECLARATION], said [NAME), spokesman for Seabrook Station. [ ADDITIONAL BACKGROUND INFORMATION.]

Operators . . .

[ARE CONTINUING TO OPERATE THE PLANT AT _ PERCENT POWER.]

[ARE SHUTTING DOWN THE PLANT, CURRENTLY AT _. PERCENT POWER.]

[ SHUT DOWN THE PLANT AT (TIME a.m./p.m.)]

Technicians are working to assess and correct the situation. Seabrook Station has informed federal and state authorities about the incident.

There [HAVE BEEN/HAVE BEEN NO] personnel injuries associated with this incident. [IF INJURIES, INCLUDE ADDITIONAL AVAILABLE INFORMATION.]

New Hampshire residents should listen to their local radio stations for ,

Emergency Broadcast Messages from the Office of Emergency Management. Primary radio l I

stations are WOKQ FM (97.5) and WMYF AM (1540). .l

ER 3.3 P:gs 25 Rev. 18 FIGURE 10 j SAMPLE NEWS RELEASE - GENERAL EMERGENCY l (Continued)

Massachusetts residents should listen to their local radio stations for Emergency Broadcast Messages from the Massachusetts Emergency Management Agency.

l Primary radio stations are VEGQ FM (93.7), VLYT FM (92.5), WCCM AM (800) and WHAV AM (1490).

In addition, special phone numbers have been established for the public to obtain information about this situation:

A recorded message about plant conditions: (800) 774-4771.

An " answer line" for public inquiries: (800) 458-2407 NOTE TO NEWS MEDIA -- A dedicated phone number has been established for media inquiries: 1-800-458-2408. This phone number is for use by reporters only.

Separate phone numbers are available for the general public, as noted above.

000 (APPROVED: }

(DATE/ TIME: ]

O O

ER.3.3 Pcgi 26 Rev. 18 FIGURE 11

.. -)

/'

%J 0FFSITE MONITORING AND SAMPLING TEAM DEPLOYMENT FLOWCHART Obsoin list of OMST t

W 1 V

l.

initial Yes FINIS No Coll OSC l

Deployment '

Available > Dosimetry issue

? ?

Yes No RPEWB5UM f

V i Fill out Port i Fill out Poril Form ER 3.3GG Form ER3.3GG V

nsm ER 4.3

, , , Inform OMC i

RAE Yes that an gm h

< 3,000 > mhe is --> Compl ete and sened by the mrom? w Response Monoger No w a V'

Complete Portil Form ER 3.3GG if Fillin RAE on OMST Briefing Form ER 5.25 if issue Dosimetry Using Form ER 3.311 OMC - Offsite Monitoring Coordinator OMST - Offsite Monitoring and Sampling Teams OSC - Operational Support Center 1r RAE - Remaining Allowable Exposure File Form ER 3.3GG s m eo m ioon and ER 4.3 Figure 4 os oppropriate nv (END

+

EMAN f070163.DGN l

ER 3.3 Pcg2 27 Rev. 18 FIGURE 12 EOF DOSIMETRY ISSUE FLOWCHART Go to OMST Seabrook Yes Nt* Yes g Deployment -

Station Radiation Monttonng 7 7

Worker? Team? pg g ,gg No No

)f Ensure Form )f ER 3.3 HH Is completed YTD F

)f y Notify RCC Complete YTD Transit Card using Form 3.3HH No A

7 Issue Dosimetry using Form ER 3.3 II f

Attach YTD Transit Card to TLD as appropriate

, Apply blank label OMFr - Offsite Man *nrtner and Sampling Teams to TLD YTD - Year to Data RCC - P*diat~+=t Controls Che~

SRPD - Self Reading Pocket Dosuneter TLD - ma t--* Deatmeter Give TLD along with !

Low and High Range SRPD to indMdual EPLAXAtF01H.DGN j l

END

^

.6 ;

c ER 3.3 Pags 28 Rev. 18

<l

. FIGURE 13 -l

fi YTD TRANSIT CARD i

f )' j l N./.

.J YTD TRANSIT CARD ,l Names SSN:

.YTDs mrom estimate / record Dose Limit Extended to- mrom

._ Initial O

4 9

8 1

4

-O

ER 3.3 Paga 29 Rev. 18 FIGURE 14 EOF DOSIMETRY RETURN CARD ~

EOF DOSIMETRY RETURN Names TLD#:

SRPD Estimated Doses Comments:

O l

l 1

1

^' ' ER 3.3 P gs'30 Rev. 18

.s >

FICURE 15 Y~N - EOF DOSIMETRY RETURN FLOWCHART

Le);

TLDs surveyed for. No g Direct personnel to the contamination? 7 . Radiological Assistant Yes a

w Assign priorities to TLDs W

Log SRFD results-and TLD information on Form ER 3.3II 1F Forward TIE to Northeast Utilities or YNSD for resdout as required 1F Re-zero SRFDs for reissue 1F Fill out exposure records-when results are available 1F Make notifications as required END SRPD .Self Reading Pocket Dosimeter TLD - Thermoluminescent Dosimeter 1

l l

EPIAN:E070176.DGN FIGURE 16 a$d'!a"*8*

POST-EMERGENCY ORGANIZATIONS RECOVERY COMI' LEMON OF PREREQUISITES OmmE MET RECOVERY NTROLED g MANAGER l -

l NORMAL I I l ; , RECOVERY EMERGENCY l MANAGER RESP NSE MADON RESPONSE I -

MANAGER g

SITE MANAGER ORGANIZATION ,g I EOF l l

1 SITE l STATION I I ORGANIZATION

~ MEDIA CENTER STATION I ~

I ORGANIZATION ORGANIZATION I

- fRGANIZATION

~

l

I g _ FEDERAL OFFSITE g g INTERFACE g I

- STATE INTERFACE I I I l l _ IPZ SAMPLING & l l 1 ANALYSIS SUPPORT l EMERGENCY l .l RESPONSE I TRANSITION I RECOVERY

. PHASE ml An above are 1-shin postions PHASE l PHASE NOTE- Recovery Manager would be SVP & CNO or designated Director.

31595 O O O

EOF SECURITY PERSONNEL CHECKLIST

1. ACTIVATION INITIAL Follow steps outlined in the Security Department Procedure

+

) a.

'/

- GD1332.00, EOF Checklist, and establish access control of the facility. Normal entry and exit will be only permitted via the EOF main entrance.

b. Attach your Station badge to the green identification tag located at your workstation.

I

c. Limit entry to personnel with a valid ID.

f EDIE - Valid ID is:

1) Seabrook Station badge

2) Official NH, MA, or ME State Badge

3) Official Federal ID (e.g., DOE, FDA, EPA, etc.)

4) Official NRC or FEMA Badge

d. If an individual does not have a valid ID, determine what role the individual plays in the emergency response effort. Page or locate appropriate interfaces within the EOF /EOC requesting that they report to the EOF entry station to identify the individual prior to allowing EOF access. Issue an EOF visitor badge and

! permit entry.

e. Direct all incoming response personnel to sign in on their respective roster board.

l

(g f. Periodically provide a copy of Form ER 3.3M, Manpower Planning, (EOF, JTIC section) to the Security Coordinator, logging the

( f date and time of issue.

g. Provide assistance to the Newington Station Access Cuard as needed.

s. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. NOTIFICATIONS

a. Contact Station security when necessary. Record conversations on Form ER 2.0E, Emergency Facility Log.

b. Contact Media Center security to determine their status and needs. Record conversations on Form ER 2.0E.

r c. Interface with the Industry Liaison concerning EOF access for support organization personnel. Record conversations on Form ER 2.0E.

d. Page the Licensing Coordinator upon arrival of NRC response personnel, b

V ER 3.3A Rev. 18 Page 1 of 2

EOF SECURITY PERSONNEL CHECKLIST .

t t

(Continued)

3. EOF OPERATIONS INITIAL

a. Interface with the Radiological Assistant concerning the return of offsite monitoring teams. Such action requires l

posting a security officer at the roll-up door. Record conversations on Form ER 2.0E.

I i b. Whenever applicable, notify the Station when the Security Coordinator authorizes site access.

1

( c. Badge emergency response personnel for site / protected area !

! access as directed by the Security Coordinator (i.e., for i personnel not currently having an active badge in the security !

system).

l l d. Retrieve the EOF access badge from those personnel leaving the facility and direct them to sign out on the EOF roster board.

e. If conditions require such action, all Station personnel l

leaving the site will report to the EOF to return their dosimetry.

l Direct those personnel to the dosimetry issue / receipt station.

l

4. DEACTIVATION

a. Determine shift status with the Security Coordinator.

b. Collect all EOF access badges from response personnel .

prior to their departure.

l l c. Forward all emergency documentation to the Security l Coordinator.

l ER 3.3A Rev. 18 S.

Page 2 of 2

DOSE ASSESSMENT PERSONNEL CHECKLIST

1. ACTIVATION INITIAL x ,) a. Sign in on the EOF roster board.

b. Obtain the Dose Assessment Personnel Emergency Response Position Manual and initiate this checklist.

c. Attach your Station badge to the green identification tag located at your workstation.

d. Verify operability of copy machines and adequacy of the paper supply.

e. Ensure the paper trays are present for documentation handling.

f. Assist METPAC Operator and Dose Assessment Specialist in establishing adequate supply of dose assessment forms.

g. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. ACCIDENT ASSESSMENT

a. Obtain logger trend printout from the Technical Assistant and give it to the METPAC Operator.

b. After each run of METPAC, copy and distribute the following:

h(,,j Documents Distribution

1. METPAC Input Data Log - Response Manager / EOF

2. METPAC Output Printout Coordinator

3. Plume Plot - Health and Safety

4. Status Board Update Form Coordinator *

- Emergency Communications Coordinator

- NH Emergency Management *

- Mass. Health Dept.*

- NRC Protective Measures Coordinator *

- NH Public Health *

- Dose Assessment Technician

- Maine Health Dept. Rep.*

Placed in appropriate mail slot at Dose Assessment area,

c. Update Radiological Status Board in the Emergency Coordination area as directed by the METPAC Operator or the Dose Assessment Specialist.

d. Depict approximate plume location on the plume EPZ map based on METPAC plume plots or as otherwise directed.

3, DEACTIVATION

,. Place' original documentation in chronological order and provide y)

( to Dose Assessment Specialist, ER 3.3C Rev. 18

RESPONSE MANAGER CHECKLIST

,- 1. ACTIVATION INITIAL

's }

'a . Sign in on the EOF roster board,

b. Obtain the Response Manager Emergency Response Position Manual and initiate this checklist,

c. Attach your Station badge .to. the green identification tag located at your workstation,

d. Direct the Administrative Services Coordinator to assign an individual to maintain a log for you using Form ER 2.0E.

Emergency Facility Log,

e. Contact the Site Emergency Director (SED) or Short Term Emergency Director (STED) to obtain a briefing on:

(1) Station status (2) radiological releases, if applicable (3) classification (4) notifications completed (5) protective action recommendations (PARS) status NOTE Ensure all completed notification forms have been transmitted

[~'} to the EOF from the Control Room /TSC.

C/

f. Review EOF organizational requirements (see Figure 2) against the EOF sign-in log to determine organizational status.

g. The following personnel should be present before the EOF is declared activated:

(1) EOF Coordinator (2) Dose Assessment Specialist (3) Technical Assistant (4) Corporate Support Manager

h. Brief the EOF Staff on the emergency status using the EOF page system, as conditions warrant.

1. Ensure the EOF Staff has completed or is nearing completion of the activation sections of its checklists.

J. Declare the EOF activated.

k. Inform the SED of EOF activation, t

i ER 3.3D Rev. 18 Fage 1 of 7

RESPONSE MANAGER CHECKLIST (Continued)

INITIAL l I

1. Assume the following responsibilities that may not be delegated.- (Ref. 6.10)

(1) Authorization of PARS (2) Authorization of State notifications (3) Authorization of news releases (4) Authorization of Nuclear Netwcrk releases

m. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. ACCIDENT ASSESSMENT

a. Obtain regular plant status brisfings from the SED. Direct the assigned logkeeper to document each telephone inquiry,

b. Conduct regular briefings for the EOF Staff.

3. PROTECTIVE ACTION RECOMMENDATIONS (PARS)

a. Obtain PARS from the EOF Coordinator.

b. Attempt ;o obtain PAR concurrence from appropriate NRC representative at the EOF before notification of State representatives.

CAUTION DO NOT UNDULY DEIAY STATE NOTIFICATION.

c. Authorize the FAR by signature in Block 6 of Form ER 2.0B.

d. Authorize the EOF Coordinator to make necessary PAR notifications.

e. Convene a meeting of available State and Federal agency representatives to discuss Seabrook Station's PAR and receive input from the offsite organizations on their intended actions /

response.

f. Review each step listed above upon reclassification of the event.

ER 3.3D Rev. 18 Page 2 of 7 1

I

RESPONSE MANAGER CHECKLIST (Continued) f~s CAITTION

)-

NOTIFICATIONS SHALL BE INITIATED WITHIN 15 MINUTES UPON RECIASSIFICATION OF THE EVENT OR FORMUIATION OF A NEW PAR. THE 15 MINUTE NOTIFICATION OF RECIASSIFICATION MUST BE MADE WHETHER OR NOT THERE ARE ANY PROTECTIVE ACTION RECOMMENDATIONS.

4. NOTIFICATIONS-

a. As needed, provide input to the EOF Coordinator for offsite notifications.

b. Authorize State notifications; review and sign forms as required.

NOTE The criteria to be used in determination of a radiological release are-in Figure 6.

c. Notify and provide a briefing to Seabrook Station executive management.

d. Conduct periodic briefings with State and Federal response officials. A suggested briefing agenda follows.

. Introductions e Current emergency classification level Brief summary of events to date O e Current plant status Status of event mitigation actions and event prognosis

Results of radiological assessments

Protective action recommendations (by NAESCO)

. Protective actions actually implemented (by_ States) e Summary of Federal and State response activities

. Level of media and political interest

. Open discussion / question and answer session

. Time of next briefing

5. MEDIA INTERFACE

a. Direct the Emergency Communications Coordinator to prepare regular updates for the media.

b. Review and authorize any news release.

6. MANPOWER / EQUIPMENT NEEDS

a. Ensure staffing according to Figure 2, Emergency Operations Facility Staff.

l

b. Authorize any deviation from the staffing recognized by Figure 2.

c. Direct the Corporate Support Manager to obtain additional manpower and equipment to support both EOF and onsite requests.

( )

ER 3.3D Rev. 18 Page 3 of 7 1 1

1 RESPONSE MANAGER CHECKLIST (Continued)

d. Monitor / approve requests for assistance to various industry and support h groups (e.g., Westinghouse and INFO), as necessary,

e. As requested by the State of New Hampshire or Massachusetts, coordinate obtaining and providing additional' support staff or resources. The Yankee Emergency Mutual Assistance Agreement (YEMAA) may be activated for this purpose. If the YEMAA is activated to support a request for monitoring and decontamination scaff, direct the contacted utility to ensure that designated personnel are not part of the Massachusetts Nuclear Incident Advisory Team (NIAT).

7. NRC INTERFACE

a. Conduct regular briefings for the NRC Director of Site Operations. _

b. Solicit input from the NRC regarding:

(1) PARS (2) news releases (3) licensing requirements

8. PLANNED RELEASES

a. Review Section 1 of Form ER 3.1M, Planned Radiological Releases Data.

Discuss the information with the Site Emergency Director.

b. Review Sections 2 and 3 of Form ER 3.lM. Discuss the information with the EOF Coordinator. When possible, discuss protective actions associated with the pending release and obtain concurrence of offsite authorities before a planned release is authorized.

c. Complete Section 4 of Form ER 3.lM.

d. Direct the SED to implement the release and associated sampling and monitoring actions.

e. Direct the EOF Coordinator to inform the States of the release and its projected duration.

f. Direct the Emergency Communications Coordinator to draft a news release on the event.

g. Notify offsite authorities when the action has been completed.

1 I

ER 3.3D Rev. 18 Page 4 of 7

RESPONSE MANACER CHECKLIST (Continued) ig) v

9. EMERGENCY TERMINATION AND RECOVERY When the risk posed by the emergency is clearly decreasing or has ceased, de-escalation or closeout of the emergency is appropriate. A combination approach is used and summarized in the table below.

Classification Event Event Downgrading Closeout via Closecut via Allowed? Termination? Recovery?

N/A Yes No Unusual Event Alert Yes Yes No Site Area Emergency Yes Yes No with no long term station damage Site Area Emergency Yes No Yes; may with long-term station occur after damage downgrading Ceneral Emergency Yes No Yes; may occur after downgrading

/

U N Prior to downgrading from a General Emergency, perform the following:

(1) Confer with the Site Emergency Director, Technical Assistant and other technical staff as conditions warrant to identify operational prerequisites for downgrading (e.g., redundant station power sources).

(2) Verify that operational prerequisites are in place and functioning.

(3) Review the basis for downgrading with cognizant state and federal authorities.

a. Confer with the Site Emergency Director, Technical Assistant and EOF Coordinator to determine whether actual / potential conditions warrant entry into a recovery mode.

b. If recovery is appropriate, direct the Site Emergency Director, Technical Assistant and EOF Coordinator to confer with their respective staffs and determine whether any radiological and/or operational conditions exist which would preclude entry into a recovery mode.

ER 3.3D Rev. 18 Page 5 of 7 1

l RESPONSE MANAGER CHECKLIST (Continued)

H.QIE Conditions required for declaring recovery are listed in Section 4, Prerequisites.

c. Direct the Site Emergency Director to develop an onsite recovery organization and shift schedule.

d. Designate an interim Recovery Manager to initiate development of an integrated recovery organization. Consider other members of the Response Manager pool for this assignment. Direct the Technical Assistant and EOF Coordinator to support the interim Recovery Manager in developing an offsite recovery organization and shift schedule.

e. Refer to Figure 16, Post-Emergency Organizations, for guidance for structuring the organizations from the emergency phase through the transitional phase to the recovery phase.

(1) The recovery organization should, to the degree practical, draw upon the functional departments and capabilities of the normal North Atlantic organization (e.g., Operations, Maintenance, Administrative Services, Planning and Scheduling, etc.). Refer to the North Atlantic organization chart when structuring the recovery organization.

(2) As needed, new recovery organization positions may be created.

(3) ERO positions may be carried over into the recovery organization if desired.

(4) Consider structuring the recovery organization such that offsite impacts on station recovery activities are minimized, i.e., keeping long-term governmental, regulatory, media, public and financial interface points at offsite locations (e.g., the EOF).

f. The organizational structure should take into account incident specifics and consider outside support organizations such as (1) UE&C (2) Westinghouse (3) Yankee Atomic Electric Company (4) Resources coordinated through INPO (5) Northeast Utilities

g. Direct key recovery organization members to prepare written prioritized work plans required to (1) maintain long-term Station stability (2) confirm the status of systems and equipment (3) confirm radiation and contamination conditions (4) repair damaged systems and equipment (5) remove contamination ER 3.3D Rev. 18 Page 6 of 7

RESPONSE MANAGER CHECKLIST (Continued) y,% .

?! : INITIAL (6) maintain doses to recovery personnel ALARA (7) minimize industrial hazards to recovery personnel (8) _ facilitate reentry into all Station areas'

_(9) maintain communications with the media and the public (10)' maintain communications with State. authorities:

_(11) maintain communications with regulatory agencies

h. Consider need for special re-entry and recovery procedures,. including (1) Exposure guidelines /A1 ARA (2) Work Control requirements (3) In-plant safety practices (4) Equipment maintenance, repair or replacement (5) Component design changes / modifications

1. As needed,' direct development, review and approval of new or revised procedures.

J. Review the NAMM, procedure NM 11800, Hazardous Condition Response Plan, to identify additional recovery considerations.

k. Review and approve the . recovery organization and a master action plan.

1. Review the proposed recovery organization, action plans, and the

-- date and time for entry into the recovery mode with the following:

(

(1) NRC representatives (2) FEMA representatives (3) State emergency response officials

m. Brief key ERO managers on the recovery organization, action plans, and date and time for entry into recovery mode.

n. Direct the Emergency Communications Coordinator to issue a news release concerning entry into the recovery mode.

o. Provide recovery assistance to State authorities, as requested,

p. Direct the administrative, financial and legal support necessary for the recovery organization.

10. DEACTIVATION Submit all emergency documentation to the Administrative Services Coordinator.

'l 1.

r

'l ER 3.3D

'~

Rev. 18 >

Page 7 of 7

EOF COORDINATOR CHECY1IST

'T 1. ACTIVATION INITIAL

)

a. Sign in on the EOF roster board.

b. Obtain the EOF Coordinator's Emergency Response Position Manual and initiate this checklist.

c. Attach your Station badge to the green identification tag located at your workstation.

d. Check workstation telephones for operability.

e. Initiate a log using Form ER 2.0E, Emergency Facility Log.

f. Obtain a briefing from the Response Manager.

g. If the Response Manager is unavailable, contact the Site Emergency Director (SED) for a briefing on (1) Station status (2) radiological releases, if applicable (3) classification (4) offsite notification status (5) protective action recommendations (PARS) status

h. Brief incoming personnel as they arrive, p Ensure that the Health and Safety Coordinator maintains the t 1 1.

Health Physics Network (HPN), if requested to do so by the NRC.

j. Interface with the NIAT Director of Radiation Control Program or designee as necessary.

k. Inform the Response Manager when responsibility for notifications and protective action recommendations can be assumed. __

l. For either a Site Area Emergency or a General Emergency, interface with the Administrative Coordinator and the Security Coordinator concerning release instructions for personnel in the Inprocessing Center assembly area based on radiological release status.

m. Obtain copies of all completed notification forms from the TSC.

n. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

p)

\

N' ER 3.3E

\

l Rev. 18 Page 1 of 5

I l

EOF COORDINATOR CHECKLIST l (Continued)

2. ACCIDENT / DOSE ASSESSMENT

a. Direct the Dose Assessment Specialist to project offsite dose rates and doses, and to verify the accuracy of the projections.

b. Direct the Dose Assessment Specialist to establish monitoring of the site perimeter, plume tracking and environmental sampling,

c. As required, request additional radiological or dose assessment support from the YAEC Engineering Support Center through the Industry Liaison.

d. Obtain radiological release data from the Dose Assessment Specialist.

NOTE The criteria to be used in determination of a Radiological Release are in Figure 6.

e. Obtain Station eperational data from the Technical Assistant.

f. Ensure that METPAC operation is initiated when applicable,

g. Incarface with the NIAT Director of Radiation Control regarding ra!iological issues.

3. CLASSIFICATION Provide the Response Manager with offsite dose projections or field monitoring data which may affect reclassification or protective action recommendations.

CAUTION THE ER 1.1, 12e INITIATING CONDITION FOR A CENERAL EMERCENCY CIASSIFICATION AND THE ER 5.4 GENERAL EMERGENCY PROTECTIVE ACTION CRITERIA ARE BASED ON DOSE VERSUS DOSE RATE.

4. PROTECTIVE ACTION RECOMMENDATIONS (PARS)

a. Determine initial PAR made by the Station.

b. Assume responsibility for the PAR process,

c. Ensure all forms and worksheets have been transmitted from the TSC.

d. Complete Form ER 5.4A, Plume Exposure Protective Action Recommendation (PAR) Worksheet.

ER 3.3E Rev. 18 Page 2 of 5

r !

EOF COORDINATOR CHECKLIST l

.(Continued)

e. Complete Form ER 2.08, State Notification Fact Sheet, with the. PAR results.

f. Review the results with the Response Manager and obtain his authorization,

g. Notify the appropriate state personnel present at the EOF of the PAR l results and give them a copy of Form ER 2.03. l 1

h. Cive Form ER 2.0B to the Corporate Support Manager. {

1 1

1. Determine protective actions implemented by State authorities, including !

precautionary actions; this can be accomplished during the periodic briefings conducted by the Response Manager. Ensure that protective action-related information is posted and kept current on the protective action status board, f J. Continue to review conditions and update PARS until the event is terminated.

k. When the evaluation process above results in no PAR, carefully review the Station conditions and prognosis with the Response Manager and Technical Assistant. Depending on the results of this review, consider issuing a precautionary PAR that is appropriate to the Station prognosis.

i

5. NOTIFICATIONS l

a. Complete Form ER 2.0B following reclassification or to recommend protective

( actions. The definition of a " release" as used in Block 5 of the form is-provided in Figure 6.

GUTION NOTIFICATIONS SHAIL BE INITIATED WITHIN 15 MINUTES UPON RECIASSIFICATION OF THE EVENT OR FORMUIATION OF A NEW PAR. 'IHE 15 MINUTE NOTIFICATION OF RECIASSIFICATION MUST BE MADE WHETHER OR NOT THERE ARE ANY PROTECTIVE ACIION RECOMMENDATIONS. ,

b. Obtain authorization for notification from Response Manager.

c. Give a copy to the Corporate Support Manager for State agency notification via the Nuclear Alert System.

d. Direct the Health and Safety Coordinator to report any changes in emergency status, offsite-dose status, and protective action recommendations via the Health Physics Network phone.

e. Approximately once every hour, obtain and complete Form ER 2.00, Followup Information Form. Obtain Response Manager approval and retain the form for use when the States call in.

/

' ER 3.3E Rev. 18 Page 3 of 5 j i

EOF COORDINATOR CHECKI.IST (Continued)

6. MANPOVER/ EQUIPMENT NEEDS Report manpower and equipment needs to the Administrative Services Coordinator.

7. RELEASE OF ASSEMBLY AREA PERSONNEL Inform the Administrative Services Coordinator if station radiological conditions require directing site personnel to the Remote Monitoring Area.

8. PLANNED RELEASES

a. Upon receipt of Form ER 3.lM from the Site Emergency Director, direct the Dose Assessment Specialist to complete Section 2 of the form,

b. Using the dose rate information from Part C of Section 2 of Form ER 3.1M, evaluate appropriate protective actions associated with the planned release using Procedure ER 5.4, Protective Action Recommendations, and document the results on Form ER 2.0B, State Notification Fact Sheet.

EQTI Use Section 3 of Form ER 5,4A to complete the required evaluation referenced by Step b above. The wind direction used should be the forecasted wind direction for the period that the release is to be initiated. The release duration used should be the actual time it would take to vent the entire source term through the defined release path.

c. Having completed Section 2 of Form ER 3.1M, coordinate discussions with offsite authorities (NH, MA, NRC) . The following topics should be reviewed:

(1) Reason for release, (2) Meteorological canditions and forecast information, (3) Protective actions currently in effect, (4) Additional Protective Actions required as a result of a planned release, (5) Offsite agency concerns regarding a planned release, particularly the release start time, (6) Appropriate media announcements regarding a planned release, (7) Monitoring activities associat,d with the planned release condition, and (8) Reporting requirements concerning release termination.

ER 3.3E Rev, 18 Page 4 of 5

r.

EOF COORDINATOR CHECKLIST (Continued)

INITIAL

/~$ d. After discussing the planned release with offsite authorities,

('") complete Section 3 ef Form ER 3.lM. Sign in the appropriate space and provide the entire form to the Response Manager.

e. Notify the remaining EOF representatives, and the Engineering Support Center of the planned release.

f. Direct the Dose Assessment Specialist to appropriately position Offsite Monitoring Teams and periodically report any recorded field observation.

9. REENTRY AND RECOVERY

a. Provide the Response Manager with radiological data necessary to support recovery operations.

b. Provide input regarding manpower and equipment needed for the recovery organization. 1 l c. Recommend that represented organizations make full use of

( available assessment resources at the EOF and other locations for the prompt determination of reentry and recovery strategies, l

l

d. Ensure the EOF staff provides the required services and equipment to expedite the assessment of radiological samples fg taken in support of reentry and recovery activities.

(U )

e. Arrange for use of additional sampling and measurement teams ;

l from other utilities as needed.

10. DEACTIVATION Sulmit all emergency documentation to the Administrative Services Coordinator.

l l

1 l

l O

\ l V ER 3.3E Rev. 18 Page 5 of 5 I

L .__________ _________ _ ____ _

DOSE ASSESSMENT SPECIALIST CHECKLIST

<-'s 1. ACTIVATION INITIAL l )

~# a. Sign in on the EOF roster board.

b. Obtain the Dose Assessment Specialist Emergency Response Position Manual and initiate this checklist.

c. Attach your Station badge to the green identification tag located at your workstation.

d. Check workstation telephone for operability.

e. Obtain a briefing of accident status from either EOF Coordinator or the Response Manager.

f. Ensure the METPAC computer is activated in accordance with ;

procedure ER 5.3, Operation of the METPAC System.

g. Inform the EOF Coordinator when the dose assessment and dosimetry records functions are operational.

h. Interface with State Representatives regarding dose assessment data and strategies.

1. Request, as necessary, assignment of an EOF Administrative Support person to assist in the dissemination of dose assessment

-s, results.

j. Direct the activities of the dose assessment support person.

k. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. ACCIDENT ASSESSMENT

a. Ensure that offsite dose projections are performed using the METPAC computer.

b. After each calculation, provide a copy of the METPAC printout and form ER 3.3G, Radiological Status Board Update Form, to the EOF Coordinator and State Representatives.

c. Ensure status boards remain current with projected and actual radiological and meteorological conditions.

d. As field monitoring results become available, compare projected dose rates with actual measured values.

/

l ER 3.3F

's Rev. 18 Fage 1 of 5

DOSE ASSESSMENT SPECIALIST CHECKLIST (Continued)

e. Designate YNSD and/or other laboratory support to receive monitoring and field environmental samples for analysis and inform the EOF Coordinator of required support.

f. Provida direction to designated laboratory staff in determining which field samples are to be analyzed and their priority.

g. Obtain weather forecast information by calling National Weather Services (NVS) at the number listed in the emergency response telephone directory or, as a backup, by calling the PSNH Control Center in Manchester (also listed in the emergency response telephone directory). Tune the weather services radio maintained in the dose assessment room to the 162.550 frequency for area forecast information.

3. CLASSIFICATIONS

a. Periodically check the 12 series EALs in ER 1.1 and monitor the status of emergency action levels expressed in dose rate (i.e., 12a, 12b and 12d) and in dose (i.e., 12e),

b. Inform the EOF Coordinator when dose or dose rate estimates / measurements exceed Emergency Action Levels.

4. MANPOWER / EQUIPMENT NEEDS

a. Report the need for additional manpower and equipment to the EOF Coordinator,

b. Determine support required for TLD readout with Dosimetry Records personnel and report the support requirement to the EOF Coordinator,

c. When notified by the Security Coordinator that personnel are to be dispatched from the EOF to the site, provide a recommendation as to the best site access route (s) to use based on dose considerations and contamination levels.

5. PIANNED RELEASES

a. Obtain the latest weather forecast from NVS or the PSNH Control Center.

b. Enter in Section 2 of form ER 3.lM the current meteorological conditions and forecasted data for the period of release as specified in Section 1.

c. Evaluate the radiological conditions for the 15-minute time interval during which form ER 3.lM is being completed.

(1) Record the projected straightline centerline dose rate at 0.6, 2. 5 and 10 mile distances in Part B of Section 2 of form ER 3.lM.

(2) Record any available field data indicating the location and time of the report.

ER 3.3F Rev. 18 Page 2 of 5 l

DOSE ASSESSMENT SPECIALIST CHECKLIST (Continued) 7 's

~

d. Evaluate the projected doses resulting from the planned release and record

( ) in Part C of Section 2 of form ER 3.lM.

v EQ1E Use the containment vent option using the data recorded in Section 1 of form ER 3.lM. The Dose Assessment Specialist has to determine the forecasted meteorological conditions appropriate to the selected release period.

e. Assuming persistence of the selected meteorological conditions, determine and record the projected doses associated with the release condition.

f. Provide any comments or concerns regarding the planned release condition in the space provided.

g. Sign Parts A, B and C of Section 2 of form ER 3.lM, attach the corresponding dose estimate printouts or plume plots, and forward to the EOF Coordinator.

6. OFFSITE MONITORING

a. Provide the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator with meteorological data and dose projections which may affect the deployment or activities of monitoring teams.

,.s b. Establish an environmental sampling program in concert with the Offsite

/ Monitoring Coordinator if release conditions warrant such action.

D)

7. REENTRY AND RECOVERY Short-Term Actions NOTE The obj ective during the implementation of short-term actions is to develop a potential contamination pattern in order to establish the initial sampling strategies in conjunction with the offsite organizations,

a. Following the termination of the release, obtain either the I-131 deposition pattern or the most reliable estimate of the thyroid dose, Heh.

for each sector block of the affected area. To acquire this pattern, it may be necessary to use the METPAC thyroid TID printout (Refer to YAEC Technical Description of the SB METPAC System), the Engineering Support Center (ESC) resources, or other resources to account for actual versus predicted iodine release components.

[ ~h V ER 3.3F Rev. 18 Page 3 of 5

DOSE ASSESSMENT SPECIALIST CHECKLIST (Continued)

E A sector block is an area defined by a one-mile by 22.5 degree region.

b. Categorize the deposition or dose pattern according to the following Derived Response 14 vel _ (DRL) criteria which apply to consumption of nonleafy locally grown produce by the one-year-old-child age group. This should be performed without regard to time of year since the short-term objective is to produce a deposition pattern for establishment of a sampling strategy.

Infant Thyroid Dose I-131 Deposition Range. H.y (Rem) Rance D(uCi/m2 ) DRL Categorv 0 < E.h < .003 0< D < .066 1

.003 s Hth < .03 .066 s D < .66 2 3

.03 s Hth < .3 .66 s D < 6.6

. 3 s Hew < 3.0 6.6 s D < 66 4 3.0 < Hg3 66 < D 5 The above criteria are based on a conversion factor of 22.2 pCi/m /2 rem ~1 which assumes that a constant deposition velocity of

.01m/sec-1 occurred during the release, and that the derived response level for I-131 on nonleafy produce for the one-year-old child is .066 pCi/m .2 Refer to IPT Software Technical Reference Manual for additional technical basis,

c. Prepare a map or other visual aid as requested, depicting the affected sector blocks by DRL category, to aid in the development of sampling strategies,

d. Participate in sampling strategy meetings with offsite support organizations as needed. During this process, the use of monitoring equipment in conjunction with sampling should be strongly encouraged since the Ingestion Pathway Tracking (IPT) computer program can be used to correlate this information.

Lone-Term Actions E

The objective of lor.g-term actions is to coordinate, correlate and manage all sampling and measurement data from all groups and provide reports and visual aids of the data in a cohesive form.

e. Coordinate offsite sampling activities of the ERO sample collection teams to ensure effective use of all resources.

l l

ER 3.3F Rev. 18 Page 4 of 5 i

l

i N ;

k' DOSE ASSESSMENT SPECIAI.IST CHECKLIST I (Continued)

T INITIAL

~

'~'l f Arrange for all offsite sample and measurement data to be routed to the Dose Assessment personnel.

g. Direct the METPAC Operator or other available personnel to

enter the offsite sample and measurement data into the IPT l software per the Ingestion Pathway Tracking Software User Manual.

h. Periodically review sampling and measurement data and the IPT outputs to identify inconsist.encies between sampling methodologies of each organization, assumptions used in the Ingestion Pathway Tracking (IPT) Software Technical Reference Manual to evaluate the data, and protective action recommendations issued by each offsite organization.

ILQ.TX PACS for deposited radioactivity, expressed as TEDE, provide criteria for relocation of the public. Relocation is warrantad

when the projected dose is 2 2 rem in the first year or f

e to avoid exposure of the skin to beta radiation at 50 times the numerical value of the relocation PAG.

The objective of the relocation PAC is to ensure that doses in any single year do not exceed 0.5 rem and that the cumulative dose over 50 years (including the first and second year) will not exceed 5 rem.

(Gj 1. Report any of the above inconsistencies to the EOF Coordinator.

j. Participate in meetings with offsite and onsite organizations to !

provide copies and interpretations of the IPT outputs.

k. Evaluate area contamination levels using one of the following methods: ,

METHOD 1: For 15-minute intervals only D x Q x 900 seconds - Ci m-2 (fifteen minute interval)

Q where D - deposition X 1 for the point of interest Q Q m2 Q - release rate gi_

see METHOD 2: For total period of interest TID x 22,0 pCi m-2 rem'1 where TID - Total Integrated Thyroid Dose in rem obtained from the F6, F7 function of METPAC

8. DEACTIVATION Submit all emergency documentation to the Administrative Services Coordinator.

m

( )

V ER 3.3F Rev. 18 Page 5 of 5

TECHNICAL ASSISTANT CHECKLIST

~1 1. ACTIVATION INITIAL t

a. Sign in on the EOF roster board,

b. Obtain the Technical Assistant Emergency Response Position Manual and initiate this checklist.

c. Attach your Station badge to the green identification tag located at your workstation,

d. Check workstation telephone for operability.

e. Obtain a briefing from either the EOF Coordinator or the Response Manager.

f. Enable the SPDS screen of the Main Plant Computer System (MPCS) to determine critical safety function status. _

g. Review plant operational status with the Response Manager,

h. Determine if the reported classification is correct.

i. Assign a member of the Training Center Staff to provide data updates to EOF Staff, particularly the METPAC operator.

j. Contact the Emergency Operations Manager to determine status of corrective actions,

k. Establish a list of appropriate plant parameters for the MPCS logger trend mode.

1. Direct a member of the Training Center Staff to enable the MET menu and the logger trend.

m. Initiate a log using Form ER 2.0E, Emergency Facility Log.

n. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. ACCIDENT ASSESSMENT

a. Assess and interpret operational data and trends for the Response Manager.

Respond to questions as required.

b. Assign a member of the Training Center Staff to update the operational ;

trend status board and the system status board. l

c. As required, request accident assessment assistance from the YAEC l Engineering Support Center (ESC). Questions asked of you or your staff may j be passed along to the ESC for answers / disposition. l

)

p)

(

U ER 3.3H f Rev. 18 I Page 1 of 3

TECHNICAL ASSISTANT CHECKLIST (Continued).

d. As requested, provide briefings and logger trend printouts to the ERO Technical Liaison,

e. In the event of a total or partial Main Plant Computer System (MPCS) failure, consider the following guidance as appropriate to the extent and nature of the failure:

(1) Designate an individual to receive data from the TSC. Personnel assigned to this role should have a basic working knowledge of station operations , operating parameters, and the MPCS.

(2) Remind the assigned individual to use Forms ER 2.0H through K to facilitate data transfer activities.

(3) Contact the Technical Services Coordinator and specify who at the EOF should receive data (and their phone number), and at what desired frequency (e.g., as needed, an established callback schedule, continuous open line, etc.). Set realistic expectations for data flow timeliness given current conditions and constraints at the site.

(4) Brief the Response Manager and EOF Coordinator on the compensatory arrangements for data transfer, including realistic expectations for timeliness and other limitations.

(5) If Forms ER 2.0H through K are used, copies of the completed sheets should be provided to the individual (s) maintaining the operational and system status boards so that the data can be posted.

(6) Consider the need for headsets for the individual receiving data.

(7) If available, consider use of a telecopy machine-to facilitate inter-facility communication of data,

f. Maintain an or5anized set of computer printouts.

3. NOTIFICATIONS Provide information to the NRC over the telephone if the TSC is unable to perform this function. If available, use the FTS-2000 handset. A commercial phone may be used as a backup.

4. ACCIDENT MITICATION

a. If radiological conditions do not preclude use of the Station simulator and I where deemed appropriate, coordinate the development of simulated i operational sequences with the Emergency Operations Manager, l

b. Direct members of the Training Center organization to run proposed I operational sequences on the Station simulator.

ER 3.3H Rev. 18 Page 2 of 3

TECHNICAL ASSISTANT CHECKLIST (Continued)

-/ ~ 5. PROTECTIVE ACTION RECOMMENDATIONS INITIAL l

' 'A Provide the EOF Coordinator with operational data needed to prepare protective action recommendations. Expedite-providing this information when the fifteen minute FAR notification clock is running.

6. MANPOWER / EQUIPMENT NEEDS ]

1

a. Assist the Response Manager with planning and scheduling of I

. resources,

b. Determine with the Emergency Operations Manager what manpower or l material support is required,

c. Review manpower and material requests to the Administrative J Services Coordinator and the Industry Liaison.

d. In the event of a power loss- at the EOF, direct a member of the Training Center Staff to start the standby diesel generator using the instructions provided in Figure 4.

7. REENTRY AND RECOVERY Provide the Response Manager with manpower / equipment needs for the rocovery organization.

l'

8. DEACTIVATION O Submit all emergency documentation to the Administrative Services.

Coordinator, l

l l:

l ER 3.3H Rev. 18 Page 3 of 3

5

-_ t lb '

a 1

I f' 1:

3 4 OFFSITE MONITORING COORDINATOR CHECKLIST Yc e

j%t .l. ' ACTIVATION INITIAL

.* U >

,4-up\ '-

Ja. Sign 'in on the EOF ro's ter board.-

b. Obtain the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator Emergency Response

^' Position' Manual and initiate this checklist.

.c. Attach your Station badge to the green identification tag i located at- your workstation.

d. ~ Check workstation telephones for operability.

e. Immediately report any. problems with the' field team radio to the Dose Assessment Specialist.

f. In the event that more than 3 monitoring team monitors or drivers'are available for assignment to field monitoring teams, determine which individuals shall be initially assigned. Any excess personnel should be directed to return to their homes and

-await further instructions.

.g. Advise the Administrative Services Coordinator of the staffing arrangements for the field monitoring teams,

h. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those f

of forms-in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled f copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. OFFSITE MONITORING

a. Implement Procedure ER 5.2, Site Perimeter and Offsite Monitoring and Environmental Sampling.

, b. Interface with the State representatives as directed in Procedure ER 5.2.

3. CLASSIFICATION

Inform the Dose Assessment Spr*ialist immediately when dose or dose rate estimates / measurements exceed any 12 series Emergency Acticn Levels c'ontained on Form ER 1. lA. A wall-mounted copy of this form is maintained in the Technical Assistert work area.

4. MANPOWER / EQUIPMENT NEEDS

. Report the need for equipment roy sted to support offsite monitoring activities to the Dose Assessment Specialist,

b. Report the need for additional manpower to the Administrative Services Coordinator.

ER 3.3I

.ev. 18 Page 1 of 2

OFFSITE MONITORING COORDINATOR CHECKLIST (Continued)

c. Monitor Remote Monitoring Area communications through the Offsite Monitoring Communicator. Report manpower, equipment or other assistance needs of the Remote Monitoring Area to the Radiological Assistant.

5. REENTRY AND RECOVERY Conduct post accident environmental sampling as directed by the EOF Coordinator and/or the Dose Assessment Specialist.

6. DEACTIVATION Submit all documentation to the Administrative Services Coordinator.

O ER 3.31 Rev. 18 Page 2 of 2 l

SECURITY COORDINATOR CHECKLIST

<% 1. ACTIVATION INITIAL i

\

a. Sign in on the EOF roster board. I

b. Obtain the Security Coordinator Emergency Response Position Manual and initiate this checklist.

c. Attach your Station badge to the green identification tag located at your workstatio...

d. Check workstation telephones for operability. !

e. Initiate Form ER 2.0E, Emergency Facility Log. l

f. Direct security personnel to (1) establish access controls for the EOF.

(2) ensure arriving personnel sign in on the roster board.

g. Contact the Security Shift Supervisor at the site to determine accountability status and any Station security problems,

h. Brief the Corporate Support Manager on Station and EOF j

security status, l

fs 1. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current i

'l\# $

revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet. l

2. CLASSIFICATION Provide Response Manager input regarding any security threat which may exceed an Emergency Action Level contained in Procedure ER 1.1, Classification of Emergencies.

3. RESPONSE ACTIONS

a. Request and ccordinate local law enforcement support as needed,

b. Implement Procedure GD1332.00, Security Response to a Declared Radiological Emergency, as applicable.

c. Ensure accountability of all personnel in the Protected Area,

d. Notify Region I of arrival of the NRC response team. The NRC Region I telephone number is in the Emergency Response Telephone Directory.

e. Provide periodic updates on emergency conditions and response actions to the Guard Island Supervisor.

ER 3.3J

Q(~'N Rev. 18

! Page 1 of 2 l

l l

r 7 SECURITY COORDINATOR CHECKLIST (Continued)

INITIAL

4. MANPOWER / EQUIPMENT NEEDS

a. If additional manpower and equipment are needed, notify the Administrative Services Coordinator.

HQIE Confer with the Dose Assessment Specialist as to the appropriate site access route and Station radiation conditions, as applicable,

b. Ensure that all emergency response personnel who require site access are tracked on the Security computer and are provided a briefing on site access route, site layout, and Station emergency guidelines.

c. Ensure the security force is notified of any individuals reporting to the site.

d. Obtain a copy of the ERONS log from the Guard Island Supervisor and forward to the Administrative Services Coordinator (if applicable).

5. RELEASE OF ASSEMBLY AREA PERSONNEL

a. Interface with the Administrative Services Coordinator to l

determine if personnel should be sent home or to the Remote l Monitoring Area,

b. If the Remote Monitoring Area is to be used, inform the Security Shif t Supervisor to set up appropriate traffic control based on the exit route.

6. REENTRY AND RECOVERY Provide the Response Manager with manpower / equipment needs for the recovery organization.

7. DEACTIVATION i

Submit all emergency documentation to the Administrative Services Coordinator.

l t

ER 3.3J Rev. 18 Page 2 of 2 l

l

p I;

RADIOiDCICAL ASSISTANT CHECKLIST.-

/T: 1. ACTIVATION INITIAL-():

-a. Sign in on the EOF roster . board, q l

b. Obtain the Radiological Assistant Emergency Response Position Manual and initiate this checklist.

c. Attach your Station badge to the green identification .

tag located at your workstation.

d. Check workstation telephones for operability.

e. Obtain a radiological status briefing from the Offsite.

Monitoring Coordinator,

f. Obtain dosimetry and exposure status from Dosimetry Records personnel.

g. Establish a chronological event log and document all activities at the contamination control point.

h. Report additional manpower and equipment needs to the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator,

i. Ensure all personnel entering the Radiologically Controlled Area (RCA) have obtained dosimetry.

I g j. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either _ a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. OFFSITE MONITORING / SAMPLING SUPPORT

a. Assist the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator in the dispatch of monitoring / sampling teams.

b. Contact ' the EOF security officer each time 'a team is dispatched or a team is returning.

c. Establish sample receipt and transfer process within the EOF.

3. RADIATION / CONTAMINATION CONTROLS

a. If radiological release conditions are evident, establish a'frisker control zone as per Figure 3, ensuring that the main entrance remains contamination free.

b. Establish the EOF Sample Return Area as shown in Figure 5.

ER 3.3K Rev. 18 Page 1 of 3

RADIGIDGICAL ASSISTANT GIECKLIST (Continued)

c. Coordinate with Dosimetry Records personnel on EOF access control for contamination monitoring once the teams have been dispatched,

d. Direct all EOF monitoring and decontamination activities ;

including Offsite Monitoring and Sampling Teams return to the EOF. Document personnel and vehicle contamination using Procedure ER 4.6 as guidance.

e. Establish and monitor a sample storage area. Notify the Offsite l Monitoring Coordinator prior to sending samples to the Station i for disposal.

4. REMOTE MONITORING AREA SUPPORT

a. Assist Remote Monitoring Area Health Physics Technicians in obtaining monitoring and decontamination kits and equipment.

b. Issue two portable radios to the Remote Monitoring Area Health Physics Technicians for communications between the monitoring area, decontamination facilities, and Emergency Operations Facility.

c. Receive reports of assistance required by the Remote Monitoring Area staff from the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator and provide direction and/or assistance as needed.

5. YANKEE ATOMIC ELECTRIC COMPANY (YAEC) SUPPORT

a. Notify the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator, the NH Monitoring Team O

Coordinator and the NIAT Field Team Coordinator of the arrival of YAEC Environmental Lab personnel.

b. Coordinate YAEC Environmental Lab and dosimetry support vehicle (s) placement outside the potential contamination zone,

c. Assist YAEC Environmental Lab personnel in establishing their activities within the EOF.

6. ENVIRONMENTAL SAMPLE PREPARATION l

a. Accept environmental samples from sample collection teams and survey them for removable contamination on the outside of containers and/or paperwork. Decontaminate or re-bag any samples with removable contamination.

l l b. Review all forms to ensure that information is correct and the form is complete. Pay particular attention to sample location; the sample location indicated on Form ER 5.2E should match the sample location marked on the environmental sample. Cuidance for completing this form is in Procedure ER 5.2, Figure 3, Environmental Lab Sample

[ Submission Form Instructions.

I I

! ER 3.3K lllk l

Rev. 18 Page 2 of 3

- - - - - - ~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

....,..,,.,.......?,-:, - . , . . . . . . - .

RADIOIDCICAL ASSISTANI-CHECKLIST (Continued).

c. Evaluate' type of analysis using ER 5'.2, Figure 2,-Analysis INITIAL Matrix, as a guideline. Ensure appropriate analyses are checked'off in the Analysis To Be Performed section of Form ER 5.2E. Request guidance for additional analysis l from the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator. -]

L

d. . Weigh sample material as necessary and package for shipment,

s. Inform the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator when samples are ready to be transported.

7. MANPOWER / EQUIPMENT NEEDS

a. Assist the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator in making transportation l) arrangements for environmental samples. i L i E91E l If the Media Center is already activated, consider using the Media Center Mechanics to transport environmental samples to laboratories. These individuals are generally on standby in 1 the EOF.

b. Coordinate obtaining required sample transportation manpower and resources through the Administrative Services Coordinator, f 8. DEACTIVATION Submit all emergency documentation to the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator.

U ER 3.3K

f. Rev. 18 f Page 3 of 3

ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES. COORDINATOR CHECKLIST i

i

-s 1. ACTIVATION INITIAL

' a. Sign in on the EOF roster board.

b. Obtain the Administrative Services Coordinator Emergency Response Position Manual and initiate this checklist,

c. Attach your Station badge to the green identification tag located at your workstation.

d. Synchronize Emergency Operations Facility clocks with the Main Plant Computer digital time display.

e. Turn on and test the Response Manager public address system.

f. Check workstation telephones for operability.

g. Assign an EOF Administrative Support person to monitor calls on the Call Director.

h. Assign one EOF Administrative Support person each to the EOF Coordinator, Response Manager, and the Dose Assessment Specialist.

i. Assign one EOF Administrative Support person as ECCC Clerk.

Direct this person to implement Form ER 3.3JJ, ECCC Clerk Checklist.

m

/ 4

j. Obtain a briefing from the Response Manager on Station

\s / equipment and ERO manpower needs.

k. Contact the Corporate Support Manager to determine whether additional administrative support is required.

1. Assist the Response Manager in establishing the initial EOF response team during a daytime activation,

m. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. INITIAL STAFFING AND SHIFT SCHEDULING

a. With assistance from the Security Coordinator, determine the names of individuals filling each first-shift ERO response position. If available, use the ERONS printout and/or Station accountability results to assist with this task. Document the results on Form ER 3.3M, Manpower Planning.

l l

/'~h l k-,) ER 3.3L !

Rev. 18 Page 1 of 5 ,

1 l

l

ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES COORDINATOR CHECKLIST (Continued)

H91E During normal workday, daytime (i.e., 0700 to 1630) responses, personnel trained for both the EOF Coordinator and HP Advisor positions will report to the EOF. The on-duty pager wearer assigned to the EOF Coordinator position will be assigned as the first-shift EOF Coordinator. The reporting, non-duty personnel assigned to these positions will mutually agree on the assignment as first-shift HP Advisor. The remaining personnel are available for second-shift assignment to the EOF Coordinator and HP Advisor positions.

b. Determine which first-shift positions have not been filled.

If available, use the ERONS printout and/or Station accountability results to assist with this task.

c. During daytime (i.e., 0700 to 1630) responses:

(1) Contact the Assembly Area Coordinator and provide a brief summary of emergency conditions.

(2) Identify and obtain ERO backup responders who are available in the assembly area to fill the open positions identified in Step b.

Document the results on Form ER 3.3M, Manpower Planning.

(3) Inquire as to the status of any personnel requested by the Maintenance Coordinator.

(4) Request the Assembly Area Coordinator to forward copies of Form ER 3.3K. Consider using a telecopier.

NOTE In the event that the emergency is declared during an outage, the Assembly Area Coordinator will also provide copies of contact telephone number listings for non-NAESCO craft personnel and vendor technical representatives. Retain this information to support the return-to-work nllout of these individuals once the emergency is terminated.

CAUTION BEFORE COMPLETING THE NEXT STEP, DETERMINE STATION RADIGIDGICAL l CONDITIONS FROM THE EOF COORDINATOR, AND SITE EGRESS ROUTE FROM THE SECURITY COORDINATOR, AND DETERMINE THE NEED TO SEND ASSEMBLY AREA PERSONNEL TO THE REMOTE MONITORING AREA.

l l

ER 3.3L

! Rev. 18 i

Page 2 of 5 l

YI L ,& 3. ,.<; o l '

'.f -

', ' ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES COORDINATOR CHECKLIST e.

.(Continued)

q q (5) . Discuss release instructions ~ to 'be given to personnel at the assembly l ' 3' ,) 3 ~ -area including where they should go, the route to use, and a_ time that t . second-shift personnel should report to the EOF._ Remind the Assembly

' Area Coordinator that ALL second-shift personnel, including those assigned to onsite facilities, must report _to the EOF prior to

' relieving first-shift personnel.

(6)' Obtain Response Manager concurrence and direct the Assembly _ Area E Coordinator to release all personnel and deactivate the, assembly _ area.

(7) Inform the Security coordinator of assembly area deactivation.

d. Fill any remaining open first-shift ERO positions by calling out additional.

backup responders. Document the results on Form ER 3.3M, Manpower ,

Planning.

e. Develop a list of second-shift responders and determine which, if any, of the first-shift responders should be reassigned. Establish ~two 12-hour shifts consisting of personnel qualified for their respective positions.

Document the results on Form ER 3.3M, Manpower Planning.

(1) Contact YAEC Engineering Support Center Manager for names of second shift YNSD personnel responding to ERO facilities.

(2) When completed, provide a copy of the second shift roster to the Dosimetry Records Personnel. >

i UDIE If FINIS is not available to confirm RAEs for second-shift personnel, have the EOF Coordinator establish a blanket authorization for the ERO with the concurrence of the Response Manager.

f. Notify second-shift personnel of their assignment and what time to report to the EOF. Remind second-shift personnel assigned to onsite facilities that they must report to the EOF prior to relieving first-shift personnel.

Provide them with a telephone number to call in case they are delayed or unable to report,

g. If required personnel have been evacuated'and cannot be contacted for shift turnover instructions, perform the following:

(1) Contact the Emergency Communications Coordinator and assist in the drafting of a news release.

(2) Obtain Response Manager approval for the news release. ,

h. Assign an assistant to document any call-ins by ERO personnel using Form ER 3.3EE, Emergency Worker Call-In Report. Make additional adjustments .to shift schedules as required by the call-ins.

[

D ER 3.3L J Rev. 18 Page 3 of 5

/

y __ , _ .__ _ _ _4

~ ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES COORDINATOR CHECKLIST (Continued)

i. Provide the NH IFO Radiological Exposure Clerk with a list of names of those personnel that will require access to the exclusion area for shift turnover.

9 J. Ensure that all relief personnel reporting to the Station receive an accident briefing from the Industry Liaison.

k. Ensure that all relief personnel receive appropriate dosimetry prior to ,

departure to the Station. l

3. MANPOWER / EQUIPMENT NEEDS

a. Determine equipment needs from both onsite and offsite ERO facilities and forward this information to the Material and Logistics Coordinator.

b. Direct the Materials and Logistics Coordinator to contract for additional vendor support as required.

c. Direct the Document Control Center Coordinator to obtain documents, drawings and office supplies as required.

d. If the results from Step 2 above still indicate manpower deficiencies, request the Industry Liaison to obtain appropriate industry support personnel,

e. In the event that an employee is killed or seriously injured while performing response duties, coordinate notification of the victim's family (next-of-kin).

f. Review the NAHM, procedure NM 11800, Hazardous Condition Response Plan, to identify additional logistic &l and recovery considerations that may be useful in responding to the emergency. Brief the Corporate Support Manager on any recommendations.

4. NUCLEAR NETWORK

a. Develop, in conjunction with the Technical Assistant, messages for transmittal on Nuclear Network,

b. Direct the Document Control Center Coordinator to input messages onto Nuclear Network, and monitor the system for any related messages.

5. EMERGENCY TERMINATION AND RECOVERY

a. Obtain additional personnel, equipment and supplies to support the recovery organization,

b. In the event that the emergency was declared during an outage, perform the following steps:

ER 3.3L Rev. 18 Page 4 of 5

ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES COORDINATOR CHECKLIST (Continued) s INITIAL

- . .)

)

(1) Contact the Outage Coordinator and request that all contact telephone number listings for non-NAESCO craft personnel and vendor technical representatives not already provided be forwarded to you.

(2) Develop a return-to-work callout plan for the above outage workers with the Response Manager. Consider who will perform callout and what information will be provided.

(3) Brief appropriate personnel on the return-to-work callout plan.

(4) If needed, direct procurement of additional dosimetry required to support the processing of outage workers through the EOF (e.g., from Station stock, vendor, Yankee Mutual Assistance, etc.).

6. DEACTIVATION

a. Collect all emergency documentation for file. l 1

b. Transmit a copy of all documents to the Emergency Preparedness (

j Manager.

I i

f~N )

l i

l, 4

'O ER 3.3L Rev. 18 Page 5 of 5

r 4_,.,. 5

~ " ' ~

}]'

.' s 4 y u, '

2 1 t

'- 5- < . - .

'Y ;

w t. <

.i '

_o -

Ti 3l co

, m&H

.(;-: .s a

y O

^G',

.~ - >e4 41 0

^

faf. A -

' ~ E x

Y t

y f -'

e

. f' k A

l8g U

E. .

~

g -w I~ I".

O

\ ==

E

.ae -

b 5

8, e

I=s

=

Wf sa-W w

-I

)

G

S. <

rp:. . _ s :

. i. l' a.

Qc., ,

8

!g f o

'. M8' 4-. 312

f. c)g.,.

3 . e

3 vg

' Rea

,1 ERP p S T '_

~

N _

E M

M O

C

~,

o E N M E O

N N O _

H _

P T

F I

H S _

D N

O C

G E S

N I

N)

Nd Aeu . ~

I O N

Pn _

i Rt _

f((

E n Wo OC T ,

P( F l

N u A S M T S

R I

F m m m m m m m m m m m o o o o o o o o o o o N o o o o o o o o o o o O R R R R R R R R R R R I

T l l l l l l l l l l l A

C o o o o o o r

o r

o r r o o r

r r r r r O t t t t t t t t t t t C C C C L n n n n n n o

n o

n o o n C S

C S

C S S S S S o o o o o C C T T T T T T T C C C C C C C C C T T T r

E o

t r S a r o e t p a NN EO O . i n

RI m r r r r r r d r T o o o o o o r g r r YI o t t t t t o M o o o CS r R r a a a a a t o r t t NO r c s C o a a t o o r e

r r e

r e e e n t n n EP n s l o

t p

e p p p p T r o s a i e i a O o T

M M e n d id R d v r r O O O i i c r r r E n r t e E E D t i o r e o r M e e n p s s s s s a i d o e

_. E t p o O m m m m m / / y r e

v r

r o

r o C o o n

e C e n C e e e e e c o t

a n S

t m t t t t t r r n p e t e n i

g g i

r y o s s s s y

s y

e e e g O S a C c i n n ig e r o y y y t t in n t

o S h r y l y n d E i e

e t

f i s R S S S r

S r r h

g g e m

c n

a c

d r t r a n

r o r r

e E .

S h i l r r iF i

e o s e o o e n m S v o a a a a a F E i n o C n i t r r e e e e e e e g

r C i t n

t c ig T

/

f t e p

t n

t l c

l c

e r r t e h

c m

e i C a ig s e

i i r u u u u u m e P h a & e r e h n u o N N N N i

F i

S E T H C M I R E D

_ t S U S C N a _

D

, , ! , :!; ! 31' j I i

, s _ _

,, m g I \ f \ l L) \al '\,,I MANPOWER PIANNING (Continued)

Date/ Timer l

l l " LOCATION FIRST SHIFT 8

SECOND SHIFT C0petENTS POS1 TION NO. PHONE NO.

l Operations Technician TSC Corputer Engineer TSC Control Roorn Coemiunicator TSC TSC Engineer - Mechanical TSC TSC Engineer - Electrical TSC TSC RMD Personnel TSC TSC RMD Personnel TSC TSC Logkeeper TSC YNSD Radiological Advisor TSC YNSD Nuclear Safety Advisor TSC YNSD System Advisor TSC OSC Coordinator OSC Red Controls Coordinator OSC PASS Coordinator OSC Technical Specialist Coordinator OSC Chemistry Technician OSC Chemistry Technteian OSC Chemistry Technician OSC IEC Personnel OSC IRC Personnet OSC Electrical Maintenance Personnel OSC ER 3.3M Rev. 18 Page 3 of 8

_ = _ _ _ - _ _ - _ _

.~ .- _ _ . _ - _ - _ _ - _ _ - _ - . _ - - - _ - - _ - - _ - - - _ - - - . - - _ _ - - - - - -_ _- _-

- - - . , . . -. . . .. . . , . _ . _ , m ,. . ,

> . . ' s;;,:

g ,, ;

- :;. Q.] - k:- ?,

2-k Y

~

. MANPOINER PIANNING , .

.(Continued)

~

Date/Ylee:

Q j MR E SE LOCATION FIRST $NIFT SECOND SN!FT COMIENTS POSlit0M NO. PHONE NO.

Electrical Maintenance Personnet OSC Mechanical Maintenance Personnet' OSC i

Mechanical Maintenance Persomet OSC Redweste Supervisor _~_

OSC Radweste Technician OSC Redweste Technician OSC i Supervisory Control Room Operator OSC .. t Control Room Operator OSC Health Physics Technician OSC s Health Physics Technician OSC Health Physics Technician OSC Health Physics Technician OSC ;

Health Physics Technician OSC Storekeeper OSC ,

computer Technician OSC Nuclear Systems Operator - OSC

'I

-i l Nuctear Systems Operator' OSC Nuclear Systems Operator OSC Nuclear Systems Operator OSC l

Nuclear Systems Operator OSC - 1 Fire Fighter / EMT OSC ;

Fire Fighter / EMT - OSC

.. 6 i

ER 3 .~ 3M' .

-Rev.~18 ,

1 Page 4;of 8- )

e

.. , , . - - - , . , , .,m. . . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .. J.1.n_

,y 4 .

7 33 ,

m , .

}l qi g- a,* ,

- MANPOIER FIRINING -h

~(Continued) 4. -

4 Date/Timet n

?

' Y REME LOCATION FIRST SHIFT SECOND SHIFT

~

CopOENTS l *~

l POSITION No. PHONE NO.

Specialty Technical Assistant (As Req'd) OSC Spectatty Technical Assistant (As Req'd) OSC -t Security Officer EOF ,

l Security Officer EOF Response Manager EOF EOF Coordinator EOF -

Technical Assistant EOF l

Dose Assessment Personnet EOF l Radiological Assistant EOF

l-Offsite Monitoring Coordinator EOF Industry Liaison EOF Dose Assessment Specialist EOF ~

t Health and Safety coordinator EOF Comununicator EOF l

Conmuunicator EOF Joint Owner Liaison EOF Joint Owner Liaison EOF Administrative Services coordinator EOF Corporate Support Manager EOF --

Security Coordinator EOF

~

, ER! 3.3M' Rev. 18

.Page 5 of 8 I

[.

L

._. _ _ _ . _ . _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ _______ _ ____~_, -, -. . , _ , . -

.v

fj I 8

f o

M8 316 J_

u 3 .e vg Rea ERP S

T N

E M

M O

C O

N E

N O

H P

T F

N S

D N

O C

G E S

N I

N)

Nd Ae I u O N

P n i

% Rt E n _

Wo OC T

P( F I

N H _

A S _

M T ,

S R

I F __

N O

I T

A C

O F F F F F F L F F F F F F F F F F F F O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E _

r _

r o o t t a r r r a n e e e n i v v v d

N id r

r o

o P

H P

H i

D r

i D

r i

D r

d SN o r o C o EO RI T

r o

C s

s n

m m m

m m

m C o _ _

YI t c o a a a a a a _

CS r a i e e e e e e F _

NO o i

t t T T T T T T O M A P P EP G

t ic is a g g g g g g E R D O O _.

a n c n n n n n - - - - __

R n u g i in E o n i i r r i

r i

r f f E

M id m L u r o

r o

r o o o o o o f

f f

f f f r o a a a a a _

o C d m t t t t t t t t t t

o / n o a a a i n

i n

t t t S

t S S

. C r a C n n r e o o o o o o S S k

e n n n n n., :

e i g

n i t

r t

s a

y c

n idr o

id r

o O p M e

M e

i d

m in d

m i

d n

i d

n in d

l C

r e __

m s W l e o o C t t t it t t A A A A A __

i T

n e C r

e g

r C C A P

i s

i s s i

s i

s C .

e C f f F F F F F C

/ c C t C T f f f f O O O O O C e i C a m C C E f f f f f f O E E E t L E M E D D M O O O O O E E E a

D

} ( l l lll ll l l l l ll[lllllll l1'fl!lliL

j1 ; i ,1 lIJ q '

5; '

7 / -

8 _

.f o

M8 _

317

-Q 3

Rea ERP

.e vg S ._

T .

N E

p s

t C ,.

t O _

N ._

C ._

N O

H P

T F

I N

S 2

O C

G E S

N I

N)

Nd Aeu I o N

F n i

Rt E n io l

0C T ,_

P( F u N !

N

. A S M T .

S R

I

- F m

N A O

_ I T

A C

O C C C C C C C C L F F F F F F F I I I I I I I I O O O O O O O T T T T T T T T C C C C E E E E E E E J J J J J J J J M M M M r

o i

s v

r 'n e o p s u i S i a '_

l L n o

o s l r t i

N e t r a O n n o t i I

n C C L T o r I s r e r r S

O f f r n o g o o f f e o o t

s t

s a m o P a a P s n r u w s s s l r r t

S t

S s i

a . . R A A A f f a e g

R F o o d i t t / f f M /

s

_ s s r r r s s s s s s a a a s

_ i i e e o L

s s n n n n t t s n a

n o

A a

v v t t c l A A o o o o S S w d d n n e a i i i i e M i i t

A A e e R c . . t t t t . . N t a a a a n s a a C C y i

n t

r l

r l l l l in im y w l l e

l a

l a g g r h t t e e e e m c e e

_ e c c n n t c C C R R R R d d n N R R _

m e e A A e a i

n i

n m T r r a a a a g . a -

iT h h i i o o i i i i C c r e

t s

i d

/ c ia a s O n n d d d d I i e c e r r o R s. s e e e e T T m s e e e R t t R M M M M J J E A M M -

t a T T T T D E D

iI I(l lI l ll j l.

j' l!

8 f

o M8 j 318

~ 3 . e s '% vg Rea ERP S

T N

- E M

M O

C O

N _

E _

N _

O H

P T _

F _

I H _

S D

N O

C C E S

N I

N)

Nd Ae O Lu N Pn I

) Rt i _

% En Wo -

OC T F

P( I N H A S M

T S

R I

F _..

N O

I T

A C

O L

C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M n

o .

N i s r O o f f f a f I i s f a

f a a T L i I

v r r t t t r S r r c c a a S S S o O c e ic r r s "P l o p u

i n

a n

a i

n a l l t

s t

s n n

n

. i v

F S h h h e e i ig i i i n

d C C c c c n n g n n A s M M . e e e n n e e d d d s n v M M M o o R R A A A i

l t

o a

n o

s r

i r

o s

v i

r o

s v

S y

r e r t

e n

r t

e n

t r

e n

P s

r e

P s

r e

t r

e n

t r

e n

t r

e n

t r

e n

t r

e n

i h

c s

y -

e e d d c e e e y y e e e e e P J

_' e R p A A n C C C t t C C C C C m s e i i h i

a e . . g a a a r r a a a a ia t T i k h h r i i i u

c u

c i

d i

d d l

a

/ d o c c e d d d e e e e e e e e e p e e m e e e e M M M H t M S T T E M M M S S M M a -

D fll I lll lll l 1l lI 1iIlllIl j

CORPORATE SUPPORT MANAGER CHECKLIST W 'l. ACTIVATION- INITIAL

< \'"' )

a. Sign in'on the EOF roster board.

b. Obtain the Corporate Support Manager Emergency Response Position Manual and initiate this checklist. ,

c. Attach your Station badge to the green identification tag located at your workstation.

d. Check workstation telephones for operability.

e. Obtain a briefing'from the Response Manager or EOF

, Coordinator.

f. Provide a briefing to the Industry Liaison, Health and Safety Coordinator,, Administrative Services Coordinator, Security Coordinator and Licensing Coordinator.

g. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. ACCIDENT ASSESSMENT q a. Obtain periodic status briefings from the Response Managet.

iN)- b. Coordinate EOF activities during those periods when the ,

Response Manager, EOF Coordinator and Technical Assistant are in conference.

3. NOTIFICATION

a. Complete Form ER 3.3P, Plant Specific Message Form for Seabrook Station Unit 1, and ensure that New England Power Exchange (NEPEX) is notified by calling the PSNH Control Center and requesring notification. Subsequent notifications should be made each time the emergency classification level is changed.

CAUTION STATE NOTIFICATIONS USING }T)RM ER 2.0B SHAI.L BE INITIATED WITHIN 15 MINUTES UPON RECIASSIFICATION OF THE EVENT OR FORNUIATION OF A NEW PAR. THE 15 MINUTE NOTIFICATION OF RECIASSIFICATION MUST BE MADE WHETHER OR NOT THERE ARE ANY PROTECTIVE ACTION RECOMMENDATIONS.

b. When instructed to do so by the EOF Coordinator or Response Manager, transmit the information on Form ER 2.0B to the State ;

Emergency Operation Centers using the Nuclear Alert System (NAS).

ER 3.3N Rev. 18 Page 1 of 2 l l

I i

l

CORPORATE SUPPORT MANAGER CHECKLIST (Continued)

c. Verify that the dispatchers have received the correct INITIAL information by asking one to read back the information.

CAVrION CALLBACK VERIFICATION IS REQUIRED FOR COMMERCIAL TELEPHONE COMMUNICATIONS.

d. If a State cannot be reached using the NAS line, use a commercial line to notify that State.

4. STATUS BOARDS

a. Periodically monitor EOF status boards to determine if they are being kept current. As needed, request administrative assistance from the Administrative Services Coordinator to ensure that status boards are properly maintained.

b. Maintain an event sequence listing for use on the event status board.

5. MANPOWER / EQUIPMENT NEEDS

a. Ensure that the Administrative Services Coordinator is coordinating the acquisition of additional manpower as requested by EOF personnel,

b. Verify that the Industry Liaison has established initial contact with the YNSD Engineering Support Center (ESC).

c. Monitor and help coordinate requests for assistance to various industry and support groups (e .g. , YNSD ESC , NU, Westinghouse or INPO). Periodically brief the Response Manager on the status of requests and responses.

6. REENTRY AND RECOVERY Assist the Response Manager in the development of a recovery organization and recovery action plan.

7. DEACTIVATION Submit all emergency documentation to the Administrative Services Coordinator.

ER 3.3N Rev. 18 Page 2 of 2

.i HEALTH AND SAFETY COORDINATOR CHECKLIST

/ w;L 1. ACTIVATION INITIAL

\,h' a. Sign in on the EOF roster board,

b. Obtain the Health and: Safety Coordinator Emergency Response Position Manual'and initiate this checklist.

c. Attach your Station badge to the green identification tag-located at your workstation.

d. Check' workstation telephones for operability.

e. Report' to and obtain a briefing from the Corporate Support' Manager.

f. Verify that forms obtained from the-forms file are the current revision. To do'this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled ,

copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. NOTIFICATIONS

a. Notify American Nuclear Insurers (kNI) e Provide an event briefing.

Establish a periodic callback schedule.

Provide your telephone rumber and the DCC telecopy number.

b. As requested by the NRC, establish the Health' Physics Network (HPN) and maintain communications per instructions provided by the NRC individual initiating the call.

Request additional support as required to maintain this line, c, Use the HPN Event Notification Worksheet, Form ER 2.0G, to record radiological information and. data, e Obtain onsite radiological data from the Health Physics Coordinator.

' e Obtain offsite radiological data and PARS from the EOF Coordinator.

d. Provide information and data to NRC contact manning the HPN.

Document actions and conversations on Form ER 2.0E, Emergency Facility Log.

ECTE Consider using a telecopier to provide copies of HPN forms to the NRC.

e. Periodically brief the EOF Coordinator and Licensing Coordinator on the status of HPN notifications.

ER 3.3Q Rev. 18 Page 1 of 2 I

e HEALTH AND SAFETY COORDINATOR CHECKLIST (Continued)

3. ACCIDENT ASSESSMENT INITIAL Periodically contact the YNSD Engineering Support Center and provide current meteorological, release and dose parameters. This function will be transferred to the YNSD Radiation Protection Engineer upon his arrival at the EOF.

4. MANPOWER / EQUIPMENT NEEDS If assistance is required to staff HPN or ANI communications, contact the Administrative Services Coordinator.

5. REENTRY AND RECOVERY Assist the Dose Assessment Specialist and METPAC operator as needed.

6. DEACTIVATION Submit all emergency documentation to the Administrative Services Coordinator.

O ER 3.3Q Rev. 18 Page 2 of 2

'T LICENSING COORDINATOR CHECKLIST

~~

g- 1. ACTIVATION. INITIAL

~J-

a. Sign in on the EOF roster board.

b. Obtain Licensing Coordinator *s Emergency Response Position Manual and initiate this checklist.

c. Attach your Station badge to the green identification tag located at your workstation.

d. Check workstation telephones for operability,

e. Report to and obtain a briefing from the Corporate Support Manager,

f. Verify that forms obtained from the forms ' file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. NOTIFICATION As needed, assist the Technical Assistant in supporting open NRC telephone communications if this function is transferred to the EOF. Use Form ER 2.0D to support this activity, q 3. LICENSING ACTIONS

1 i /

a. Coordinate resolution of all licensing and permit-related issues that may arise during the emergency. Consider impact to regulations from:

NRC a FEMA e EPA e OSHA e DOT e FAA

b. As needed, request assistance from the licensing representative at the YNSD Engineering Support' Center in resolving licensing and permit-related issues,

c. Review information issued to the NRC during the emergency.

. Contact the Health and Safety Coordinator for copies of HPN updates.

Contact the Emergency Operations Manager for copies of ENS updates.

d. Upon their arrival at the EOF, brief the NRC Site Response Team on emergency status,

e. Coordinate the NRC Site Response Team's interface with EOF operations,

f. Establish site access arrangements for NRC Site Response Team members assigned to the Station.

g. Document meetings / conferences with the NRC.

-')

k./ ER 3.3R Rev. 18 Page 1 of 2

LICENSING COORDINATOR CHECKIlST

- (Continued)

4. MANPOWER / EQUIPMENT NEEDS INITIAL Report the need for additional manpower and equipment to the Administrative Services Coordinator.

5. DEACTIVATION Submit all emergency documentation to the Administrative Services Coordinator.

O i

-l l

l l

l ER 3.3R Rev. 18 Page 2 of 2

INDUSTRY LIAISON CHECKLIST INITIAL ex 1. . ACTIVATION r

'" ]

a. Sign in on the EOF roster board.

b. Obtain the Industry Liaison's Emergency Response Position Manual and initiate this checklist.

c. Attach your Station badge to the green identification tag located at your workstation.

d. Check workstation telephones for operability.

e. Report to and obtain a briefing from the Corporate Support Manager,

f. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. NOTIFICATION

a. Notify INPO e Provido an event briefing.

Establish a periodic callback schedule.

Provide your telephone number and the DCC telecopy number.

b. Notify the Westinghouse Energy Systems Business Unit Emergency Response Team

. Provide an event briefing.

Establish a periodic callback schedule.

. Provide your telephone number and the DCC telecopy number.

c. Notify the Nuclear Energy Institute (NEI)

Provide an event briefing.

Establish a periodic callback schedule, e Provide your telephone number and the DCC telecopy number.

Fax approved press releases to NEI.

3. MANPOWER / EQUIPMENT NEEDS

a. Establish contact with the YNSD Engineering Support Center (ESC) and coordinate manpower / equipment requests. l e If at an Alert, determine in conjunction with the Corporate l Support Manager if a YNSD site team should report to the site l and the EOF. Advise the ESC if a team should be dispatched. ,

l

b. Determine from the Joint Owners Liaison (JOL) if any Joint Owner support has been offered. Disposition each offer and advise the JOL.

k/ ER 3.3S Rev. 18 Page 1 of 3

i l

INDUSTRY LIAISON CHECKLIST (Continued) l INITIAL

c. Determine in conjunction with the EOF Coordinator if assistance O from the YNSD environmental lab or if YNSD TLD support is required. Coordinate acquisition of the required services through ;

YNSD ESC. I l

d. Notify the Security Coordinator of any visitors who will be reporting to the EOF. !'

I

e. As requested, review the INPO Resources Manual to ascertain what equipment and persont.el are available for responding to the 1 emergency. As approved by the Response Manager, request resources f

through INPO. ;

i

f. As requested, contact other utilities for additional support.

g. Interface, as needed, with emergency response personnel reporting to the EOF. Provide the following:

i (1) accident status briefing (2) instructions to report to the Dositnetry Records Personnel ]

for dosimetry r l (3) reporting and interface instructions (4) instructions to report to Security for a briefing on which access route should be used to get to the site

h. Ensure all personnel reporting to the site obtain a pass from i the NH IFO Radiological Exposure Clerk allowing entry into the l exclusion area.

i. Instruct all visitors who will be reporting to the site to l complete Form ER 3.3B upon completion of their briefing.

NOTE For events that have resulted in a release of radioactive materials to the environment, all individuals reporting to the site should be

1) Radiation worker qualified at Seabrook Station, or

2) Radiation worker qualified at another commercial nuclear power plant, or

3) Broadly familiar with the concepts of ionizing radiation

! and contamination as a result of their normal work activities.

J. Submit Form ER 3.3B to the Security Coordinator for processing of the site visitors.

ER 3.3S Rev. 18 Page 2 of 3

INDUSTRY LIAISON CHECKLIST (Continued)

INITIAL i ,,)

\-- 4. DEACTIVATION Submit all emergency documentation to the Administrative Services Coordinator.

O e ER 3.3S Rev. 18 Page 3 of 3 l

1 ,

(.4 >_ '

E ENERGENCY CONNL'WICATIONS, COORDINATOR (ECC) CHECKLIST ,

W ' -

INITIAL ~

94 " : '

~1.' ACTIVATION' -

vt .

Vk .a. Sign in on the EOF roster board.-

Og < b,- Obtain the Emergency Communications Coordinator Emergency

. Response Position Manual.and initiate:this checklist.

c. Attach your Station badge to the green identification tag located at your workstation.

Obtain emergency status'information from the Response

~

d.

~

Manager.

.~, .

b Establish communication contact with the Emergency News:

e.

Manager at the Media Center usin5 the auto. ringdown telephone or an'outside line.

E T The Media Center.has to activate which may cause delay in.

initial contact.

f. Establish. interface with the assigned EOF Technical Advisor.

g. Brief ECCC staff on emergency status.

LL h. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current

\ revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER.or controlled ,

copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. NEWS RELEASE i

a. Coordinate and supervise preparation of sequentially i numbered draft news releases.

b. Consult with the Technical Advisor for advice on technical aspects of news releases. :;

NOTE Ensure that the Technical Advisor concurs with technical and radiological information contained in news releases.

I i

\- ER 3.3T Rev. 18 Page 1 of 3

F i r

EMFRGENCY COMMUNICATIONS COORDINATOR (ECC) CHECKLIST (Continued)

c. Ensure that each news release addresses the appropriate elements listed below. See sample news releases in Figures 7 through 10.

News release number e Date and time of the event

. Event classification e Definition of event classification e Name and title of Seabrook Station Spokesman e Cause of the event e State and federal government notifications e Action being taken to mitigate the event e Radiological release status e Statement related to injured personnel e Status of nonessential site personnel e Telephone information line number o "THIS IS A DRILL" at the beginning of each release when a drill is being conducted e If an ALERT is declared, include the plant information Rumor Control telephone number e Include statement urging NH and MASS residents to listen to their local radio stations for EBS messages from their State agencies e If a SITE AREA EMERGENCY or GENERAL EMERGENCY is declared, include the local meteorological conditions and a statement instructing the public to listen to local radio stations

d. Obtain approval for the content of news releases from the Response Manager, (or Site Emergency Director if Response Manager has not yet arrived) prior to releasing to the public.

e. Discuss the content of news releases with the Spokesman or the Emergency News Manager.

f. Ensure the approved news release is transmitted to the Media Center and distributed to the Media Relations / Rumor Control Supervisor, EOF personnel and the Joint owner Liaisons,

g. Ensure the Media Center is contacted regularly with updates on plant status.

h. Ensure that a new news release is drafted whenever any of the following occurs:

(1) change in plant status (2) change in classification level (3) radiological release conditions change (4) rumor or inquiry that should be addressed (5) any event that may be deemed as newsworthy (

ER 3.3T Rev. 18 Page 2 of 3 l

y ,

EMERGENCY CO MUNICATIONS. COORDINATOR (ECC) CHECKLIST -l (Continued) l l

,~\ <

i, Ensure that news releases periodically describe the

.. l i ' INITIAL.

V chronology of emergency activities.

J. Ensure that the Document Control Center Coordinator is provided with a copy of approved news release for transmittal over INPO Nuclear. Network.

3. ACCIDENT ASSESSMENT

a. Attend all regular plant status briefings conducted by the Response Manager.

b. Interface with the NRC Public Affairs Technical Briefer, when applicable.

4. MANPOWER / EQUIPMENT NEEDS' Coordinate manpower or equipment requests through the Administrative Services Coordinator.

t

5. DEACTIVATION Submit all completed emergency documentation to the Administrative .

Services Coordinator.

O p

ER 3.3T Rev. 18 ,

Page 3 of 3 l

l

TECHNICAL ADVISOR (EOF) CHECKLIST

1. ACTIVATION INITIAL

,y s D

L

a. Sign in on'the EOF roster board.

b. Obtain the Technical Advisor's Emergency Response Position

[' ' Manual and initiate this checklist,

c. . Attach your Station badge, to - the green identification tag

' ~ '

located at-your workstation.

d. Report to the Technical" Assistant for assignment to the ]

Emergency Communications Coordinator or as the communications- !

link with a Media Center Technica1' Advisor. !

l

e. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or. controlled copies of procedures . in your position packet.

2. ACCIDENT ASSESSMENT

a. If assigned to the Emergency Communications Coordinator, implement the following steps: j (1) Provida technical expertise to assist the Emergency.

Communications Coordinator.

(2) Provide technical interpretation during and after

- meetings between the Emergency Communications Coordinator l

[

and Response Manager.

(3) Review draft news release for technical accuracy.

(4) Monitor the situation during the absence of the Emergency Communications Coordinator,

b. If assigned as liaison to a Media Center Technical' Advisor, implement the following steps:

(1) Initiate telephone contact with the Media Center Technical Advisor.

(2) Once contact is established,~ maintain the line open.

(3) Provide technical and background information regarding the accident.

I'

c. Both assignees should document all emergency information on Form ER 2.0E, Emergency Facility Log.

h- 3. DEACTIVATION Submit all completed emergency documentation to.the Emergency

. . Communications Coordinator.

t-ER 3.3U~

( Rev. 18 i

es, - .

C,

, r ECCC WRITER / COMMUNICATOR CHECKLIST'

~ 7~N 1., ACTIVATION INITIAL-

'~' Sign in on the EOF roster board.

.a.

b. Proceed to the ECCC Writer / Communicator workstation and initiate this checklist.

c. Attachiyour Station badge to the green ~ identification tag

, located at your workstation.

13. Obtain Supplemental Material 16, Media Center /ECCC Writer Communicator Resource. Manual.

e. Report to the Emergency Communications Coordinator.

c

f. ' Check workstation phone for operability.

@lE Determine if the Media.-Center has been activated by attempting to establish the telephone communication link.

g. Prepare the word processor for operation. Refer to Resource Manual for instructions,

h. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current

[A revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. NEWS RELEASES

a. Draf t news release as directed by the Emergency Communications F,oordinator.

b. Maintain communications with Media Center Writer /

Communicator at the Media Center.

. c. Ensure that the final news release, as released by the Media Center, is given to the ECCC Clerk copying and distribution.

Distribution list is provided on Form ER 3.3JJ.

3. DEACTIVATION Submit all completed emergency documentation to the Emergency Communications Coordinator.

l l

k ER 3.3V Rev. 18

t b /

1 EOF ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF CHECKLIST-j >4

.1. ACTIVATION. INITIAL

a. Sign in on the EOF roster. board.

b. 'Obtain the EOF Administrative Staff Emergency Response Po'ition Manual and initiate this checklist.

i. c. Attach yourLStation badge to.the green' identification tag

located at your workstation.

. d. Report to the Administrative Services Coordinator for 'l '

~

assignment.

e. Verify date 'and time:on EOF fax machines and correct them :

if necessary.

f. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this,. compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. ADMINISTRATIVE SUPPORT

a. -If you are assigned to support the Response Manager, implement the following actions:

j- (1) Report to the Response Manager.

-\

(2) . Monitor all Response Manager communications and log all decision making discussions on Form ER 2.0E, Emergency Facility Log. Record the time of these discussions.

(3) Accompany the Response Manager to all conferences.

-Record noteworthy items such as: (a) discussions.with the NRC or States concerning PARS; (b) approval of news releases;.

and (c) classification changes.

(4) At the termination of the emergency, submit the log to the Administrative Services Coordinator.

b. If assigned to the EOF Coordinator, implement the following actions:

(1) ' Report to the EOF Coordinator.

(2) Monitor all EOF Coordinator activities and log any actions taken related to: (a) PAR discussions; (b) offsite notification process; and (c) manpower and equipment requests. Use Form ER 2.0E, Emergency Facility. Log.

(3) Accompany the EOF Coordinator to all conferences, unless instructed otherwise.

-VO ER 3.3W Rev. 18 Page 1 of 2

p- 1 EOF ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF CllECKLIST (Continued)

(4) At the termination of the emergency, submit the log to the Administrative Services Coordinator,

c. If assigned to operate the Secretarial Answering Unit, implement the following actions:

(1) Monitor telephones of ERO personnel within the EOF and answer phones when ERO personnel are away from their workstations.

(2) Log telephone _ messages on Form ER 2.0E, Emergency Facility Log, and forward to the appropriate ERO position.

(3) At the termination of the emergency, submit the log to the Administrative Services Coordinator.

O l

I ER 3.3W Rev. 18 9i i i

PaSe 2 of 2 l

l l

l

c \

JOINT OWNERS LIATCON CHECKLIST f

~x 1. ACTIVATION INITIAL i

/

a. Sign in on the EOF Roster Board.

b. Obtain the Joint Owner Liaison's Emergency Response Position Manual and initiate this checklist.

c. Attach your Station badge to the green identification tag located at your workstation.

d. Check workstation telephones for operability,

e. Obtain a briefing from the Response Manager.

f. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. . NOTIFICATIONS

a. Notify the Joint Owner Contacts listed in the Emergency Response Telephone Directory.

. Provide an event briefing.

. Establish a periodic callback schedule.

-~s e Provide your telephone number and the DCC telecopy number.

I \

-- b. Telecopy all news releases to the Joint Owner Contacts, including:

(1) Initial press release (s) issued from the site prior to EOF and Media Center activation.

(2) All press releases originating from the EOF.

(3) All State press releases.

c. Attend all formal briefings conducted by the Response Manager.

d. Inform the Industry Liaison if a Joint Owner utility offers response assistance or resources.

3. DEACTIVATION Submit all completed emergency documentation to the Administrative Services Coordinator.

5 y h

, V ER 3.3X Rev. 18 1

l l

a METPAC OPERATOR CHECKLIST

1. ACTIVATION INITIAL r^.1 i'~' ]

a. Sign in on the EOF roster board.

b. Obtain the METPAC Operator's Emergency Response Position Manual and initiate this checklist.

c. Attach your Station badge to the green identification tag located at your workstation.

d. Check workstation telephones for operability,

e. Activate the METPAC computer in accordance with Procedure ER 5.3, Operation of the METPAC System.

f. Inform the Dose Assessment Specialist when the METPAC system is operational.

g. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. ACCIDENT ASSESSMENT

a. Perform offsite dose projections using the METPAC computer.

m l i b. Provide results of dose calculations to the Dose Assessment

\- ' Specialist.

3. CLASSIFICATIONS Inform the Dose Assessment Specialist immediately when dose or dose rate estimates / measurements exceed any 12 series Emergency Action Levels contained on Form ER 1.1A. A wall-mounted copy of this form is maintained in the Technical Assistant work area.

4. MANPOWER / EQUIPMENT NEEDS Report the need for additional manpower and/or equipment to the Dose Assess.mnt Specialist.

5. PLANNED RELEASES Provide offsite dose estimates for planned radiological releases. ,

6. REENTRY AND RECOVERY

a. Provide the Dose Assessment Specialist with the total population exposure, when requested.

b. Assist in the development of the initial potential

,-s contamination pattern and in the initial sampling strategy.

(V)

ER 3.3Y Rev. 18 Page 1 of 2 l i

l 1

-_)

METPAC CPERATOR CHECKLIST (Continued)

c. Enter offsite sampling and measurement data into the computer using the IPT software in accordance with the Ingestion Pathway Tracking Software User Manual,

d. Provide guidance to personnel assigned to assist in the IPT data entry process.

e. Produce IPT reports and plots in accordance with the Ingestion Pathway Tracking Software User Manual when requested by the Dose Assessment Specialist or EOF Coordinator,

f. Provide further evaluations, assessments and duties as assigned by the Dose Assessment Specialist.

7. DEACTIVATION Submit all emergency documentation to the Dose Assessment Specialist.

O ER 3.3Y Rev. 18 l Page 2 of 2 i

EP

~

]

DOCUMENT CONTROL CENTER COORDINATOR CHECKLIST

' /%- 1. ACTIVATION _ INITIAL

.h a. -Sign in on the EOF Roster Board,

b. Obtain the' Document ' Control Center Coordinator's Emergency Response Position Manual and initiate this checklist, c .- Attach your Station badge to the green identification tag located at your workstation.

d. Check workstation telephones for operability.

e. Report to Administrative Services Coordinator for an accident briefing.

f. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the_ SSER or ' controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. NOTIFICATIONS

a. Operate the Nuclear Network issuing all press releases and accident summaries to the industry as directed by the Administrative Services Coordinator.

Wg b. Coordinate EOF telecopy arrangements for the engineering staff.

J 3. ACCIDENT ASSESSMENT

a. Coordinate document retrieval for the EOF-staff,

b. Operate the FINIS terminal, when necessary.

4. DEACTIVATION

a. Update all controlled document files used by the EOF staff, if necessary,

b. Submit all emergency documentation, including Network transmissions, to the Administrative Services Coordinator.

O ER 3.3Z Rev. 18

u a s w m. +-_u - a-.m .nsa- ,m.a,, .AM m s,,_,r_ a g ,4 m

_ __ _ _. a a _

1 l

1 1

t-(-

I I

O I

i

't I l

f

)

I 1

O f

.i 1

s O

d d

1

- - , , . -- - - -.. ..n,, - , _ _ , . _ ,_ .. _, _ ..-, - __ _ _ _ _________

4 MATERIAL AND IDGISTICS COORDINATOR CHECKLIST

, 1. ACTIVATION INITIAL

}

a. Sign in on the EOF roster board.

b. Obtain the~ Material and Logistics Coordinator's Emergency Response Position Manual and initiate this checklist,

c. Attach your Station badge to the green identification tag located at your workstation

d. Check workstation telephones for operability.

e. Report to Administrative Services Coordinator for an accident briefing.

f. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forns in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. NOTIFICATICN

a. Coord!nate vendor acquisitions in support of the ERO respotse.

b. Establish logistical arrangements for ERO response personnei.

7--)g

\

'- 3. MANPOWER / EQUIPMENT NEEDS

a. Interface with the Industry Liaison to obtain equipment resources through INPO or YNSD.

b. As needed, contact a service provider for any onsite or offsite emergency facility telephone or equipment repairs.

c. Confer with the Administrative Services Coordinator and Corporate Support Manager to determine if video recording /

playback equipment stored at the site is desired at the EOF.

d. Contact the Assistant News Manager at the Media Center to determine if video recording / playback equipment stored at the site is available at the Media Center. If not, determine if any equipment is desired.

1

e. If video recording / playback equipment is desired at either the l EOF or Media Center, perform the following: j (1) Ask the Corporate Support Manager to confirm that emergency conditions do not preclude travel to the site, and what precautions should be taken.

73 t b V ER 3.31A Rev. 18 Fage 1 of 2

7 g

MATERIAL AND IDGISTICS COORDINATOR CHECKLIST (Continued)

(2) Identify personnel to retrieve video recording / playback equipment from the High Rise, Training Center and/or GOB inventories. Consider using the Media Center Mechanics and/or the Media Center equipment trailer for this function.

After the Media Center is activated, these individuals will be on standby in the lower level of the JTIC building.

(3) Brief the Corporate Support Manager, Security Coordinator and the Technical Services Coordinator (in the TSC) on the gameplan for retrieving the equipment.

(4) Brief selected personnel on what items to gather (e.g.,

cameras, televisions, VCR playback units, cables, tripods, etc.), where items are to be delivered, travel constraints and precautions, and your telephone number if questions or problems arise.

4. DEACTIVATION

a. Support the recovery organization by expediting material acquisition to support recovery operations,

b. Submit all emergency documentation, such as MPRs and material receipt slips, to the Administrative Services Coordinator.

O ER 3.3AA Rev. 18 Page 2 of 2

-DOSIMETRY RECORDS PERSONNEL' CHECKLIST 1; ACTIVATION INITIAL I r

'I )

a. Sign in on the EOF roster board,

b. Obtain the Dosimetry Records Personnel Emergency Response Position Manual and initiate this checklist,

c. Attach your Station badge to the green identification tag-located at your workstation,

d. Check workstation telephones for operability. __

e. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled

~

copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. EMERGENCY DOSIMETRY PROCESSING F_Q.IE Refer to Figure 12 for an overview of the process described below.

a. Preparation (1) Verify FINIS Computer terminal operability.

(2) Begin rezeroing hi and lo range Self-Reading Pocket Dosimeters (SRPDs).

(3) Arrange dosimetry-on TLD rack for Offsite Monitoring and Sampling ,

Teams (OMST) in preparation for personnel issue. Include in each group a hi and lo range SRPD plus a TLD.

b. Offsite Monitoring and Samoline Team (OMST) Initial Deolovment (1) Obtain the names of OSMT personnel from the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator.

(2) Initiate Form ER 3.3GG, Offsite Monitoring and Sampling Team Exposure Tracking, for each OMST member.

(3) Perform the following steps to determine exposure status (see Figure 11).

l l (a) Sign on to FINIS - RPMS (b) To determine the current Whole Body Year To Date (WBYTD) exposure for an individual:

1 RPEWBSUM [SSf, security badge (4 digit) or name] {

1 i

ER 3.3DD "

Rev. 18 Page 1 of 6 l

1 l

DOSIMETRY RECORDS PERSONNEL CHECKLIST (Continued)

'(c) If FINIS-RPHS is unavailable, contact the Dosimetry Issue Technician at the OSC for the current WBYTD exposure status.

(d) Enter the value established for the current WBYTD on Form ER 3.3GG, Part 1.

(c) Subtract the WBYTD from the administrative limit (4500 mrem) and enter the value for the Remaining Allowable Exposure (RAE) on Form ER 3.3GG, Part I.

(f) If the RAE is less than 3000 mrem, inform the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator that an exposure extension may be required and note in Part II of Form ER 3.3GG.

(g) If extension is required, ensure Figure 4 of ER 4.3, Emergency Dose Limit Extension, is completed. Using Figure 4 of ER 4.3, complete Part II of Form ER 3.3GG.

(4) Enter the current RAE (or extended RAE if extension is given) on Form ER 5.2B, Offsite Monitoring and Sampling Team Briefing Form, when requested.

(5) Issue TLD by using Form ER 3.3II, Emergency Dosimetry Issue Log.

Enter date, time, security badge number and write "0MST" in the comments section.

(6) Enter the TLD number and TLD type on Form ER 3.3GG, Part III.

I (7) Give the individual the assigned TLD along with a hi and lo range SRPD and instruct the individual to write his/her name on the TLD.

(8) Instruct the individual to return dosimetry to the EOF Dosimetry Records Personnel following use unless otherwise directed by the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator.

(9) File Form ER 3.30G pending return of dosimetry.

(10) File Figure 4 of ER 4.3 as appropriate.

c. DMST Exposure Trackine (1) Each time an OMST member returns from the field, record date, time, l

and SRPD reading on Form ER 3.3CG, Part III.

(2) Determine new RAE by subtracting the SRPD reading from the current or extended RAE, whichever is greater, and document on Form ER 3.3GG, Part III.

(3) If the TIS readout is requested, forward the TLD to Northeast Utilities or YNSD as appropriate. Refer to step 2.f, Dosimetry Return, below.

ER 3.3DD Rev. 18 I

Page 2 of 6

).

c:

DOSIMETRY RECORDS PERSONNEL CHECKLIST (Continued) t, (4) Upon receipt of TLD dose results, fill out the appropriate sections on

'"' ) Forms ER 3.3GG and ER 3.3II.

(5) Calculate the revised RAE using Form ER 3.3GG, Part III.

(6) Notify the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator if the TLD and SRPD values differ by more than a factor of 2.

(7) Notify the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator of the TLD results and indicate on Form ER 3.3II in the "Notificttion Made" column.

d. Offsite Monitorinc and Samoline Team (OMST) Redaolovment (1) Perform the following steps to determine es.posure status.

(a) Initiate a new Form ER 3.3GG for each OMST member.

(b) Fill in the current RAE using the revised RAE from the member's previous Form ER 3.3GG. l (c) The Offsite Monitoring Coordinator will determine if an exposure extension is necessary. Fill out Part II of Form ER 3.3GG, as appropriate.

(d) If an extension is given, ensure Figure 4 of ER 4.3 is completed.

()

/"~ .

(e) Issue TLD and SRPD per Steps 2.b.4 through 2.b.10.

e. Personnel Deolovment to the Site (1) Issue dosimetry to personnel authorized site access per Form ER 3.3B, (2) Obtain a completed Form ER 3.3M, Kanpower Planning from the Administrative Services Coordinator and begin dosimetry issue process for second shift personnel.

(3) Initial Deployment to the Site I (a) If the individual is a currently monitored Seabrook radiation I worker, determine if the WBYTD from the Exposure Status Report (ESR) is greater than 3000 mrem.

(b) If the individual's WBYTD is greater than 3000 mrem, notify the Radiological Controls Coordinator (RCC) at the OSC for further instructions. ,

I (c) If the individual is not a currently monitored Seabrook radiation )

worker, ensure Form ER 3.3HH, Current Year to Date Exposure, is g completed. Unless official final dosimetry results are ;

available, the current year exposure is considered an estimate. !

fx (d) Complete YTD Transit Card for the individual (see Figure 13).

I \

L/ ER 3.3DD Rev. 18 1 Page 3 of 6 i

DOSIMETRY RECORDS PERSONNEL CHECKLIST (Continued)

(e) Issue dosimetry per step 2.e.5.

lf (4) Redeployment to the Site Issue dosimetry per step 2.e.5.

(5) Dosimetry Issue (a) If it is determined that site TLDs can be used, proceed to Step 2.e.6.

(b) Using Form ER 3.3II, Emergency Dosimetry Issue Log, enter for Seabrook Worker - date, time, and security badge number. For All Others - date, time, social security number, name and organization.

(c) Attach a YTD Transit Card (Figure 13) to the TLD, as appropriate.

Apply a blank label to the TLD.

(d) Give the' individual the TLD along with a hi and lo range SRFD.

Instruct the individual to write his/her name on the TLD.

(e) Should dosimetry be requested for State emergency workers, the State emergency organization is responsible for exposure records and controls. Record issue of dosimetry only.

(6) Instruct the individual to return the dosimetry to the EOF Dosimetry Records Personnel following use unless otherwise directed by supervisory personnel,

f. Dosimetry Re turn (1) Verify that all returned badge hangers have been surveyed for contamination. If not surveyed, direct personnel to the Radiological Assistant.

(2) Dosimetry assigned to an individual not requiring readout may be reused by the same individual for subsequent shifts.

(3) Prioritize TLD readout from SRPD estimates according to the following, unless otherwise directed.

(a) 0-1000 mR Low Priority (b) 1001 2000 mR High Priority (c) 2001-3000+ mR Immediate Readout (4) Log all dosimetry returned for processing on Form ER 3.311 even if not originally issued from the EOF. If SRPD results and/or comments are listed on the EOF Dosimetry Return (Figure 14), fill out the appropriate sections of Form ER 3.3II.

ER 3.3DD Rev. 18 Page 4 of 6

DOSIMETRY RECORDS PERSONNEL CHECKLIST (Continued)

)

(5) Forward TLDs for readout to Northeast Utilities or YNSD for processing. Separate SRPDs and set aside for rezeroing.

(6) Obtain the TLD report when readout is complete and update TLD and exposure records as follows:

(a) For Whole Body dosimetry, indicate DDE, LDE and SDE-ME on Form

.ER 3.3II.

(b) For extremity dosimetry enter value under SDE-ME heading on Form l

ER 3.3II.

l (7) Notify the following of dose results, as appropriate.

l I (a) Personnel deployed to site - Dosimetry Issue Technician at OSC. l (b) OMST Personnel - OMC at EOF.

(c) MA State Personnel - Director of Radiation Control Program.

(d) NH State Personnel - NH Radiation Exposure Clerk.

(e) Additional notification per special instructions.

(f) Any exposure greater than 4.5 rem - Dose Assessment Specialist.

n

g. Expanded Dosimetrv Response

(

(1) Determine the projected dosimetry needa of the Station response j organization. If the level exceeds available supplies, notify the l Dose Assessment Specialist that the Yankee Nuclear Services Division !

(YNSD) mobile support teams must be dispatched immediately, if such '

action has not already been initiated.

(2) Inform the Dose Assessment Specialist of van arrivals and subsequent activation to full status.

(3) Inform the TLD Van Coordinator of badge volume needed for issue in preparation of whole body badge TLD system turnover.

(4) Obtain the badge supply and coordinate issuance.

(5) Continue emergency dosimetry issue using YNSD TLD badges and rezeroed SRPDs. Indicate badge type (YNSD) on Form ER 3.3II.

-(6) Previously issued TLDs will continue to be read out at Northeast Utilities.

(7) Continue coordinating dose records update.

A ER 3.3DD Rev. 18 Page 5 of 6

(

. - _ _ _ - ________-__-_________________________________-__A

DOSIMETRY RECORDS PERSONNEL CHECKLIST (Continued)

3. DEACTIVATION INITIAL

a. Document results of all emergency dosimetry analyses.

b. Reissue dosimetry to recovery organization for RCA access.

c. Submit all emergency documentation to the Administrative Services Coordinator.

l l

9 ER 3.3DD Rev. 18 Page 6 of 6

l ECCC CLERK CHECKLIST

1. ACTIVATION INITIAL i

s_, ) a. Sign in on the EOF roster board,

b. Obtain the ECCC Clerk Emergency Response Position Manual and initiate this checklist,

c. Attach your Station badge to the green identification tag located at your workstation.

d. Report to the Emergency Communications Coordinator for assignment.

e. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. ADMINISTRATIVE SUPPORT

a. Report to the Emergency Communications Coordinator.

b. Prepare copies of approved news releases ano distribute to the following personnel:

Media Center (via telecopier)

Response Manager Both EOF Technical Advisors jN Designated Massachusetts Representative

( ,)

Designated New Hampshire Representative Designated Maine Representative EOF Document Control Center Coordinator Designated FEMA Representative Designated NRC Representative Emergency Communications Coordinator Joint Owner Liaisons (2 copies)

NH Public Utilities Commission Representative

c. Ensure that the Joint Owners Liaison office receives news releases in a timely manner,

d. Send copies of approved news bulletins to the Media Center (via telecopier)

e. Assume clerical duties as assigned to include:

e answering telephones in the Emergency Communications Command Center (ECCC) e operating copy machine located in Dose Assessment Area e operating telecopier (the telecopier is used as a means by which the ECCC can transmit approved news releases and bulletins to the Media Center) p

, Y ER 3.3JJ Rev. 18 Page 1 of 2

s i ECCG CLERK CHECKLIST (Continued)

NOTE All Media Center messages should be telecopied/ forwarded to the Assistant News Manager at the Media Center.

f. At the termination of the emergency, submit all documentation to the Administrative Services Coordinator.

O ER 3.3JJ Rev. 18 Page 2 of 2

ERO TECIDTICAL LIAISON CHECKLIST

1. ACTIVATION INITIAL

a. Sign in on the EOF roster board.

b. Obtain und initiate checklist ER 3.3KK from the EOF forms file,

c. Attach your Station badge to the green identification tag located at your workstation.

d. Maintain a log using Form ER 2.0E, Emergency Facility Log.

e. Contact the Technical Assistant to obtain a briefing on (1) Station status (2) radiological releases (3) classification j (4) notifications (5) protective action recommendations (PARS) status l

t

! f. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current

! revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. ACCIDENT ASSESSMEtTI

a. Obtain regular plant status briefings from the Technical Assistant.

() b. As required, obtain copies of logger trend printouts from the Technical Assistant. Other technical material can be obtained from the DCC Coordinator.

3. NOTIFICATIONS

a. Notify and provide periodic briefings to the New Hampshire Public Utilities Commission (NHPUC) Chief Engineer (or as conditions warrant). This contact is not required if an NHPUC representative has responded to the EOF. (Ref. 6.11)

b. Notify and provide periodic briefings to the NHPUC Representative in the EOF (or as conditions warrant). Provide other technical information as requested. (Ref. 6.10)

c. Notify and provide periodic briefings to the MEMA Nuclear Engineer. Provide other technical information as requested.

(Ref. 6.20)

d. Interface with the MEMA Liaison regarding plant information.

e. Provide briefings and/or technical information to the Area I Utility Representative as requested.

f. As needed, request administrative support from the Administrative Services Coordinator.

ER 3.3KK Rev. 18 Page 1 of 2

ERO TECHNICAL LIAISON CHECKLIST (Continued) 4 DEACTIVATION INITIAL Submit all emergency documentation to the Administrative Services 9 <I Coordinator. (

l l

1 i

O ER 3.3KK Rev. 18 Page 2 of 2 ,

I 1

l

r' TRAINING CENTER STAFF CHECKLIST

1. ACTIVATION INITIAL t i y) a '. Sign in on the EOF roster board,

b. After obtaining the checklist from the EOF forms file, report to the Technical Assistant and obtain a briefin6 and ins tructions ,

c. Attach your station badge to the green identification tag located at your workstation.

d. At the direction of the Technical Assistant, enable the MET menu and the logger trend of the Main Plant Computer System.

e. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. ACCIDENT ASSESSMENT

a. Obtain plant parameters to be monitored from the Technical Assistant.

b. Monitor operational data and trends as directed by the Technical Assistant.

c. Provide data updates to EOF staff, particularly to the METPAC (x.sw) Operator, as directed by the Technical Assistant.

d. Assist the Technical Assistant with answering EOF staff inquiries and with obtaining accident assessment assistance from the YAEC Engineering Support Center (ESC).

e. In the event of total or partial failure of the Main Plant Computer System, assist the Technical Assistant with acquisition of plant data from the TSC. Use Forms ER 2.0H through K to facilitate data transfer.

f. Ensure that the operational trend status boatd and the system status board are maintained and updated. If Forms ER 2.0H through K aro used, ensure they are used to update the status boards.

g. Assist the Technical Assistant with monitoring plant operational data, providing pertinent data to offsite liaison personnel, and performing other duties as assigned by the Technical Assistant.

3. HANP0tJER/ EQUIPMENT NEEDS

a. Assist the Technical Assistant with determining resource requirements and material purchases needed by plant personnel to support corrective actions.

( ER 3.3LL N- -

Rev. 18 Page 1 of 2

- TRAINING CENIER STAFF C11ECKLIST (Continued)

INIITAL

b. In the event of a power loss in the EOF, receive direction from the O Technical Assistant to start the standby diesel generator using the instructions in ER 3.3, Figure 4.

4. DEACTIVATION Submit all emergency documentation to the Technical Assistant.

O i

l I

4 I

ER 3.3LL Rev. 18 Page 2 of 2

ER 3.4 P:ga 1 Rev. 9

,g ADKINISTRATIVE FROCEDURE COVER FORM I

\ s] ' A. IDENTIFICATION NUM3ER ER 3.4 ' REVISION 9 TITLE SEABROOK STATION NEWS SERVICES OPERATIONS ORIGINATOR J. W. Baer

1. Does this procedure / procedure revision:

a. Make changes in the facility as described in the UFSAR7 O Yes E No

b. Make changes in procedures as described in the UFSAR7 O Yes E No

c. Involve tests or experiments not described in the UFSAR7 O Yes E No

d. Involve changes to the existing Operating License or require additional license requirements? O Yes E No

2. If any of the above questions are answered y.gg, a safety evaluation per the Regulatory Compliance Manual (NARC) is required. (The individual performing the above review shall have completed 10 CFR 50.59 training.)

B. MANAGER / DEPARTMENT SUPERVISOR APPROVAL l TITLE SIGNATURE D6IE N A Gett- a 3M i i i t

C. NUCLEAR OUALITY SERVICES REVIEW TITLE SIGNATURE DATE

& \A D. E REVIEW SORC MEETING NO. k6-O N E. APPROVAL FOR IMPLEMENTATION ffkh *

////f fJ' 05/03/95 EFFECTIVE DATE APMOViL DATE STATION [IRECTOR SM 6.1A V Rev. 13 I

L__-_______-___________-________________-____________________________________

ER 3.4 Pcga 2 Rev. 9 CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS COVER 1 9 CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS 2 9-1.0 OBJECTIVES 3 8 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 3 2.1 SHORT TERM EMERCENCY DIRECTOR / SITE EMERGENCY DIRECTOR 3 2.2 EMERCENCY NEWS MANAGER 3 2.3 TECHNICAL ADVISOR 3 2.4 NEWS SERVICES REPRESENTATIVE 3 2.5 SSNS CLERK 3 3.0 PRECAUTIONS 3 4.0 PREREQUISITES 3 5.0 ACTIONS 3 5.1 NEWS RELEASE 3-4 8 5.2 NEWS BRIEFINGS 5 8 5.3 PUBLIC STATEMENTS AND RESPONSES TO INQUIRIES 5 5.4 SPECIAL MEDIA REQUESTS 5 5.5 UTILIZATION OF THE MEDIA CENTER 6 8 5.6 PHASED SSNS DEACTIVATION / MEDIA CENTER ACTIVATION 6 5.7 CHECKLIST REFERENCES 7 8

6.0 REFERENCES

7 !

l 7.0 ATTACHMENTS j l

Figure 1, Seabrook Station News Services 8 8 Organization ER 3.4A, Event Status 9 ER 3.4B, Seabrook Station News Services Manpower 8 Planning ER 3.4C, Emergency News Manager Checklist 9 ER 3.4D, Technical Advisor Checklist 9 ER 3.4E, News Services Representative Checklist 9 ER 3.4F, SSNS Clerk Checklist 9

EVENT STATUS

- - 's, . Briefing No. Time Date Prepared by j -'

\ I. 'CIASSIFICATION -

II. REASON FOR DECLARATION - (Initiating Condition Number from the Emergency Classification Flowchart)

III. TIME OF DECIARATION -

IV. RADIOLOGICAL RELEASES - (yes/no) Explanation:

V. STATE AND FEDERAL GOVERNMENTS NOTIFIED - (yes/no)

/~'N 1

I l

I O

%.) ER 3.4A Rev. 9

EMERGENCY NEWS MANAGER CHECKLIST

1. ACTIVATION INITIAL 7-

) a. Upon notification of an Unusual Event, call the Control Room and contact the STED, SED or Control Room Communicator to obtain a briefing using Form ER 3.4A, Event Status.

HOTE Minimize follow-up contacts with the Control Room to 1/2 hour frequency unless required for news release approval.

b. Report to the North Atlantic Communications Offices in the

eneral Office Building (GOB).

c. Obtain the Emergency News Manager Emergency Response Position Manual located in the emergency response storage area,

d. Using the Seabrook Station Emergency Response Telephone Directory, contact the remaining SSNS staff as defined in Figure 1, SSNS Organization. Document name, telephone number, and time contacted using Form ER 3.4B, Seabrook Station News Services Manpower Planning.

e. Inform GOB Receptionist that the SSNS is being activated and to prepare for the arrival of SSNS personnel.

,m e i f. Contact and brief the Director of North Atlantic k_.) Communications.

g. Ensure the Technical Advisor contacts the Control Room for a briefing if additional information is required.

h. Document response actions taken on Form ER 2.0E, Emergency Facility Log.

1. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. NEWS RELEASE

a. Prepare news releases in accordance with 65.1 of this procedure. j l

b. Obtain STED/ SED approval prior to issuing the news release, O

\,s)

I ER 3.4C Rev. 9 Page 1 of 2

ENERGENCY NEWS MANAGER CHECKLIST (Continued)

3. NEWS BRIEFINGS INITIAL

a. Inform Seabrook Station Security Supervisor of time and O location of news briefings and to prepare for the arrival of news media personnel.

b. Conduct news briefings in accordance with $5.2 of this procedure.

4. PUBLIC STATEMENTS AND RESPONSES TO INQUIRIES Respond to inquiries and public statements in accordance with $5.3 of this procedure.

5. SPECIAL MEDIA REQUESTS Coordinate special media requests in accordance with $5.4 of this procedure.

6. INFORMATION LINE e the Voice-Tel Information Line the latest information from approved news releases.

7. UTILIZATION OF THE MEDIA CENTER Develop Media Center activation strategies in accordance with $5.5 of this procedure.

8. PHASED SSNS DEACTIVATION / MEDIA CENTER ACTIVATION

a. Perform phased SSNS deactivation /Madia Center activation in accordance with 95.6 of this procedure.

b. Submit all emergency documentation to the Emergency Preparedness Manager.

l ER 3.4C l

l Rev. 9 Page 2 of 2

f

'I !

,L \ .

TECHNICAL' ADVISOR CHECKLIST

1. - ACTI'VATION . ' INITIAL-

a. Upon request from the Emergency News Manager, report to 1

-the North Atlantic Communications offices in the ceneral Office Building (GOB). ;

I

b. ' Obtain the Technical Advisor Emergency Response Position Manual located in the emergency response storage area. .

I

c. As directed by the ENM, obtain regular briefings, using l Form ER 3.4A, from the STED/ SED or Control Room Communicator.

(1) Coordinate Control Room contact with the Emergency News Manager.

(2) Follow-up contact with the STED/ SED or Control Room Communicator should not be more than once every 1/2 hour iexcept for news release approval.

d. Verify that forms'obtained from the forms file are the current I revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those '

of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

(- 2. NEWS RELEASE Brief and advise the Emergency News Manager on technical issues.

i 3. NEWS BRIEFINGS

- Assist'in news briefings in accordance with $5.2 of this procedure.

4. DEACTIVATION Submit all emergency documentation to the Emergency News Manager.

i i

i 1 l-l

!I l

ER 3.4D J Rev. 9 o

NEWS SERVICES REPRFJENTATIVE CHECKLIST

1. ACTIVATION INITIAL

a. Upon notification of an Unusual Event, report to the

\~/ ) North Atlantic Communications offices in the General Office Building (GOB).

b. Obtain the News Services Representative Emergency Response Position Manual located in the emergency response storage area.

c. Respond to news media calls or rumor related calls as directed by the Emergency News Manager.

d. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. NEWS RELEASE Assist the ENM in preparing news releases in accordance with l

$5.1 of this procedure.

3. NEWS BRIEFINGS Assist in the conduct of news briefings in accordance with 65.2 of this procedure.

~s 4.

(J ) PUBLIC STATEMENTS AND RESPONSES TO INQUIRIES Respond to inquiries and public statements in accordance with

$5.3 of this procedure.

5. SPECIAL MEDIA REQUESTS Arrange special media requests as directed by the ENM and in accordance with 55.4 of this procedure.

6. UTILIZATION OF THE MEDIA CENTER Implement Media Center utilization strategies as directed by the ENM and in accordance with $5.5 of this procedure.

7. PHASED SSNS DEACTIVATION / MEDIA CENTER ACTIVATION

a. Perform phased SSNS deactivation / Media Center activation in accordance with $5.6 of this procedure.

b. Submit all emergency documentation to the Emergency News Manager.

f Q/

A)

ER 3.4E Rev. 9 i

]

SSNS CLERK CHECKLIST

1. ACTIVATION INITIAL (m a. Upon notification of an Unusual Event, report to the

)

/ North Atlantic Communications offices in the General Office l Building (GOB).

l

b. Obtain the SSNS Clerk Emergency Response Position Manual located in the emergency response storage area,

c. Ensure that word processors, typewriters, telephones and telecopiers are operable, provide a status report to the News Services Representative,

d. Perform administrative duties as directed by the News Services Representative.

e. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. NEWS RELEASE

a. Type news releases under Emergency News Manager direction end in accordance with $5.1 of this procedure.

b. Log all approved news releases in the Emergency Facility Log, Form ER 2.0E.

[\._)/ c. Copy and distribute approved news releases according to the following order or priority:

- 20 copies to North Atlantic Communications Offices in the GOB

- 70 copies to the Science and Nature Center

- 10 copies to the Community Relations Department

3. NEWS BRIEFINCS Assist in news briefings as directed by the News Services Representative in accordance with $5.2 of this procedure.

4. PUBLIC STATEMENTS AND RESPONSES TO INQUIRIES Assist in responding to inquiries and public statements as directed by the News Services Representative in accordance with $5.3 of this procedure.

5. SPECIAL MEDIA REQUESTS Assist in responding to special media requests as directed by the News Services Representative in accordance with $5.4 of this procedure.

I ER 3.4F V Rev. 9 Page 1 of 2 l 1

i

SSNS CLERK CHECKLIST (Continued)

6. UTILIZATION OF THE MEDIA CENTER INITIAL Assist in implementing Media Center utilization strategies as directed by the News Services Representative in accordance with $5.5 of this procedure.

7. PHASED SSNS DEACTIVATION / MEDIA CENTER ACTIVATION

a. Assist in implementing phased SSNS deactivation / Media Center activation as directed by the Emergency News Manager in accordance with $5.6 of this procedure,

b. Submit all emergency documentation to the Emergency News Manager.

O ER 3.4F Rev. 9 Page 2 of 2

w ER 3.5 P:ga 1 Rev. 15

,- ADMINISTRATIVE FROCEDURE COVER FORM A. IDENTIFICATION i

NUMBER ER 3.5 REVISION 15 TITLE MEDIA CENTER / JOINT TELEPHONE INFORMATION CENTER ORIGINATOR J. W. Baer

1. Does this procedure / procedure revision:

a. Make changes in the facility as described in the UFSAR7 O Yes E No

b. Make changes in procedures as described in the UFSAR7 O Yes E No

c. Involve tests or experiments not described in the UFSAR? O Yes E No

d. Involve changes to the existing Operating License or require additional license requirements? O Yes E No

2. If any of the .above questions are answered ys1. a safety evaluation per the Regulatory Compliance Manual (NARC) is required. (The individual performing the above review.shall have completed 10 CFR 50.59 training.)

B. MANAGER / DEPARTMENT SUPERVISOR APPROVAL TITLE SIGNATURE DAIE EP be hvCC16d 4/3As I '

C. NUCLEAR OUALITY SERVICES REVIEW TITLE SIGNATURE DATE bl Id D. SORC REVIEW SORC MEETING NO. h54 E. APPROVAL FOR IMPLEMENTATION f/hr/),

J///p)j" 05/03/95

APfR641L DATE EFFECTIVE DATE STATIO%IRECTOR l

,O SM 6.lA

\ Rev. 13 4

ER 3.5 Pega 2 Rev. 15 CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS CONTENTS PAGE NO. PAGE REV. O.

COVER 1 15 CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS 2-4 15 1.0 OBJECTIVE 5 12 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 5 2.1 EMERGENCY NEWS MANAGER 5 2.2 ARSISTANT NEWS MANAGER 5 2.3 SPOKESPERSON 5 2.4 HEALTH PHYSICS ADVISOR 5 2.5 MEDIA RELATIONS FLOOR LIAISON 5 2.6 EMERGENCY SERVICES SUPERVISOR 5 2.7 MEDIA RELATIONS / RUMOR CONTROL LIAISON 5 2.8 MEDIA RELATIONS / RUMOR CONTROL SUPERVISOR 5 2.9 MEDIA RELATIONS ASSISTANT 5 2.10 RUMOR CONTROL ASSISTANT 5 2.11 TECHNICAL ADVISOR (MC) 6 12 2.12 MEDIA CENTER WRITER / COMMUNICATOR 6 2.13 MEDIA CENTER MECHANIC 6 2.14 MEDIA CENTER REGISTRAR 6 4

2.15 SECURITY PERSONNEL 6 2.16 MEDIA CENTER ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF AND JOINT TELEPHONE INFORMATION CENTER ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF 6 3.0 PRECAUTIONS 6 4.0 6 PREREQUISITES 5.0 ACTIONS 7 12 5.1 EMERGENCY NEWS MANAGER 7 5.2 ASSISTANT NEWS MANAGER 7

I ER 3.5 P:gs 3 Rev, 15 CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS r-]

PAGE NO. PAGE REV, !

CONTENTS 5.0 ACTIONS 5.3 SPOKESPERSON 7 5.4 HEALTH PHYSICS ADVISOR 7 5.5 MEDIA REIATIONS FIh0R LIAISON 7 5.6 EMERGENCY SERVICES SUPERVISOR 7 5.7 MEDIA RELATIONS / RUMOR CONTROL LIAISON 7 5.8 MEDIA REIATIONS/ RUMOR CONTROL SUPERVISOR 7 5.9 MEDIA REIATIONS ASSISTANT 7 5.10 RUMOR CONTROL ASSISTANT 7 5.11 TECHNICAL ADVISOR (MC) 8 12 5.12 MEDIA CENTER WRITER / COMMUNICATOR 8 5.13 MEDIA CENTER MECHANIC 8

/-

8

' 5.14 MEDIA CENTER REGISTRAR 5.15 SECURITY PERSONNEL 8 5.16 MEDIA CENTER ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF 8 5.17 JOINT TELEPHONE INFORMATION CENTER ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF 8 5.18 PUBLIC STATEMENTS AND RESPONSES TO INQUIRIES 8 5.19 BRIEFINGS 9 12 5.20 MEDIA REQUESTS 9

6.0 REFERENCES

9 7.0 ATTACHMENTS Figure 1, Media Center Setup Diagram 10 15 Figure 2, Media Center / Joint Telephone Information Center Organization 11 15 Figure 3, Media Center Report Status Board 12 15 Figure 4, Information Line Instructions 13 13 Figure 5 Media Center Setup Diagram (Public Shelter p)

,v Contingency) 14 15

ER 3.5 P:g'a 4 Rev. 15 CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS 7.0 -ATTACMMENTS ER 3.5A, Information Line Punch List 15 l ER 3.5B, Media Center General Registration 11 i ER 3.5C, Media Relations - Inquiries / Rumors 13 {

ER 3.5D, Rumor Control - Inquiries / Rumors 15 l ER 3.5E, Emergency News Manager checklist 15 l ER 3.5F, Assistant News Manager Checklist 15 ER 3.5G, Spokesperson Checklist 15 ER 3.5H, Health Physics Advisor Checklist 15 ER 3.5I, Media Relations Floor Liaison Checklist 15 ER 3.5J, Emergency Services Supervisor Checklist 15 ER 3.5K, Media Relations / Rumor Control Liaison Checklist 15 ER 3.5L, Media Relations / Rumor Contrel Supervisor Checklist 15 ER 3.5M, Media Relations Assistant Checklist 15 ER 3.5N, Rumor Control Assistant Checklist 15 ER 3.5P, Technical Advisor (MC) Checklist 15 ER 3.5Q, Media Center Writer / Communicator Checklist 15 ER 3.5R, Media Center Mechanic Checklist 12 ER 3.5S, Media Center Registrar Checklist 11 ER 3.5T, Security Personnel Checklist 12 ER 3.5U, Media Center Administrative Staff Checklist 15 ER 3.5V, Joint Telephone Information Center Administrative Staff Checklist 15 l

l r

O

... r.

M ;. .;a: 5.;'f ~

,: ;w 39 c

-Qp) " ;1,)y ,

f' , qi

'~

ER 3.5'3- .Page 11i ,

t Rev.' 15 f n- ~

t-1- ._ - %

FIGURE 2- -

i MEDIA CENTER / JOINT TELEPHONE INFORMATION CENTER ORGANIZATION s

~ -

, d. . -

EPERGENCY NEWS MANAGER- -

MC 1

~

J 1

, PEDIA RELATIONS / t ASSISTANT e MEDIA .

, RUMOR CONTROL TECHNICAL - NEWS . ' RELATIONS SPOKESPERSON LIAISON ADVISOR (MC) MANAGER FLOOR LIAISON MC 1 MC l2 MC 1 -MC l 2 MC- 1 .

MEDIA RELATIONS / SECURITY- MEDIA CENTER EMERGENCY HEALTH-RUMOR CONTROL _. WRITER / . SERVICES PHYSICS, SUPERVISOR . PERSONNEL .

COMMUNICATOR ~ SUPERVISOR ADVISOR-JTIC MC l 2

^

1 MC - l 1 MC 1 MC l 1 --

e MEDIA MEDIA CENTER

~ RELATIONS MEDIA CENTER MEDIA' CENTER REGISTRAR

- ADMINISTRATIVE ASSISTANT STAFF MECHANIC JTIC l 3 MC -l 2 MC l3 MC l 4 RUMOR

_ CONTROL ASSISTANT JTIC l 2' .

KEY JTIC

' _ ADMINISTRATIVE TITLE STAFF-JTIC l 2 I' - -O EPLANsES79172.DGN

- LOCATION NikeER.-l s

t --

j

< w

--_---vw_ - - - =

h 3,-4 , %.,,r s ,r p ---n- r m,--- a,-y o -e . . , - y .-

3

^

.,,. -ww'.1s ,r-w% -w .--s.- -e,-, .

2 1

P e

g a S E

O 5 T 51 O N

3 .

v Re ER SS NS OA IM T

C -

A D

EE VT IN TE CM EE TL OP D RM R PI A

O B

S S NH U ON T I A T -

T C S AD 3 E T ET ER VN RO I E UP GE IR F

TM CE EL TP OM O

u l

RI P

N E

C N?

A I S

I D ES E SE M AR EG LO ER RP R S O U T T C A A T E S R

N O

I Y

C TA N

E CI G

R F E IS M S E

A I

C E

M O

I T

/

E T

A D

INFORMATION LINE PUNCH LIST an Alert

.fm.

) ] a Site Area Emergency a General Emergency (was declared / continues) at Seabrook Station in Seabrook, N.H.

; An Alert is the second lowest of four emergency categories that apply to nuclear power plants.

; A Site Area Emergency is the second highest of four emergency categories that apply to nuclear power plants.

g A General Emergency is the highest of four emergency categories that apply to nuclear power plants.

There (have/have not) been (any) radioactive releases from the station.

The State (s) of New Hampshire / Massachusetts . .

] has (have) not made any protective action recommendations.

has (have) made protective action recommendations you should O know about.

Tune to your local radio station . . .

/~T for information about what you should do.

{) ]

for further details as soon as they become available.

]

New Hampshire residents should listen to their local radio stations for Emergency Broadcast messages from the New Hampshire Office of Emergency Management. Primary radio stations are WOKQ FM (97.5) and WMYF AM (1540).

Massachusetts residents should listen to their local radio station for Emergency Broadcast messages from the Massachusetts Emergency Management Agency. Primary radio stations are WEGQ FM (93.7), VLYT FM (92.5), WCCM AM (800) and WHAV AM (1490) . ,

1 Seabrook Station management has asked the public not to call the station. To help l address rumors and misinformation, an " answer line" for inquiries has been l established for the general public. This line should be used to check questionable i information regarding the emergency at Seabrook Station. The number is 1-800-458-2407.

Date Time Recorded l Media Relations / Rumor Control Supervisor Initials:

Media Relations or Rumor Control Assistant Initials:

/3

!d ER 3.5A Rev. 15

I I l'

i: RUMOR CONTROL - INQUIRIES / RUMORS

.-s

/ NAME OF CALLER:

l i

ADDRESS / TOWN:

INQUIRY:

I T.V. Phone

] Other SOURCE: ] Radio RESPONSE: New Hampshire residents should listen to their local radio stations for Ernergency Broadcast messages from the New Hampshire Office of Emergency Management. Primary radio stations are WOKQ FM (97.5), and WMYF AM (1540).

Massachusetts residents should listen to their local radio station for Emergency Broadcast messages from the Massachusetts e Emergency Management Agency. Primary radio stations are WECQ FM i

(93.7), WLYT FM (92.5), WCCM AM (800) and WHAV AM (1490).

Read News Release / Advisory No.

Other (Explain below)

NOTE: The Massachusetts Rumor Control number is (800) 982-6846 The Massachusetts Media Relations number is (603) 433-0481 The ERO and Yaw Hampshire Rumor Control number is (800) 458-2407.

The ERO and New Hampshire Media Relations number is (800) 458-2408.

The ERO Telephone Information Line number is (800) 774-4771.

The New Hampshire Telephone Information Line number is (603) 433-5706.

INQUIRY / RUMOR TAKEN BY:

e TIME: DATE:

7y v] ER 3.5D Rev. 15

pf m

' - - ~

t .

7 ihN L .

,x.

MERCENCY NWS . MANAGER CHECKLIST '

,8

].$ . NOTIFICATION" INITIAL

"/~'g?,:1. .

<( a. Upon'. notification of' an Ui Event, call the Control nf"~,)g , Room and contact the STED, .or Control Room Communicator.

- , to obtain the following,information:

- ' emergency classification level 4 - l reason for declaration (initiating condition)' '

time of declaration

! .. . ' release in progress <(yes/no)

" - state and federal notifications completed

-~- protective actions recommended EQIE If SSNS is operational,L conduct a phased activation of the' Media-Center per Procedure ER 3.4, Seabrook Station News Services Operation.

b. During normal business hours:

1. Notify the Newington Town Office that the Media Center-is being activated. Determine whether Newington Town Hall has been designated as a public shelter.

4

, 2. Request that the front and interior doors be' unlocked.

This includes the Selectmen's Meeting Room, derochemont-Room,-- and Audio-Visual closet.

(

)

3. If.at Seabrook Station, you may wish to locate video ,

recording equipment stored'in the Mediagraphics work area.

If desired,' bring this equipment with you to the Media Center.

, -1

c. During non-business hours: y

1. Notify the Newington Police Department or the'24-hour police dispatch center in Brentwood, N.H., and inform the police that the Media Center at the Newington Town'0ffice is being activated. Determine whether the Newington. Town Hall has been designated as a public shelter.

2. Request that the front and~ interior doors be unlocked.

This includes the Selectmen's Meeting Room, derochemont Room, and Audio-Visual closet.

4

d. Report to the Newington Town Office / Media Center.

4 ER 3.5E Rev. 15 Page 1 of 5 I

. __ _ ____ - ._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~ _.

EMERGENCY NEWS MANAGER CHECKLIST (Continued)

2. ACTIVATION INITIAL

a. Upon entry to the Media Center, sign in with the Registrar, and obtain the appropriate Media Center badge and the Emergency News Manager Emergency Response Position Manual from the Selectmen's Meeting Room.

EQIE Forms needed for Media Center operation can be found in the form i file in the Selectmen's Meeting Room storage closet. .

If the Registrar is not set up, obtain the Emergency Response Position Manual and go directly to the deRochemont Room.

b. Report to the deRochemont Room and initiate an Emergency Facility Log using Form ER 2.0E.

c. Establish communication with the Emergency Communications Coordinator at the Emergency Operations Facility (EOF) using the auto ring-down telephone. If unsuccessful, call the Emergency Communications Coordinator on a commercial line.

d. Obtain the plant status and news release status from the Emergency Communications Coordinator,

e. If the Spokesperson is present, brief him/her on the plant status,

f. Obtain a briefing on facility activation status from the Assistant News Manager. If video recording equipment is available, you may request the Assistant News Manager to set up the equipment to record press briefings.

g. Brief key Media Center personnel on the proper use of press bulletins:

- Bulletins provide background or fast-breaking information

- They may be used to assist with oral briefings / interviews

- They are not to be copied for or distributed to the press

h. Upon notification from the Assistant News Manager that the Media Center is operational, notify the Emergency Communications Coordinator at the EOF.

1. Determine the anticipated time of the first press briefing and inform the Assistant News Manager, Media Relations Floor Liaison and the Spokesperson.

J. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet, j ER 3.5E Rev. 15 Page 2 of 5 l

l

f L EMERGENCY NEWS MANAGER CHECKLIST (Cont,inued) -

7" INITIAL

'-( .

j. Provide the. Voice-Tel system password to the Media-Relations-Rumor Control Liaison. Direct'the Liaison to relay the password to' the Media Relations / Rumor Control Supervisor at the JTIC. If ,

you do not know the password, request it from a member of the' l North Atlantic Communications Division staff /

k. Interface with the Massachusetts Public Information Officer j i

and'the State of New Hampshire Office of Emergency M.snagement Media Representative.

3. STAFF BRIEFINGS ;

a. Periodically brief the Media Center Staff on:

- emergency status

- news release status

- Emergency Broadcast System status

- Public Alert and Notification System status

. ILQTI Ensure that the Media Center Staff obtains current information as soon as possible.

[ b. Solicit status updates from the Media Relations / Rumor Control

\ Liaison to address any trends in rumor control or media ,

inquiries.

4. NEWS RELEASE DISSEMINATION

a. Ensure that each news release addresses the appropriate elements listed below.

News release number

+ Date and time of the event

Event classification

Definition of event classification e Name and title of Seabrook Station spokesperson e Cause of the event e State and Federal government notifications

Action being taken to mitigate the event

Radiological release status

Statement related to injured personnel e Status of nonessential site personnel e Telephone information line number

"THIS IS A DRILL" at the beginning of each news release when a drill is being conducted.

If an ALERT or higher emergency is declared, include the Joint Telephone Information Center number. ;

J

\s ER 3.5E l Rev. 15 '

' Page 3 of 5

EMERGENCY NEWS MANAGER CHECKLIST (Continued)

If a SITE AREA EMERGENCY or GENERAL EMERGENCY is declared, include the local meteorological conditions and a statement instructing the public to listen to local radio stations.

i

b. Coordinate a review of the news release with State and Federal officials if they are available.

c. Contact the Emergency Communications Coordinator if the content of news release must be changed.

C.'iUTION ANY CHANGE IN THE CONTENT OF THE NEWS RELEASE REQUIRES THE ]

)

APPROVAL OF THE RESPONSE MANAGER.

d. Sign the news release prior to release for copy and distribution within the Media Center.

5. PRESS BRIEFINGS / INTERVIEWS

a. Act as the Spokesperson until the designated Seabrook Station Spokesperson l arrives,

b. Coordinate news briefing strategy with the Seabrook Station Spokesperson, Media Center Technical Advisor, and State Media Representatives.

c. Establish a press briefing schedule as soon as possible with the Seabrook Station Spokesperson and State Media Representatives.

NOTE Once the briefing schedule is established and announced to the press, avoid deviations from the schedule as much as possible.

d. Incorporate input from the Media Relations / Rumor Control Liaison regarding rumors or misinformation that should be corrected in press briefing.

e. Coordinate logistics and graphics required for news briefing with the Assistant News Manager.

f. Moderate press briefings:

- introduce speakers

- direct media inquiries to the appropriate speaker

g. Ensure that the chronology of significant events is reviewed periodically during press briefings.

ER 3.5E Rev. 15 Page 4 of 5

E m

ENIGLGENCY, NEWS MANAGER CHECKLIST - .-

. (Continued).

h. Assign a staff member to attend separate NRC,-FEMA, or State INITIAL

(;N).. special interviews and to tape the sessions, if' appropriate.

.,-c a -

' i. Refer to $5.0 of this procedure for guidance in media briefings and interviews.

6. STAFFING / EQUIPMENT NEEDS Direct the Assistant News Manager to obtain additional staffing or equipment from the' Administrative Services-Coordinator.as necessary.

7. DEACTIVATION

a. When the' emergency has been terminated and media interest has subsided, deactivate the Media Center.

b. Ensure that all emergency response documentation is submitted to the Assistant News Manager.

[

ER 3.5E Rev. 15 Page 5 of 5

LASSISTANT NEWS MANAGER CHECKLIST

11. NOTIFICATION . INITIAL 1 jy - .

, . (j-Upon notification'of an ALERT or higher level emergency, proceed.

to the Newington Town Office / Media Center.

-2. ACTIVATION

a. If the Town Office main door has not been unlocked, go to the Newington Police Department and request that' they open the Town Office. .Once inside, request police to unlock doors to 1 deRochemont,' Selectmen's Meeting Rooms, and the auditorium audio-visual room and closet. Determine whether the Town Hall has been designated as a public shelter,

b. Upon entry to the Media Center, sign in with the Registrar, obtain a Media Center badge and the Assistant News Manager t

Emergency Response Position Manual from the Selectmen's Meeting Room.

(1) If the' Registrar is not set up, go directly to the Selectmen's Meeting Room and obtain the Emergency Response Position Manual- .

CAUTION NO MEDIA REPRESENTATIVES SHOUID BE ALIDWED INSIDE.THE BUIIRING UNTIL THE RECISTRAR AND SECURITY PERSONNEL HAVE ARRIVED AND THE REGISTRATION TABLE HAS BEEN SET UP. UPON ARRIVAL OF THE SECURITY OFFICER, INSTRUCT THE OFFICER TO RESTRICT ACCESS TO EMERCENCY RESPONSE PERSONNEL ONLY.

c. Direct the setup of the Media Center as shown in Figure 1, Media Center Setup Diagram. If the Town Hall is being used as -

a public shelter, direct the setup as shown in Figure 5.

d. Ensure that the following minimum' communication links with the EOF Emergency Communications Command Center are set up first and are operational: s

- Technical Advisor (MC) telephone link with EOF

- Auto ring-down telephone line between the Emergency News Manager and Emergency Communications Coordinator

- ERO telecopiers

- Telecopier for receipt of new releases from the ECCC.

For repairs, contact the Administrative Services Coordinator,

e. Check with the Emergency News. Manager to determine if video .

recording Equipment is desired.

(1) If the equipment is desired and available, direct setup of the equipment to record press briefings.

( ER 3.5F Rev. 15 Page 1 of 4

g ASSISTANT NEWS MANAGER CHECKLIST (Continued)

(2) If the equipment is desired but not available, contact the Material and Logistics (M&L) Coordinator at the EOF and request that video recording equipment be obtained and delivered to the Media Center. Remind the M&L Coordinator that following Media Center activation, the Media Center Mechanics would be available to return to the station to retrieve video recording equipment.

E If the Media Center is activated following emergency public information activities at Seabrook Station News Services (SSNS), implement activation as follows:

1. Provide operational telecopier number to the Emergency News Manager at SSNS and the Emergency Communications Command Center (ECCC) Administrative Staff at the EOF so that the latest news release and Rumor Control messages can be relecopied.

2. Distribute the latest news release to any reporters who have arrived.

3. When contact is made with the Emergency Communications Coordinator, notify the Emergency News Manager at SSNS,

4. Manage the operation of the Media Center until the Emergency News Manager arrives.

f. Ensure security protection and access control for the Media Center have been established.

E If additional security support is necessary, contact the Security Coordinator at the EOF.

g. Notify the Emergency News Manager when the Media Center l is operational. I

h. When no longer required, direct the Emergency Services )

Supervisor and Media Center Mechanics to proceed to the EOF l Break Room at Newington Station, and await further l instructions. Request that the Emergency Services Supervisor call you upon arrival at the EOF and provide a contact telephone number,

i. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

ER 3.5F Rev. 15 Page 2 of 4

r ,o K ASSISTANT NEWS MANAGER CHECKLIST f (Continued)

'5 '3. NEWS RELEASE DISSEMINATION INITIAL

'i l-p)- a. ' Ensure that approved Seabrook Station news releases are copied and distributed in a' timely manner as follows:

i p

t:

- copy to each person in the deRochemont Room

- 10 copies to' remain in Selectmen's Meeting Room

- 70 copies to the Media Relations Floor Liaison for

~

media representatives and Registrar's table ,4,

b. Ensure that any State news releases (New Hampshire,. Maine, and Massachusetts) are distributed in the same manner as above.

j

4. PRESS BRIEFINGS / INTERVIEWS 1

4

a. Obtain the anticipated time' of the initial press briefing from the Emergency News Manager. Inform the Media Relations Floor Liaison of the press briefing schedule.

b. Assist in the news briefing preparation.

(1) Keep the Emergency News Manager i. ware of the time remaining ,

until the next press briefing.

(2) Coordinate news briefing logistics with the Spokesperson.

f- c. Coordinate graphics and status board display setup. Direct setup l of the display. stands as close to the front of the stage as possible

'- to facilitate access by speakers and visibility to the audience.

h d. During news briefings, remain in deRochemont Room in case

) new information is received from Emergency Communications-I Coordinator. If new approved information is received, deliver.

it to the Emergency News Manager.

e. Ensure that the status board in the deRochemont Room is f maintained.

5. MANPOWER / EQUIPMENT NEEDS P

Ensure the Media Center is staffed according to Figure 2, Media Center / Joint Telephone Information Center Organization; coordinate additional staffing and shift relief with the Administrative Services Coordinator at the EOF using Form ER 3.3M, Manpower Planning.

6. DEACTIVATION

a. Collect all completed emergency documentation from the-Media Center Staff and submit it to the Administrative Services Coordinator.

O-ER 3.5F Rev. 15 Page 3 of 4

' ASSISTANT NEWS MANAGER CHECKLIST (Continued)

INITIAL

b. Supervise the deactivation of the Media Center to ensure O the Newington Town Office is returned to normal condition and equipment and emergency packets are stored in their proper location,

c. During business hours, notify the Town Hall Manager or Office Supervisor of Media Center deactivation; during nonbusiness hours, notify the Newington Police Department of Media Center deactivation.

4 O

ER 3.5F Rev. 15 Page 4 of 4

SPOKESPERSON CHECKLIST

1. ' NOTIFICATION INITIAL 7_

( )- Upon notification of an ALERT or higher level emergency, proceed to

the Newington Town Office / Media Center.

2. ACTIVATION

a. Upon entry to the Media Center, sign in with the Registrar,.

obtain a Media Center badge, and report to the deRochemont Room.

If the Registrar is not set up, go directly to the deRochemont Room.

b. Obtain a plant status briefing and the latest news release from the Emergency News Manager and the Technical Advisor (MC),

c. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

3. PRESS BRIEFING / INTERVIEWS

a. Develop news briefing statements in conjunction with the Emergency News Manager utilizing:

- News releases,

- Technical clarification from the Technical Advisor (MC),

- Media Relations and Rumor Control information, ps - Information from Emergency Communications Coordinator,

(

's-} - State and Federal input, and

- Chronological summations of emergency events.

b. Participate in news briefings to describe the situation, answer questions and dispel rumors.

c. Refer to Section 5.0 of this procedure for guidance on news briefings and interviews.

4. DEACTIVATION

- Submit all emergency response documentation to the Assistant News Manager.

,a ER 3.5G Rev. 15 l

1 I

HEALTH PHYSICS ADVISOR CHECKLIST

1. NOTIFICATION INITIAL

) Upon notification of an ALERT or higher level emergency, proceed to

the Newington Town Office / Media Center.

2. ACTIVATION

a. Upon entry to the Media Center, sign in with the Registrar, obtain a Media Center Badge, and report to the deRochemont Room.

If the Registrar is not set up, go directly to the deRochemont Room.

b. Obtain a plant status briefing and the latest news release from the Emergency News Manager and the Technical Advisor (MC).

c. Initiate an Emergency Facility Log using Form ER 2.0E.

d. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or centrolled copies of procedures in your position packet.

3. PRESS BRIEFINC/ INTERVIEWS

a. Develop news briefing statements in conjunction with the Emergency News Manager utilizing:

- News Releases, fs

- Technical clarification from the Technical Advisor (MC),

(*' ) - Media Relations and Rumor Control information,

- Information from Emergency Communications Coordinator,

- State and federal input, and

- Chronological summations of emergency events,

b. Participate in news briefings to address health physics-related questions and rumors.

c. Refer to Section 5.0 of this procedure for guidance on news briefings and interviews.

. 4. DEACTIVATION Submit all emergency response documentation to the Assistant News Manager.

p)

O ER 3.5H Rev. 15 .

l l

l MEDIA RELATIONS FIDOR LIAISON CHECKLIST

1. NOTIFICATION INITIAL

) Upon notification that an Alert or higher level emergency has been declared,

proceed to the Newington Town Office / Media Center.

2. ACTIVATION

a. Upon arrival at the Media Center, sign in at the Registrar's desk and obtain a Media Center badge. If the Registrar is not set up, go directly to the deRochemont Room.

I i- b. Report to the Emergency News Manager for an initial briefing and the latest news release.

c. Proceed to auditorium / media work area.

d. Ensure an adequate supply of press kits is available.

e. Answer media inquiries, and provide requested background information when the spokesperson is unavailable,

f. Ensure that media representatives have received a copy of the l latest news release. .

I NOTE i l

l In between formal briefings, the Media Relations Flcor Liaison 7s shall be responsible for providing appropriate updated information ;

to news media representatives.

w_- } -

g. Brief Emergency News Manager regarding media inquiries.

h. Attend news briefings.

i. Ensure that status boards in the auditorium are maintained.

I NOTE Ensure thtt one copy of each news release remains visible and available to the media when the distribution copies are all gone.

J. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

3. SPECIAL MEDIA REQUESTS Coordinate responses to special media requests with the Emergency News Manager. Requests for emergency response facility or station tours shall be approved by the Response Manager before being granted.

ER 3.5I Rev. 15

[^'}

x_/

Page 1 of 2

'MELUA REIATIONS FIDOR LIAISON CHECKLIST

4. DEaCTINATION INITIAL

a. Report to Emergen:y News Manager for debriefing.

, b. Submit all emergency response documentation to the Assistant News Manager.

O i

I i

l l

i l

l l

1 l

l l

ER 3.51 Rev. 15 Page 2 of 2

c ENERGENCY SERVICES SUPERVISOR CHECKLIST

, 1. NOTIFICATION INITIAL

a. Upon notification of an Alert, Site Area' Emergency or General

'- )

Emergency, proceed to the Emergency Operations Facility (EOF) to pick up the Media Center Trailer.

b. Contact PSNH Newington Control Room and request the use of PSNH vehicle #0517 (blue Suburban).

c. If needed, obtain a key for PSNH vehicles from the Security Guard at the Newington Station main gate or, if the Security Guard is not available, make arrangements with the Newington Station Control Room Shift Supervisor.

d. Hook the Media Center Trailer located in the field team dispatch area to the PSNH vehicle and proceed to the Media Center.

e. Place trailer in position for unloading, disconnect the trailer and return PSNH vehicle to the EOF. Use personal vehicle to return to the Media Center.

2. ACTIVATION

a. Upon entry into the Media Center, sign in with the Reeistrar, and obtain a Media Center badge and the Emergency S es Supervisor Emergency Response Position Manual from

e. If the Registrar is not set up, obtain the t . uion Manual and begin the Media Center setup.

('~~%

s s# b. Direct Media Center Mechanics to set up the facility in accordance with Figure 1, Media Center Setup Diagram.

If the facility is being used as a public shelter, direct them to set up the facility as shown in Figure 5.

c. Ensure that the communications links with the EOF Emergency Communications Command Center are set up first and are operational.

d. Direct / assist Media Center Mechanics in setting up chairs in the auditorium for press conferences. Questions regarding setup configuration should be directed to the Assistant News Manager.

e. Provide assistance to the Assistant News Manager.

f. When your services and those of the Media Center Mechanics are no longer required, contact the Assistant News Manager. Unrequired personnel should proceed to the lower level of the JTIC facility at Newington Station, and stand by for further instructions. Upon arrival at the JTIC, contact the Assistant News Manager and provide a contact telephone number.

( ER 3.5J L

Rev. 15 Page 1 of 2 1

EMERGENCY SERVICES SUPERVISOR CHECKLIST (Continued)

g. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

3. DEACTIVATION

a. Supervise deactivation of the Media Center to ensure that the Newington Town Office is returned to its normal condition and equipment and emergency response position manuals are stored properly,

b. Notify the Assistant News Manager when deactivation is complete and submit all emergency response documentation to him.

O ER 3.5J Rev. 15 Page 2 of 2 l

l

' MEDIA REIATIONS/ RUMOR CONTROL LIAISON CHECKLIST l

INITIAL l

1. NOTIFICATION

[ )

' Upon notification of an ALERT or higher level emergency, proceed to

'~') the Newington Town office / Media Center.

2. ACTIVATION

a. Upon entry to the Media Center, sign in at the Registrar's desk, and obtain a Media Center badge and the Media Relations /

Rumor Control Liaison Emergency Response Position Manual from storage. If the Registrar is not set up, go directly to the Selectmon's Meeting Room and obtain Position Manual.

b. Report to the Seabrook Station Spokesperson and obtain the news release status.

c. Obtain the Voice-Tel system password from the Emergency News Manager.

d. Brief the Media Relations / Rumor Control Supervisor on the emergencj status and provide the Voice-Tel system password.

e. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

,q 3. NEWS RELEASE DISSEMINATION l}

\ a. Ensure that the initial news release has been provided to the Wire Services. Notify the Wire Services and read the initial news release.

The Wire Services should be notified of subsequent news releases if there is not adequate press representation present at the Media Center,

b. Ensure that the Media Relations / Rumor Control Supervisor receives copies of news releases and bulletins as soon as they are available.

c. Provide periodic briefings to the Media Relations / Rumor Control Supervisor.

4. PRESS BRIEFINCS/ MEDIA REQUESTS

a. Assist in the preparation of the press briefing by reporting any trends in media inquiries to the Emergency News Manager,

b. Relay any special media requests from the Media Relations /

Rumor Control Supervisor to the Media Relations Floor Liaison.

ER 3.5K

/ \ Rev. 15 Page 1 of 2

MEDIA REIATIONS/ RUMOR CONTROL LIAISON CHECKLIST

5. DEACTIVATION INITIAL Submit all emergency documentation to the Assistant News Manager. .

O ER 3.5K Rev. 15 Page 2 of 2

~ - . . . _ . . .-

i

, MEDIA REIATIONS/ RUMOR'COKIROL SUPERVISOR CHECKLIST

.1. NOTIFICATION INITIAL i /~~N ' ,

.Upon' notification of.an Alert or higher level emergency, proceed to the .!

"'( 'J - Joint Telephone Information Center (JTIC). '!

i

2. ACTIVATION

a. Sign in on EOF roster board.

b. Report to Media Relations / Rumor Control Supervisor workstation and obtain Media Relations / Rumor Control Supervisor Emergency Response Position Manual.

c. Attach station badge to green identification tag at workstation.

d. Initiate an Emergency Facility Log using Form ER 2.0E.

e. If auto ringdown line to. Media Relations / Rumor Control Liaison is not operational, use a commercial telephone or.

contact the Administrative Services Coordinator for correction or substitution.

f. Ensure televisions, radios, recording equipment and tone alert radios are operational. If not operational, contact the Administrative Services Coordinator in the EOF for assistance.

g. Receive initial briefing on response status from the Media I Relations / Rumor Control Liaison, and request estimated time of 5

N- / next news release. Also request the password'for the Voice-Tel

, system.

h. Brief Media Relations / Rumor Control Assistants on response status and estimated time of next news release. Also provide the Voice-Tel system password for use in updating the i information line.

i. Assign Media Relations and Rumor Control Assistants to answer telephones, and to monitor TV and radio news broadcasts for accuracy in coverage of the emergency. Direct them to document

- items of concern on either Form ER 3.5C or D. Completed forms should be forwarded to the Media Relations / Rumor Control Supervisor.

0 E0.1E Direct Media Relations Assistants to report any special media j requests such as EOF tours. Relay special media requests to the ;

Media Relations / Rumor Control Liaison, j 7 ER 3.5L

.\

Rev. 15 Page 1 of 3

MEDIA P,EIATIONS/ RUMOR CONTROL' SUPERVISOR CHECKLIST (Continued)

INITIAL !

i

j. Brief JTIC personnel on the proper use of press bulletins: 1

- Bulletins provide background or fast-breaking information

- They may be used to assist with telephone responses

- They AIf.Dag to be copied or distributed for use outside the JTIC ]l

k. Brief JTIC personnel that if a call is received for Massachusetts-related media relations or rumor control, direct the caller to call the appropriate number listed on the bottom of the inquiry forms (ER 3.5C and D). )

l

1. Assign a Media Relations or Rumor Control Assistant to 4 monitor tone-alert radio broadcasts of EBS messages. Keep radio :

switch in " stand by" position.

f m. Determine if sufficient Media Relations and Rumor Control Staff is present for Media Relations / Rumor Control %

operations. ,

n. If needed, ask the Administrative Services Coordinator in the EOF to obtain additional personnel for staffing.

o. When all JTIC staff checklist activation steps are complete, declare the JTIC activated and operational by making an announcement and a log entry. Also notify Media Relations /

Rumor Control Liaison at the Media Center.

p. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

3. OPERATION I

a. Maintain periodic contact with Media Relations / Rumor Control Liaison at the Media Center and ensure that all rumor trends and i special media requests are reported. l 1

' b. Provide periodic briefings to Media Relations and Rumor j Control Assistants. Highlight any known or suspected topics i of particular media interest or rumor trends. l

c. Ensure that Media Relations / Rumor Control Assistants have all news releases to date.

d. If notified of a call from a person within an EPZ community requesting emergency assistance (e.g. , abandoned child, medical l emergency, disabled person needing assistance), instruct the I assistant who took the call to obtain the person's name, address and telephone number and to refer the caller to his/her community EOC telephone namber listed in the public information materials.

Provide the caller's information to the MA or NH rumor control staff for follow-up. . j ER 3.5L i Rev. 15 l Page 2 of 3

MEDIA REIATIONS/ RUMOR CONIROL SUPERVISOR CHECKLIST (Continued)

L

INITIAL

. ~*x.

')-' e. Periodically review the work load of Media Relations and Rumor Control personnel to determine if an adequate number of personnel are available to handle call volume. As needed, request the Administrative Services Coordinator to coordinate obtaining additional staff.

f. Ensure that latest news release has been recorded on the Information Line. (Hg.tg - Not every release need be recorded if information is unchanged. ~Two or more releases can be combined on one recording.)

4. DEACTIVATION

a. Upon shift change, or relief. from duty, brief your ,

replacement thoroughly using chronological logs, EBS messages, news releases and bulletins.

b. Submit all emergency response documentation to the Administrative Services Coordinator at the EOF.

O ER 3.5L.

Rev. 15 Page 3 of 3 1

+, , .. - . . . _ _ , , . . ~, , r

f 5 MEDIA REIATIONS ASSISTAlfr CHECKLIST

1. NOTIFICATION INITIAL ,

[( ' Upon notification of an ALERT or higher level emergency, proceed to

" -: the Joint Telephone Information Center at Newington Station.

2. ACTIVATION

a. Upon~ arrival, sign in at the EOF roster board. Obtain Media Relations Assistant Emergency Response Position Manual from storage. Attach station badge to green identification tag.

b. = Report to the Media Relations / Rumor Control Supervisor-for an initial briefing and initial news release.

c. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

3. OPERATI1NS

a. Maintain the latest news release on.the Information Line.

Refer to Figure 4, Information Line Instructions, for information line operation. Obtain the Voice-Tel system password from the Media Relations / Rumor Control Supervisor.

.b. Review the following information before answering phones. ,

O (1) Sources of Official Information for Media-Relations Staff: The Media Relations / Rumor Control Supervisor and Assistants shall be allowed to use official Seabrook Station, State of New Hampshire, and Commonwealth' of Massachusetts news releases, oral information as related by the Media Relatioas/ Rumor Control Supervisor, and general, factual information as contained in its staff position manuals.

As general guidaneo, staff should feel free to relate general, factual plan information such as:-how many people are involved in the Seabrook Station response organization, etc.

(2) Receint of Phone Calls: Answer all calls according to your function.

People are calling a specific number for a specific purpose; they should immediately know they got the-right number.

" Hello, Joint Telephone Information Center Media Relations. This is (First and Last Name) . May I help you?"

Media Relations staff members shall give reporters their full name, since they are acting as spokespersons.

Reporters are required by their employers to identify themselves as reporters, and they should do so automatically. If they do not, ask for their name and affiliation. If they are unwilling to give that, they are probably not real reporters.

ER 3.5M Rev. 15 Page 1-of 3

r MEDIA RELATIONS ASSISTANT CHECKLIST (Continued)

3. OPERATIONS Explain to such callers that you are not authorized to talk to callers who refuse to identify themselves; refer them to appropriate rumor i I

control numbers or taped message, if appropriate. You are there to help reporters only.

(3) 1pterviews: Media relations staff shall conduct 2nly telephone ;

interviews. Special requests for additional interviews will be taken, but with no guarantees given to the press; efforts will be made to satisfy appropriate requests.

Radio: Media Relations staff members are allowed to give taped interviews to radio stations for broadcast, with an understanding and agreement beforehand that information will be limited to the constraints outlined in the previous section.

Newspacerg: Media Relations staff members are allowed to give newspaper interviews for attribution, subject to the above constraints.

Television: Media Relations staff members are allowed to talk to television reporters on the phone for attribution. Media Relations staff members do not give videotaped interviews to television reporters; encourage reporters to come to the Media Center where they can get taped interviews with appropriate spokespersons.

Interviews shall be given only while filling an ERO role. You should inform the individual interviewing you that once the emergency has been terminated, all subsequent requests for information should be directed to the North Atlantic Communications Division. You will D21 be available for further interviews once the emergency has been terminated.

(4) Release of Phone Numbers: Under no circumstances should staff release EOF, EOC or other facility telephone numbers. Release only stare or Seabrook Station approved emergency numbers, as posted.

(5) Faxine of News Releases: If a caller requests that-you fax them a news release, politely inform them that 1) the Joint Telephone Information Center does not have the resources to handle this type of request and ;

2) they should consult the wire services for latest news release updates.

(6) Calls from Utilities: Callers from other utilities should be politely informed that 1) your purpose is to respond to media inquiries and 2) for information on the emergency, they may call the Institute for Nuclear Power Operations (INPO) or the American Nuclear Society ( ANS),

or review wire service reports.

(7) Calls Concernine Iniuries/ Deaths: For inquiries concerning injured or dead plant personnel, you may provide confirmation as to such an occurrence, if known, but do n2t release any individual's name.

ER 3.5M Rev. 15 Page 2 of 3 j i

i l

1

MEDIA REIATIONS ASSISTANT CilECKLIST (Continued)

3. OPERATIONS ' INITIAL

'O '

c. Rerpond to media inquiries received on the Media Relations telephones and document all calls on Form ER 3.5C, Media Relations - Inquiries / Rumors.

d. Direct special requests from the media to the Media Relations / Rumor Control Supervisor.

4. DEACTIVATION Submit all documentation to the Media Relations / Rumor Control Supervisor.

O ER 3.5M Rev. 15 Page 3 of 3

RUMOR CONTROL ASSISTANT CHECKLIST

1. NOTIFICATION INITIAL

)' Upon notification that an ALERT or higher level emergency has been declared, proceed to the Joint Telephone Information Center at Newington Station.

2. ACTIVATION

a. Upon arrival, sign in at the EOF roster board, and obtain a badge and the Media Relations / Rumor Control Assistant Emergency kesponse Position Manual from storage.

b. Report to the Media Relations / Rumor Control Supervisor for a briefing on plant status and the initial news release.

c. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

3. OPERATIONS

a. Review the following information before answering calls.

(1) Sources of Official Information for Rumor Control Staff: Rumor Control Staff shall be allowed to use official Seabrook Station, State of New Hampshire, and Commonwealth of Massachusetts news releases, oral f--(

information from the Media Relations / Rumor Control Supervisor and general, factual information as contained in its staff position

() manuals.

(2) Recelot of Phone Calls: Answer all calls according to your function.

People are calling a specific number for a specific purpose; they should immediately know they got the right number.

" Hello, Joint Telephone I.3 formation Center Rumor Control. This is 1First name onlvi . May I help you?"

If a person volunteers his/her name, write it down, but do not ask for names unless it is necessary in order to provide help. Try to get locations of callers by explaining that we are trying to ascertain if there are specific areas where a given rumor is prevalent and the information would be helpful. If they balk, drop it. Staff members are not required to give their full names if they do not wish to do so; first names are required.

(3) Plant Status: Use the latest news release as much as possible. DO NOT speculate or guess. You may also direct the caller to call the toll-free information line.

(4) Offsite Activities: Refer to the information kit.

(h ER 3.5N Rev. 15 Page 1 of 2 l

n RUMOR CONTROL ASSISTANT CHECKLIST (Continued) l

3. OPERATIONS INITIAL (5) Calls for Medical Assistance: All calls that require emergency '

assistance (e.g. , abandoned child, medical emergency, disabled person needing assistance) should be immediately referred to the Media Relations / Rumor Control Supervisor. DO NOT HANG UP ON THE CALLER.

(6) Release of Phone Numbers: Under no circumstances should staff release EOF, EOC or other facility telephone numbers. Release only state or Seabrook Station approved emergency numbers, as posted.

(7) Emolovee Family Inaufries: Inform the caller that everything is being done to protect plant personnel and-emergency responders.

(8) Calls Concernine Iniuries/ Deaths: For inquiries concerning injured or dead plant personnel, you may provide confirmation as to such an occurrence, if known, but do n2t release any individual's name.

(9) Ealls Recuirine Additional Information: If a call requires information not contained in approved news releases or staff position manuals, refer such calls to the appropriate state or plant rumor control personnel, or to the Media Relations / Rumor Control Supervisor.

(10) Endinc for Calls: Close the response by telling the individual to listen to local radio station.

b. Respond to Rumor Control calls. Document all calls on Form ER 3.5D, Rumor Control - Inquiries / Rumors.

3. DEACTIVATION Submit all emergency documentation to the Media Relations / Rumor Control Supervisor,

a. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

ER 3.5N Rev. 15 Page 2 of 2

TECHNICAL ADVISOR (MC) CHECKLIST

1. NOTIFICATION INITIAL Upon notification of an ALERT or higher level emergency, proceed to (m) the Newington Town Office / Media Center.

2. ACTIVATION - BOTH TECHNICAL ADVISORS

a. Upon arrival at the Media Center, sign in at the Registrar's desk and receive a Media Center badge. If the Registrar is not set up, go directly to the Selectmen's Meeting Room,

b. Obtain the Technical Advisor Emergency Response Position Manual and a copy of the SSER manual from storage.

c. Report to the Emergency News Manager and receive a briefing on events and responses. Determine assignment as either the liaison to an EOF Technical Advisor or advisor to the Spokesperson. If assigned as the liaison, proceed to the next step. If assigned as the advisor, proceed to Step 4.

3. ACTIVATION - LIAISON TO EOF TECHNICAL ADVISOR

a. Report to the workstation in the deRochemont Room. Stand by to receive a call from an EOF Technical Advisor, which will initiate an open communications line.

b. Obtain plant status and current MPCS digital time from the EOF Technical Advisor. Refer to Procedure ER 1.1, Classification of Emergencies, for assistance in evaluating plant conditions.

[)

V

c. Maintain communication with the EOF Technical Advisor for updated information and document discussions using Form ER 2.0E, Emergency Facility Log.

d. Brief the Spokesperson, Emergency News Manager, and the other Media Center Technical Advisor on plant conditions and related information.

4. ACTIVATIOM - ADVISOR TO SFOKESPERSON

a. Obtain plant status updates from the other Media Center Technical Advisor. Refer to Procedure ER 1.1, Classification of Emergencies, for assistance in evaluating plant conditions.

b. Assist the Spokesperson and Emergency News Manager in understanding plant conditions and related information.

O ER 3.5P Rev. 15 Page 1 of 2 l

TEGINICAL ADVISOR (MC) QlECKLIST (Continued)

4. ACTIVATION - ADVISOR TO SPOKESPERSON INITIAL CAUTION O

INFORMATION RECEIVED FROM T!!E EOF TEQiNICAL ADVISOR IS CATHERED FOR THE SOLE PURPOSE OF PROVIDING A PERSPECTIVE ON, AND INTERPRETATION OF, TEQiNICAL CONDITIONS AT TIIE PIANT TO Tile SPOKESPERSON AND EMERGENCY NEWS MANAGER. TilIS INFORMATION MAY BE RELEASED TO 'IllE PRESS ONLY IF IT FURTilER EXPIAINS EXISTING APPROVED NEWS RELEASES.

c. Assist in news briefing preparation by:

- Providing guidance on technical interpretations of plant conditions and the selection of appropriate plant system graphics.

- Developing news briefing statements in conjunction with the Emergency News Manager utilizing:

(1) News Releases (2) Technical clarification from the HP Advisor (3) Information from Emergency Communications Coordinator (4) State and Federal input (5) Chronological summations of events

d. Participate in news briefings to address plant status questions and rumors as directed by the Spokesperson.

e. Refer to Section 5.0 of this procedure for guidance on news briefings and interviews.

f. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

5. DEACTIVATION Submit all emergency documentation to the Assistant News Manager.

ER 3.5P Rev. 15 Page 2 of 2

MEDIA CENTER WRITER / COMMUNICATOR CHECKLIST

1. NOTIFICATION INITIAL n

I Upon notification of an ALERT or higher level emergency,~ proceed to

'- the Newington Town Office / Media Center.

2. ACTIVATION

a. Upon arrival at the Media Center, sign in at the Registrar's desk and obtain a Media Center badge. If the Registrar is not set up, go directly to the Selectmen's Meeting Room and obtain the Media Center Writer / Communicator Emergency Response Position Manual and Supplemental Katerial 16, Media Center /ECCC Writer /

Communicator Resource Manual.

b. Report to the Emergency News Kanager for a briefing and the initial news release.

c. Report to the Selectmen's Meeting Room,

d. Establish contact with the ECCC Writer / Communicator at the EOF.

e. Ensure the telecopier link to the EOF /ECCC is operational.

f. Maintain contact with ECCC Writer / Communicator at the EOF.

g. Maintain a log to record the time each news release was received using Form ER 2.0E, Emergency Facility Log.

( )

\~~/ h. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

3. NEWS RELEASE DISSEMINATION Notify the Emergency News Manager when a news release is transmitted from the EOF. During a press briefing, the Assistant Emergency News Manager should be notified when a new news release is being transmitted from the EOF.

EQIE The Emergency News Manager shall review the news release before it is given to the clerk for copying.

4. DEACTIVATION Submit all emergency documentation to the Assistant News Manager.

r

(

x ER 3.5Q Rev. 15

MEDIA CENTER ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF CHECKLIST

1. NOTIFICATION INITIAL

( Upon notification of an ALERT or higher level emergency, proceed l

'- )

to the Newin8 ton Town Office / Media Center. ,

l

2. ACTIVATION

a. Upon arrival at the Media Center, sign with the Registrar, obtain a Media Center badge and report to the Assistant News '

i Manager for a status briefing and assignment.

b. If the Registrar is not set up, report to the Assistant News Manager.

c. Verify date and time on Media Center fax machines and correct them if necessary. ]

d. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

3. NEWS RELEASE DISSEMINATION

a. Copy and distribute approved Seabrook Station news releases according to the following order or priority:

~, 10 to deRochemont Room

, n 10 remain in Selectmen's Meeting Room

\- / 70 to the media work area in the auditorium (floor liaison area)

b. State news releases and EBS messages should be copied and distributed as noted above.

c. State news releases and EBS messages should be telecopied to the ECCC and the JTIC.

4. ADMINISTRATIVE SUFFORT

a. During press briefing answer the telephones for those staff members attending the briefing.

b. Perform administrative tasks as requested by the Assistant News Manager.

c. Receive and distribute any news releases as passed on by Media Center support personnel.

5. DEACTIVATION Submit all emergency documentation to the Assistant News Manager.

A I ER 3.5U Rev. 15

. \

JOINT TELEPHONE INWRMATION CENTER ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF CHECKLIST

1. ACTIVATION INITIAL jq

() a. Sign in on the EOC roster board.

b. Report to Media Relations / Rumor Control Supervisor workstation,

c. Attach station badge to green identification tag at workstation.

d. Ensure that word processors, typewriters, telephones, telecopiers are operable. If not operable, contact the Media Relations / Rumor Control Supervisor for assistance.

e. Send and receive a test message from the Media Center Administrative Staff via telecopier.

f. Perform administrative duties as directed by the Media Relations / Rumor Control Supervisor.

g. Upon receipt of news releases from the ECCC, do the following:

(1) Log receipt on Form ER 2.0E, Emergency Facility Log.

(2) Ensure that news releases Center, are immediately given to the Media Relations / Rumor Control Supervisor and, upon s

direction, distributed to Media Relations and Rumor Control

-l ) Assistants and posted.

'O (3) At the direction of the Media Relations / Rumor Control Supervisor, update status boards with curren; news release information.

(4) Ensure that all news releases and EBS messages received from other response organizations are distributed to the Media Relations / Rumor Control Supervisor and posted.

h. Verify that forms obtained from the forms file are the current revision. To do this, compare their revision numbers with those of forms in either a controlled copy of the SSER or controlled copies of procedures in your position packet.

2. DEACTIVATION

a. Upon shift change, or relief from duty, thoroughly brief your replacement using chronological logs, news releases and bulletins.

b. Upon termination of activities, provide the Media Relations / Rumor Control Supervisor with the following:

(1) a list of additional forms, equipment, and supplies needed;

/ \ ER 3.SV

\ Rev. 15 Page 1 of 2

JOINT TELEPHONE INR)RMATION CENTER ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF CllECKLIST (Continued)

INITIAL-(2) the sorted and chronologically organized documentation generated.

c. Submit all emergency documentation to the Media Relations Rumor Control Supervisor.

O ER 3.5V Rev. 15 Page 2 of 2

i ER 3.6. Pcg2 1 Rev. 11 r

( ADIGNISTRATIVE FROCEDURE COVER FORM A. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ER 3.6 REVISION 11 TITLE ASSEMBLY AREA OPERATIONS ORIGINATOR J. W. Baer

1. Does this procedure / procedure revision:

a. Make changes in the facility as descrioed in the UFSAR7 O Yes E No

b. Make changes in procedures .ns described in the UFSAR7 O Yes E No

c. Involve tests or experiments not described in the UFSAR7 O Yes E No i

d. Involve changes to the existing Operating License or require additional license requirements? O Yes E No

2. If any of the above questions are answered ygR, a safety evaluation per the Regulatory Compliance Manual (NARC) is required. (The individual performing the above review shall have completed 10 CFR 50.59 training.)

B. MANAGER / DEPARTMENT SUPERVISOR APPROVAL lO' TITLE SIGNATURE DAIE E9 Mw FMGAA uhks i i C. NUCLEAR OUALITY SERVICES REVIEW TITLE SIGNATURE pf15 a JA D. SORC REVIEW SORC MEETING NO. OM E. APPROVAL FOR IMPLEMENTATION

/jjy)f)*

////flff AP(R09AL DATE 05/03/95 EFFECTIVE DATE STATIOpIRECTOR SM 6.1A Rev. 13 l

ER 3.6 Pego 2 Rev. 11 CoffrENTS AND REVISION STATUS PAGE NO. PACE REV.

[QtEFEIS I

COVER 1 11 l l

CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS 2 11 !

1.0 OBJECTIVES 3 9 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 3 2.1 ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES COORDINATOR 3 2.2 ASSEMBLY AREA COORDINATOR 3 2.3 ASSEMBLY AREA ASSISTANTS 3 2.4 INITIAL RESPONDERS 3 i

! 2.5 BACKUP RESPONDERS 3 2.6 MAINTENANCE COORDINATOR 3 3.0 PRECAUTIONS 3 4.0 PREREQUISITES 4 9 5.0 ACTIONS 4 5.1 NORMAL DUTY HOURS (0700 - 1630 hours0.0189 days 0.453 hours 0.0027 weeks 6.20215e-4 months ) 4 5.1.1 Assembly Area Coordinator 4 5.1.2 Assembly Area Assistant 5 10 5.1.3 Initial Responders 5 5.1.4 Backup Responders 5 5.2 0FF-DUTY RESPONSE (1631 - 0659 hours0.00763 days 0.183 hours 0.00109 weeks 2.507495e-4 months ) 6 10 5.2.1 Initial Responders 6 5.2.2 Backup Responders 6

6.0 REFERENCES

6 l

1 7.0 ATTACHMENTS Figure 1, Assembly Area Layout 7 11 Figure 2. Map to the EOF and Remote Monitoring Area 8 11 Figure 3, Instructions to Personnel Prior to Release From the Assembly Area 9 11

. O

2 b

2 jC,f 1

.d .

x. g.

d ,

g Jgg E

Y g -l, sli

!% i 8 l-n

_ . _!2g i ;

., .,, e o eeo 8 m

i

- l bE *5 ,

.o is !

5!

e i.

U L IRE

N h\\\ E h h\\\\\hh\h\

l l

w hNNdkxk C i

i l

8 s .

~~~-

33n33 Au wuas O

88 ER 3.6 Pcgo 8 MONITORING AREA Rev. 11 MAP TO THE EOF AND REM DIRECTIONS EMER0ENCY OPERATIONS FACILITY NEWINGTON STATION (SEE D IL 9 AM) REMOTE MONITORING AREA TAKE l-95 NORTH TO PORTSMOUTH, TAKE SPAULO!NG TURNP!KE ( exit 6 ) TO 0 GOSLING RO. EXIT ( e.ut ! ), TURN RIGHT g@9 g ONTO GOSLING ROAD. PROCEED % HILE BEYOND WOODBURY AVENUE, FOR EMERGENCY OPERATIONS FACILITY: O TURN LEFT 'INTO HEWINGTON STATION, FIRST o LEFT INTO EOF PARKING LOT. p MARKET ST FOR REMOTE MONITORING AREA: A TAKE FIRST RIGHT PAST EMERGENCY OPERATIONS /

FACILITY GOSLING ROAD ENTRANCE. DRIVE UP hp HILL THROUGH PAVED AREA 00WN ROAO UNTIL THE OIL TANK FARM IS REACHEO. TURN AROUND }

AND RETURN TO THE PAVED VEHICLE MONITORING AREA IN SINGLE FILE. AWAIT HEALTH PHYSICS INSTRUCTIONS TO ENTER THE MONITORING AREA.

FROM MASSACHUSETTS:

ACCESS I-495 NORTH TO I-95 NORTH, N THEN PROCEE0 AS ABOVE. 8 FROM MANCIESTER:

ACCESS ROUTE 101 EAST TO I-95 NORTH THEN PROCEED p

AS A80vE- i DETAIL #1 !

i i

o

==%

&w a+ %

e %

"4T 9 I k4$

f+ +

O

ER 3.6 Pags 9 Rev. 11

,a

( FIGURE 3

" )- INSTRUCTIONS TO PERSONNEL PRIOR TO RELEASE FROM THE ASSEMBLY AREA Provide the following information to all ERO members prior to their release from the assembly area:

1. Co home and " stand by your telephone.

NOTE Do not call unless it is necessary.

2. Listen to announcements on local radio stations for staffing instructions.

l ~ 3. If you must be away from your telephone, call (603) 433-1539 and identify how you can be reached.

l 4. If you need information on shift status, call (603) 433-1539 .

l S. If you live in the EPZ and are evacuated, call (603) 433-1539 for further instructions. Accommodations will be provided to you for the duration of the j emergency or if you are going to some place other than instructed, identify I how you can be reached. i

[h s/s 6. Personnel assigned to the second shif t of the facility marked below, report to I the EOF at hours. If you need directions to the EOF, refer to l

Figure 2 of this procedure.

[ ] Control Room ( l Technical Support Center

[ ] Operational Support Center [ ] Emergency Operations Facility ,

1

[ ] Media Center [ ] Joint Telephone Information Center f

7. Follow any further instruction when telephoned by either the Administrative Services Coordinator or by ERONS.

I LOCAL RADIO STATIONS j AM Radio FM Radio Massachusetts WCCM 800 VLYT 92.5 WHAV 1490 WECQ 93.7 WNBP 1450 New Hampshire WNNU 1110 WCQL 95.3 l WTSN 1270 WSRI 96.7

[~ WMYF 1540 WOKQ 97.5 WHEB 100.3

\ WINN 930 WERZ 107.1 VZEA 102.1

- . . . _ . _ . . . ..- _. m .. . . _ . . ._

f f

ADIONISTRATIVR Punernme CANCEE2ATION 70BM 1

t A. IDENTIFICATION

'(D'-

b- NUMBER: ER 4.1 . REVISION: 11 l 1

Panatunerf ACCOtMTARTI.ITY/ EVACUATION j

TITLE:

4 ORIGINATOR: J. V. n==r ]

1. Does,this procedure cancellation ,

s. Make changes in the facility as described in the UFSAR?.- O Yes B No I

b. Make changes in procedures as described in tho'UFSAR? O Yes E No

c. Involve tests or experiments not described in the UFSAR? O Yes E No 4

d. Involve changes to the existing Operating License or require additional license requirements? O Yes E No

2. If any of the above questions are answered Xan, a safety ovaluation per the j Regulatory Compliance Manual'(NARC) is required. (The individual

. performing the above review shall have completed 10 CFR 50.59 training.)

B. REASON FOR CANCE14AT10N ER 4.1 nrovisions that nortain to the Site R==rnancy Director's reanon-sibilition to direct a site evacuation have been incarnorated into ER-3.1 and thm Site W==rmancy Director *m checklist. ER 4.1 nrovisions that nartain to-the ,

Security Denare==nt's renconsibilities to innla-nt norsonnal accountabilitv/

[ 3vacuation have been incornorated into Security Procedure CD1332.00.

C. MANAGER / DEPARTMENT SUPERVISOR APPROVAL M SICNATURE DATl Ei h Ace <t 4/3[95 I I i

). , D. NUCLEAR OUALITY SERVICES REVIEW HILE SIGNATURE DAH N /4 E. 50RC REVIEW SORC MEETING NO.: kS' C#[M F. CANCELIATION APPROVAL p

//)/fhd' //////fs' O5/03l95 AFML6 VAL DATE EFFECTIVE DATE

'STATIONpKECTOR

O SM 6.1B i Rev. 13 l 1

4 I

~

=.* - .. ,-~,m - ------------___.----.-------.-----------N_--- - - - - - - . . - - , ,e. - ~ - - , , ,. ,

ER 4.3 Pi:gs 1 Rev. 13 ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURE COVER FORM t.g}m A. IDENTIFICAllDE !

l NUMBER ER 4.3 REVISION 13 TITLE RADIATION PROTECTION DURING EMERCENCY CONDITIONS ORIGINATOR J. V. Baer

1. Does this procedure / procedure revision:

a. Make changes in the facility as described in the UFSAR7 O Yes E No

b. Make changes in procedures as described in the UFSAR7 O Yes E No

c. Involve tests or experiments not described in the UFSAR7 O Yes @ No

d. Involve changes to the existing Operating License or require additional license requirements? O Yes E No

2. If any of the above questions are answered y.mg, a safety evaluation per the Regulatory Compliance Manual (NARC) is required. (The individual performing the above review shall have completed 10 CFR 50.59 training.)

B. MANAGER / DEPARTMENT SUPERVISOR APPROVAL TITLE SIGNATURE DAIE ET rLm 9dXd yh/w I I C. NUCLEAR OUALITY SERVICES REVID[

TITLE SIGNATURE DAIE N JA D. SORC REVIEW SORC MEETINC NO. hbO E. APPROVAL FOR IMPLEMENTATION fl> '

1/f/fl/J' OS103/95 C APPRD WL DATE EFFECTIVE DATE STATION'D[CTOR SM 6.lA

O Rev. 13

~

[

ER 4.3 Prg2 2 Rev. 13 p0NTENTS AND REVISION STATUS COVER 1 13 l

CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS 2-3 13 1.0 OBJECTIVES 4 13 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 4 2.1 RADIOLOGICAL CONTROLS COORDINATOR (RCC) 4 2.2 HEALTH PlWSICS COORDINATOR (HPC) 4 2.3 HEALTH PIUSICS TECHNICIANS 4 3.0 PRECAUTIONS 4 4.0 4 PREREQUISITES 5.0 ACTIONS 4 5.1 OPERATIONAL SUPPORT CENTER CONTROL ACTIVITIES 4 5.1.1 Access Control 4 5.1.2 Radiation Exposure control 5 12 5.1.3 Egress Control 6 12 5.1.4 Radioactive Material / Contamination control 6 5.1.5 Respiratory Protection 6 5.1.6 Use of the Radiation Data Management System 7 12 5.2 PROTECTED AREA RADIOLOGICAL SURVEILLANCE AND CONTROL 7 5.2.1 Security Gatehouse Functions 7 5.2.2 Assembly Area Monitoring 8 12 5.2.3 Ceneral Radiation / Contamination Surveillance 8 5,3 IN-PLANT SURVEILIANCE AND CONTROL 8 5.3.1 Radiation / Contamination Surveys and Posting 8 5.3.2 Airborne Radioactivity Monitoring, Sampling and Posting 9 12 5.4 DAC HOUR ACCOUNTABILITY 9 5.5 DOSE ASSESSMENTS 9 5.5.1 External Dosimetry Evaluations 9 Exposure Tracking 10 12 5.5.2

r-l ER 4.3 Paga 3 )

Rev. 13 ;

1

/-$ CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS ,

/

)

CONTENTS PAGE NO. PACE REV. !

5.0 ACTIONS 5.5.3 Extremity Monitoring 10 12 5.5.4 Bioassays 10 5.5.5 Abnormality Evaluations 11 13 5.6 DECONTAMINATION 11 5.6.1 Offsite 11 5.6.2 Personnel 11 5.6.3 Area and Equipment 11 5.7 MEDICAL EMERGENCY 11 5.8 RCA FIRE 11 5.9 POST-ACCIDENT SAMPLING 12 13 5.10 COMMUNICATIONS 12

6.0 REFERENCES

12 13 12

/~

(% 7.0 ATTACHMENTS Figure 1, Protective Action Criteria 14-15 12 Figure 2, Emergency Dose Limits 16 12 Figure 3, Dose Guidance 17 12 Figure 4, Emergency Dose Limit Extension 18 12 Figure 5, Emergency Exposure Tracking 19 12 Figure 6. KI Issue Log 20 12 V

l

ER 4.3 P:gs 4 Rev. 13 1.0- QMlGTIVES This procedure specifies the onsite radiation protection practices implemented following the activation of the Radiological Emergency Plan.

2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 RADIOLOGICAL CONTROLS COORDINATOR (RCC)

Directs Health Physics activities from the Operational Support Center (OSC) during an emergency. These practices will be implemented to maintain personnel exposure as low as reasonably achievable (ALARA). In an emergency situation some Health Physics practicea may 5, different from the standard. The RCC will use his best judgement in e emergency situation to determine if such practices are included in standard procedures or not.

2.2 HEALTH PHYSICS C JDINATOR (HPC)

Coordinates Health Physics activities in the Technical Support Center (TSC),

including job planning, monitoring TSC radiological conditions, communicating in-plant and near-plant radiological conditions to the Emergency Operations Facility (EOF) and advising the Site Emergency Director. The RCC will perform the functions designated in this procedure for the HPC until that position is filled.

2.3 HEALTH PHYSICS TECHNICIANS Carry out emergency actions as directed by the RCC and outlined in the emergency procedures.

3.0 PRECAUTIONS Onsite radi< logical conditions following an emergency event may be radically different from those associated with normal station operations and maintenance.

4.0 PREREOUISITES An Alert, Site Area Emergency, or a General Emergency has been declared in accordance with Procedure ER 1.1, Classification of Emergencies.

5.0 ACTIONS 5.1 OPERATIONAL SUPPORT CENTER CONTROL ACTIVITIES 5.1.1 Access Control

1. The Health Physics control point remains b primary access point to radiologically controlled areas, including those resulting from the emergency event.

2. The Radiological Controls Coordinator (RCC) directs the radiation protection activities at the Health Physics control point.

3. The RCC assists the Operational Support Center Coordinator in implementing emergency response and mitigating actions.

ER 4.3 Paga 11 Rev. 13 r

p.l

+

5.5 DOSE ASSESSMENTS

~'

5.5.5 Abnormality Evaluations When relatively large doses are involved, any di ;_:,;sney between dosimeter or expected dose and the TLD dose should be investigated immediately and referred to the RCC for final disposition.

5.6 DECONTAMINATION 5.6.1 offsite Use procedure ER 4.6, Offsite' Monitoring and Decontamination, for monitoring and decontamination of evacuated onsite personnel and emergency responders assigned to offsite facilities.

5.6.2 Personnel

1. During normal operations the goal of personnel decontsmination, is the complete removal of the contamination. In an emergency situation this goal may change to reducing contamination levels as quickly as possible to an acceptable level.

2. The RCC will establish the acceptable level for personnel decontamination.

l 5.6.3 Area and Eculement i

("~

\-- The RCC will determine the need and direct the methods to be used for major i equipment or area decontamination.

5.7 MEDICAL EMERGENCY

1. The time needed for proper radiological precantions (i.e., clothing, respiratory, etc.) may not be available in a medical emergency. The Health Physics Technician assigned to the nedical emergency will monitor

, personnel doses as needed.

2. The ROC will supply Health Physics personnel as necessary to assist in maintaining radiological conditions as stable as possible without delayin; the treatment / transport of the victim.

3. Health Physics personnel will respond in accordance with Operations Department Instruction (ODI) 32.

5.8 RCA FIRE

1. The RCC will direct the radiological actions to be performed for a fire in the RCA.

2. Self-contained breathing apparatus is the only acceptable respiratory protection to be used in the vicinity of a fire.

A v)

L

ER 4.3 Pego 12 Rev. 13

.5.9 POST-ACCIDENT SAMPLING Radiological considerations for post accident sampling are incorporated into the following post-accident sampling and analysis procedures:

1. CSO925.01, Post Accident Liquid Sampling

2. CS0925.07, Pont-Accident Cas Sampling

3. CSO925.08, Undiluted Post-Accident Coolant Sampling and Analysis 4 CSO925.10, Preparation for Post-Accident Sampling 5.10 COMMUNICATIONS

1. Formal communication practices, whether face-to face, over the radio, or by phone will be empicyed at all times.

2. Information regarding unusual radiological conditions should be communicated to the OSC for dissemination and use in planning response actions.

6.0 BEFERENCES

1. IID0958.01, Airborne Activity Survey and Techniques

2. IID0958.02, Radiation and Contamination Survey Techniques

3. HD0958.13, Generation and Control of Radiation Work Permits

4. 11D0958.17, Routine Radiological Surveys

5. IID0958.19, Evaluation of Dosimetry Abnormalities

6. HD0958.27, Dose Assessment for Skin Contamination

7. RP 5.1, Radiation Exposure Extension Requests l 8. ODI.32, Medical Emergency

9. CS0925.01, Post-Accident Liquid Sampling

10. CSO925.07, Post-Accident Gas Sampling

11. CS0925.08, Undiluted Post-Accident Coolant Sampling and Analysis

12. CSO925.10, Preparation for Post-Accident Sampling

13. Seabrook Station Radiological Emergency Plan (SSREP)

14. USEPA, Manual of Protective Action Guides and Protective Actions for Nuclear Incidents, Revised 1991

15. I&E Information Notice 86-43, " Problems with Silver Zeolite Sampling of Airborne Radiciodine"

. .- . -- .. - .~.~ ~ . . _,

7 .

AmmrISTRATIVR renmmrme cancer 2ATIgg yong A. IDENTIFICATION ;

/

NUNSER: ER 4.4' REVISION: ~ 14 TITLE: acA MEDICAY. ENRacmdCY ORIGINATOR: J. V. *==r ;

1. Does this procedure cancellation:

a. Make changes in the facility as described in the UFSAR? O Yes E No

b. Nake changes in procedures as described in the UFSAR? O Yes 5 No

- c. Involve tests or experiments not described in the UFSAR7 O Yes B No

d. Involve changes to the existing Operating License or require additional license requirements? O Yes 5 No

2. If any of the above questions are answered y,RR, a safety evaluation per the Regulatory Compliance Manual (NARC) is required. ('ahe individual performing the above review shall have completed 10 CFR 50.59 training.).

B. REASON FOR CANCELIATION 4

ER 4.4 nrovisions for RCA medical ===rrancias have been incornorated #nto Onarations Denar*==nt Instruction 32 anel consolidated with Non-RCA Medical 1

R-reancy Resnonsa Instructions .

, C. MANAGER / DEPARTMENT SUPERVISOR APPROVAL Il.ILE SIGNATURE DAIE

, ef obm OvcGEd whAs

,i D. NUCLEAR OUALITY SERVICES REVIEW TITLE SIGNATURE DAIE

. Nh4 --

E. SORC REVIEW SORC MEETING NO.: hMO F. CANCELIATION APPROVAL

/j)/) h)** J///fhf* O5/03l95 AP@ROVAL DATE EFFECTIVE DATE

'SfATI6N D[ECTOR

(

SM 6.1B Rev. 13 l l

l 1

l

. . - ., - . . - , _ . - . _ , i

ER 4.6 Pcg2 1 Rev. 9 ADIGNISTRATIVE PROCEDURE COVER FORM A. IDENTIFICATION I

I NUMBER ER 4.6 REVISION 9

.I TITLE OFFSITE MONITORING AND DECONTAMINATION l ORIGINATOR J. W. Baer

1. Does this procedure / procedure revision:

a. Make changes in the facility as described in the UFSAR? O Yes E No

b. Make changes in procedures as described in the UFSAR? - O Yes E No I

c. Involve tests or experiments not described in the UFSAR? O Yes E No

d. Involve changes to the existing Operating License <

or require additional license requirements? O Yes E No

2. If any of the above questions are answered ygg, a safety evaluation per the )

Regulatory Con 11ance Manual (NARC) is required. (The individuti l

, performing the above review shall have completed 10 CFR 50.59 training.) j B. MANAGER / DEPARTMENT SUPERVISOR APPROVAL l TITLE SIGNATURE E ww %e4 sstks i

)

C. NUCLEAR OUALITY SERVICES REVIEW TITLE SIGNATURE E NIA D. SORC REVIEW SORC MEETING NO. N'O E. APPROVAL FOR IMPLEMENTATION

/ ff/) ,

t/hflpr 05/03/95 APPIOVAL DATE EFFECTIVE DATE "StATIO % IRECTOR SM 6.1A O Rev. 13

ER 4.6 Paga 2 Rev. 9

.QONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS COVER 1 9 CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS 2 9 1.0 OBJECTIVES 3 9 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 3 3,0 PRECAUTIONS 3 4.0 PREREQUISITES 3 5.0 ACTIONS 3-4 9 5 9

6.0 REFERENCES

5 7.0 ATTACHMENTS Figure 1, Remote Monitoring Area Layout 6 9 Figure 2, Schiller Station Decontamination Facility Layout 7 9 Figure 3, Vehicle Monitoring and Decontamination 8 9 Actions 9 7 Figure 4, Personnel Decontamination Activities 10 7 O

'ii K , .r

)

t

-l ER 4'.6 .. Pags 3 '

j f, Rev. 9

. .W. 1. 0 - 9173 m'JX,1 '

t F

A -

This procedure provides1 guidelines for offsite radiological monitoring and-

. decontamination of evacuated onsite personnel and vehicles at the Remote Monitoring

. Area'and Decontamination Facility at Schiller Station, and at the Emergency Operations Facility.'

2,0 RESPONSIBILITIES HEALTH PHYSICS TECHNICIANS AND RADWASTE SUPPORT PERSONNEL

1. Form and supervise qualified monitoring and decontamination teams at the Remote' Monitoring' Area and Decontamination Facility and, when requested, at the Emergency Operations Facility.

2. Monitor evacuated onsite personnel and vehicles.

i

, 3. Decontaminate evacuated onsite personnel and vehicles.

J 3.0 PRECAUTIONS

1. Members of the monitoring and decontamination teams should exercise {

precautions to ensure that they.do not become contam b ted and thr.t ;

exposure to radioactive material via inhalation, ingestion, aM/or j J

absorption is avoided.

2. Personnel who cannot be decontaminated, or havin8 Potentially

contaminated wounds .and/or ingestion, should be immediately referred to ,

b the Radiological Assistant.

3. Contamination of the mouth or nose may indicate ingestion or inhalation of radioacttve material. Urine and fecal bioassay samples should be considered <nd a whole body count conducted.

4. Personnel involved in vehicle and equipment decontamination should ensure the proper handling of materials used (i.e., plastic wraps, bags, .

labels, vacuum cleaners, sponges, mops).

4.0 PREREOUISITES

1. A site evacuation has been initiated and site area radiological conditions will potentially result in contamination.

2. Seabrook Station Security will assist at the Remote Monitoring Area in directing traffic and evacuation measures, if available.

5.0 ACTIONS HEALTH PHYSICS TECHNICIANS AND RADWASTE SUPPORT PERSONNEL

1. If available, obtain a briefing from the Radiological Controls l Coordinator, and proceed to the Emergency Operations Facility.

ER 4.6 Pcg3 4 Rev. 9 5.0 ACTIONS HEALTH PHYSICS TECHNICIANS AND RAD'JASTE SUPPORT PERSONNEL

2. At the Emergency Operations Facility, gain entry to the Remote Monitoring Area equipment storage room, break the seal on the storage cabinet, obtain the inventory list from the cabinet, and obtain the equipment shown on the inventory list.

3. Obtain portable radios and monitoring instruments and perform response / battery checks as applicable. Receive an emergency status briefing from the Radiological Assistant if available.

4. Load equipment into a vehicle, perform a radio check with the Offsite Monitoring Communicator, and ptoceed to the Remote Monitoring Area.

5. Upon arrival, use a monitoring instrument to determine the background count rate, e Using an E-140, measure the background and report 2300 cpm measurements to the Radiological Assistant.

6. Distribute equipment and set up barriers, signs and other equipment in accordance with Figure 1, Remote Monitoring Area Layout, and Figure 2, Schiller Station Decontamination Facility Layout.

7. As evacuated onsite personnel arrive, obtain radiation worker qualified volunteers to assist in vehicle and personnel monitoring. As a minimum three teams of two individuals should be formed.

8. Brief these teams in contamination monitoring as follows:

a. Monitor all personnel for contamination in accordance with Figure 4, Personnel Decontamination Activities.

b. Monitor every other vehicle in accordance with Figure 3. Vehicle Monitoring and Decontamination Actions. After about the twentieth vehicle that arrives with no previously identified contamination, monitor about every tenth arriving vehicle in accordance with Figure 3.

c. Increase vehicle monitoring frequency if vehicle contamination is found.

9. If vehicles are found to be contaminated, decontaminate in accordance with Figure 3.

10. If personnel are found to be contaminated, decontaminate in accordance with Figure 4, Personnel Decontamination Activities. Document all personnel contamination in accordance with Health Physics Departrent procedures.

11. If the Decontamination Facility is required, request two volunteers from the evacuated onsite personnel to shuttle contaminated personnel to decontamination facilities and decontaminated personnel back to their cars. Issue each driver a portable radio and label these vehicles as

" CONTAMINATED TRANSPORTATION" and " CLEAN TRANSPORTATION," respectively.

l l

} ,,ki" a r

. l*' '

1 ER 4.6 'Pega 5 l Rev.19 ~1

.1

/j 5.0- ACTIONS

~ K~ ) HEALTH PHYSICS TECHNICIANS AND RADUASTE' SUPPORT PERSONNEL- i i

12. Set up the male'and female decontamination areas in accordance with applicable Health Physics Department procedures, ensuring-that'Schiller.

Station personnel are warned of the radiation hazard.

' 13'. Don. protective clothing appropriate for the radiological conditions.

14. If additional personnel or. equipment is required, contact the Radiological Assistant.

15. If all personnel have arrived and no contamination is found on vehicles, notify -the Radiological Assistant and obtain additional instructions.

6.0 REFERENCES

1. HD0958.02, Radiation'and Contamination Survey Techniques i

. 2. HD0958.03, Personnel Survey and Decontamination Techniques

3. HD0958.04,l Establishing and Posting Radiologically Controlled Areas 4 HD0958.32, Release of Material from the RCA O

c V b

i 1

4 i

.l

4/4/95- EPLAN\E010428.DGN l FIGURE 1 ER 4.6 Page 6 Rev.9 REMOTE MONITORING AREA LAYOUT O

l To Reserve Coo!Yord Td Form Schiller Station Personnel Decon Facility Red V BIdg Enter Monitoring 3r 3r 3r Neo Brick Bldg O II II II 7

/ A.

Exit Contaminated To Remote Mon:toring he S ttle ruto F eld ght i 00 "9 # '8 To EOF keo O

Woodbury Ave u

O o REMOTE MONITORING AREA INSTRUCTIONS e

1. Take first right post Emergency Operations Focility, Gosling Rd entrance. .

[ 2. Drive up hillthrough paved creo. down road until the reserve coolyard

= entronce is reached.

Newin ton o 3. Turn oround and return to the monitoring oreo in single file, O 4. Aw it instructions to enter the monitoring creo.

Ma n

Spaulding Turnpike U.S. Route 4 & U.S. Route 16 EPLANTE010428 DGN

]

Note:

Loyout of monitoring oreo is typicoland may be modified by HP Personnelbased on radiological conditions and number of vehicles /personneito monitored. i O l l

l l

I

ER 4.6 PAGE 7 FIGURE 2 SCFTT.T.RR STATION DECONTAMINATION FACILITY LAYOUT

" a FEMALE

+-- DECONTAMINATION FACILITY SCHILLER RE TE STATION MONITORING AREA PARKING AREA

] _

I I n

GATE MALE HOUSE DECONTAMINATION FACILITY O w RIVER N w WW N EPLANE010290.DGN FEMALE DECONTAMINATION MALE FACILITY DECONTAMINATION l FACILITY ENTRANCE I

l pTO BREAK AREA & EXIT-

^"" ' "^ $

HONITORING RS0Nt L S O AND "

H DECON AREA l l C DREAK ^

K AREA MONITORING W I CONTAM]NATED CHANGE & W AREA E I PER50tNEL DECONTAMINATING E k R AREA R g h u n

ENTRANCE EXIT THROUGH PLANT

= '

fO REV. DATE: 03/24 /95 EPLAN:E010290.DGN

1 l

i l

ER 4.6 Paga 8 l Rev. 9 FIGURE 3 VEHICLE MONITORING AND DECONTAMINATION ACTIONS f' Vehicle Monitorine

1. Direct waiting vehicles to the monitoring point. Personnel should remain inside the vehicle. Monitor every other vehicle. After about the twentieth vehicle that arrives with no identifiable contamination, monitor about every tenth arriving vehicle.

2. Smear survey horizontal surfaces and areas that could most likely become contaminated. Direct frisk one wheel well, front grill, and driver-side door handle as necessary.

3. Record readings for all contaminated areas on the Vehicle Radiological Survey Maps.

4. If vehicle survey results indicate contamination levels greater than release limits as established in procedure HD0958.32, Release of Material from the RCA, direct the personnel inside the vehicle to drive to the contaminated parking area, park the vehicle (leaving keyr in the vehicle), and walk to the personnel monitoring area.

5. If survey results indicate contamination levels of less than release limits as established in Health Physics Department procedures, direct vehicles to leave the area af ter personnel have been monitored for contamination.

Vehicle Decontamination

1. Post the perimeter of the area.

2. Wipe down contaminated surfaces with masslin or equivalent cloths.

3. If necessary, further decontaminate surfaces by using detergent in t.ater and sponges and/or wipes.

CAUTION ALVAYS CLEAN FROM Th3 AREA OF LEAST CONTAMINATION TOVARD AREAS OF HICHEST CONTAMINATION.

4. Continue monitoring / decontamination steps until contamination levels are less than release limits as established in procedure HD0958.32, Release of Material from the RCA. If necessary, use detergent in water with a scrub brush.

l l

O

' ER 5.2 Pega 1 Rev.~ 22 ff'^

A .- IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ER 5.2 REVISION 22 TITLE SITE PERIMETER AND OFFSITE MONITORING AND ENVIRONMENTAL SAMPLING ORIGINATOR J. V. Baer

1. Does this procedure / procedure revision:

a. Make changes in the facility as described in the UFSAR? O Yes E No

b. Make changes in procedures as described in the UFSAR? O Yes El No

c. Involve tests or experiments not described in the UFSAR? O Yes S No

d. Involve changes to the existing Operating License or require additional license requirements? O Yes E No

2. If any of the above questions are answered y.u, a safety evaluation per the Regulatory Compliance Manual (NARC) is required. (The individual performing the above review shall have completed 10 CFR 50.59 training.)

B. MANAGER / DEPARTMENT SUPERVISOR APPROVAL TITLE SIGNATURE DATI ep v%~ MA4

~

4/aAs-l I C. NUCLEAR OUALITY SERVICES REVIEW TITLE SIGNATURE DAIE N

D. SORC REVIEW SORC MEETING No. hMO E. APPROVAL FOR IMPLEMENTATION fb]8bh

1/ f ff f 05/03/95 STATION D CTOR Al@RdVAL DATE EFFECTIVE DATE SM 6.1A l

' Rev. 13 '

r -

ER 5.2 Pcg2 2 Rev. 22 CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS CONTENTS PAGE NO. PAGE REV.

COVER 1 22-CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS 2 22 1.0 OEJECTIVES 3 19 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 3 2.1 0FFSITE MONITORING COORDINATOR 3 2.2 0FFSITE MONITORING AND SAMPLING PERSONNEL 3 2.3 0FFSITE MONITORING COMMUNICATOR 3 3.0 PRECAUTIONS 3 4.0 PREREQUISITES 3 5.0 ACTIONS 3 5.1 0FFSITE MONITORING COORDINATOR 3-4 19 5 22 5.2 0FFSITE MONITORING AND SAMPLING PERSONNEL 6 22 5.2.1 Predeployment Actions 6 5.2.2 Monitoring Actions En Route to Survey Locations 7 19 5.2.3 Monitoring and Sampling Actions at the Assigned Locations 8 19 5.2.4 Return to the EOF 9 19 5.2.5 Subsequent Sampling Actions 10 19 11-14 22 15 19 5.3 0FFSITE MONITORING COMMUNICATOR 15

6.0 REFERENCES

16 19 7.0 ATTACHMENTS Figure 1, Offsite Grid Map 10-Mile EPZ 17 19 Figure 2, Analysis Matrix 18 19 Figure 3, Environmental Lab Sample Submission 19-20 22 Form Instructions Figure 4, Environmental Sample Type Codes 21 19 Figure 5, Offsite Grid Map 50-Mile EPZ 22 19 ER 5.2A, Offsite Monitoring and Sampling Personnel 19 Predeployment Checklist ER 5.2B, Offsite Monitoring and Sampling Personnel 22 Briefing Form ER 5.2C, Field Survey / Air Sample Calculation Worksheet 22 ;

ER 5.2D, Field Survey / Air Sample Data Form 22 l ER 5.2E, Environmental Lab Sample Submission 19 4

. -- ~ . .

A s

ER 5.2 Pags 5 Rev. 22 7-- y 5.1 OFFSITE MONITORING. COORDINATOR lf N -14. ' Determine the need to dispense potassium iodide (KI) tablets to emergency response personnel based upon a projected or actual' thyroid I CDE 225'rea. Administering KI after an uptake may, limit thyroid CDE depending on time after exposure, j

15. Direct the Offsite Monitoring Communicator. to maintain communications with all offsite monitoring and sampling teams via the VHF radio system. ,

16. Direct'the Offsite Monitoring Communicator to relay messages to and from offsite survey teams and to maintain a continuous log of location and radiological data on the Field Survey / Air Sample Calculation Worksheet, Form ER 5.2C.

17. As survey teams call in radiological data, calculate the particulate and iodine activity concentration of the samples using the formula on Form ER 5.2C. Notify the Dose Assessment Specialist, . the NIAT Field Team Coordinator and the NH Monitoring Team Coordinator when offsite data becomes available.

18. For higher activity samples place an R02 or R02A on the collection face of the cartridge onen window. Divide the dose rate (net) of the sample by 0.5 mR/hr/pCi to determine sample activity. (Ref. 6.1)

I-131 pCi/cc = Net (mR/hr)

(.5 mR/hr/pCi)(Vol. ft 3 )(28,320 cc/ft 3) >

\- / 19. Attempt to identify actual plume characteristics and centerline values.

Review offsite team distribution with the NIAT Field Team Coordinator and NH Monitoring Team Coordinator ar.d assign locations in accordance with the estimated plume characteristics.

20. Evaluate and control the radiological exposures being accumulated by offsite teams. Update teams on plant emergency conditions, plume location and exposure considerations.

21. When appropriate or upon completion of. their assignments, direct survey teams to report back to the EOF for sample delivery.

l 22. As air sample analysis data becomes available, notify the Dose Assessment Specialist.

23. When appropriate, discuss environmental sampling strategy (sample type, l location, laboratory resources, and priority) with the Dose Assessment Specialist.

24. After sampling strategy discussions, coordinate team deployment with the NIAT Field Team Coordinator and the NH Monitoring Team Coordinator.

25. Brief environmental sampling teams on expected radiological conditions and type / location of environmental samples to be obtained using Form ER 5.2B, Offsite Monitoring and Sampling Team Briefing Form.

4

ER 5.2 Pega 6 l Rev. 22 5,1 0FFSITE MONITORING COORDINATOR

26. Consider the following guidelines for environmental sampling,

a. Using the fifty-mile grid maps, identify up to three different sample locations per team,

b. Direct sample teams to contact the EOF upon arrival and prior to departure from each sample location, c, With Seabrook Station Environmental Sampling Teams, review appropriate procedure steps listed in the Radiological Services Environmental Procedures, and document any deviation from procedure on Form ER 5.2B.

d. As Environmental Sampling Teams return, Direct the Radiological Assistant to maintain facility contamination control measures, review completed Environmental Lab Sample Submission Form ER 5.2E for errors, and weigh and package samples as appropriate for shipment,

e. Evaluate type of analysis using Figure 2. Analysis Matrix as a l guideline. Instruct the Radiological Assistant to ensurs appropriate analyses are checked off in the Analysis To Be Performed section of Form ER 5.2E.

f. Prioritize, coordinate and direct environmental sample dispatch to the YNSD Environmental Laboratory located in Westboro, MA Notify the Dose Assessment Specialist if special courier services are required to transport samples to Westboro. Also request assistance in obtaining any special sample transport permits,

g. As environmental sampin analysis data becomes available from the YNSD Environmental laboratory, notify the Dose Assessment Specialist.

5.2 0FFSITE MONITORING AND SAMPLING PERSONNEL 5.2.1 Engdfolovnent Actions

1. Sign in on the EOF personnel roster-

2. Report to the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator at the EOF for team assignments.

3. Obtain the monitoring and sampling kit corresponding to the team l number from the storage area. Complete the checklist steps l listed in Form ER 5.2A, Offsite Monitoring and Sampling Team Predeployment Checklist. Exact inventory of consumable supplies in kit is not necessary. Assess adequacy of stock on hand.

Additional sampling equipment and specific predeployment actions may be necessary depending on the samples requested '

by the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator.

ER 5.2 Pega 11 l Rev. 22 j j

7- 3 5.2 0FFSITE MONITORING AND SAMPLING PERSONNEL i l

'd 5.2.5 Subsecuent Samnline Actions

3. TLD Collection and Analysis

a. Complete the steps in the applicable Health Physics Department procedures as directed by the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator. The equipment necessary to complete the procedure is provided at the EOF. Obtain necessary equipment prior to leaving EOF.

b. If background dose rates warrant, place retrieved and i replacement TLDs in a shielded box during transit.

c. As directed by the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator, proceed to the TLD locations and change out the TLDs in accordance with Health Physics Department procedures.

i l d. Return the TLDs to the Dosimetry Records Personnel for evaluation.

4. Milk Sampling

a. Sample milk as directed by the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator. The equipment necessary to complete the i

procedure is provided at the EOF. Obtain necessary equipment prior to leaving EOF. j (V) l

b. Select a sufficient number of one-gallon sample bottles to l obtain a two-gallon sample from each location shown in step 4.d, unless otherwise directed by the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator.

c. Using an indelible marker, identify each container with the l name of the sample location, sample date, sample volume, and i the appropriate sample submission code determined in accordance with Figure 3.

d. Proceed as directed by the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator to f the location from which milk samples are to be obtained, i

1 i.

I l

,q NJ l

I i . - _ _ _ _ _ - _ - _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

f ER 5.2 P ga 12-y Rev. 22 5.2 0FFSITE MONITORING AND SAMPLING PERSONNEL .

5.2.5 Subsecuent Samoline Actions (Continued)

Typical milk san:ple locar. ions:

STATION DESCRIPTION SECTOR No. Mi, 04 SW 3.2 Main St., Salisbury, MA, at Congress St., Bartlett cow herd.

09 NNW 3.4 Old Stage Rd., Hampton, NH, Hurd cow hard.

10 WNW 3.0 Ree. 84, Hampton Falls, NH, Golden goat herd.

20 S 10.1 Rte lA, Rowley, MA, Pikul cow herd.

c. Report any problems encountered to the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator.

f. When samp'ies have been collected, labeled and Form ER 5.2E completed, forward the samples to the Radiological Assistant at the EOF.

5. Sampling of Food Crops and Vegetation

a. Sample food crops and vegetation as directed by the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator. The equipment necessary to complete the procedure is provided at the EOF. Obtain necessary equipment prior to leaving EOF.

b. Select a sufficient number of plastic bags to accommodate the numbers of locations and the media specified by the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator,

c. Using an indelible marker, identify each bag with the name of the sample location, sample date, sample volume, and the appropriate sample submission code determined in accordance with Figure 3.

d. Proceed as directed by the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator to the location from which food crops and vegetation samples are to be obtained. Collect sufficient amount of the appropriate vegetation, determined in step 5.g.

e. Report any problems encountered to the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator.

f. When samples have been collected, labeled and Form ER 5.2E completed, forward the samples to the Radiological Assistant at the EOF.

a-ER 5.2 Prga 13 Rev. 22 5.2 0FFSITE MONITORING AND SAMPLING PERSONNEL

')

v 5.2.5 Subseauent Samoline Actions

g. Sample Table HEI RECOMMENDED AMOUNT NOTES Apples 3 lbs. (cored) Usually 4 lbs. of whole apples are required to attain the desired weight.

Corn 3 lbs. (husk and Remove the husks and cob removed) collect kernels.

Approximately 24 medium ears are required to attain desired weight.

Grasses 5 lbs. Stake off 2 meter by 2 meter plot in an open area.

Cut grass approximately one inch above ground level.

Gamma and I-131 analysis may be required.

Lettuce 2 lbs. Gamma and I-131 analysis (x (Broad leaf) required.

\

'~

]

Tomatoes 3 lbs.

Beans 3 lbs.

Broccoli 3 lbs.

Berries 3 lbs.

Exact weighing of sample material should be performed at the EOF.

6. Water Sampling

a. Sample Water as directed by the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator. The equipment necessary to complete the procedure is provided at the EOF. Obtain necessary equipment prior to leaving EOF.

l b. Obtain one-gallon sample containers as needed to accommodate the number of locations specified by the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator,

c. Using an indelible marker, identify each container with the name of the sample location, sample date, sample volume, collector's initials, and the appropriate sample submission )

code determined in accordance with Figure 3.

d. Proceed as directed by the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator to j the location from which water samples are to be obtained.

7)

%. I

ER 5.2 Pega 14 Rev. 22 5.2 0FFSITE MONITORING AND SAMPLING PERSONNEL .

5.2.5- Subseouent Samoline Actions

e. If samples from more than one sample point are mixed together, ensure composite sample is checked on Form ER 5.2E.

f. Report any problems encountered to the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator,

g. When samples have been collected, labeled, and packaged, complete Form ER 5.2E and forward the samples to the Radiological Assistant at the EOF.

7. Snow Sampling

a. Obtain a meter stick, scoop and plastic bag for snow sampling.

b. At sampling locations specified by the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator, stake off a one meter square plot in an open area,

c. Using a scoop, obtain a one inch deep sample from the surface of the entire 1 meter by 1 meter area (avoid any debris such as leaves, twigs, and soil in the sample) .

d. Place snow in a plastic bag for transport to the preparation area. Mark the bag indicating the sample 1ccation, date, time, and other relevant information.

e. After allowing the snow to melt, transfer the water into a one-gallon container. Using an indelible narker, identify each container with the name of the sample location, sample date, sample volume, collector's initials, and the appropriate sample submission code determined in accordance with Figure 3.

f. Complete Form ER 5.2E, identify as snow, and forward the samples to the Radiological Assistant.

8. Soil Sampling

a. Choose an open area that is free of manmade or environmental disturbances such as mining, erosion or flooding. The area should be easily sampled, free of large stones, trees and other heavy vegetation.

b. Select a sample container capable of holding the volume of soil collected.

c. Label the sample container using a waterproof marker. .

indicating the sample location, date, time, and any other relevant information.

[ .'

)

ER 5.2 Paga 19 Rev. 22 i

!j] FIGURE 3

! 1 'EtWIRONMENTAL IAB SAMPLE SUBMISSION FORM INSTRUCTIONS

's~ ,'_

l Complete Form ER 5.2E as follows:

I l 1. FROM, DATE SHIPPED, SHIPPING MSTHOD - Fill in the appropriate information.

i l

2. PLANT CODE Contains the letter "S" for Seabrook.

3. SAMPLE TYPE CODE - Enter the two-letter code from Figure 4 that corresponds to the sample type.

4. SAMPLE STATION CODE - The sample station code identifies the type of EPZ area that was sampled and the sampling grid coordinates. Determine the code as I

follows: !

a. EPZ Area - Enter either "T" or "F" to correspond to the Ten-Mile EPZ !

area (Figure 1) or the Fifty-Mile EPZ area (Figure 5) from which the sample collection locations were determined,

b. Sampling Grid Coordinates - Provide the quadrant number first and the quadrant letter second (e.g., 9-K). .

c. Break up the quadrant into 9 squares resembling a telephone key pad.

l 1 2 3 l

(]

4 5 6 K 7 8 9 9

d. Determine where you are in the quadrant (e.g., the location of the plant within quadrant 9-K is 6),

e. The sample location is recorded using the EPZ area map indicator first, the number on the grid map second, the letter on the grid map third, and the number location within the quadrant last (e.g., the plant location is T-9 K-6).

f. The sample location for the fifty (50) mile map is determined the same way as the 10 mile map except there is a second key pad used as the first 9 quadrant pad is already drawn on the map.

g. The sample location is recorded using the EPZ area map indicator first, the number on the grid map second, the letter on the grid map third, the first grid number location fourth, and the number in the quadrant last (e.g., the plant location is F-9-H 7-6).

l S. SAMPLE NUMBER - Fill in the sample number.

i 6. YEAR Enter the last two digits of the year.

f-~

V

ER 5.2 Pega 20 Rev. 22 FIGURE 3 ENVIRONMENTAL LAB SAMPLE SUBMISSION FORM INSTRUCTIONS (Continued)

7. STATION AND SAMPLE TYPE DESCRIPTION AND/OR COMMENTS - Describe the location and/or type of sample or mark "N/A."

8. COLLECTION PERIOD - Enter the start and stop times for all sample collections. "M", "D" and "HR" correspond to " month," " day," and " hour,a respectively.

NOTE Accurate information for the " Collection Period" is , quired as to the duration of the collection and for the exact time of campling for grab samples or multiple grab samples that are field composited so the proper correction can be made for decay of activity from the collection time, or midpoint of the collection period, to the time of analysis.

9. SAM"LE AMOUNT VOLUME / WEIGHT - The volume or weight of the sample is needed to ensure adequate sample size and to calculate the correct activity by unit volume in the case of charcoal filters and air particulate.

10. ANALYSIS TO BE PERFORMED - Gamma Spec is the minimum analysis that should be performed. Mark other columns as appropriate,

11. WATER ONLY - For water samples only, check the " Composite" or " Crab" block as applicable.

12. SAMPLE FIELD TREAT.'2.NT - Document sample preparation provided. Preparation includes addition of acids or stabilizers such as sodium bisulfite or preservatives such as formaldehyde and methimazole. Indicate if a sample has been frozen and sectioned. If no field treatment was performed, write in "None "

13. COLLECTED BY/ RECEIVED BY/ TRANSMITTED BY - Self-explanatory.

i i

1 0\

5

,1, y

n :

OFFSITE MONITORING AND SANFLING PERSONNEL BRIEFING FORM

,?Y Time: -Date i f\j. Monitoring / Sampling Team Number:

. Leader (Name): . Driver (Name):

1. Plant Status:

2. Radiological Release: in progress expected- terminated

3. Source of Release:

4. Current Wind Direction from (degrees)

5. Current Wind Speed: mph' 6, Projected dose rates at survey locations (when available):

Location Dose Rate TEDE faE mrem /hr mrem /hr mrem /hr mrem /hr mrem /hr mrem /hr

7. Instructions:

f

8. Current RAE: Leader mrem Driver mrem Revised RAE: Leader arem Driver mrem mrem mrem U91E In the event of radio failure, use the following commercial telephone numbers to contact the EOF: (603) 433-1424 (603) 433-1525 -

(603) 427-7015 i

1 ER 5.2B Rev. 22 l l

l

1 FIEIE SURVEY / AIR SAMPLE CAlfUIATION WORKSHEET DATE: TIME:

c3 REPORT NUMBERED ITEMS ONLY Team (1) Air Sample Data Sample Time (hh:mm) (13)

Location of Sample (2)

Monitoring Dose Rates Carma (Window Closed) Volume of Air Sample (cu.ft.) (14) waist level R0-2 (Mr/hr) (3) Eberline 140/E140N RO.2A (Mr/hr) (4) Background Count Rate (cpm) (15)

Filter Paper Count Rate 2" level (Gross epm) (16)

RO-2 (Mr/hr) (5) SZ Cartridge (Gross epm) (17) .

/

RO.2A (Hr/hr) (6)

Beta-Gamma (Window Onen) Direct. Reading Dosimeter (Mr) waist level Leader (18)

Driver (19)

R0 2 (Mr/hr) (7)

R0 2A (Mr/hr) (8)

Eberline.140 (cpm) (9) Ontions:

2" level Smear Sample (Gross epm) (20)

RO.2 (Mr/hr) (10) Edge Locations (21) and (22)

R0 2A (Mr/hr) (11)

Eberline-140 (epm) (12)

O AIR SAMPLE CALCULATIONS PARTICULATE i

(

l l l l - NCPM X 1.6E pCi/cc j

16 Gross epm #15 Background ; ;

14 Volume IODINE l

l l - NCPM X 6.4E.9 - pCi/cc

[

17 Gross epm #15 Background ; ;

14 Volume l

uCi/cc x 1.25E+6 - Adult Thyroid CDE Rate Rem /hr.

Approximate Distance and Direction from Plant: miles degrees.

HQTX Air concentrations of radioiodine can be rapidly approximated for 7-cubic foot air sample by using the ratio 100 cpm /lE-7 pCi/cc I.131.

) ER 5.2C Rev. 22

fe; .

' n y, ,

y 1, FIEID SURVEY / AIR SAMPIX D&TA FORK

,7- , 4 DNIE: / TIME:

, 4

-w ,/ , REPORT NUMBERED ITEMS ONLY Team (1) Air Samnle Data Sample Time Stop (hh:mm) (13)

Location of Sample (2) Sample Time Start (hh:mm) -

Total Running time (min) -

Monitoring Dose Rates Air Sample Flow Rate (cfm) x C=-- (Window Closed) Volume of Air Sample (cu.ft.) (14) waist level Ro-2 (Mr/hr) (3) Eberline 140/E140N R0-2A (Mr/hr) (4) Background Count Rate (cpa) (15)

Filter Paper Count Rate 2" level (Gross cpm) (16)

RO-2 (Mr/hr) (5) SZ Cartridge (Cross epm) (17)

RO-2A'(Mr/hr) (6)

Beta-Gamma (Window Ooen) Direct-Reading Dosimeter (Mr) waist level Leader (18)

RO-2 (Mr/hr) (7) Driver (19)

RO-2A (Mr/hr) (8)

Eberline-140 (cpm) (9) Ootions:

2" level Smear Sample (Cross epm) (20)

R0-2 (Mr/hr) (10) Edge Locations (21) and (22)

RO-2A (Mr/hr) (11)

Eberline-140 (cpm) (12)

.(9 COMPLETED BY IABORATORY PERSONNEL V Analysis Performed By:

Date/ Time Analyzed:

Cartridge MCA Disk # Spectrum Tag #

Filter MCA Diskf Spectrum Tagf Particulate Filter Activity; pCi/cc Total j Iodine Cartridge Activity: pCi/cc Total Projected thyroid dose estimation: Cross cpm (fl7) - background (#15) j l

1

- NCPM x 6.4E-9 - pCi/cc x 1.25E+6 - Adult Thyroid CDE Rate Volume (#14) l l

Rem /hr SAMPLE ANALYSIS DATA ATTACHED i l

Remarks:

A l I sm/ ER 5.2D Rev. 22 i

ER 5.3 P:p 1 Rev. 12 ADMINISTRATIVE FROCEDURE COVER FtMtM A. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ER 5.3 REVISION 12 TITLE OPERATION OF THE METPAC SYSTEM ORIGINATOR J. W. Baer

1. Does this procedure / procedure revision:

a. Make changes in the facility as described in the UFSAR7 O Yes E No

b. Make changes in procedures as described in the UFSAR? O Yes @ No

c. Involve tests or experiments not described in the UFSAR7 0 Yes E No

d. Involve changes to the existing Operating License or require additional license requirements? O Yes @ No

2. If any of the above questions are answered y_es, e a safety evaluation per the Regulatory Compliance Manual (NARC) is required. (The individual performing the above review shall have completed 10 CFR 50.59 training.)

B. MANAGER / DEPARTMENT SUPERVISOR APPROVAL (q,)

TITLE SIGNATURE DATE N>< MAR 4fS[#1 6

( l C. NUCLEAR OUALITY SERVICES REVIEW TITLE SIGNATURE DATE NIA D. SORC REVIEV SORC MEETING NO. h8'O '

E. APPROVAL FOT IMPLEMENTATION

//)g. j jj. t/)pjp'f 05/03/95 APPkOYAL DATE EFFECTIVE DATE

/ ~ STATION %RE'CTOR

,9 SM 6.1A

( Rev. 13

'\--

g ER 5.3 Pega 2 Rev. 12 i

CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS COVER 1 12 CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS 2 12 1.0. OBJECTIVES 3 12 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 3 2.1 METPAC OPERATOR 3 2.2 DOSE ASSESSMENT SPECIALIST 3 3.0 PRECAUTIONS 3 4.0 PREREQUISITES 4 12 5.0 ACTIONS 5 12 5.1 METPAC OPERATOR 5-9 12 5.2 DOSE ASSESSMENT SPECIALIST 10 12

6.0 REFERENCES

10-11 12 .

7.0 ATTACHMENTS Figure 1, Options 12-13 12 Figure 2, Special Keys 14 12 Figure 3, Loca Type / Stability Classification 15 12 Figure 4, WRCM Backup Monitor Data Calculation Sheet 16 12 Figure 5, Plant Vent Stack Flow Summarizat'.on 17 12 Figure 6 METPAC Isotopic Sample Input Data Log 18 12 Figure 7, METPAC Input Data Log 19-20 12 0

-ER 5.3 Pega 3 Rev. 12 ,

m' l.0 OBJECTIVES

'~

This procedure provides instructions for the operation of HETPAC, a software package-developed to produce dispersion and offsite dose estimates during an accidental release of radioactive material.

2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 METPAC OPERATOR Operates the METPAC system.-

2'2 DOSE ASSESSMENT SPECIALIST Reviews projected offsite doses and dose rates for iwpact on emergency classifications and protective action decision making.

-3.0 PRECAUTIONS

1. Periodically check on the quarter-hour for significant changes in meteorological conditions.

2. Do not terminate the program in the middle of a run; this may crash the program. Return to Screen One and select Q to terminate.

3. The dose rate projections produced by this procedure represent a best estimate. If projections from in-plant parameters are significantly different'from those measured in the environment, it may be due to (nv) inaccuracies i" meteorological modeling and/or release rate estimates.

The results obtained from this procedure should be carefully analyzed since they may form the basis for protective action recommendations to the public.

4. The existence of a seabreeze can significantly affect plume transport and diffusion as predicted by METPAC. Seabreeze effects occur primarily from April through September during the daylight hours. Necessary conditions include sunny days when the sun warms the ground and the ground surface air temperatures rise significantly above the ocean and bay water temperatures.

A shift of onsite wind direction from offshore to onshore (onshore being defined as winds from 22' clockwise to 173*) occurring sometime during daylight hours can be indicative of a seabreeze front passing the site.

Existence of a seabreeze front inland from the site can be confirmed by comparing onsite wind data with wind data from inland stations (e.g.,

l- Concord NWS).

If an inland seabreeze front exists, the plume will rise several hundred feat above ground upon reaching the front and be directed back towards the shoreline. As a result, there will be (i) little dose inland from the seabreeze front, and (ii) a low dose elsewhere between the seabreeze front and the shoreline where the plume passes several hundred feet l overhead in the return flow.

\.)

W

\

ER 5.3 Pcga 4 ]

Rev. 12 j 3.0 PRECAUTIONS 1 l

5. When the containment failure model is executed in " batch execution" mode and produces a release duration of less than one hour, a thyroid shelter protection factor of 0.5 should be :nanually applied to the total thyroid dose. (Ref. 6.3)

6. If steam line pressure is indicated as less than 50 psig, enter 50 psig as the steam line pressure.

l 7. All times must be entered in 24-hour-clock notation.

8. All items must have proper values. No error checking is done until after the user has completed the input screen. If there are errors with the input, the terminal will beep, a message will appear above the input ;

screen and tha cursor will automatically move to the input location that !

is in error. The correction values must be inputted followed by a (CR). f once the value has been corrected, the program will continue error processing.

9. In the event that the Wide Range Gas Monitor (WRGM) is inoperable and .

the WRGM Backup Monitor has been activated, initiate Figure 4, WRGM )

< Backup Monitor Data Calculation Sheet, and input the Effective WRGM ]

Stack Concentration and Release Rate from this form as the STACK 4 CONCENTRATION and STACK RELEASE RATE on the Radiological Data Screen.

10. Data entry limitations can be recognized by use of the " Prompt" I selection,

11. Assumed Isotopic Mix ani'. LOCA Types

a. Steam Line Relea se The predetermined radionuclide mixture is based on the steam generator tube rupture accident,

b. Stack Release Enter LOCA 3 if time of analysis is less than 100 hours0.00116 days 0.0278 hours 1.653439e-4 weeks 3.805e-5 months after the

(- reactor trip time. Enter LOCA 1 if the time period is equal to or greater than 100 hours0.00116 days 0.0278 hours 1.653439e-4 weeks 3.805e-5 months .

c. Containment Release l Enter LOCA 3 for all time periods after reactor trip time.

d. If the Wide Range Gas Monitor (WRGM) is inoperable and the WRGM

[ Backup Monitor has been activated, enter LOCA 3 for all times after shutdown.

e. Refer to YAEC Technical Description of the SB METPAC System for isotopic breakdown of LOCA types.

4.0 PREREOUISITES j For purposes of requiring offsite dose assessment (i.e., a METPAC run), a release is l

defined as follows:

bM ' ,

ER 5.3 Pcgs 5 Rev. 12 7

'4.0 PREREQUISITESf(Continued)-

b J ~ l lj Wide Range Gas Monitor'(WRGM) High Alarm (ICC225),

2. Main Steam Line Monitor High Alarm with an pf]2i ASDV or SRV on- the affected main steam line,

'3. The results of effluent analysis or site boundary monitoring indicate a dose rate greater than or equal to 0.06 mrem /hr.

> :5.0 ACTIONS 5.1 METPAC OPERATOR

1. Turn on the METPAC Operator's computer and printer. Each piece of

' hardware can be turned on manually or all units can be powered through a master switch on the multiple outlet strip in which the units are l plugged. The system should display a menu screen with 3 alternative programs:

- METPAC

- IPT

- ODPS ,

2. Turn on the Dose Assessment Specialist *s computer and printer. The Dose

. l Assessment Specialist's METPAC system may be used either to review postulated worst case release scenarios or to provide a backup to the

, METPAC Operator's system. ,

3. At the prompts, type in METPAC on either system followed by a carriage return (CR). The system should begin executing the METPAC program and current analysis conditions will be outputted on the screen at this l time. Refer 'to Figure 2 for information on special keys used by METPAC. .

l 4. If the METPAC system does not execute, the user may reload the system with the backup diskettes which are available in the Dose Asse:,sment -t Area, as follows:

a. Turn on the system.

b. After entry of date and time, load the METPAC reload disk 1 into drive A.

c. Type: A: Reload (CR).

d. Follow any further instructions as specified on the screen (usually -

for loading other disks).

This procedure should ret. urn METPAC to its original state. Any analysis previously performed will be lost. ,

5. Obtain a logger trend printout with data needed to run METPAC from the Technical Assistant. In the event that a logger trend printout is not

! available, obtain this information from the Technical Assistant or

\ Health Physics Coordinator (in the TSC) as necessary, and record the l l data on the METPAC Input Data Log, Figure 7.

ER 5.3 Pega 6 Rev. 12 1

l 5.1 METPAC OPERATOR

6. If the system is functioning properly, the Main Menu screen should appear. Select one of the following six options by moving the cursor 9l; key up or down to the option *o be selected. For more information on l METPAC Options refer to Figure 1, Options.

1 - START NEW ACCIDENT i 2 - CONTINUE ACCIDENT l

3 - ELIMINATE LAST 1/4 HOUR ANALYSIS 4 - OBTAIN OUTPUT 5 - BATCH EXECUTION l

Q - QUIT

7. Upon selecting option 1 (START NEW ACCIDENT), the user will be prompted to keep previous data. The user should enter Y to initiate a new accident analysis'. Entering N vill return the user to the Main Menu screen to select another option.

8. Enter the appropriate parameters for the various screens by using the information on the logger trend or Figure 7, METPAC Input Data Log.

9. When entering data in the Radiological Data Input screen, the user will be required to select one of two options:

a. Monitor response entry

b. Isotopic entry Choose the appropriate option considering the following:

a. Monitor response entries will calculate offsite dose rate conditions based on an assumed mixture of noble gas and iodine concentrations. (Ref 6.9)

b. Isotopic entry can be initiated by entering a Y to the prompt "IS0 TOPICS Y/N." This will require data entry to Screen 5. Figure 12 has to be completed by the Dose Assessment Specialist. The

, program will calculate offsite Total Effective Dose Equivalent (TEDE) and Committed Dose Equivalent (CDE) to the thyroid using the inputted conecutrations of noble gases, iodines or particulates.

Return to Seteen 3 is accomplished by moving the cursor to the

" EXIT" prompt on Screen 5 after data entry, followed by a (CR) .

(1) " MON VS 150" is a flag option for selecting the type of input i data used in calculations, l l

0- Use of predetermined radionuclide mixture for calculating l TEDE and thyroid CDE.

l 1- Use of predetermined no' ole gas mixture for calculating l TEDE and use of iodine isotopes from Screen 5 for thyroid l 1

CDE.

ER 5.3 Pcg2 7 Rev. 12 J.--( 5' .1 METPAC OPERATOR (Continued) 4 1

! (

2- Use of noble gas, iodine and particulate isotopes from - i Screen 5 for calculating TEDE and thyroid CDE. -l (2) Screen 5 isotopic inputs will be used in; subsequent dose projections until the monitor / isotopic flag is reset to zero (0) on Screen 3. l (3) Obtain Dose Assessment Specialist approval to use isotopic input rather than monitor response, using METPAC Isotopic l Sample Input Data Log, Figure 6.

10. When entering data in the Meteorological Data Input Screen, the user should enter the 15-minute average data points. On this screen, also enter the " Estimated End of Release." Obtain this information (date and time) from the Dose Assessment Specialist.

11. Position the cursor on the prompt "RUN" and press (CR). The program will begin execution of the dispersion and dose program. (Ref. 6.8)

12. The initial program output will appear on the monitor as a color background map with the plume and a function key menu. As desired, select additional functions and capabilities as follows:

Function Keys 7s F1 (RPORT! ! - Allows user to obtain METPAC reports. Selecting this

( ) option brings up the following menu:

\s_/'

F1 - Tracking report F2 - PAG comparison / PAR report F3 - TID reports. Selecting this option brings up the following submenu:

F1 - Total dose (TEDE and thyroid CDE) from start of release.

F2 - Dose (EDE) rate due to accumulated ground deposition.

F1, F3 F3 - Total accumulated ground deposition report.

Submenu F4 - Accumulated ground deposition by isotope report.

F5 - Accumulated external dose (EDE) due to plume.

F1 F6 - Accumulated EDE due to inhalation.

Menu F7 - Accumulated EDE due to ground deposition.

F8 - TEDE and thyroid CDE for last 15-minute time period.

F9 - All of the above reports.

F10 - Exit (to previous menu).

F4 - Status Board report.

F10 - Exit (to previous menu).

i 4

I

gr -

ER 5.3 P;ga 8 Rev. 12 5.1 METPAC OPERATOR 1 Function Keys (Continued) l F2 (CROUND) - Cround plume display, i

~F3-(ELVTED) - Elevated plume display.

F6 (NODIFY) - Modify plume plot. Selecting this option brings up the i following menu: ;

F1 -

Draws / removes 5 and 10 mile radius circles and 16 direction sectors.

F2 -

Draws / removes evacuation roads.

F3 - Draws / removes points of interest; use keyboard letter corresponding with point of interest; to exit, press (CR).

F4 - Draws / removes town names.

F5 - Zooms in on an area of the map. To specify the area of interest, the user positions the cursor using the mouse in the upper left-hand corner of the area of interest, depresses the mouse key, and moves the cursor diagonally to the lower right-hand corner of the area of interest. The system will box the area of interest. The user then moves the cursor using the mouse to the accompanying menu and positions the cursor on either ACCEPT or EEJECT and depresses the mouse key. If ACCEPT, the map will be redrawn on the area of interest.

F6 - Changes legend.

F6 Menn F7 - Draws / removes TID plot.

F8 -

Allows user to obtain a dose or dose rate for a location of interest on the map. To select the location of interest, the user positions the cursor using the mouse. To exit, position the cursor on the F10 (EXIT) display on the monitor.

NOTE This feature works for the plume plot (F6), TID plot (F7) and ground deposition plot (F9).

F9 - Draws / removes the ground deposition plot.

F10 - Exit (to previous menu).

F7 (

SUMMARY

) -

Summary table for plume points. Selecting this feature brings up the following menu:

F1 - Allows user to obtain METPAC reports (See F1 above).

F2 - Summary table for ground level release F7 Menu F3 - Summary table for elevated release.

F7 - Returns user to previous plot.

F10 - Exit (to Main Menu screen).

I

u .. .. .. ..

ER 5.3 Pcga 9 Rev. 12 3 5.1 METPAC OPERATOR

'j l Function Keys (Continued) ]

F8 (DOSE) - Allows user to obtain a dose or dose rate for a location of interest on the map (see F8 above). j F9 (PRINT) - Makes a hard copy of the graphic screen. '

F10 (EXIT) -

Exit (to Main Menu screen).

Spacebar - allows user to switch from plume display based on TEDE to a plume display based on thyroid CDE.

l

( 13. Depress the EXIT function key (F10) to start the next quarter-hour analysis. This will clear the screen and display the first input l screen.

14. As projection information becomes available, review output for errors and turn over results to the Dose Assessment Specialist (DAS) for review and validation. If the DAS is not available, report information to the EOF Coordinator.

15. If time permits, the METPAC Operator should try to generate a hardcopy of one projected map per fifteen-minute period and should not go beyond 30 minutes without a graphic printout. The map hardcopy is generated by depressing function key F9.

16. The Status Board Report should be used for status board updates. The l

Status Board Report is generated by depressing function key F1, followed l

g by function key F4. If the system cannot access the Status Board Report e (function keys F1, F4), fill out a Radiological Status Board Update Form, available in Procedure ER 3.3, Emergency Operations Facility Operations. Make necessary changes and direct the information to be posted on the status board by the Dose Assessment Personnel.

17. Ensure copies of the latest printouts are made and delivered, or are placed appropriately for pickup.

18. Maintain a file of printouts and logger trends. Maintain completed l METPAC Input Data 1.ogs (Figure 7) if used in place of logger trends.

19. Continue to obtain updates on plant radiological release and l meteorological information using the logger trend printout, or Figure 7 if necessary. When possible, make time-advance projection (s) by advancing through the input screens. This assumes the meteorological and radiological data have not changed. Use Option 3 (eliminate last 1/4 hour of accident) when more than one projection has been made and current data becomes available. Option 2 (CONTINUE ACCIDENT) and the edit mode should be used to change the first projection time of analysis to that of the latest data. This procedure minimizes the amount of new data that must be input.

20. When appropriate, return to the main menu and select " QUIT" to exit METPAC program.

I

21. Turn in all data sheets and printouts from METPAC to the Dose Assessment j Specialist. !

p_

\

v i

1

i ER 5.3 Prgs 10 Rev. 12 5 '. 2 DOSE ASSESSMENT SPECIALIST

1. 'Until the METPAC Operator reports, activate the METPAC computer in accordance with steps in $5.1 of this procedure. The batch option should be used to quickly analyze plume data when the release has been in progress before the initial operation of METPAC.

2. After reporting, direct the METPAC Operator in selecting program options.

3. Inform the EOF Coordinator when the dose assessment function is operational.

4. Use the Dose Assessment Specialist's METPAC to evaluate any " worst case" or "what if" release scenarios to assist in the Protective Action Recommendation review process.

5. Review offsite dose projections performed by the METPAC Operator.

E94TI If a two-phase flow release from a Main Steam Line (MSL) has been l identified, instruct the METPAC Operator to execute steam line pathway 3.

This pathway incorporates the correction factors for the calculation of TEDE and thyroid CDE. (Ref. 6.12) l 6. Provide the METPAC printout and plume plots, to the EOF Coordinator, when available.

7. Inform the EOF Coordinator immediately when dose or dose rate estimates exceed any 12 series Emergency Action Levels contained on Form ER 1.lA, or any PAR criteria contained in procedure ER 5.4. The METPAC "PAGS" Report should be consulted when making this determination.

8. Provide input to the Dose Assessment personnel for updating status boards.

I

9. Provide the Offsite Monitoring Coordinator with meteorological data and dose projections which may affect monitoring teams. Obtain field results, when available.

10. Determine when it is appropriate to use either isotopic or field data, instead of accident monitor results, when determining the plume dispersion results.

6.0 REFERENCES

1

1. YAEC Technical Description of the SEMETPAC system I

2. ER 5.7, Offsite Dose Projection System

3. YAEC rnemorandum SBP-89-273, dated 4/7/89, METPAC Software Problem.

4. ER 3.3, Emergency Operations Facility Operations

5. ER 2.0, Emergency Notification Documentation Forms Procedure

({s ;ff' '

I 4 1 6 1 - ER 5. 3 ' Pags 11'- l Rev.' 12- -

'I

. 6.0L REFERENCES ,

-6 .' 'ER 5.4, Protective Action Recommendations :s .

4

7. 'NRC Inspection Report No.'50-443/85-32-20 l i

NRC Inspection Report No. 50-443/85-32-24 1

8.

9. NRC' Inspection Report No. 50-443/86-10-07 10.- YAEC .SBC-362 'WRGM Input Correction Factors 11.' YAEC Memorandum SBP-88-197, dated 3/22/88

12. Primary Technical Data Book- .

5 i

n e

F d

. g ER 5.3 Pega 12 Rev. 12' FIGURE 1 OPTIONS 1- Start New Accident .

The program will verify that the user wishes to choose this option. A "Y" should be typed. This will destroy the previous data base. %

2- Continue Accident continues the analysis of the accident. This allows the user to update the release based on the next 15-minute radiological and meteorological data. The operator can also start up a new release pathway under this option. .

3- Eliminate Last 1/4 Hour Accident Selecting this option will result in a change in the "END TIME OF ANALYSIS" displayed on the Main Menu Screen (i.e., the end time of analysis is reduced by 15 minutes). This option will eliminate the last 15-minute data base record from the data base file.

4- Obtain Output Selecting this option allows the user to view a plume plot or obtain a report generated for a previous time step. The user must enter the time period of interest. Valid times are between the start time of analysis and the end time of analysis. If the user does not wish to execute this option, press (CR).

If valid times are entered, followed by a (CR), the program will display the plume plot for the time period of interest. After the plume plot is displayed, the user can obtain any desired METPAC report.

5- Batch Execution The program clears the screen and asks the user to enter a batch option. The valid options are: (1) Project using current analysis with persistent meteorological and radiological data; (2) Project using current analysis with user-input meteorological and radiological data; (3) Project using new data; or (4) Perform containment failure / stack venting projection. The user has to enter in th' (ption number, press (CR), then input appropriate data. The batch options allow the analysis of 1 through 32 quarter hours (8 hours9.259259e-5 days 0.00222 hours 1.322751e-5 weeks 3.044e-6 months total).

Q- Quit To exit from METPAC, the user should type "Q" and (CR) . The program will terminate without losing any data files.

O

r ER 5.3' Pega 13 Rev. 12

(

i FIGURE 1 OPTIONS

\ '

(Continued)

EDITING DATA To edit a mistake in a previous quarter hour data record, the user should proceed through the Main Menu screen as if continuing an accident. When the Date Screen is presented, the user should enter the quarter hour that the error occurred in the time of analysis input line. The user may change any previously entered value on the RAD and MET screens by moving the cursor to the error location and typing the corrected value. After all editing has been completed, move the cursor to "RUN" and press (CR). Since the program uses persistence when continuing an analysis, the program will assume that the error may have continued in future quarter hours. The program allows the user to proceed to the next quarter hour but will not change the field that was in error. If the user finds that the error did persist, it can be corrected at this time. The program will do this for all quarter hours from the time of the error to the last time analyzed. All quarter hours will be reanalyzed, but only the last quarter hour will be printed and plotted.

0 v

4 W

i

E ER S.3 Pigo 14 Rev. 12 FIGURE 2 SPECIAL KEYS When the Print Screen key is pressed along with the Shift key, a copy of the information displayed is printed on the printer. If PrtSc the information on the display is alpha / numeric characters, such as a program listing, Print Screen will duplicate this information on the printer. If the information is a graphic representation, it can only be reproduced on a printer that supports graphic printing.

_f When pressed, the Backspace key erases the last character typed and 4 moves the previously typed characters one position to the right.

The Caps Lock key when pressed once, locks the characters A through Z in the uppercase position. You can get lowercase characters CAPS while Caps Lock is on by pressing the Shift key. Press the Caps LOCK Lock key again and uppercase mode for characters A through Z released.

This is the Carriage Return key or the Enter key. Its use is M defined by the programming language or application you are using.

If (CTRL) is depressed along with the C key, the METPAC program C will come to a complete stop.

CTRL O

l 1

d.

1 ER.5.3 Paga 15 Rev. 12 l

FIGURE 3

(,, LOCA TYPE / STABILITY CLASSIFICATION LOCA Type Classification Table:

REACTOR TRIP TIME RELEASE PATH LESS THAN . GREATER THAN 100 HOURS 100 HOURS STACK 3 1 CONTAINMENT 3 3 UNMONITORED 3 3 Stability Classification Table:

STABILITY PASQUILL UPPER LOWER CLASSIFICATION CIASSES DELTA-t DELTA-t EXTREMELY UNSTABLE A-1 s.l.74 s-1.12 MODERATELY UNSTABLE B-2 2-1.73 to s-1.55 2-1.11 to s-1.0 O

SLICHTLY UNSTABLE C-3 2-1.54 to s-1.37 2-0.99 to s-0.89

'-~'/ NEUTRAL D-4 2-1.36 to s-0.46 2-0.88 to s-0.30 SLIGHTLY STABLE E-5 2-0.45 to s+1.36 2-0.29 to s+0.88 MODERATELY STABLE F. 6 2+1.37 to $+3.64 2+0.89 to s+2.34 EXTREMELY STABLE G-7 2+3.65 2+2.34 U.0II Q

The Backup Met Tower displays the Pasquill Class (A-G) in numeric format (1-7) rather than the delta temperature in degrees F. To obtain the proper delta l temperature, choose the appropriate upper or lower delta temperature value corresponding to the Pasquill Class letter (A-G).

l l3 v i

ER 5.3 Pogs 16 Rev. 12 FIGURE 4 WRGM BACKUP MONITOR DATA CALCUIATION SHEET ,

l This figure is to be used to calculate the " Effective" WRGM Stack Concentration and

" Effective" WRGM Stack Release Rate from the output of the WRGM Backup Monitor (WBM).

1. Obtain the WBM reading from the Technical Support Center:

A - WBM reading - mR/hr

2. Determine the Time After Shutdown (TAS) and obtain the WBM Correction Factor (WBMCF) from the table below:

TAS in hours WBMCF

$1 0.175 2 0.183 If TAS does not match listed TAS 5 0.223 hours, round down (e.g., if TAS -

7 0.252 8, use TAS 7 WBMCF 0.252) 10 0.294 20 0.437 50 1.10 70 1.71 100 2.13 200 2.26 500 2.27 700 2.25 1000 2.18 41/**

B - WBM Correction Factor (WBMCF) - .a/hr

3. Obtain the Stack Flow Rate from Logger Trend, Main Plant Computer Data Point l 1CC 225 PF "PF PIANT VENT DISCH FLOW" or Figure 5, Plant Vent Stack Flow Summarization, and convert to ec/sec as necessary:

CEM x 472 **/8**

C - Stack Flow Rate - -

cc./sec cm 4 Calculare the Effective WRGM Stack Concentration and Release Rate:

D - Effective WRCM Stack Concentration - A x B - pCi/cc E - Effective WRGM Stack Release Rate - C x D - uCi/sec 1

0 l

1 i

ER 5.3 Pags 17 Rev. 12 pq. FIGURE 5 PLANT VENT STACK FLOV SUMMARIZATION

._'Q --

The following list represents the operating fans and respective flow rates for the various modes of plant operation. All flows are in CFM.

If a fan is shut down, assume a total stack flow reduction of 50% of the shutdown fan flow value. For example, if WAH-FN-13A is shut down, normal conditions stack flow would be 276,160-(151,620/2)(.5)-238,255 CFM. Only the fans listed below should be considered when calculating flow reductions. Smaller support fans not listed below (e.g., WAH-FN-125) should not be considered in a flow reduction calculation.

NORMAL "A" ISOLATION. EAH ON RECIRC CAP-FN-10 4,000 CAP-FN-10 4,000 FAH-FN-124 34,000 FAH-FN-124 34,000 PAH-FN-7A, B 6/OR C 43,340 PAH-FN-7A, B 6/OR C 43,340 PAH-FN-8A OR B 43,200 PAH-FN-8A OR B 19,800 WAH-FN-13A AND B 151.620 WAH-FN-13A AND B 151,620 EAH-FN-4A OR B 4.000 TOTAL CFM 276,160 TOTAL CFM 256,760 PRE-ENTRY PURGE REFUELING PURGE CAP-FN-10 15,000 CAP-FN-10 4,000 34,000 FAH-FN-124 34,000 m FAH-FN-124 PAH-FN-7A, B 6/OR C 43,340 PAH-FN-7A, B 6/OR C 43,340

(]

\ PAH-FN-8A OR B 43,200 PAH-FN-8A OR B 43,200 151,620 WAH-FN-13A AND B 151.620 WAH-FN-13A AND B CAP-FN-35 40.000 TOTAL CFM 287,160 TOTAL CFM 316,160 REFUELING CAP-FN-10 4,000 FAH-FN-11A OR B 16,000 PAH-FN-7A, B 6/OR C 43,340 PAH-FN-8A OR B 43,200 WAH-FN-13A AND B 151.620 TOTAL CFM 258,160 Assume a minimum default value (due to the stack chimney effect) of 57,568 CFM if

1) no fans are running, or

2) the total flowrate from a plant fan alignment is less than 57,568 CFM. l l

NOTE The above information was taken from the Primary Technical Data Book, located in the Control Room.

ER 5.3 Pegs 18 Rev. 12 FIGURE 6 .I METPAC ISOTOPIC SAMPLE INPUT DATA LOG Stack (WRGM) Containment (atmosphere)

Start Date/ Time of Sample End Date/ Time of Sample ISOTOPIC SAMPLE RESULTS I-131 pCi/cc Cs-134 pCi/cc I-132 pCi/cc Cs-136 pCi/cc I-133 pCi/cc Cs-137 pCi/cc I-134 pCi/cc Ba-140 pCi/cc I-135 pCi/cc La-140 pCi/cc Kr-83m pCi/cc Sr-91 pCi/cc Kr-85m 'pci/cc Sr-92 pCi/cc Kr-85 pCi/cc Y-91 pCi/cc Kr-87 pCi/cc Y-93 Ci/cc Kr-88 Ci/cc Zr-95 pCi/cc Kr-89 pCi/cc Nb-95 yCi/cc Xe-131m pCi/cc Nb-97 Ci/cc Xe-133m pCi/cc Ru-103 pCi/cc Xe-133 pCi/cc Ce-143 pCi/cc Xe-135m pCi/cc Np-239 pCi/cc Xe-135 Ci/cc Ru-106 pCi/cc Xe-137 pCi/cc Te-132 pCi/cc Xe-138 pCi/cc Ce-144 pCi/cc TIME: DATE: INITIALS:

O

' t.

GL[.7 ' '

i i

ER 5.3. Pegs 19 l

Rev. 12-f j; FIGURE 7' 1

s y METPAC INPUT DATA IDG ~

%{ :..

2 COMPLETED BY M0/DA/YR HR:MN SHUTDOWN UNMONITORED RELEASE:

STEAM LINE-CONTAINMENT RELEASE STACK RELEASE Jl . ESTIMATED END OF RELEASE 15 MINUTE METEOROLOGICAL AVERAGES Lower Wind Speed (mph):

Upper Wind Speed (mph):

Lower. Wind Direction (deg from):

Upper Wind Direction (deg from):

Lower Delta Temperature (deg F): i Upper Delta Temperature (deg F):

l Precipitation (in/qtr hr):

Solar Radiation (Ly/ min):

UNMONITORED RELEASE Field Team Dose Rate (mR/hr):

Field Team Location (mile):

Gross Iodine (pCi/cc);

Site Boundary Dose Rate (mR/hr):

Estimated Flow Rate (cc/Sec):

G'

g, ,

S

'!f ER 5.3 Prgs 20 Rev. 12 FIGURE 7 METPAC INPUT DATA LOG (Continued)

STEAM LINE RELEASE ]

i i '

Steamline Dose Rate (mr/hr):

Steamline Pathway : SRV-1 ASD-2 2-Phased l l

Steamline Pressure (psig):

CONTAINMENT REI2ASE Containment Dose Rate (R/hr):

Containment Pressure (psig): l Final Pressure (psig):

Estimated Hole Diameter (ft):

Stack Venting (8" hole): YES NO STACK RELEASE I

WRGM Concentration ( Ci/cc):

WRCM Release Rate (pCi/sec):

MISCELIANEOUS RELEASE INPUTS Isotopics (pCi/cc): YES NO LOCA Type (1 or 3):

Monitored vs Isotopics (0-Mon /1-Thy /2-EDE):

All parameters are available on the Dose Assessment Status screen of the MPCS.

Solar radiation measurements can only be accessed through the logger trend printout.

O

L }

ER 5.4 Pag 2 1

'Rev. 19 g~y ADIGNISTRATIVE PROCEDURE COVER FORM

[. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ER 5.4 REVISION 19 TITLE PROTECTIVE ACTION RECOMMENDATIONS ORIGINATOR J. V. Baer

1. Does this procedure / procedure revision:

a. Make changes in the facility as described in the UFSAR? O Yes E)No

b. Make changes in procedures as described in the UFSAR? O Yes E No

c. Involve tests or experiments not described in the UFSAR7 O Yes E No

d. Involve changes to the existing Operating License or require additional license requirements? O Yes E No

2. If any of the above questions are answered ygg, a safety evaluation per the Regulatory Compliance Manual (NARC) is required. (The individual performing the above review shall have completed 10 CFR 50.59 training.)

B. MANAGER / DEPARTMENT SUPERVTSOR APPROVAL b TITLE SIGNATURE DAU EP %~ OveCLA 4/sh6 I I C. NUCLEAR OUALITY SERVICES REVIEW TITLE SIGNATURE DAE NiA D. SORC REVIEW SORC MEETING NO.

E. APPROVAL FOR IMPLEMENTATION g/gp 05/03/95

' EFFECTIVE DATE AP(ROVAL DATE STATION /IRECTOR rQ

(>

SM 6.1A Rev. 13

c , , l g ER 5.4- Paga 2 Rev. 19 s- CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS' ,

. CONTENTS PAGE NO. PAGE REV, .I COVER 1 '19 '

CONTENIS AND REVISION STATUS 2 19 1.0 OBJECTIVES 3 16 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 3 2.1 RESPONSE MANAGER 3 2.2 SITE EMERGENCY DIRECTOR 3 2.3 EOF COORDINATOR 3

.4 HEALTH PHYSICS COORDINATOR 3 3.0 PRECAUTIONS 3 4.0 PREREQUISITES 3 r

5.0 ACTIONS 3

6.0 REFERENCES

4 16 7.0 ATTACHMENTS Figure 1, Site Area Emergency Protective Action Flowchart 5-6 19 ER 5.4A, Plume Exposure Protective Action Recommendation (PAR) Worksheet 19 O',

,k EPLAN:E070177.DGN ER 5.4 Page 5

.. Rw.19

,/~.

'j FIGURE 1 SITE AREA EMERGENCY PROTECTIVE ACTION FLOWCIfART-SAE DECLARED u

IS r ,

TODAY BETWEEN MAY 15 NO NO PROTECTIVE AND ACTIONS SEPTEMBER 15 RECOMMENDED 7 a NO.

YES p, u .

. 'i

-S - ommim*

STATION IN MODE S-RED, C-ORANGE YES

1. 2, 3, OR 4, a B-RED, P-RED PRIOR TO Z-ORANGE, OR THE EVENT Z-RED EXIST

? ?

yo TES u y GO TO "A" NEIT PAGE

)

j RECOMEND:

EPLAN:EO70177.DGN EVACUATION OF SEABROOK AND HAMPTON BEACHES.

Unmitigated means the CSF CLOSURE OF SALISBURY AND

""d

PLUM ISLAND BEACHES, AND i appmpnate Funchonal PAREER RIVER NATIONAL Restomhon Guide was WILDLIFE REFUGE.

xy ._u in -i.,

the condition.

EPLAN:E070177.DGN ' ER 5.4 Page 6 Rev.19 4 ,

FIGURE 1 h' SITE AREA EMERGENCY: PROTECTIVE ACTION FLOWCHART (Continued) l l

"A" u

/ S _

THE STATION gg THE STATION YES IN HODE 5 PRIOR : NOW BE TO TE EVENT MAINTAINED IN 7 MODE 5

?

NO NO y v RECOMEND:

IS IRRADIATED EVACUATION OF SEABROOK FUEL COOLANT YES AND HAMPTON BEACHES.

AT OR ABOVE 200* F 7 CLOSURE OF SALISBURY AND SEE NOTE 1 PLUM ISLAND BEACES, AND PARKEk RIVER NATIONAL WILDLIFE REFUGE.

NO H U p

' r ,

/ IS IRRADIATED NO PROTECTIVE ACTIONS REcotEENDED 2

YES h FUEL UNCOVERED OR IS UNC0VERY IMMINENT I

NOTE 1: TEMPERATURE AS INDICATED BY EITHER INSTRUMENTATION READINCS OR VISUAL INDICATIONS OF COOLANT BOILING.

NO EPLAN:E070177.DGN

.. (qu - -

I-l( .

P111ME EXPOSURE PROTECTIVE ACTION' RECOMMENDATION (PAR) WORKSIIEET t i . PAR ASSESSMENT BY:

Q.

DATE: / / TIME: am/pm UNUSUAL EVENT

1. Recommend no protective actions.

2. Document the PAR on form ER 2.0B and return to your appropriate checklist in ER 3.1 or ER 3.3 for further actions.

ALERI

1. Recommend no protective actions.

2. Document the PAR on form ER 2.0B and return to your appropriate checklist in ER 3.1 or ER 3.3 for further actions.

SITE AREA EMERGENCY

1. Determine PARS based on Figure 1, Site Area Emergency Protective Action t Flowchart.

2. Document the PAR on form ER 2.0B and return to your appropriate checklist in ER 3.1 or ER 3.3 for further actions.

GENERAL EMERGENCY STARTS ON NEXT PAGE

\ C)\

ER 5.4A Rev. 19

!- Page 1 of 4 l

l

PLUME EXPOSURE PROTECIIVE AGTION RECOMMENDATION (PAR) WORKSilEET l (Continued)

GENERAL EMERGENCY

1. Does a verified Coro Cooling Critical Safety Function Status Tree RED path exist?

Yes - Go to Step 5 (Page 3 of 4 of this form)

No - Go to Step 2 Not Krown - Go to Step 2

2. Does a verified Containment. Critical Safety Function Status Tree RED path exist?

Yes Go to Step 5 (Page 3 of 4 of this form)

No - Go to Step 3 Not Known - Go to Step 3

3. Is the projected Total Effective Dose Equivalent (TEDE) at 5 miles downwind greater than or equal to 1,000 mrem (see Note below)7 Yes - Go to Step 5 (Page 3 of 4 of this form)

No - Go to Step 4 Not Known - Go to Step 4

4. Is the projected Adult Thyroid Committed Dose Equivalent (CDE) at 0

5 miles downwind greater than or equal to 5,000 mrem (see Note below)?

Yes - Go to Step 5 (Page 3 of 4 of this form)

No - Go to Step 11 (Page 4 of 4 of this form)

Not Known - Go to Step 11 (Page 4 of 4 of this form)

E91E If METPAC is being used for dose projections, this question should be answered by reviewing the METPAC "PAGS" report.

ER 5.4A Rev. 19 Page 2 of 4

PLUME EXPOSUPI PROTECTIVE ACTION JECOMMENDATION (PAR) WORKSHEET (Continued) l

\l

' s' 5. If a release is in progress from the plant vent, enter the current upper wind direction; otherwise, enter the current lower wind direction -

FROM degrees.

6. Identify the appropriate PAR GROUP B column based on the above wind direction to determine the towns to be evacuated and sheltored.

R :.

PAR GROUP B (Evacuate 5 Mile Radius and 10 Miles Downwind-Shelter All Others)

WIND DIRECTION FROM (Degrees)

ERPA TOWN 303- 34- 101 123- 191.5- 259-33.9 100.9 122.9 191.4 258.9 302.9 A Seabrook Evacuate Evacuota Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Hampton Falle Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evecuate C Kensington Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Soutf. Hampton Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate D Hampton Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate North Hampton Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate F Brentwood Shelter Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Shelter Shelter East Kingston Shelter Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Shelter Shelter Exeter Shelter Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Shelter Shelter Newfields Shelter Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter p)

(

%J Newton Kingston Shelter Shelter Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evecuate Evacuate Evacnate Shelter Shelter G Greenland Shelter Shelter Shelter Evacuate Evacuate Shelter Stratham Shelter Shelter Shelter Evacuate Evacuate Shelter Rye Shelter Shelter Shelter Evacuate Evacuate Shelter New Castle Shelter Sheiter Shelter Evacuate Evacuate Shelter Portsmouth Shelter Shelter Shelter Evacuate Evacuate Shelter B Amesbury Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evecuate Evacuate Evacuate Salisbury Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate E Merrimac Evacuate Evacuate Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Newburyport Evacuate Evacuate Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Newbury Evacuate Evacuate Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter West Newbury Evocuate Evacuate Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter

7. Check off the evacuated and sheltered towns on form ER 2.0B, Block 3.

8. New Hampshire and Massachusetts beaches should be checked off as evacuated and closed, respectively.

9. Leave the PANS Message Number blank.

10. STOPT - Monitor and reevaluate PARS as conditions change. Return to your appropriate checklist in ER 3.1 or ER 3.3 for further actions, g) i

'v ER 5.4A Rev. 19 Page 3 of 4

PLUME EXPOSURE PROTECTIVE ACTION RECOMMENIETION. (PAR) WORKSHEET (Continued)

11. If a release is in progress from the plant vent, enter the current upper wind direction; otherwise, enter the current lov,r wind direction -

FROM degrees.

12. Identify the appropriate PAR CROUP A column based on the above wind direction to determine the towns to be evacuated and sheltered.

PAR EmmP A (Evacuate 2 Mile Radius and 5 Miles Downwind-Shelter All others)

WIND DitECTION FROM (Degrees)

ERPA TOWN 303 33.9 34 100.9 101- 123- 168- 281.5-122.9 167.9 281.4 302.9 A Seabrook Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evocuate Evacuate Hampton Falls Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate C Kensington Shelter Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Shelter Shelter South Hanpton Shel*er Evacuate Evacuate Evacuate Shelter Shelter D Hanpton Shelter Sheltea Shelter Evacuate Evacuate Shelter North Hanetan Shelter Shelter Shelter Evacuate Evacuate Shelter F Brentwood Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter East Kingston Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Exeter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Newffelds Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Newton Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Kingston Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter G Greenland Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Stratham Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Rye Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter New Castle Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Portsmouth Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter B Amesbury Evacuate Evacuate Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Salisbury Evacuate Evacuate Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter E Merrimac Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Newburyport Shelter Shatter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Newbury Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter West Newbury Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter Shelter

13. Check off the evacuated and sheltered towns on form ER 2.03, Block 3.

14. All New Hampshire and Massachusetts beaches should be checked off as evacuated and closed, respectively.

15. Leave the PANS Message Number blank.

16. STOP! - Monitor and reevaluate PARS as conditions change. Return to your appropriate checklist in ER 3.1 or ER 3.3 for further actions.

l ER 5.4A Rev. 19 Page 4 of 4

ER 5.7 Page 1 Rev. 16 ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURE COVER MRM O A. IDENTIFICATION I

NUMBER ER 5.7 REVISION 16 TITLE OFFSITE DOSE PROJECTION SYSTEM ORIGINATOR J. W. Baer l 1. Does this procedure / procedure revision:

a. Make changes in the facility as described in the UFSAR7 O Yes @ No

b. Make changes in procedures as described in the UFSAR7 O Yes E No

c. Involve tests or experiments not described in the UFSAR7 O Yes O No

d. Involve changes to the existing Operating License or require additional license requirements? O Yes E No

2. If any of the above questions are answered yin, a safety evaluation per the Regulatory Compliance Manual (NARC) is required. (The individual performing the above review shall have completed 10 CFR 50.59 training.)

B. MANAGER / DEPARTMENT SUPERVISOR APPROVAL

,TlILE SIGNATURE DATE av m m 9aaL4 we I/

C. NUCLEAR OUALITY SERVICES REVIEW TITLE SIGNATURE DAIE NlA D. SORC REVIEW SORC MEETING NO. k['O N E. APPROVAL FOR IMPLEMENTATION p// /p/p( 05/03/95

~ STATION D CTOR APPit0 VAL DATE EFFECTIVE DATE SM 6.1A O Rev. 13

ER 5.7 Pcg3 2 Rev. 16 CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS COVER 1 16 CONTENTS AND REVISION STATUS 2- 16 1.0 OBJECTIVES 3 16 2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 3 2.1 SHIFT SUPERINTENDENT /SHORT TERM EMERGENCY DIPECTOR 3 2.2 WORK CONTROL COORDIIMTOR 3 2.3 HEALTH PHYSICS COORDINATOR 3 3.0 PRECAUTIONS 3 4.0 PREREQUISITES 4 16 5.0 ACTIONS 4 5.1 ODPS OPERATOR 4 5-9 15

6.0 REFERENCES

10 15 7.0 ATTACHMENTS Figure 1, Dose Assessment Data Points 11 14 Figure 2, Stability Classification 12 14 Figure 3, Plant Vent Stack Flow Summarization 13 14 Figure 4, Logger Trend Instructions 14 14 Figure 5, ODPS Printer Setup 15-17 14 ER 5.7A, WRGM Backup Monitor Data Calculation Sheet 16 ER 5.7B, ODPS Worksheet 13 0

l i

l

ER 5.7 Pegs 3 Rev. 16

- /^y 1.0 OBJECTIVES

l /

This procedure provides instruction.for operation of the Offsite Dose Projection System (ODPS). This sof tware program projects the Total Effective Dose Equivalent (TEDE) and adult thyroid Committed Dose Equivalent (CDE) dose rates and doses at the site boundary, and 2, 5 and 10 miles. It also assists in the determination of the emergency classification level and protective action recommendations.

2.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 SHIFT SUPERINTENDENT /SHORT TERM EMERGENCY DIRECTOR Performs or directs operation of the ODPS in the Control Room.

2.2 WORK CONTROL COORDINATOR Operates ODPS at the direction of the Shift Superintendent /Shcrt Term Emergency Director.

2.3 HEALTH PHYSICS COORDINATOR Operates ODPS in the Technical Support Center (TSC).

3.0 PRECAUTIONS

1. The program can be exited at only two locations. The first appears at g' g the end of input data entry; the second appears at the end of an ODPS

() execution. To exit, type -1 followed by the enter key.

2. Operation of this program requires meteorological data from the onsite meteornlogical monitoring system. Additional information on existing regional meteorological conditions and forecasts is available from the Weather Services International.(WSI) System and forecast evaluation from the Yankee Nuclear Services Division (YNSD) Engineering Support Center.

3. Monitor response entries will calculate offsite dose rate conditions based on an assumed mixture of noble gas and iodine concentrations.

(Ref 6.9) 4 ODPS may be run from the following Main Plant Computer System (MPCS) terminals in either the Control Room or TSC,

a. Shift Technical Advisor (STA) work station

b. Shift Superintendent work station

c. Any TSC terminal

5. In the event that the MPCS terminals become inoperable, a backup laptop computer with ODPS is maintained in the Control Room.

6. When available, the meteorological data used for ODPS run should be the 15 minute average values.

ER 5.7 Pcg2 4 Rev. 16 3.0 PRECAUTIONS

7. The step-by-step program operating instructions contained in this procedure are for reference purposes as needed by the ODPS Operator.

8. All items must have proper values within a defined range. Error checking is done as each value is entered. Entry of an invalid value causes a message to appear at the bottom of the screen. The program will continue when an acceptable input value is entered.

9. In order to obtain data from the MPCS, a file containing the data must be available. The data in this file will be read and used for displaying input values which the operator will have the option of changing. Any changed values will be displayed in bold type.

4.0 PREREOUISITES A release of radioactive material has occurred as indicated by one of the following:

l 1. Wide Range Gas Monitor (WRGM) high alarm (ICC225),

2. Main Steam Line Monitor high alarm with an QfEE Atmospheric Steam Dump Valve (ASDV) or safety relief valve (SRV) on the affected line,

3. The results of effluent analysis or site boundary monitoring indicate a dose rate greater than or equal to 0.06 mrem /hr.

5.0 ACTIONS 5.1 ODPS OPERATOR

1. If running ODPS on the MPCS from the STA console, press the ODPS key then proceed to step 4. If running ODPS on a MPCS terminal, proceed to step 3. If running ODPS on the laptop computer, proceed to step 2.

2. Set up laptop computer:

a. Obtain the laptop computer (stored in Control Room).

b. Connect the AC power cord to the computer and AC outlet,

c. If normal AC power is unavailable, locate an Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) outlet.

d. If a printer is available and its use desired, refer to Figure 5 for setup instructions,

e. Turn on laptop computer. The ODPS program will start running.

f. Proceed to step 4.

O

]

WRCN BACKUP MONITOR DATA CAIEUIATION SHEET

.., m ; This form is to be used to calculate the " Effective" WRGM Stack Concentration and l " Effective" WRGM Stack Release Rate from the output of the WRGM Backup Monitor

-( M (WBM).

1. Obtain the WBM reading from the Technical Support Center:

A = WBM reading = area /hr

2. Determine the Time After Shutdown (TAS) and obtain the WBM Correction Factor (VBMCF) from the table below:

TAS in hours WBMCF

$1 0.175 2 0.183 If TAS does not match listed TAS 5 0.223 hours, round down (e.g., if TAS -

7 0.252 8, use TAS 7 WBMCF 0.252) 10 0.294 20 0.437 50 1.10 70 1.71 100 2.13 200 2.26 500 2.27 !

700 2.25 1000 2.18 W /**

B = WBM Correction Factor (WBMCF) - -

area /hr

3. Obtain the Stack Flow Rate from Logger Trend, Main Plant Computer Data Point 1CC 225 PF "PF P1 ANT VENT DISCH FLOW" or Figure 3, Plant Vent Stack Flow Summarization, and convert to ec/sec as necessary:

C = Stack Flow Rate - CEM x 472 **/8** =

cc/sec cm

4. Calculate the Effective WRGM Stack Concentration and Release Rate: l 1

. D - Effective WRGM Stack Concentration - A x B = pCi/cc E = Effective WRGM Stack Release Rate = C x D = uCi/sec l

, l ER 5.7A Rev. 16

. . - - -

ML20083K735

Contents

Text

6.0 REFERENCES

6.0 REFERENCES

6.0 REFERENCES

6.0 REFERENCES

6.0 REFERENCES

6.0 REFERENCES

6.0 REFERENCES

6.0 REFERENCES

6.0 REFERENCES

6.0 REFERENCES

6.0 REFERENCES

6.0 REFERENCES

6.0 REFERENCES

6.0 REFERENCES

6.0 REFERENCES

6.0 REFERENCES

6.0 REFERENCES

6.0 REFERENCES

SUMMARY

6.0 REFERENCES

6.0 REFERENCES

6.0 REFERENCES

Navigation menu